1998-2001 Honda Accord V-6 SM Supp PDF

Introduction
General Info
-How to Use This Manual ^ ^
T h i s s u p p l e m e n t c o n t a i n s i n f o r m a t i o n for t h e '98-01 A C C O R D V 6
S e d a n a n d '98-01 A C C O R D C O U P E V 6 . R e f e r t o t h e '98-01
A C C O R D a n d A C C O R D C o u p e S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 , f o r
Specifications
service p r o c e d u r e s a n d data n o t i n c l u d e d in this s u p p l e m e n t .
T h e f i r s t p a g e o f e a c h s e c t i o n is m a r k e d w i t h a b l a c k t a b t h a t
lines u p w i t h o n e o f the t h u m b index tabs o n this page a n d the
back cover. Y o u can quickly find the first page of each section
Maintenance
w i t h o u t looking t h r o u g h a full table of contents. T h e s y m b o l s
p r i n t e d at t h e t o p c o r n e r o f each p a g e c a n also be u s e d as a
quick reference s y s t e m .
Engine Electrical
Safety Messages
Y o u r s a f e t y , a n d t h e s a f e t y o f o t h e r s , is v e r y i m p o r t a n t . T o h e l p
y o u make i n f o r m e d decisions, w e have provided safety
messages a n d other safety information t h r o u g h o u t this m a n u a l . Engine
O f c o u r s e , it is n o t p r a c t i c a l o r p o s s i b l e t o w a r n y o u a b o u t a l l t h e
hazards associated w i t h servicing this vehicle. Y o u m u s t use
your own good judgment.
Y o u w i l l f i n d i m p o r t a n t safety i n f o r m a t i o n in a v a r i e t y o f f o r m s
including:
Safety Labels on the vehicle.
Safety Messages preceded b y a safety alert s y m b o l ^ and
one of three signal w o r d s , DANGER, W A R N I N G , or CAUTION.
These signal w o r d s m e a n :
inHT^TTcTini Y o u W I L L b e K I L L E D o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
Fuel and Emissions
you don't follow instructions.
WMMzIMM Y o u C A N b e K I L L E D o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.
*Transaxle
firaOTJTItfll Y o u C A N b e H U R T if y o u d o n ' t f o l l o w
instructions.
instructions h o w t o service this vehicle correctly a n d safely.

Steering
A l l i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s m a n u a l is b a s e d o n t h e l a t e s t
p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n available at t h e t i m e of printing. W e reserve
t h e r i g h t t o m a k e c h a n g e s at a n y t i m e w i t h o u t n o t i c e . N o part o f
t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n m a y be r e p r o d u c e d , s t o r e d in retrieval s y s t e m ,
or t r a n s m i t t e d , in a n y f o r m b y a n y m e a n s , electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures and tables. *Brakes
A s y o u r e a d t h i s m a n u a l , y o u w i l l f i n d i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t is
(Including ABS )
p r e c e d e d b y a I NOTICE | s y m b o l . T h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s m e s s a g e is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
Body
First E d i t i o n 9/2000 HONDA MOTOR C O . ,
All Rights Reserved LTD.
S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a p p l y t o U.S.A. a n d C a n a d a S e r v i c e Publication
Office
*Heatincj,Ventilation
A s sections with "include S R S components; and Air Conditioning
special p r e c a u t i o n s are required w h e n servicing.
m a r k e d sections are n o t included in this m a n u a l .
Body Electrical
1998-01 A c c o r d V - 6
^Restraints
S u p p l e m e n t
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs.
Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual,
P/N 61S8008. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items w i l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
done by and authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).
Do not b u m p the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-01 models) and around the floor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes

-1998 Model 1-2
-1999 Model 1-3
-2000 Model 1-4
- 2001 Model 1-5
Identification Number Locations 1-6
Warning/Caution Label Locations 1-7
Under-hood Emission Control Label 1-8
Parts Marking Locations 1-12
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes -1998 Model
Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number
rrrrrm
1HG CG1 6 4 * W A 000001 J 3 0 A 1 - 1000001
c de f g h
a. Engine Type
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. Fuel-injected engine
HONDA, Passenger vehicle b. Serial Number
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1 Transmission Number
CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1
Body Type and Transmission Type B7XA - 5000001
1: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual
2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) Transmission Type
US model Canada model B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
4: LX, LX V6 4: LX, LX V6 P2A8: 5-speed Manual
5: EX, EX V6 5:EX,EXV6 b. Serial Number
6: EX-L
Check Digit Paint Code
Model Year
W: 1998 Code Color
Factory Code B-80P Mystic Blue Pearl *Note1
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl

h. Serial Number NH-578 Taffeta White
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model NH-592P Flamenco Black Pearl
800001 : Canada model NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic
RP-25P Black Currant Pearl
RP-29P Raisin Pearl
R-94 San Marino Red
YR-508P Heather Mist Metallic * Note2
* Note 1: US m o d e l o n l y
* Note 2: Canada m o d e l only
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
Number a n d C a n a d i a n
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPE E
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
K A S 8 4 AO A
1-2
Chassis and Paint Codes -1999 Model
J30A1 - 2000001
1 H G C G 1 6 4 * X A 000001
a b
a b cdef g h
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 6 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle Fuel-injected engine
1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. b. Serial Number
HONDA, Passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type Transmission Number
CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1
CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1 B7XA - 000001
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic a b
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
US model Canada model a. Transmission Type
4: LX, LX V6 4: LX B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
5: EX, W X V6 5: EX b. Serial Number
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year Paint Code
X:1999
g. Factory Code Code Color
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl
h. Serial Number NH-578 Taffeta White
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model NH-592P Flamenco Black Pearl
8 0 0 0 0 1 - : Canada model NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic # N o t e 2
NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic

Note1
RP-25P B l a c k c u r r a n t Pearl *
R-94 San Marino Red * Note1
YR-508M Heather Mist Metallic

* Note 1: US m o d e l only
* Note 2: Canada m o d e l only
Number and Federal
Number and Canadian
1-3
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - 2000 Model
Vehicle identification Number Engine Number
1HG C G 5 5 4 * Y A 000001 J30A1 - 3000001
i b cde f g h
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

1 HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. J30A1: 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
HONDA, Passenger vehicle Fuel-injected engine
b . Line, Body and Engine Type b. Serial Number
CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1 Transmission Number
Body Type and Transmission Type
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic B7XA - 7500001
Vehicle Grade (Series)
US model Canada model
4: LX, LX V6 4: LX
5: EX, EX V6 5: EX
Check Digit
Model Year a. Transmission Type
Y: 2000 B7XA: 4-speed Automatic (Ohio)
Factory Code b. Serial Number
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A.
Serial Number Paint Code
0 0 0 0 0 1 U S model
800001 - : Canada model Code Color
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl
G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl
NH-578 Taffeta White #Note
NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic

RP-31M Signet Silver Metallic
R-94 San Marino Red #Note
YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic

* Note : US m o d e l only
Number and Federal
Standard Certification.
Number and Canadian
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KA S84 AO A
Paint Code
1-4
Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model
1HG C G 5 5 4 * 1 A 000001 J30A1 - 4000001
a
a b cdef g h
a. Engine Type
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
JHM: HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD. Fuel-injected engine
HONDA, Passenger vehicle b. Serial Number
1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG INC., U.S.A.
HONDA, Passenger vehicle Transmission Number
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
B7XA - 000001
CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) a. Transmission Type
US model Canada model B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
4: LX, LX V6 4: LX b. Serial Number
5: EX, EX V6 5: EX
Check Digit Paint Code
Model Year
1:2001 Code Color
Factory Code B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl
Note2
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. B-96P Eternal Blue Pearl *
C: Saitama in Japan (Sayama). G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl * Note1
# N o t e 1
Serial Number NH-578 Taffeta White
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic
800001 - : Canada model R-94 San Marino Red * Note1
R-507P Firepepper Pearl

RP-31M Signet Silver Metallic * Note2
YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic

* Note 1: US m o d e l only
* Note 2: Canada m odel only
Vehicle Identification
Number and Federal
Standard Certification.
Vehicle Identification
Number and Canadian COLOR LABEL
Standard Certification. INT. C O L O R
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KA S84 AO A
Paint Code
1-5
General Information
1-6
Warning/Caution Label Locations
1 -
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label (1998 Model)
Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families

Example: Engine Family:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

W HNX V 03.0 FF1
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
a b
r r r
c d
SPARK PLUG GAP a. Model Year

NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.
W: 1998
WHNXV03, OFfl TWC/H02S (2)
WHNXR0130AAA EGR/SFI b. Manufacturer Subcode
6.1 30-96 PROCEDURES)
3.0L HNX: HONDA
CATALYST c. Family Type
V: LDV
30VHGXBG
(5dD) T: LDT
P8C-A00
HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA Evaporative Family:
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
r
W HNX R 0130 AAA
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF a b c d
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS a. Model Year
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE W: 1998
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA. b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
TIER 1/LEV c. Family Type
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 A N D E: EVAP
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS R: EVAP/ORVR
APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR d. Canister Work Capacity
VEHICLES. e. Sequence Characters
CALIFORNIA L E V
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
CALIFORNIA U L E V
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA A N D STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
1-8

TO CANISTER EWP
X HNX V 03 0 FF1
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA -| \ VALVE
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
a b c d
SPARK PLUG GAP a. Model Year

X: 1999
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
CATALYST c. Family Type
V: LDV
30VHGXBG
HJ
H O N D A MOTOR CO. , LTD
G3) T: LDT
d. Displacement
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR Evaporative Family:
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
X HNX Ft 0130 AAA
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF
rr
a b c d
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE a. Model Year
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA. X:1999
TIER 1/LEV HNX: HONDA
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 AND c. Family Type
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS E: EVAP
APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR R: EVAP/ORVR
VEHICLES. d. Canister Work Capacity
CALIFORNIA LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
CALIFORNIA ULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA AND STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
General information

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA TO CANISTER EVAP PURGE
^ \ VALVE
NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000
MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS
Y HNX V 03.0 FF1
AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW
LEV PASSENGER CARS.
a b cd e
SPARK PLUG GAP
TWC/H02S (2)
EGR/SFI
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
CATALYST b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
30VHGFFG c. Family Type
H O N D A MOTOR CO. , LTD V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
FEDERAL e. Sequence Characters
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, A N D CALIFORNIA Evaporative Family:
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
Y HNX R 0130 AAA
ab c d
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
1-10
Example; Engine Family:

REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR IAC VALVE E V A P EVAP
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA if\
CANISTER CANISTER
' A PURGE
1 HNX V 03.0 M5U
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR ,,l 1 f VALVE
m^jmMmJ^ I ST
REGULATOR vK/ \ w
VALVE LASH (IN) 0. 220. 02mm
(COLD) !EX)0. 300. 02mm
SPARK PLUG GAP 1.0-1.1mm

a b cd e
1 HNXV03.OM5U TWC/H02S (2) a. Model Year

1 HNXR01 30AAF EGR/SF1
3.0L OBO II CERTIFIED
IA BYPASS CONTROL/
THERMAL VALVE
/
J \
1:2001
CATALYST FRONT
HNX: HONDA
( T T 1 30VAGFFG c. Family Type
IHJ O V: LDV
HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD P8C-AQ3
T: LDT
d. Displacement
FEDERAL e. Sequence Characters
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, A N D CALIFORNIA Evaporative Family:
1 HNX R 0130 AAF
CANADIAN TIER 1
REGULATIONS A N D CANDIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS
FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS.
a b c d e
a. Model Year
1: 2001
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked w i t h the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts w i l l have self-adhesive labels, and a replacement engine and
transmission will have the VIN plate attached w i t h a break-off bolt.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
1-12
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical 2-2
Engine A s s e m b l y 2-2
Cylinder Head 2-3
Engine Block 2-4
Engine Lubrication 2-5
Cooling 2-5
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s 2-5
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n and Differential 2-6
Steering 2-12
Suspension 2-13
Brakes '2-13
Air Conditioning 2-13
Design Specifications
Dimensions 2-14
Weight (U.S.A.) 2-14
Weight (CANADA) 2-14
Engine 2-14
Starter 2-14
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n 2-14
Steering 2-15
Suspension 2-15
Wheel Alignment 2-15
Brakes 2-15
Tires 2-15
Air Conditioning 2-15
Electrical Ratings 2-16
Body Specifications
Illustration 2-17
Engine Electrical i
Stem Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w S e r v i c e Limit
I g n i t i o n coil Rated voltage 12 V
Primary w i n d i n g resistance at 68F (20C) 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 il
Secondary w i n d i n g resistance at 68F (20C) 1.71 20.3 k i i
Firing order 1 - 4 - 2 - 5 - 3 - 6
Ignition wire Resistance at 68F (20C) 25 k Q m a x .
Spark plug Type N G K : PZFR5F-11
DENSO; PKJ16CR-L11
Gap 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in.) 1.3 m m (0.05 in.)
Ignition timing A t idle (check A / T (in M o r B ) : 1 0 2 B T D C at 680 + 50 r p m
t h e red m a r k )
Alternator belt Tension adjustment A u t o adjuster type
Alternator Output A t 13.5 V a n d 100 A
normal engine
temperature
Starter Output 1.6 k W
C o m m u t a t o r mica depth 0.4-0.5 mm 0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x . 0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
C o m m u t a t o r O.D. 2 8 . 0 - 2 8 . 1 m m ( 1 . 1 0 2 - 1 . 1 0 6 in.) 27.5 m m (1.083 in.)
Brush length 1 5 . 8 - 1 6 . 2 m m ( 0 . 6 2 - 0 . 6 4 in.) 11.0 m m (0.43 in.)
Brush spring tension (new) 1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 0 - 1 . 8 0 kgf, 3 . 5 3 - 3 . 9 7 Ibs)
Engine Assembly
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w S e r v i c e Limit
Compression P r e s s u r e C h e c k at 2 0 0 r p m w i t h w i d e Minimum 2
9 3 0 kPa (9.5 k g f / c m , 135 psi)
o p e n t h r o t t l e . (See D e s i g n S p e c s f o r Maximum 2
2 0 0 kPa (2.0 k g f / c m , 28 psi)
ratio.) variation
2-2
specs
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage 0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
Height 120.95 - 121.05 m m ( 4 . 7 6 2 - 4.766 in.)
Camshaft End play 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 8 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
C a m s h a f t - t o - h o l d e r oil c l e a r a n c e 0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 0 8 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 5 in.) 0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x . 0.04 m m (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake, p r i m a r y 34.615 m m (1.3628 in.)
Intake, m i d 36.210 m m (1.4256 in.)
Intake, 31.188 m m (1.2279 in.)
secondary
Exhaust 36.076 m m (1.4203 in.)
Valves C l e a r a n c e (cold) Intake 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)
Exhaust 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
S t e m O.D. Intake 5 . 4 8 5 - 5 . 4 9 5 m m ( 0 . 2 1 5 9 - 0 . 2 1 6 3 in.) 5.455 m m (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust 5 . 4 5 0 - 5 . 4 6 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 4 6 - 0 . 2 1 5 0 in.) 5.420 m m (0.2134 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 8 in.) 0.08 m m (0.003 in )
Exhaust 0 . 0 5 5 - 0 . 0 8 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 1 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in )
V a l v e seats Width Intake 1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.) 2.00 m m (0.079 in.)
Exhaust 1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.) 2.00 m m (0.079 in )
Stem installed height Intake 4 6 . 7 5 - 4 7 . 5 5 m m (1.841 - 1 . 8 7 2 in.) 47.80 m m (1.882 in.)
Exhaust 4 6 . 6 8 - 4 7 . 4 8 m m ( 1 . 8 3 8 - 1 . 8 6 9 in.) 47.73 m m (1.879 in.)
Valve springs Free l e n g t h Intake 51.03 m m (2.009 in.)
Exhaust 53.48 m m (2.106 in.)
Valve guides I.D. Intake 5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 7 1 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.) 5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
Exhaust 5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m (0.2171 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.) 5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 8 3 5 - 0 . 8 7 4 in.) _ _
Exhaust 2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 m m ( 0 . 8 1 2 - 0 . 8 5 2 in.)
Rocker a r m s Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 6 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 6 in.) 0.067 m m (0.0026 in.)
Exhaust 0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 7 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 0 in.) 0.077 m m (0.0030 in.)
2-3
Engine Block
Block W a r p a g e of deck 0.07 m m (0.003 in.) m a x . 0.10 m m (0.004 ir.
Bore diameter 86.000-86.015 m m 86.065 m m
( 3 . 3 8 5 8 - 3 . 3 8 6 4 in.) (3.3884 in.)
Bore taper 0.05 m m (0.002 in )
Reboring limit 0.5 m m (0.02 in.)
Piston S k i r t O.D.at 16.0 m m {0.63 in.) f r o m 85.975-85.985 m m 85.965 m m
b o t t o m of skirt ( 3 . 3 8 4 8 - 3 . 3 8 5 2 in.) (3.3844 in.)
Clearance in c y l i n d e r 0.015-0.040 m m 0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.)
Ring groove w i d t h Top 1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.) 1.25 m m (0.049 in )
Second 1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.) 1.25 m m (0.049 in )
Oil 2 . 8 0 5 - 2 . 8 2 5 m m ( 0 . 1 1 0 4 - 0 . 1 1 1 2 in.) 2.85 m m (0.112 in )
Piston rings Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0 . 0 3 5 - 0 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 4 in.) 0.13 m m (0.005 in )
Second 0 . 0 3 0 - 0 . 0 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.) 0.13 m m (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.60 m m (0.024 in.)
Second 0 . 0 4 0 - 0 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 2 in.) 0.70 m m (0.028 in.)
Oil 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.) 0.80 m m (0.031 in.)
Piston pin O.D. 21.962-21.965 m m 21.954 m m
( 0 . 8 6 4 6 - 0 . 8 6 4 8 in.) (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.0050-+0.0010 mm 0.004 m m (0.0002 in.)
( - 0 . 0 0 0 2 0 - + 0 . 0 0 0 0 4 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 m m 0.019 m m (0.0007 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 0 6 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 m m
( 0 . 8 6 5 0 - 0 . 8 6 5 2 in.)
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 56.0 m m (2.20 in.)
End play installed on crankshaft 0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.45 m m (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 71.976-72.000 m m
( 2 . 8 3 3 7 - 2 . 8 3 4 6 in.)
Rod journal diameter 52.976-53.000 m m
( 2 . 0 8 5 7 - 2 . 0 8 6 6 in.)
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) m a x . 0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) m a x . 0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)
End play 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.45 m m (0.018 in )
Runout 0.020 m m (0.0008 in.) m a x . 0.03 m m (0.0012 in.)
Crankshaft M a i n b e a r i n g - t o - j o u r n a l oil 0 . 0 2 0 - 0.044 m m (0.0008 0.0017 in.) 0.050 m m (0.0020 in.)
bearings clearance
Rod bearing 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 7 in.) 0.050 m m (0.002 in.)
clearance
2-4
Engine Lubrication
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w ! Service Limit
Engine oil Capacity 5.0 % (5.3 U S q t , 4.4 I m p qt) f o r e n g i n e o v e r h a u l
4.4 (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 I m p qt) f o r oil c h a n g e , i n c l u d i n g f i l t e r
4.0 % (4.2 U S q t , 3.5 I m p qt) f o r oil c h a n g e , w i t h o u t f i l t e r
Oil p u m p Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008in.)
P u m p housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0 . 1 4 - 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
P u m p h o u s i n g - t o - o u t e r r o t o r axial 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 7 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
clearance
2
Oil p r e s s u r e w i t h oil t e m p e r a t u r e at at idle 7 0 k P a (0.7 k g f / c m , 1 0 psi)
2
176F (80C) at 3,000 r p m 490 kPa (5.0 k g f / c m , 71 psi)
Cooling
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w | S e r v i c e Limit
Radiator Coolant capacity (includes engine, Engine overhaul 7.5 ft (7.9 U S q t , 6.6 I m p qt)
heater, hoses and reservoir) C o o l a n t c h a n g e j 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p qt)
Reservoir Coolant capacity | 0.6 ft (0.6 U S q t , 0.5 I m p qt)
2
Radiator cap O p e n i n g pressure 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169-176F(76-80C)
'98-00 m o d e l s Fully o p e n 194F(90C)
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n 10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins t o open 163~171F (73~77C)
'01 m o d e l s Fully o p e n 190F(88C)
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n 10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .
Radiator fan Thermoswitch " O N " temperature 196~203F (91-95C)
switch Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature S u b t r a c t 5 - 1 5 F ( 3 - 8 C ) f r o m actual " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e
Fan t i m e r " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e 217-232F(103-111C)
Fan t i m e r " O F F " t e m p e r a t u r e S u b t r a c t 5 - 2 3 F (3 13C) f r o m actual " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e
Fuel and Emissions

Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w | S e r v i c e Limit
2
Fuel p r e s s u r e Pressure w i t h regulator 2 8 0 - 3 3 0 kPa ( 2 . 9 - 3 . 4 k g f / c m , 4 1 - 4 8 psi)
regulator v a c u u m hose disconnected
Fuel t a n k Capacity 64.8 ft (17.1 U S g a l , 14.3 I m p gal)
Engine idle Idle s p e e d w i t h h e a d l i g h t s IndorE 680 5 0 r p m
and radiator fan off
Idle CO % 0.1 m a x .
2-5
Automatic Transmission and Differential
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w Service Limit
ATF (Automatic Capacity Use Honda For f l u i d c h a n g e : 2.9 fi (3.1 U S q t , 2.6 I m p q t )
Transmission ATF-Z1 For o v e r h a u l : 7.2 fi (7.6 U S q t , 6.3 I m p qt)
Fluid)
ATF pressure Line p r e s s u r e A t 1,500 r p m i n 8 0 0 - 8 6 0 kPa 7 6 0 kPa
llorE 2
( 8 . 2 - 8 . 8 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 130 psi) 2
(7.7 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
position
4th clutch pressure A t 2,000 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 7 5 0 kPa
2
H position (8.1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) 2
(7.6 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
3rd clutch pressure A t 2,000 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 7 5 0 kPa
2
H position (8.1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) 2
(7.6 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
2nd clutch pressure A t 1,500 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 7 5 0 kPa
2
[U p o s i t i o n ( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) 2
(7.6 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
1st c l u t c h p r e s s u r e A t 1,500 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 7 5 0 kPa
CD p o s i t i o n 2
( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) 2
(7.6 k g f / c m , 1 1 0 psi)
Torque converter Stall s p e e d : C h e c k with v e h i c l e on 2,250-2,550 rpm
level g r o u n d
Clutches C l u t c h e n d plate-to-top d i s c 1st 1.2-1.4 m m
clearance ( 0 . 0 4 7 - 0 . 0 5 5 in.)
2nd 0.85-1.05 m m
( 0 . 0 3 3 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
3rd 0.55-0.75 m m
( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)
4th 0.55-0.75 m m
( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 45.7 m m (1.80 in.) 43.7 m m (1.72 in.)
2nd 63.0 m m (2.48 in.) 61.0 m m (2.40 in.)
3rd, 4th 33.5 m m (1.32 in.) 31.5 m m (1.24 in,)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 m m (0.076 in.)
Clutch plate thickness 1st 2.0 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n discolored
2nd 2.0 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n discolored
3rd 2.3 m m (0.091 in.) W h e n discolored
4th 2.0 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n discolored
I s l a n d 2nd clutch end plate thickness Markl 3.10 m m (0.122 in.) W h e n discolored
Mark 2 3.20 m m (0.126 in.) W h e n discolored
MarkO 3.00 m m (0.118 in.) W h e n discolored
3rd and 4th clutch end plate thickness Markl 2.10 m m (0.083 in.) W h e n discolored
2-6
specs
Valve body S t a t o r s h a f t n e e d l e b e a r i n g c o n t a c t I.D. Torque converter 27.000-27.021 m m W h e n w o r n or
side ( 1 . 0 6 3 0 - 1 . 0 6 3 8 in.) damaged
ATF p u m p side 29.000-29.021 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.) damaged
ATF p u m p gear thrust clearance 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 5 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.) 0.07 m m (0.003 in.)
ATF p u m p gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0 . 2 1 0 - 0.265 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 3 - 0 . 0 1 0 4 in.)
Driven gear 0 . 0 7 0 - 0 . 1 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 8 - 0 . 0 0 4 9 in.)
A T F p u m p d r i v e g e a r I.D. 14.016-14.034 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 1 8 - 0 . 5 5 2 5 in.) damaged
A T F p u m p d r i v e n gear shaft O.D. 13.980-13.99 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 0 4 - 0 . 5 5 0 8 in.) damaged
Reverse shift Fork f i n g e r t h i c k n e s s 5 . 6 0 - 6 . 0 0 m m ( 0 . 2 2 0 - 0 . 2 3 6 in.) 5.40 m m (0.213 in.)
fork
Park g e a r a n d W h e n w o r n or
pawl damaged
Servo body S h i f t f o r k s h a f t b o r e I.D. 14.000-14.010 m m
( 0 . 5 5 1 2 - 0 . 5 5 1 6 in.)
S h i f t f o r k s h a f t v a l v e b o r e I.D. 37.000-37.039 m m 37.045 m m
( 1 . 4 5 6 7 - 1 . 4 5 8 2 in.) (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D. 32.000-32.025 m m 32.050 m m
body ( 1 . 2 5 9 8 - 1 . 2 6 0 8 in.) (1.2618 in.)
Accumulator S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D. 35.000-35.025 m m 35.05 m m
body ( 1 . 3 7 8 0 - 1 . 3 7 8 9 in.) (1.3799 in.)
Stator shaft S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D. 29.000-29.013 m m 29.050 m m
( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 2 in.) (1.1437 in.)
2-7
Automatic Transmission and Differential (cont'd)
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at s t a t o r s h a f t 22.984-23.000 m m W h e n w o r n or
area ( 0 . 9 0 4 9 - 0 . 9 0 5 5 in.) damaged
at 3 r d g e a r 52.975-52.991 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 2 . 0 8 5 6 - 2 . 0 8 6 3 in.) damaged
at 4 t h g e a r c o l l a r 33.975-33.991 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 3 3 7 6 - 1 . 3 3 8 2 in.) damaged
I.D. o f 3 r d g e a r 59.000-59.019 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 2 . 3 2 2 8 - 2 . 3 2 3 6 in.) damaged
I.D. o f 4th g e a r 40.000-40.016 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.) damaged
End play of 3rd gear 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.)
End play of 4th gear 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)
41 x 7 3 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s No. 1 7.85 m m (0.309 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
No. 2 7.90 m m (0.311 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Thrust washer thickness 27 x 47 x 5 m m 5.00 m m (0.197 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
Length of 4th gear collar 5 8 . 5 - 5 8 . 6 m m ( 2 . 3 0 3 - 2 . 3 0 7 in.)
4th gear collar flange thickness 4 . 4 5 - 4 . 6 0 m m ( 0 . 1 7 5 - 0 . 1 8 1 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
Sealing ring thickness 32 m m sealing 1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.) 1.800 m m (0.071 in.)
ring
29 m m s e a l i n g 1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.) 1.800 m m (0.071 in.)
ring
W i d t h of sealing ring groove 2.025 - 2.060 m m (0.079 - 0.081 in.) 2.080 m m (0.082 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D. 3rd clutch 5.97 - 5.98 m m (0.2350 - 0.2354 in.) 5.95 m m (0.2343 in.)
4th clutch 11.47 - 11.48 m m (0.4516 - 0.4520 in.) 11.45 m m (0.4508 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e b u s h i n g I.D. 3rd clutch 6.018 - 6.030 m m (0.2369 - 0.2374 in.) 6.045 m m (0.2380 in.)
4th clutch 11.500 - 11.518mm 11.530 m m
(0.4528 - 0.4535 in.) (0.4539 in.)
2-8
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 4 t h g e a r 34.975-34.991 m m W h e n w o r n or
area ( 1 . 3 7 7 0 - 1 . 3 7 7 6 in.) damaged
at 2 n d g e a r 39.979-40.000 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 0 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.) damaged
at p a r k g e a r 41.964 - 4 1 . 9 8 0 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 6 5 2 1 - 1 . 6 5 2 8 in.) damaged
at r i g h t e n d 3 8 . 5 0 5 - 38.515 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 1 5 9 - 1 . 5 1 6 3 in.) damaged
I.D. o f 4th g e a r 41.000-41.016 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 6 1 4 2 - 1 . 6 1 4 8 in.) damaged
I.D. o f i d l e r g e a r 50.000-50.016 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 9 6 8 5 - 1 . 9 6 9 1 in.) damaged
I.D. o f r e v e r s e g e a r 46.000-46.016 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 8 1 1 0 1 . 8 1 1 6 in.) damaged
E n d p l a y o f 1st g e a r 0 . 0 0 - 0 . 3 3 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
E n d p l a y o f 4th g e a r 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 2 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 1 1 in.)
End play of idler gear 0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 8 in.)
End play of reverse gear 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 0 in.)
Length of distance collar 5 3 . 9 2 - 5 3 . 9 6 m m ( 2 . 1 2 3 - 2 . 1 2 4 in.)
Cotter thickness 1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)
R e v e r s e s e l e c t o r h u b O.D. 5 5 . 8 7 - 5 5 . 9 0 m m ( 2 . 1 9 9 6 - 2 . 2 0 0 8 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
2-9
Secondary shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 1st g e a r 37.978-37.993 mm W h e n w o r n or
area ( 1 . 4 9 5 2 - 1 . 4 9 5 8 in.) damaged
at 2 n d gear 33.986-33.999 mm W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 3 3 8 0 - 1 . 3 3 8 5 in.) damaged
I.D. o f 1st g e a r 44.000-44.016 mm W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 7 3 2 3 - 1 . 7 3 2 9 in.) damaged
I.D. o f 2 n d g e a r 40.000-40.016 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.) damaged
E n d p l a y o f 1st g e a r 0 . 0 7 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
End play of 2 n d gear 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
3 8 x 56.5 m m s p l i n e d w a s h e r t h i c k n e s s No. 1 6.85 m m (0.270 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
37 x 55 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s No. 1 4.90 m m (0.193 in.) W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Cotter thickness 1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)
Sealing ring thickness 1 . 8 9 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 4 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.) 1.800 m m (0.071 in.)
W i d t h of sealing ring groove 2 . 0 2 5 - 2 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 0 8 1 in.) 2.080 m m (0.082 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D. 7 . 9 7 - 7 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 3 1 3 8 - 0 . 3 1 4 2 in.) 7.95 m m (0.3130 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e b u s h i n g I.D. 8 . 0 0 0 - 8 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 1 5 0 - 0 . 3 1 5 6 in.) 8.030 m m (0.3161 in.)
Reverse idler Diameter of needle bearing contact at reverse idler 13.990-14.000 m m W h e n w o r n or
gear area gear shaft ( 0 . 5 5 0 8 - 0 . 5 5 1 2 in.) damaged

End play 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 6 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
I.D. 18.007-18.020 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 7 0 8 9 - 0 . 7 0 9 4 in.) damaged
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
h o u s i n g side
Reverse idler 0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
gear shaft holder
side
I.D. o f r e v e r s e i d l e r g e a r s h a f t h o l d e r 14.006-14.024 m m W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.) damaged
I.D. o f t r a n s m i s s i o n h o u s i n g o f r e v e r s e 14.006-14.024 m m
idler gear shaft contact area ( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)
2-10
specs
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Wire Diameter O.D. Free L e n g t h N o . of Coils
Main valve body Modulator valve spring 1.6 m m 10.4 m m 33.5 m m 9.8
s p r i n g s (see (0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
p a g e 14-161) Shift valve C spring 0.8 m m 6.6 m m 49.1 m m 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Shift valve D spring 0.7 m m 6.6 m m 35.7 m m 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.7 m m 6.6 m m 32.2 m m 13.4
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.268 in.)
Relief v a l v e s p r i n g 1.1 m m 8.6 m m 30.1 m m 10.7
(0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.185 in.)
Lock-up shift valve s p r i n g 0.9 m m 7.6 m m 63.0 m m 22.4
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.480 in.)
C o o l e r check v a l v e s p r i n g 0.6 m m 5.8 m m 14.5 m m 6.8
(0.024 in.) (0.228 in.) (0.571 in.)
T o r q u e converter check 1.2 m m 8.6 m m 35.1 m m 14.3
valve spring (0.047 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.382 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.7 m m 6.6 m m 35.7 m m 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
R e v e r s e CPC v a l v e s p r i n g 0.7 m m 6.1 m m 17.8 m m 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 5.5 m m 37.4 m m 30.3 m m 2.12
body springs (0.217 in.) (1.472 in.) (1.193 in.)
(see p a g e 14- Regulator valve spring A 1.8 m m 14.7 m m 87.5 m m 16.5
164) (0.071 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.445 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.7 m m 9.4 m m 44.0 m m 13.4
(0.067 in.) (0.370 in.) (1.732 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 m m 6.6 m m 42.9 m m 14.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
Lock-up t i m i n g valve spring 0.65 m m 6.6 m m 34.8 m m 15.6
(0.026 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.370 in.)
Servo body Shift valve B spring 0.8 m m 7.1 m m 40.4 m m 16.9
s p r i n g s (see (0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.591 in.)
p a g e 14-165) Shift valve A spring 0.8 m m 7.1 m m 40.4 m m 16.9
(0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.591 in.)
CPC v a l v e A s p r i n g 0.7 m m 6.1 m m 17.8 m m 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
CPC v a l v e B s p r i n g 0.7 m m 6.1 m m 17.8 m m 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
4th a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g A 2.6 m m 19.6 m m 66.4 m m 9.7
(0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.614 in.)
4th accumulator spring B 2.4 m m 12.8 m m 51.5 m m 11.5
(0.094 in.) (0.504 in.) (2.028 in.)
3rd accumulator spring A 2.6 m m 19.6 m m 66.4 m m 9.7
(0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.614 in.)
3rd accumulator spring B 2.4 m m 12.8 m m 51.5 m m 11.5
(0.094 in.) (0.504 in.) (2.028 in.)
Accumulator 1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g B 2.7 m m 15.0 m m 52.5 m m 10.3
body springs (0.106 in.) (0.591 in.) (2.067 in.)
(see p a g e 14- 1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g A 2.5 m m 21.6 m m 87.5 m m 11.8
166) (0.098 in.) (0.850 in.) (3.445 in.)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.4 m m 12.6 m m 53.5 m m 12.9
(0.094 in.) (0.496 in.) (2.106 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.7 m m 19.6 m m 66.3 m m 9.9
(0.106 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.610 in.)
2-11
A/1 differential P i n i o n s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D. 18.010-18.028 m m
carrier ( 0 . 7 0 9 1 - 0 . 7 0 9 8 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0 . 0 2 3 - 0 . 0 5 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.) 0.1 m m (0.004 in.)
D r i v e s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D. 3 0 . 0 2 5 - 3 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 1 8 2 - 1 . 1 8 3 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0 . 0 4 5 - 0 . 0 8 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 1 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting t o r q u e For n e w b e a r i n g 2 . 7 - 3 . 9 N-m Adjust
(preload) ( 2 8 - 4 0 k g f - c m , 2 4 - 3 5 ibf-in.)
For used bearing 2 . 5 - 3 . 6 N-m Adjust
( 2 5 - 3 7 k g f - c m , 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)
A/T differential Backlash 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
pinion gear I.D. 18.042-18.066 m m
( 0 . 7 1 0 3 - 0 . 7 1 1 3 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055 - 0 . 0 9 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 7 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
Steering
Steering wheel R o t a t i o n a l p l a y m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e With engine 0 - 1 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 3 9 in.)
edge running
S t a r t i n g l o a d m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e With engine 30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 lbs)
edge running
Gearbox A n g l e o f rack g u i d e s c r e w l o o s e n e d 60 5
f r o m locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kpa
2
closed ( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm ,
1 , 1 1 0 - 1 , 2 1 0 psi)
Power steering Capacity Use Genuine For f l u i d c h a n g e : 0.4 fi (0.42 U S p t , 0.35 I m p qt)
fluid Honda Power For s y s t e m o v e r h a u l : 1.1 fi (1.16 U S q t , 0.97 I m p qt)
Steering Fluid
Power steering D e f l e c t i o n w i t h 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs) U s e d belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in.)
p u m p belt applied m i d - w a y between pulleys N e w belt: 8 . 5 - 1 1 . 0 m m ( 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 3 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a T e n s i o n ( m e a s u r e d w i t h belt t e n s i o n U s e belt: 3 9 0 - 5 4 0 N ( 4 0 - 5 5 kgf, 8 8 - 1 2 0 lbs))
n e w belt t o t h e gauge) N e w belt: 7 4 0 - 8 8 0 N ( 7 5 - 9 0 kgf, 1 7 0 - 2 0 0 lbs))
n e w belt s p e c ,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
t h e n r e a d j u s t it
to the used belt
spec.
2-12
specs
Suspension
Wheel alignment Camber Front 000'1
Rear -030'+1
Caster Front 2 4 8 ' + 1
Total Toe Front 0 + 2 m m ( 0 + 1 / 1 6 in.)
Rear IN 2 2 ( 1 / 1 6 + 1 / 1 6 in.)
Front w h e e l t u r n i n g angle Inside w h e e l 3 8 3 2 ' 2
Outside w h e e l 3103' (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0 - 0.7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.) 2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Radial 0 - 0 . 7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.) 1.5 m m (0.06 in.)
Steel w h e e l Runout Axial 0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.) 2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Radial 0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.) 1.5 m m (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearings End play Front 0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Rear 0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Brakes
Parking brake Distance travelled w h e n 6 - 9 clicks
lever p u l l e d w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs) o f
force
Brake p e d a l Pedal h e i g h t (carpet r e m o v e d ) 148 m m (5 13/16 in.)
Free p l a y 1 ---5 m m ( 1 / 1 6 - 3 / 1 6 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance 0 - 0 . 4 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 2 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 2 2 . 9 - 2 3 . 1 m m ( 0 . 9 0 - 0 . 9 1 in.) 21.0 m m (0.83 in.)
Rear 8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 3 6 in.) 8.0 m m (0.31 in.)
Runout Front 0.10 m m (0.004 in.)
Rear 0.10 m m (0.004 in )
Parallelism F r o n t a n d rear 0.015 m m (0.0006 in.)
Brake p a d s Thickness Front 1 0 . 5 - 1 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 4 1 - 0 . 4 5 in.) 1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
Rear 8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 5 - 0 . 3 5 8 in.) 1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
Air Conditioning
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w -1 S e r v i c e Limit
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a(R-134a)
Capacity or system 450 - 500 g ( 1 5 . 2 - 1 6 . 9 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type D E N S O : N D - O I L 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01 A H o r 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of c o m p o n e n t s Condenser 25 m f i (5/6 f l oz, 0.9 I m p oz)
Evaporator 40 m f i (1 1/3 fl oz, 1.4 I m p oz)
Each l i n e a n d 10 mfi (1/3 f l oz, 0.4 I m p oz)
hose
Receiver 10 m f i (1/3 f l oz, 0.4 I m p oz)
Compressor 1 6 0 - 1 7 5 m f i (5 1 / 3 - 6 fl oz, 5 . 6 - 6 . 2 I m p oz)
Compressor Starter coil resistance at68F(20C) 3 . 4 - 3 . 8 ii
(DENSO) Pulley-to-pressure plate 0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.02 + 0.006 in.)
clearance
2-13
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length 4-door 4,795 m m (188.8 in.)
2-door 4,745 m m (186.8 in.)
Overall w i d t h 1,785 m m (70.3 in.)
Overall height 4-door 1,455 m m (57.3 in.)
2-door 1,405 m m (55.3 in.)
Wheelbase 4-door 2,715 m m (106.9 in.)
2-door 2,670 m m (105.1 in.)
Track Front 1,555 m m (61.2 in.)
Rear 1,535 m m (60.4 in.)
G r o u n d clearance 158 m m (6.2 in.)
Seating capacity Five
W E I G H T (U.S.A.) Gross Vehicle W e i g h t Rating 4-door 4,235 lbs
(GVWR) 2-door 4,190 lbs
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle W e i g h t Rating 4-door 1,920 kg
(CANADA) (GVWR) 2-door 1,900 kg
ENGINE Type W a t e r - c o o l e d , 4 - s t r o k e S O H C VTEC V 6 g a s o l i n e
engine
Cylinder arrangement 60 V 6 - c y l i n d e r , t r a n s v e r s e
Bore and stroke 86.0 x 86.0 m m (3.39 x 3.39 in.)
3
Displacement 2,997 c m (mft) (183 c u in.)
C o m p r e s s i o n ratio 9.4
Valve train Belt d r i v e n , S O H C VTEC 4 v a l v e s per c y l i n d e r
Lubrication system Forced, w e t s u m p , w i t h trochoid p u m p
Oil p u m p d i s p l a c e m e n t at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m 58.4 ft (61.7 U S q t , 51.4 I m p q t ) / m i n u t e
Water p u m p displacement at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m 172 ft (182 U S q t , 151 I m p q t ) / m i n u t e
Fuel r e q u i r e d U N L E A D E D g a s o l i n e w i t h 86 p u m p o c t a n e n u m b e r o r
higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output 1.6 k W
Nominal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 s e c o n d s
Direction of rotation C l o c k w i s e as v i e w e d f r o m g e a r e n d
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically controlled automatic, 4-speed f o r w a r d , 1
TRANSMISSION reverse
Primary reduction D i r e c t 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.534
2nd 1.502
3rd 0.947
4th 0.608
Reverse 1.846
Final r e d u c t i o n Type S i n g l e helical g e a r
Gear ratio 4.200
2-14
specs
STEERING Type P o w e r - a s s i s t e d rack a n d p i n i o n
Overall ratio 15.77
T u r n s , lock-to-lock 3.05
Steering wheel diameter 380 m m (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front I n d e p e n d e n t d o u b l e w i s h b o n e , c o i l s p r i n g w i t h stabilizer
Rear Five-link d o u b l e w i s h b o n e
Shock absorber F r o n t a n d rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
WHEEL Camber Front 0
ALIGNMENT Rear -030'
Caster Front 248'
Total toe Front 0 m m (0 in.)
Rear In 2 m m (1/16 in.)
BRAKES T y p e of service brake Front P o w e r - a s s i s t e d s e l f - a d j u s t i n g v e n t i l a t e d disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
T y p e of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear w h e e l s
2
Pad f r i c t i o n s u r f a c e area Front 59 c m x 2 (9.0 sq i n . x 2)
Rear 2
28 c m x 2 (4.3 sq i n . x 2 )
TIRES Size of f r o n t a n d rear t i r e s P 2 0 5 / 6 5 R 1 5 92V
Size o f s p a r e t i r e s T135/90D15 100M
AIR Cooling capacity 5,240 K c a l / h (20,800 B T U / h )
CONDITIONING Compressor Type/Manufacturer Swash plate/DENSO
N u m b e r of cylinders 10
Capacity 177.7 m f i / r e v . (10.84 c u i n / r e v . )
M a x i m u m speed 7,600 r p m
Lubricant capacity 160 mfl (5 1/3 f l oz)
Lubricant type ND-OIL8
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Sirocco fan
M o t o r input 230W/12 V
Speed control M a n u a l A/C: 4-speed A u t o A/C: Infinite variable
3
M a x i m u m capacity 520 m / h (18,300 c u f t / h )
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type D r y , s i n g l e p l a t e , Poly-V b e l t d r i v e
Electrical p o w e r 40 W m a x i m u m at 12 V
c o n s u m p t i o n at 68F (20C)
Refrigerant Type H F C - 1 3 4 a ( R - 1 3 4 a)
Quantity 4 5 0 - 5 0 0 g (15.2 - 1 6 . 9 f l oz)
2-15
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V - 5 5 A H / 5 h o u r s
RATINGS Starter 12 V - 1 . 6 k W
Alternator 12 V - 1 0 0 A
Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 100A, 5 0 A , 4 0 A , 3 0 A , 2 0 A , 15A

Under-dash driver's fuse/ 3 0 A , 15A, 10A, 7.5A
relay box
Under-dash passenger's 3 0 A , 2 0 A , 10A, 7.5A
fuse/relay box
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V - 6 0 W
Headlight low beam 12 V - 5 1 W
Front t u r n signal/Front side 12 V - 2 4 W / 2 . 2 CP ( c a n d l e p o w e r ) ( t w o f i l a m e n t s )
marker lights
Front parking lights 12 V - 3CP
Rear t u r n s i g n a l l i g h t s 12 V - 2 1 W
Brake/Taillights 12 V - 2 1 / 5 W
Taillight 12 V - 3CP
High m o u n t brake light 12 V - 2 1 W
Back-up lights 12 V - 2 1 W
License plate light 12 V - 3 C P
Ceiling light 12 V - 8 W
Trunk lights 12 V - 5 W
Door courtesy lights 12 V - 2 C P
Vanity mirror lights 12 V - 1 . 1 W
Glove box light 12 V - 3 . 4 W
Spotlights 12 V - 4 C P
Gauge lights 12 V - 1 . 2 6 W , 3.78 W
Indicator lights 12 V - L E D , 1 4 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.7 W , 1.4 W
Panel a n d pilot lights 14 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.84 W
Heater control panel lights 8 V - 1 . 2 W , 14 V - 1 . 1 2 W , 1.4W
2-16
Body Specifications
specs
4-door sedan
U n i t ; m m (in.)
(cont'd)
2-17
Body Specifications
(cont'd)
2-door coupe
Unit: m m (in.)
2-18
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids 3-2

Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions (1998-2000 models)
Listed by Distance/Time 3-4
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions (1998-2000 models)

and Severe Conditions (1998-2000 models)
Listed by Maintenance Item 3-8
Conditions (2001 Model)
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions (2001 Model)
and Severe Conditions (2001 Model)
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-14
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various w o r k
procedure (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
NO. LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT

1 Engine API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy Conserving" grade
oil. The oil container may also display the API
Certification seal shown below. Make sure it says "For
Gasoline Engines/' SAE Viscosity: See chart below.
1
2 Transmission Honda A T F - Z 1 *
3 Brake line (includes ABS line) Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*"
4 Power steering gearbox Steering grease P/N 08733-B070E
5 Throttle cable end (Dashboard lower panel hole) Silicone grease
6 Throttle cable end (Throttle link) Multi-purpose grease
7 Brake master cylinder pushrod
8 Pedal linkage
9 Battery terminals
10 Fuel fill lid
11 Hood hinges and hood latch Honda White Lithium Grease
12 Trunk hinges and latch
13 Door hinges, upper and lower
14 Door opening detent
15 Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots Silicone grease
16 Brake line joints (Front and rear wheelhouse) Rust preventives
17 Power steering system Genuine Honda Power Steering F l u i d * 3
18 Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: DENSO: ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-

A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
For Refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
API SERVICE LABEL API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

Engine oil viscosity for a m b i e n t temperature ranges
30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 C
* 1 : Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
* 2 : Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease
the life of the system.
* 3 : Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic
transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
3-2
3-3
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
(1998-2000 Models)
Listed by Distance/Time
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t .
7,500 m i / 12,000 k m / D o i t e m s in A .
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / D o i t e m s in A,
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
37,500 mi/ 60,000 km/ D o i t e m s in A .
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
Replace b r a k e f l u i d . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3 B r a k e F l u i d . Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
52,500 m i / 8 4 , 0 0 0 k m / D o i t e m s in A .
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m / D o i t e m s in A .
75,000 m i / 1 2 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 y e a r s
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). C a p a c i t y : 5.6 G (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . U s e U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / Do items in A.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . 2.9 fl (3.1 U S q t , 2.6 I m p q t ) . U s e H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (see p a g e 14-113).
Replace b r a k e f l u i d . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
D o i t e m s in A , B, a n d C.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / D o i t e m s in A .
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e ( c o l d ) (see p a g e 6-13).
Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.), E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
R e p l a c e s p a r k p l u g s (see p a g e 4-24). U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ 16CR-L11).
G A P : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in)
Replace t i m i n g belt (see p a g e 6-19) a n d i n s p e c t w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-10).
C h e c k idle s p e e d . S h o u l d be 680 + 50 r p m in M o r E p o s i t i o n (see p a g e 11-68).
LJ Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
112,500 m i / 1 8 1 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A .
D o t h e i t e m s in A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s

3-4
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, a n d C as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l listed.
A
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil (see p a g e 8-5). - C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l t e r c h a n g e : 4.4 fi (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 I m p qt)
R o t a t e t i r e s . F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n in t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l - Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n .
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5).

I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear brakes (see p a g e 19-2).
C h e c k p a d s a n d discs f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
C h e c k c a l i p e r s f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s o f m o u n t b o l t s .
C h e c k p a r k i n g brake a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
I n s p e c t t i e r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see p a g e 17-12).
C h e c k rack g r e a s e a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check boots for d a m a g e and leaking grease.
C h e c k f l u i d line f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Inspect suspension c o m p o n e n t s .
Check bolts f o r t i g h t n e s s .
C h e c k c o n d i t i o n o f ball j o i n t b o o t s f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n a n d d a m a g e .
1
I n s p e c t d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r c r a c k s a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 16-3)* .
I n s p e c t brake h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . - C h e c k t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e
a n d leakage.
C h e c k all f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
windshield washer fluid.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Check f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n .
Check f o r p r o p e r f a n o p e r a t i o n .
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m * . Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r heat s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s * . Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d replace
d a m a g e d parts (see p a g e 11-73).
C
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt.
L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k b e l t d e f l e c t i o n b y p u s h i n g o n it ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e p u l l e y s .
- P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10).
1
R e p l a c e t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace it t w i c e as o f t e n (at 15,000 m i l e i n t e r v a l ) if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y in u r b a n areas t h a t h a v e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s of s o o t in t h e
air f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s .
Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l o w f r o m t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is less t h a n n o r m a l .
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s

e m i s s i o n s w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m
reliability.
1
* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 61S8008)
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
(1998-2000 Models)
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t . U s e t h i s s c h e d u l e if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n M A I N L Y in C a n a d a o r in a n y o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s ; if o n l y O C C A S I O N A L L Y d r i v e n i n t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s , u s e t h e N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s s c h e d u l e (see p a g e 3-4).
S e v e r e Driving C o n d i t i o n s
Less t h a n 5 m i l e s (8 k m ) p e r t r i p o r , in f r e e z i n g t e m p e r a t u r e s , less t h a n 10 m i l e s (16 k m ) per t r i p
In e x t r e m e l y ; h o t w e a t h e r ( o v e r 90F/32C)
Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
Trailer t o w i n g
On m u d d y , dusty, or de-iced roads
D r i v i n g in m o u n t a i n o u s c o n d i t i o n s
3,750 m i / 6,000 k m / - Replace oil a n d filter.

7,500 m i / 1 2 , 0 0 0 k m / D o items in A.
11,250 m i / 1 8 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil and filter.
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
18,750 m i / 30,000 k m / Replace oil a n d filter.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 y e a r s : Do i t e m s in A.
26,250 m i / 42,000 k m / Replace oil a n d filter
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s : D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / 2 1/2 y e a r s : D o i t e m s in A.
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s :
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) .
1
Replace b r a k e f l u i d (see p a g e 1 9 - 7 ) * .
U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3.
Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
Do i t e m s in A a n d B.
48,750 m i / 78,000 k m / R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
5 2 , 5 0 0 m i / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 y e a r s : D o i t e m s in A .
56,250 m i / 90,000 k m / ^ Replace oil a n d filter.
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s :
Replace t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19) a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) if t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in w e a t h e r o v e r 110F
(43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 2 9 C ) ; If n o t , r e p l a c e t h e b e l t s at 105,000 m i l e s .
D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C. ; ^
63,750 m i / 1 0 2 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil and filter.
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m 4 1/2 y e a r s : D o i t e m s in A . ^
71,250 m i / 1 1 4 , 0 0 0 k m Replace oil and filter. ~..~.~Z1S. '
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
R e p l a c e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t )
78,750 m i / 1 2 6 , 0 0 0 " k m / Replace oil and filter.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 1/2 y e a r s Do i t e m s in A. ^
86,250 m i / 1 3 8 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil and filter. "" ~~
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s :
1
Replace b r a k e f l u i d (see p a g e 1 9 - 7 ) * .
Use G e n u i n e H o n d a DOT 3 brake f l u i d ; fill t o b e t w e e n marks o n reservoir.
D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
93,750 m i / 1 5 0 , 0 0 0 k m / R e p l a c e oil a n d filter.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 1/2 y e a r s : Do i t e m s in A.
101,250 m i / 1 6 2 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil and filter. ^
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s :
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e ( c o l d ) (see p a g e 6 - 1 3 ) l n t a k e : 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
R e p l a c e s p a r k p l u g s . U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ16CR-L11). G a p : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in) (see p a g e 4-24).
Replace t i m i n g belt (see p a g e 6-19), a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-10) o n l y if t h e belts w a s n o t r e p l a c e d at 60,000 m i l e s .
Check i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-68): 680 + 50 r p m
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). Use H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2. C a p a c i t y : 5.6 ft (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) .
108,750 m i / 1 7 4 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil and filter.
112,500 m i / 1 8 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 1/2 y e a r s : D o i t e m s in A .
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s : D o i t e m s A , B, a n d C.
1
* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
3-6
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, a n d C as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l .
A
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil a n d f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5). C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l t e r c h a n g e : 4.4 fi (4.6 U S q t , 3.9 I m p qt)
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s , e v e r y 6 m o n t h s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n less t h a n 7,500 m i l e p e r y e a r (see p a g e 19-2).
Check pads a n d d i s c s f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
Check calipers f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d tightness<of m o u n t b o l t s .
R o t a t e t i r e s , if t h e v e h i c l e has b e e n d r i v e n t h e d i s t a n c e l i s t e d . F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n in t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l . (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d
condition.)
I n s p e c t tie r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see p a g e 17-12).
Check rack g r e a s e a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check b o o t s f o r d a m a g e a n d l e a k i n g g r e a s e .
Check f l u i d lines f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Check bolts f o r t i g h t n e s s .
Check c o n d i t i o n o f ball j o i n t b o o t s f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n a n d d a m a g e .
1
I n s p e c t d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r cracks a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 16-3)* .
B
C h e c k p a r k i n g b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 c l i c k s .
L u b r i c a t e d o o r locks a n d h i n g e s w i t h H o n d a w h i t e l i t h i u m g r e a s e .
I n s p e c t brake h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e a n d
1
leakage (see p a g e 1 9 - 3 0 ) * .
C h e c k f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , b r a k e f l u i d , a n d
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m . * Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r h e a t s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s . * Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e
1
C h e c k all l i g h t s . Check f u n c t i o n o f all i n t e r i o r a n d e x t e r i o r l i g h t s , a n d t h e p o s i t i o n s o f t h e h e a d l i g h t s (see p a g e 2 2 - 9 8 ) * .
I n s p e c t t h e v e h i c l e u n d e r b o d y . Check t h e p a i n t f o r d a m a g e , s c r a t c h e s , s t o n e c h i p p i n g , a n d d e n t s .
C
R e p l a c e air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e b e l t . L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k t e n s i o n b y p u s h i n g o n e a c h belt ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e
pulleys:
P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10)
Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r , e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d
1
d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s ; also r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF).
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s

w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m r e l i a b i l i t y .
1
* : Refer t o '98-00 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 61S8005)
3-
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions
(1998-2000 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item

a
If d r i v e n in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s , d o i t e m s w i t h a d o t ( ) .
If d r i v e n in s e v e r e c o n d i t i o n s {see p a g e 3-6) o r n o r m a l l y d r i v e n in C a n a d a , d o i t e m s w i t h a circle ( O ) a n d i t e m s w i t h a d o t ( ) .
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r m i l e s x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5

c o m e s first.
k m x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
years 1/2 - 1 - 1 1/2 - 2 - 21/2
Replace e n g i n e oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles
(6,000 km) or 6 months
Replace e n g i n e oil filter Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t o
R e p l a c e air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t #
Inspect valve clearance A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .
Replace spark plugs
N 0 T E 1
Replace t i m i n g belt, and inspect water p u m p
Inspect and adjust drive belts

I n s p e c t idle s p e e d *
Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d o
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s o o o
Replace b r a k e f l u i d
Check parking brake a d j u s t m e n t # #

Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r N 0 T E 2
m
Lubricate locks and hinges o
R o t a t e t i r e s (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n at least o n c e a m o n t h ) m
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering g e a r b o x , and boots o m o m o
Inspect s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s o m o m o
Inspect driveshaft b o o t s o o m o
I n s p e c t b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) #
I n s p e c t all f l u i d l e v e l s a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m hoses and c o n n e c t i o n s m #
Inspect exhaust s y s t e m *
Inspect fuel lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s * #
Check lights and controls o o

Inspect vehicle under b o d y o o
NOTE:
1. If t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in v e r y h o t o r c o l d w e a t h e r , o v e r 110F (43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 29C), replace t h i s belt e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s ;
If n o t , r e p l a c e it at 105,000 m i l e s .
2. Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has a h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y
a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l .
* A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s
3-8
41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25' 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
_ 3 31/2 4 _ 41/2 5 51/2 6 - 61/2 7 - 71/2 - 8
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 7,500 m i l e s (12,000 k m ) o r 12 m o n t h s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 3,750 m i l e s (6,000 k m ) o r 6 m o n t h s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y o t h e r oil c h a n g e
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y oil c h a n g e
o o o

A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .

o o
m o

o m o
o o o m o o

m
m m
o o o
Q m
o o o m o o
o o o m o o B
o o o m o o
m
m m
m m
m m
m m m m
o o o o o
o o o o o :
3-9
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
(2001 Model)
7,500 m i / 12,000 k m / Do i t e m s in A.
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / D o i t e m s in A .
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / Do i t e m s in A .
45,000 m i / 7 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 3 y e a r s D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d D.
52,500 m i / 84,000 k m / Do items in A .
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m / Do i t e m s in A .
75,000 m i / 1 2 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 y e a r s D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / Do i t e m s in A .
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s D o i t e m s in A , B, C, a n d D.
97.500 m i / 1 5 6 . 0 0 0 k m / Do items in A.
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e (cold) (see p a g e 6-13).
Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.), E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
R e p l a c e s p a r k p l u g s (see p a g e 4-24). U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ 16CR-L11).
G A P : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in)
R e p l a c e t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19) a n d i n s p e c t w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9).
C h e c k i d l e s p e e d . S h o u l d b e 6 8 0 50 r p m i n M o r [ E p o s i t i o n (see p a g e 11-68).
112,500 m i / 1 8 1 , 0 0 0 k m / Do items in A .
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s D o t h e i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 years
R e p l a c e t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . U s e H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF) ( s e e p a g e 14-113), t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 90,000 m i l e s (144,000 k m ) or 5 y e a r s
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 years
R e p l a c e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 6 0 , 0 0 0 m i l e s (100,000 k m ) o r 5 y e a r s .
3-10
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, C, a n d D as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l l i s t e d .
A
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil (see p a g e 8-5). - C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l t e r c h a n g e : 4,4 fl (4.6 U S q t , 3.9 I m p qt)
R o t a t e t i r e s . F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n i n t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n .
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5).

I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear brakes (see p a g e 19-2).
C h e c k p a d s a n d discs f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
C h e c k c a l i p e r s f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s o f m o u n t b o l t s .
C h e c k p a r k i n g brake a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
I n s p e c t tie r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see p a g e 17-12).
C h e c k rack grease a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check boots for d a m a g e and leaking grease.
C h e c k f l u i d line f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Check bolts for tightness.
1
I n s p e c t d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r cracks a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 1 6 - 3 ) * .
I n s p e c t b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e
a n d leakage.
C h e c k all f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m hoses a n d connections.
C h e c k f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n .
Check for proper fan operation.
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m * . Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r h e a t s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s * . Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d replace
C
R e p l a c e air cleaner e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt.
L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k belt d e f l e c t i o n b y p u s h i n g o n it ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e p u l l e y s .
- P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10).
1
Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace it t w i c e as o f t e n (at 15,000 m i l e i n t e r v a l ) if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y in u r b a n areas t h a t h a v e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f s o o t in t h e
air f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s .
Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l o w f r o m t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is less t h a n n o r m a l .
D
R e p l a c e b r a k e f l u i d e v e r y 3 y e a r s ( I n d e p e n d e n t o f D i s t a n c e ) . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r (see p a g e 1 1 -
000).
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s

e m i s s i o n s w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m
reliability.
* \ Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
3-11
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
12001 Model)
S e r v i c e a t t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t U s e t h i s s c h e d u l e if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n M A I N L Y in C a n a d a o r in a n y o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s ; if o n l y O C C A S I O N A L L Y d r i v e n in t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s , u s e t h e N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s s c h e d u l e (see p a g e 3-10).
Severe Driving Conditions
. Less t h a n 5 m i l e s (8 k m ) p e r t r i p o r , in f r e e z i n g t e m p e r a t u r e s , less t h a n 10 m i l e s (16 k m ) p e r t r i p
In e x t r e m e l y ; h o t w e a t h e r (over 90F/32C)
Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
Trailer t o w i n g
O n m u d d y , dusty, or de-iced roads
D r i v i n g in m o u n t a i n o u s c o n d i t i o n s
3,750 m i / 6,000 k m / - Replace oil and filter.

7,500 m i / 12,000 k m / D o i t e m s in A .
11,250 m i / 1 8 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil and filter.
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
f l Do i t e m s i n A a n d B.
18,750 m i / 30.000 k m / Replace oil and filter.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 y e a r s : Do i t e m s in A .
26,250 m i / 42,000 k m / Replace oil and filter
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s : D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C
3 3 , 7 5 0 m i / 54,000 k m / Replace oil a n d filter.
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / 2 1/2 y e a r s : Do items in A.
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s :
Clean air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
f l D o i t e m s in A , B, a n d D.
5 2 , 5 0 0 m i / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 y e a r s : Do i t e m s in A.
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s :
Replace t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6 -19) a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) if t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in w e a t h e r o v e r 110F
(43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 2 9 C ) ; if n o t , r e p l a c e t h e b e l t s at 105,000 m i l e s .
L J D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
60,000 m i / 9 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 3 y e a r s
f l R e p l a c e t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . U s e H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF) (see p a g e 1 4 - x x ) , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 90,000 m i l e s (144,000 k m ) o r 5 y e a r s .
63,750 m i / 1 0 2 , 0 0 0 k m / I ~i R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m 4 1/2 y e a r s : Do items in A.
71,250 m i / 1 1 4 , 0 0 0 k m - R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 1/2 y e a r s Do items in A.
86,250 m i / 1 3 8 , 0 0 0 k m / R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s : D o i t e m s i n A , B, C. a n d D.
93,750 m i / 1 5 0 , 0 0 0 k m / Replace oil a n d filter.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 1/2 y e a r s : Do items in A.
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s :
i n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e (cold) (see p a g e 6-13)lntake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) E x h a u s t : 0.28 - 0 . 3 2 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
Replace s p a r k p l u g s . U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ16CR-L11). G a p : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in) (see p a g e 4-24).
R e p l a c e t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19), a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) o n l y if t h e belts w a s n o t r e p l a c e d at 60,000 m i l e s .
Check i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-68): 6 8 0 5 0 r p m
f ] D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
112,500 m i / 1 8 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 1/2 y e a r s : Do i t e m s in A.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s : D o i t e m s A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 2 0 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 ft (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s (100,000 k m ) o r 5 y e a r s .
Replace t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19), a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) o n l y if t h e belts w a s n o t r e p l a c e d at 60,000 m i l e s .
3-12
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, C, a n d D as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l ,
A
Replace e n g i n e oil a n d f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5). C a p a c i t y w i t h filter c h a n g e : 4.4 fl (4.6 U S q t , 3.9 I m p qt)
Inspect f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s , e v e r y 6 m o n t h s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n less t h a n 7,500 m i l e p e r y e a r (see p a g e 19-2).
Check p a d s a n d d i s c s f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
Check c a l i p e r s f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s o f m o u n t b o l t s .
Rotate t i r e s , if t h e v e h i c l e h a s b e e n d r i v e n t h e d i s t a n c e listed. F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n in t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l . (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d
condition.)
Inspect t i e r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see page 17-12).
Check rack g r e a s e a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check b o o t s f o r d a m a g e a n d l e a k i n g g r e a s e .
Check f l u i d lines f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Inspect s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s .
Check b o l t s f o r t i g h t n e s s .
1
Inspect d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r cracks a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 1 6 - 3 ) * .
B
Check p a r k i n g b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
L u b r i c a t e d o o r locks a n d h i n g e s w i t h H o n d a w h i t e l i t h i u m g r e a s e .
Inspect b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e a n d
1
leakage (see p a g e 1 9 - 3 0 ) * .
Check f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m h o s e s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .
Inspect e x h a u s t s y s t e m . * C h e c k c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r heat s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
Inspect f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s . * C h e c k f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e
d a m a g e d p a r t s (see p a g e 11-73).
1
Check all l i g h t s . C h e c k f u n c t i o n o f all i n t e r i o r a n d e x t e r i o r l i g h t s , a n d t h e p o s i t i o n s o f t h e h e a d l i g h t s (see p a g e 2 2 - 9 8 ) * .
Inspect t h e v e h i c l e u n d e r b o d y . C h e c k t h e p a i n t f o r d a m a g e , s c r a t c h e s , s t o n e c h i p p i n g , a n d d e n t s .
C
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
Inspect a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt. L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k t e n s i o n b y p u s h i n g o n e a c h belt ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e
pulleys:
P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10)
Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r , e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d
1
d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use G e n u i n e H o n d a A T F .
D
Replace b r a k e f l u i d e v e r y 3 y e a r s ( I n d e p e n d e n t o f D i s t a n c e ) . U s e G e n u i n e D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r , (see p a g e 11-000).
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s

1
* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
3-13
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions
(2001 Model)
Listed by Maintenance item
If d r i v e n i n n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s , d o i t e m s w i t h a d o t < ) .
If d r i v e n i n s e v e r e c o n d i t i o n s (see p a g e 3-6) o r n o r m a l l y d r i v e n i n C a n a d a , d o i t e m s w i t h a c i r c l e (O) and items with a dot ( # ) .
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r m i l e s x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5

c o m e s first. k m x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
years _ 1/2 _ 1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2
Replace e n g i n e oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Replace e n g i n e o i l f i l t e r Normal Conditions: Every other oil change
Severe Conditions: Every oil change
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Inspect valve clearance
o
A d j ust o n l y if n o i s y .

Replace s p a r k p l u g s
Replace t i m i n q b e l t ,
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Insoect idle s p e e d *
N 0 T E 1
and inspect water p u m p

Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or
For engine coolant: Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles 10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
(192,000 km) or 10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years.
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d Normal Condition: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years,

thereafter every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Condition: Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years,
thereafter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s
Replace brake f l u i d
o m o m
E v e r y 3 y e a r s ( i n d e p e n d e n t of d i s t a n c e !
o
Check parkinq brake a d j u s t m e n t
m #
N 0 T E 2
R e p l a c e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r
Lubricate locks a n d h i n g e s
R o t a t e t i r e s (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n at least o n c e a m o n t h )
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering g e a r b o x , a n d boots

O
o
m
m
#
o o

Inspect suspension c o m p o n e n t s o m o o
Inspect driveshaft boots o m o o
Inspect brake hoses a n d lines (including A B S )
m
I n s p e c t all f l u i d l e v e l s a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s
Inspect c o o l i n q s y s t e m hoses a n d c o n n e c t i o n s
Inspect exhaust s y s t e m *

m
m
Inspect fuel lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s *
m #
Check liqhts and controls o o
Inspect vehicle under b o d y o o
NOTE:
1. If t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in v e r y h o t o r c o l d w e a t h e r , o v e r 110F (43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( ~ 2 9 C ) , r e p l a c e t h i s b e l t e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s ;
If n o t , r e p l a c e it at 105,000 m i l e s .
2. Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air h a s a h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y
a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l .
* A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s
w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s b e d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m r e l i a b i l i t y .
3-14
41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 r
132 ~ 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
3 31/2 4 41/2 5 51/2 6 _ 61/2 _ 7 71/2 _ 8
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 7,500 m i l e s (12,000 k m ) o r 12 m o n t h s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 3,750 m i l e s (6,000 k m ) or 6 m o n t h s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y o t h e r oil c h a n g e
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y oil c h a n g e
o
o
A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .
o

o ::

o

N o r m a l a n d S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 120,000 m i l e s (192,000 k m ) or 10 y e a r s , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s (96,000 k m ) or 5 y e a r s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 120,000 m i l e s (192,000 k m ) or 6 y e a r s , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 90,000 m i l e s (144,000 k m ) or 5 y e a r s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 60,000 m i l e s (96,000 k m ) or 3 y e a r s , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 30,000 m i l e s (48,000 k m ) or 2 y e a r s
I I IOi I I IO! I I I O ! I I I O I Q O
Every 3 y e a r s ( i n d e p e n d e n t o f d i s t a n c e )

o

o
m
o

o
m
o
m c
0

m o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o

o
o
o
# L o
o
o
o
Q
0
m

m

0
o
#
m

m

#
o
o
0
o o o o o
o o o o o
3-15
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special T o o l s 4-2
Starting System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-3
Circuit Diagram 4-4
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting 4-5
Starter S o l e n o i d T e s t 4-6
Starter Performance T e s t 4-7
Starter Replacement 4-8
Starter Overhaul 4-9
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram 4-16
Ignition Timing Inspection 4-18
Distributor Replacement 4-19
Distributor D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y 4-20
ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input T e s t 4-21
Ignition Coil T e s t 4-22
Ignition Wire Inspection and Test 4-22
Ignition Coil Troubleshooting 4-23
Spark Plug Inspection/Replacement 4-24
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting 4-27
Alternator-Compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement 4-31
Alternator R e p l a c e m e n t . 4-31
A u t o - T e n s i o n e r Inspection 4-33
Alternator Overhaul 4-35
Cruise Control
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index 4-43
Cruise Control C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting 4-45
Control Unit Input T e s t 4-46
Main S w i t c h T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t 4-48
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 4-49
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h T e s t 4-50
Actuator S o l e n o i d T e s t 4-50
Actuator T e s t 4-51
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement 4-52
Actuator Cable Adjustment 4-54
Engine Mount Control System

Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg 1
07746-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
(D
4-2
Starting System
Component Location Index
BATTERY
STARTER
S t a r t e r C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 4-5
S o l e n o i d T e s t p a g e 4-6
P e r f o r m a n c e T e s t , p a g e 4-7
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 4-8
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-9
4^3
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION S W I T C H

BATTERY
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A) ^BAT"
BLK WHT
ST,
BLK/WHT
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No.13(7.5A)
BLK/RED BLU/ORN BLU/WHT
PCM
PGM-FI TRANSMISSION
MAIN RELAY RANGE
SWITCH
/Closed: \
I B and E l position/
BLK/WHT BLK
JCL
G101
4-4
ENGINE
Starter Circyit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical

Air temperature must be between 59 and 100F (15 connections at the battery and the starter for
and 38C) during this procedure. looseness and corrosion. Then check the starter
After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the again.
PCM to clear any Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC);
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page Did the starter crank the engine?
11-3).
Y E S T h e starting system is O K . B
Recommended Procedure:
Use a starter system tester. N O - G o to step 5.
Connect and operate the equipment in accordance
w i t h the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then
disconnect the BLK/WHT w i r e (A) f r o m the starter
Alternate Procedure solenoid (B). Connect a jumper w i r e f r o m the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
1. Hook up the f o l l o w i n g equipment:
Ammeter, 0 - 4 0 0 A
Voltmeter, 0 - 2 0 V (accurate w i t h i n 0.1 volt)
Tachometer, 0 - 1 2 0 0 rpm
/I
A v
o o
Did the starter crank the engine?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
NO Remove the starter and diagnose its internal

problems.
2. Remove the No. 46 (15 A) fuse f r o m the under-dash 6. Check the following items in the order listed until
fuse/relay box. y o u find the open circuit.
3. With the shift lever in HQ or E, turn the ignition Check the BLK/WHT wire and connectors
switch to start (III). between the starter cut relay and the ignition
switch, and between the starter cut relay and the
Did the starter crank the engine normally? starter.
Check the ignition switch, refer to the '98-01
Y E S - The starting system is OK Accord Service Manual (see page 22-55).
Check the transmission range switch and
NO - If the starter w o n ' t crank at all, go to step 4. If connector (see page 14-141).
it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to
step 7. If it w o n ' t disengage f r o m the torque
converter ring gear when y o u release the key,
check for the f o l l o w i n g until y o u find the cause.
Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction

Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch. (cont'd)
4-5
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Starter Solenoid Test
(cont'd)
1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S
terminal (A) and the armature housing (ground).
7. Check engine speed during cranking. There should be continuity.
Is engine speed above 100 rpm? If there is continuity, go to step 2.

If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
Y E S - G o to step 8. A
IMO Remove and disassemble the starter, and

check for the f o l l o w i n g until y o u find the cause.
Excessively w o r n starter brushes

Open circuit in c o m m u t a t o r brushes
Dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear
Faulty drive gear clutch
8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.
Is cranking voltage no less than 8.5 volts, and

current draw no more than 380 amps?
NO Remove and disassemble the starter, and 2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S
check for the f o l l o w i n g until y o u find the cause. and M terminals (B). There should be continuity.
Open circuit in starter armature c o m m u t a t o r If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.

segments If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
Starter armature dragging
Shorted armature w i n d i n g
Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and

the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
4-6
ENGINE
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wires f r o m the S terminal (A) and Disconnect the battery also f r o m the body. If the
the M terminal (B). pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
To avoid damaging the starter, do not leave the
2. Make a connection as described below using as battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to
the wire used for the vehicle).
3. Connect the battery as s h o w n . If the starter pinion

pops out, it is w o r k i n g properly. To avoid damaging
the starter, do not leave the battery connected for
more than 10 seconds.

12 V
BATTERY
6. Clamp the starter f i r m l y in a vise.
7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in

the diagram below, and confirm that the motor
starts and keeps rotating.
Disconnect the battery f r o m the M terminal. If the

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil is w o r k i n g
properly. To avoid damaging the starter, do not
leave the battery connected for more than 10
seconds.
M EL
12 V
BATTERY
If the electric current and motor speed meet the

specifications w h e n the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is w o r k i n g properly.
Specifications:
1.6 kw 80 A or less (Electric current),

2,600 rpm or more (Motor-speed)
4-7
Starting System
Starter Replacement
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the radio, 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's the crimped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing
preset buttons. out.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then

disconnect the positive cable, and w a i t at least 3
minutes.
3. Remove the ATF cooler hose f r o m the clamp on the

starter motor.
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) f r o m the B terminal

on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT w i r e
(B) f r o m the S terminal.
C A
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative

cable to the battery.
8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter

the customer's radio station presets.
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
5. Remove the 2 bolts (C) holding the starter, then

remove the starter.
4-8
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
END COVER
GEAR HOUSING
COVER
(cont'd)
4-9
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8). 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure. Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.)
Armature Inspection and Test Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage due t o

contact w i t h the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
6. Measure the commutator runout.
If the commutator runout is within the service

4. Check c o m m u t a t o r (A) surface. If the surface is limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
dirty or burnt, resurface w i t h emery cloth or a lathe brass chips between the segments.
w i t h i n the f o l l o w i n g specifications, or recondition If the commutator runout is not within the service
w i t h # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (B). limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
4-10
ENGINE 1
Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
undercut the mica w i t h a hacksaw blade to the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core.
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the commutator segments. The undercut should the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). the armature.
Commutator Mica Depth

Standard (New): 0 . 4 0 . 5 mm {0.016 0.020 in.)
10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists

8. Check for continuity between the segments of the between the commutator (A) and armature coil
commutator. If an open circuit exists between any core <B), and between the commutator and
segments, replace the armature. armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the
armature.
(cont'd)
4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Starter Brush Inspection Starter Brush Holder Test
1 1 . Measure the brush length. If it is not w i t h i n the 12. Check that there is no continuity between the ( + )
service l i m i t replace the brush holder assembly. brush holder (A) and ( ) brush holder (B). If there
is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Standard (New): 1 5 . 8 1 6 . 2 mm (0.62 0.64 in.)
13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact w i t h the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the m o m e n t the spring lifts off
the brush.
Spring Tension:
1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 - 1 . 8 kgf, 3 . 5 3 3 . 9 7 ibf)
4-12
14. Pry back each brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then Overrunning Clutch Inspection
position the brush about halfway out of its holder,
and release the spring to hold it there. 17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. If it

does not lock in either direction or it locks in both
directions, replace it.
A
15. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back

each brush spring again, and push the brush d o w n
until it seats against the commutator, then release
the spring against the end of the brush.
NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or

# 600 sandpaper, w i t h the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate
the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
w i l l be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
19. If the starter drive gear (B) is w o r n or damaged,

replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring

gear if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.
16. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush 20. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of
holder (B). disassembly.
4-13
Ignition System
'98-99 models:
IGNITION W I R E S
I n s p e c t i o n a n d T e s t p a g e 4-22
DISTRIBUTOR
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-20
Ignition C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( I C M ) Input T e s t , p a g e 4-21
Ignition T i m i n g I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 4-18
4-14
"00-01 models:
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
'98-99 models:
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX IGNITION S W I T C H
No. 41 (100 A) No. 42 (50 A)
"
BLK/YEL
) No. 6 DRIVER'S
(15 A) UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION C O I L
BLU BLK/YEL YEL/GRN
DISTRIBUTOR Is I, I,
IGNITION C O N T R O L
M O D U L E (ICM)
[Has built-in \
I noise condenser J
IGNITION W I R E S
4-16
H ENGINE 1
'00-01 models:
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A) No.42(50A) BAT
K> Of BLK/YEL
0 - IG1
DRIVER'S
No. 11 UNDER-DASH
(15A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLK/YEL
BRN/WHT BLK/RED BRN WHT/BLU BLU/RED YEL/GRN
I. I. I.
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
II ICM ICM ICM
IGNITION
COILS
! 2 No.6
TBLK
SPARK
PLUGS
SL
G101
ICM : Ignition Control Module
4-17
Ignition System
Ignition Tinning Inspection
1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see 5. Point the light toward the pointer (A) on the t i m i n g
page 11-86). belt cover. Check the ignition t i m i n g under a no
load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear
2. Connect the Honda PGM tester to the Data Link w i n d o w defogger, and air conditioner are not
Connector (DLC), and f o l l o w the tester's prompts in operating. If the ignition t i m i n g differs f r o m the
the " S C S " menu (see the Honda PGM Tester specification below, replace the PCM; refer to
Operator's Manual). the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h Ignition Timing:

no load, shift lever in M or GB, until the radiator fan 1 0 2 BTDC (RED mark (B)) during idling in K or
comes on, then let it idle. m
A
4. Connect the t i m i n g light to the No. 1 ignition w i r e
(ignition coil w i r e for '00-01 models).
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM tester.
4-18
Distributor Replacement - '98-99 models
Removal 5. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor cap as
shown.
1. Disconnect the connector(A) f r o m the distributor.
No. 6 No. 1
6. Connect the 3P connector to the distributor.
B
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
2. Disconnect the ignition wires f r o m the distributor

cap.
3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts (B) then

remove the distributor (C) f r o m the cylinder head.
Installation
1. Bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC.
2. Coat a new O-ring (D) w i t h engine oil, then install it.
3. Slip the distributor into position.
NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its

mating grooves in the camshaft end (E) are both
offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the
distributor 180 out of time.
4. Tighten the mounting bolts (B).
4-19
ignition System
Distributor Disassembly/Reassembly - '98-99 modeis
4-20
F
ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input ; - 98-99 models
NOTE: 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage

If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on, between the No. 2 terminal and body ground.
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index; refer to There should be battery voltage.
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual.
Perform an input test for the ignition control module If there is no battery voltage, check:
(ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the - ignition coil.
ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. - BLK/YEL wire between the ICM and ignition
coil.
1. Disconnect the 3P connector f r o m the distributor. If there is battery voltage, go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage

between the No. 3 terminal and body ground.
There should be battery voltage.
If there is no battery voltage, check:

- ignition coil.
- BLU wire between the ICM and ignition coil.
If there is battery voltage, go to step 4.
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) and check for

continuity on the No. 1 terminal between the ICM
connector terminal No. 1 (YEL/GRN) and PCM
connector terminal B13. There should be continuity.
5. Check for continuity on the No. 1 terminal to body

ground. There should be no continuity. If there is
continuity (short to ground), the ICM is probably
damaged.
6. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P) and the

W i r e side of
female terminals distributor 3P connector.
7. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM.
4-21
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Test - '98-99 models Ignition Wire Inspection and
Test - '98-99 models
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector and the ignition coil 1. Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on
wire. the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might
break them inside.
2. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If

any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken
or distorted, replace the ignition wire.
3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between

the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is corroded, or bent
terminals.
not within specifications.
NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil 3. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance.
temperature; specifications are at 68F (20C).
Ignition Wire Resistance:
Primary Winding Resistance 25 kQ max. at 68F (20C)
(Between the terminals 1 and 3): 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 Q
Secondary Winding Resistance

(Between terminal 2 and
secondary winding terminal): 17.120.3 kQ
2
I O 1
o o
3 4. If resistance exceeds 25 kQ, replace the ignition
wire.
4-22
Ignition Coil Troubleshooting - '00-01 models
NOTE: Perform an ignition coil test after finishing the 6. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).
fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel
and emissions system. 7. Check for continuity between the body g r o u n d and
PCM connector terminals C3, C4, C12, C13, C14,
1. Remove the ignition coil cover. and/or C23 individually.
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
2. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil 3P connectors.
IGP L S 3 ( W H T / B L U ) IGP L S I ( Y E L / G R N )
3. Measure the voltage at the No. 3 terminal of each
ignition coil 3P connector with the ignition switch
ON (II).
IGP L S 5
(BLK/RED)
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
23 2627 30
IGP L S 6
(BRN/
2 1G WHT) IGP LS2
(BLK/YEL) IGP L S 4 (BLU/
(BRN) RED)
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there continuity?
Is there battery voltage? Y E S Repair short in the wire between ignition coil
and PCM.B
NO - G o t o step 8.
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between ignition coil
and No. 1 1 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 8. Connect PCM connector C (31P).
fuse/relay b o x . B
9. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of each
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ignition coil 3P connector w i t h the ignition switch to
start (III).
5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of
each ignition coil 3P connector and body ground. IGNITION C O I L 3P C O N N E C T O R
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR IGP LSI (YEL/GRN)

IGP LS2 (BLU/RED)
IGP LS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGP LS4 (BRN)
GND
(BLK) , IGP LS5 (BLK/RED)
IGP LS6 (BRN/WHT)
W i r e side of
Wire side of female terminals
female terminals
Is there approx. 0.5 V?

YES Replace the ignition coil.
Y E S - Go to step 6.
NO Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
NO - Repair open in the wire between ignition coil and PCM.B
and body ground (G10D.B
4-23
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A);
replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: specification.
Advanced ignition t i m i n g
Loose spark plug Electrode Gap:
Plug heat range too hot Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039 0.043 in.)
Insufficient cooling Service Limit: 1.3 mm (0.05 in.)
Fouled plug may be caused by:

Retarded ignition t i m i n g
Oil in combustion chamber
Incorrect spark plug gap
Plug heat range too cold
Excessive idling/low speed running
Clogged air cleaner element
Deteriorated ignition coil
W o r n or deformed
electrodes
Improper gap
Oil-fouling
> Carbon deposits
Cracked center
electrode insulator
Damaged
gasket 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the
center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
plugs listed below.
Spark Plugs:
Cracked
insulator
NGK: PZFR5F-11
DENSO: PKJ16CR-L11
4. A p p l y a small quantity of anti-seize compound to

the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head finger-tight. Torque them to 18 N m
(1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibfft).
4-24
Charging System
CHARGING S Y S T E M INDICATOR
(In t h e g a u g e a s s e m b l y )
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX T e s t , page 22-29
[ H a s built-in E L E C T R I C A L L O A D
[ D E T E C T O R (ELD) UNIT
4-25
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
U N D E R - H O O D FUSE/RELAY B O X
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PCM
WHT/RED
'00-01 models
4-26
- +
ENGINE
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
If the charging system indicator does not come on or 9. Ground the No. 3 terminal of the 4P connector.
does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
f o l l o w i n g items in the order listed below:
ALTERNATOR
Battery (see page 22-30) 4P C O N N E C T O R
Charging system indicator
Alternator/regulator circuit
Alternator control system
1 2
Wire side of
Charging System Indicator Test female terminals
3 4
1. Check the B terminal, that the 4P connector and
L (WHT/BLU)
under-hood fuse/relay box terminals are securely
tightened.
Are they securely tightened?
Does the charging system indicator come on?
NOTighten or reconnect.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check for a
Does the charging system indicator come on? b l o w n No. 6 (15 A) fuse and a blown charging
system light bulb. If the fuse and bulb are OK,
Y E S - G o to step 3. repair the open in the WHT/BLU wire.
N O - G o to step 7. 10. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of the

alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON
3. Start the engine. (ID.
Does the charging system indicator go off? ALTERNATOR

4P C O N N E C T O R
Y E S Charging system indicator circuit is OKM
NO Go to step 4. IG
(BLK/YEL)
1 2
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of
female terminals
3 4
5. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the alternator.
Does the charging system indicator come on?
Y E S T u r n the ignition switch OFF, and repair the Is there battery voltage?
short in the WHT/BLU w i r e .
Y E S Replace the alternator
N O - G o to step 10.
NO -Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. alternator and the under-dash driver's fuse relay
box.
8. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the alternator.
(cont'd)
4-27
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test'98-99 9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and hold it
models there.
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page Is there voltage less than 12.0 V?
22-30).
Y E S Replace the alternator.
2 . Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and t u r n
the selector switch to position 1 (starting). NO - G o to step 10.
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD T E S T E R
( C A R B O N PILE) LEAD (BLU) 10. A p p l y a load w i t h the VAT-40 until the battery
X ^ . V O L T M E T E R voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.
NEGATIVE
L E A D (BLK)
Is the amperage 75 A or more?
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE Y E S T h e charging system is O K . B
L E A D (RED)
N O - Replace the alternator

VOLT
SELECTOR
FIELD
SELECTOR
NEGATIVE TESTER
C A B L E (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
C A B L E (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
B TERMINAL WIRE
3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold

the engine at 3,000 r p m , w i t h no load until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and hold it

there.
Is there voltage over 16.0 V?
YES Replace the alternator.
NO G o t o step 5.
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine

idle.
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the

selector switch to position 2 (charging).
7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the

ammeter.
8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal w i r e

of the alternator so that the arrow points away f r o m
the alternator.
4-28
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test '00-01 9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and hold it
models there.
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page Is there voltage less than 13.5 V?
22-30).
Y E S Repair the alternator components (see page
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn 4-35).
the selector switch to position 1 (starting).
N O G o to step 10.
LOAD ADJUSTER F U L L FIELD TESTER
( C A R B O N PILE) LEAD (BLU) 10. Apply a load w i t h the VAT-40 until the battery
t ^-VOLTMETER voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.
NEGATIVE
L E A D (BLK)
Is the amperage 75 A or more?
VOLTMETER
VOLT
POSITIVE
SELECTOR
L E A D (RED) Y E S The charging system is OK
FIELD NO Go to step 11.

SELECTOR
TEST SELECTOR NEGATIVE TESTER 11. With the engine speed still at 2,000 r p m , full-field
SWITCH CABLE (BLK) the alternator Attach the probe to the VAT-40 full-
POSITIVE TESTER field test lead, and insert the probe into the full field
C A B L E (RED)
sccess hold at the back of the alternator. Switch the
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
field selector to the " A (Ground)" position
B TERMINAL
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
momentarily, and check the amperage reading.
WIRE
Because voltage w i l l rise will rise quickly w h e n the
alternator is full-fielded, do not allow the voltage to
exceed 18 V: it may damage the electrical system.
3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold
REGULATOR
the engine at 3,000 r p m , w i t h no load until the
(Located inside
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. the end cover)
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and hold it

there.
Is there voltage over 15.1 V?
Y E S - Repair the voltage regulator
F U L L FIELD
END ACCESS HOLE
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine COVER
idle.
Is the alternator out put 75 A or more ?
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the
selector switch to position 2 (charging). Y E S Replace the voltage regulator.
7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the NO Repair the alternator components (see page
ammeter. 4-35).
8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire

of the alternator so that the arrow points away f r o m
the alternator.
(cont'd)
4-29
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Alternator Control System Test 7. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
terminal C2 and body ground.
1. Check for proper operation of the ELD by
confirming with the MIL.
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the alternator.
3. Start the engine and turn the headlights (high 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
beam) ON.
/ 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
4. Measure voltage between the 4P connector
terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the
23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
battery. Wire s i d e of female terminals
BATTERY
YESRepair short in the wire between the

alternator and PCM.
C (WHT/GRN) NO Substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck;

refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual. If
ALTERNATOR W i r e side of prescribed voltage is now available, replace the
4P C O N N E C T O R female terminals original PCM.
8. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.
Is there 1 V or less? 9. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).
Y E S - G o to step 8. 10. Check for continuity between the PCM connector

terminal C2 and alternator 4P connector terminal
N O - G o to step 5. No. 2.
5. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF. ALTC (WHT/GRN) C (WHT/GRN)
6. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 12 13 14
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21
/ rf
3
23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/ ALTERNATOR
4J
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P) 4P C O N N E C T O R
YESTest the alternator/regulator.
NORepair open in the wire between the

alternator and PCM.
4-30
ENGINE
Alternator-compressor Belt Alternator Replacement

Inspection and Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt preset buttons.
is cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
2. Check that the pointer (A) on the auto-tensioner disconnect the positive cable.
housing is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib
(B) on the tensioner base. 3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension f r o m
the alternator belt (B), and remove the alternator
belt.
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tensioner

f r o m the alternator belt (B), and remove the
alternator belt.
4. Install the new belt in reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
4-31
Charging System
Alternator Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the condenser fan motor connector (A) 7. Remove the mount bolt (A) and alternator bracket
f r o m the condenser fan shroud. m o u n t i n g bolt (B), then remove the harness clamp
6 x 1.0 m m (C) f r o m the alternator bracket.
9.8 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
7.2 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
5. Remove the condenser fan/shroud assembly (B).
6. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and BLK wire (B) 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
f r o m the alternator.
'98-99 m o d e l s
6 x 1.0 m m
7.8 N m (0.8 k g f - m , 5.8 I b f f t )
'00-01 m o d e l s
8 x 1.25 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
4-32
ENGINE
Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement
1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's Check if the auto-tensioner (A) moves smoothly
pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position and check for abnormal noise w h e n the pulley is
of the pointer again. If the position changes, go to turned counterclockwise w i t h the designated tool. If
step 5. the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly or if
the there is abnormal noise. Replace the auto-
tensioner. Do not move the auto-tensioner beyond
its limit.
2. Check for abnormal noise f r o m the tensioner pulley.

If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley.
3. Stop the engine, then remove the alternator belt

(see page 4-31).
5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f . m , 8.7 Ibf ft)
(conf d)
4-33
Charging System
Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement (cont'd)

6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using 2 bolts (6 8. If necessary, remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand
m m diameter) (B) and vise (C) in a vise as s h o w n . threads), and replace the tensioner pully (B).
Do not clamp the auto-tensioner itself. A
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
7. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt.

Measure the torque w h e n the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than
specified value, replace the auto tensioner.
23 N m (2.3 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft)
4-34
Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models
Exploded View
SPACER RING
END COVER DUST SEAL
(cont'd)
4-35
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (B) f r o m
Driver 07749-0010000 the " B " terminal, then remove the end cover (C)
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400 and dust seal (D).
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed d u r i n g

this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before y o u

remove t h e m (see step 1 on page 4-27).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-31).
3. If the f r o n t bearing needs replacing, remove the

pulley locknut w i t h a 10 m m wrench (A) and a 22 D
m m wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact w r e n c h .
6. Remove the brush holder.
4. Remove the 3 flange nuts (A) and the screw (B)

f r o m the alternator, then remove the plate terminal
(C).
4-36
(cont'd)
4-37
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)
11. (If you are not replacing the f r o n t bearing and/or 14. W i t h a hammer and commercially available tools
rear bearing, go to step 18). Remove the rotor f r o m s h o w n , install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft.
the stator drive end housing.
12. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the 15. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
bearing journal surface in the stator housing for
seizure marks.
If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged,

replace the alternator.
If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK,
go to step 13.
13. Remove the rear bearing using a puller as s h o w n .
4-38
16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out Rectifier Test
the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer.
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the
B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the
E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair.
All diodes should have continuity in only one
direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed
to allow current to pass in one direction, and the
rectifier is made up of 8 diodes (4 pairs), you must
test each diode in both directions for continuity
w i t h an ohmmeter that has diode checking
capability: a total of 16 checks.
If any diode failed, replace the rectifier assembly.

(Diodes are not available separately.)
If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.
17. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new

front bearing in the stator housing.
07749-0010000
A B'i
07746-0010400
k Ak Ak Ak
Bi
B 2
J B 3
J
B 4
k Ai Ak A
(cont'd)
4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models (cont'd)
Alternator Brush Inspection Stator Test
19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) w i t h a 22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of
vernier caliper (B). leads (A).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit, If there is continuity, go to step 23.
replace the brush assembly. If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.
* If brush length is OK, go to step 20.
Alternator Brush Length:

Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
Service Limit: ' 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
23. Check for no continuity between each lead and the

coil core (B).
If there is no continuity, g o t o step 24.

If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
Rotor Slip Ring test
24. Reassemble the alternator in reverse order of
20. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings disassembly, and note these items:
(A).
Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip
* If there is continuity, go to step 2 1 . rings.
* If there is no continuity, replace the alternator. If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
C 111 N-m (11.3 kgf-m, 81.7 Ibf-ft) w h e n you
reinstall it.
2 1 . Then check that there is no continuity between

each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor
shaft (C).
* If there is no continuity, go to step 22.

* If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
4-40
Cruise Control
ACTUATOR
T e s t , p a g e 4-51
S o l e n o i d T e s t , p a g e 4-50
ACTUATOR CABLE
A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 4-54
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
T e s t , p a g e 14-140
4-41
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
: 01 model
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX IGNITION SWITCH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
COMBINATION
BATTERY
LIGHT SWITCH
-
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)
G202 G101 G501
4-42
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
NOTE:
The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence.
Before troubleshooting,
- check that the speedometer works properly.
- check for proper engine vacuum at the actuator.
- check the No. 9 (7.5A) and No. 6 (15A) fuses in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
- check that the horn sounds.
- check the tachometer to see if it works properly.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Cruise control cannot be set. 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48) Poor ground: G101
2. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49) Open circuit, loose
3. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see or disconnected
page 4-50) terminals: L T G R N ,
4. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140) LT GRN/RED, GRY,
5. Check control unit (see page 4-46) LT BLU, BLU/WHT
Cruise control can be set, but 1. Check d i m m i n g circuit in gauge (see page 22-33) Poor ground: G501
indicator light does not go on. 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) Open circuit, loose
or disconnected
terminals: YEL,
BLU/BLK
Cruise speed is noticeably 1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51)
higher or lower than what 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
was set.
Excessive overshooting or 1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51)
undershooting w h e n trying to 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
set speed.
Speed fluctuates on a flat 1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51)
road w i t h cruise control set. 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Vehicle does not decelerate 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49) Open circuit, loose or
or accelerate accordingly 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) disconnected
w h e n SET/RESUME/CANCEL terminals:
button is pushed. LT GRN/RED, LT
GRN/BLK
Set speed not cancelled 1. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140) Open circuit, loose or
(engine rpm stays high) w h e n 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) disconnected
shift lever is moved to M terminals, short to
position. ground: LT BLU
Set speed is not cancelled 1. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see Open circuit, loose or
w h e n brake pedal is pushed. page 4-50) disconnected
2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) terminals: WHT/BLK
(cont'd)
4-43
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Set speed does not cancelled 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48) Open circuit, loose or
w h e n main switch is pushed 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) disconnected
OFF terminals, short to
power: LTGRN
Set speed does not cancelled 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4- Open circuit, loose or
w h e n CANCEL button is 49) disconnected
pushed 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) terminals: L T G R N /
RED, LT GRN/BLK
Set speed will not resume 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4- Open circuit, loose or
w h e n RESUME button is 49) disconnected
pushed (with main switch o n , 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) terminals: L T G R N /
set speed is temporarily BLK
cancelled).
The transmission shifts d o w n 1. Troubleshoot the cruise control communication
slower than normal w h e n circuit (see page 4-45)
going up a hill w i t h the cruise
control on.
4-44
ENGINE
Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine. 8. Measure the voltage between the No. 8 terminal of
the cruise control unit connector and g r o u n d .
2 . Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive
C R U I S E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R
the vehicle to speeds over 2 5 m p h (40 km/h) with
the cruise control.
Does the cruise control operate?

1 2 3 / 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
BLU/GRN
IMO-Check the cruise control unit or cruise control
actuator.
4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
control unit 14P connector.

Is there approx. 1 V?
5. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
terminal A5 and body g r o u n d . Y E S - G o to step 9.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
NO Replace the cruise control u n i t . B
9. Measure the voltage between the A5 terminal of

" BLU/GRN the PCM connector and g r o u n d .
/ 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 10
/
12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
25 26 27 28 29 30 32
BLU/GRN
/ 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 10
/
12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 19 20 21 23 24
W i r e side of female terminals 25 26 21 28 29 30 32
Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM

connector terminal A5 and the cruise control unit Wire side of female terminals
14P connector terminal No. 8.

NO Go to step 8.
Y E S -Check for loose connectors. If necessary
6. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise replace the PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord
control unit 14P connector. Service Manual (see page 11 - 3 ) .
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO Repair or open in the BLU/GRN wire between
the A5 terminal and the cruise control u n i t . B
4-45
Cruise Control
Control Unit Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS c o m p o n e n t locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-25).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector f r o m the control unit.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
9 BRN/WHT Under all Check for resistance to Faulty actuator solenoid
conditions ground: Poor ground(G202)
There should be 8 0 - 1 2 0 Q. An open in the wire
1 BRN Under all Check for resistance to
conditions ground:
There should be 4 0 - 6 0 Q.
11 BRN/BLK Under all Check for resistance to
conditions ground:
There should be 7 0 - 1 1 0 Q.
4-46
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
2 GRY Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to Faulty brake pedal position switch
(II), main switch ON ground: An open in the w i r e
and brake pedal There should be 0 V w i t h
depressed, then the pedal depressed and
released battery voltage w i t h the
pedal released.
3 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
ground: An open in the w i r e
There should be continuity.
5 WHT/BLK Brake pedal Check for voltage to Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
depressed, then ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
released There should be battery Faulty brake pedal position switch
voltage w i t h the pedal An open in the wire
depressed, and 0 V w i t h the
pedal released.
6 LT GRN/ Set button pushed Check for voltage to Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
RED ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
7 LTGRN/ Resume button There should be battery Faulty horn relay
BLK pushed voltage. Faulty set/resume/cancel switch
Faulty cable reel
An open in the w i r e
10 BLU/BLK Ignition switch ON Attach to ground: Blown bulb
(II) Cruise indicator light in the Blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the
gauge assembly should under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
comes on. Faulty d i m m i n g circuit in the
gauge assembly
An open in the wire
12 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between Faulty vehicle speed sensor
(II) and main switch the BLU/WHT ( + ) and BLK An open in the w i r e
ON; raise the front of ( ) terminals:
the vehicle, and There should be 0 5 V or
rotate 1 wheel slowly more
while holding the - 0 - 5 V or more
other wheel repeatedly.
13 LTGRN Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to Blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
(II) and main switch ground: under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
ON There should be battery Faulty main switch
voltage. An open in the wire
14 LT BLU Shift lever in [2], S3 or Check for continuity to Faulty transmission range switch
B ground: Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. An open in the wire
8 BLU/GRN Reconnect the cruise Check for voltage to Faulty cruise control unit
control unit 14P ground: There should be Short to ground
connector, start the approx. 1V
engine, main switch
ON and drive the
vehicle to speeds
over 25 mph (40 km/
h) with the cruise
control set.
5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK,
the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
4-47
Cruise Control
Main Switch Test/Replacement
'98-00 models: '01 model:
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument 1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument
panel. panel.
Terminal side of male T e r m i n a l side of

terminals male terminals
B A
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (B) f r o m the switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the table. If there is no
continuity, replace the switch.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) f r o m the switch. ^ Terminal

4 7 5 1 2
Position \
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. If there is no
continuity, replace the switch.
OFF a
o a
o
ON
o- o
o o -
o
\^ Terminal
1 2 3 4 5
Position \
OFF o -
o o--@- o
ON
o--- o
o a -- o
4-48
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement
1. Carefully remove the set/resume/cancel switch 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in
cover (A) by prying between the cover and the switch position according to the table.
switch (B) in the sequence shown.
If there is continuity and it matches the table, but
switch failure is occurred on the cruise control
unit input test, check and repair the wire harness
on the switch circuit.
If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
Terminal
Position
S E T (ON) O o
R E S U M E (ON) o o
o -o
C A N C E L (ON)
o
2. Remove the 2 screws (A), then remove the switch

(B).
4-49
Cruise Control
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test Actuator Solenoid Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the switch (A). 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f r o m the actuator.
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
: T e r m i n a l side of
/ male terminals
2. Check for resistance between the terminals

2. Remove the brake pedal position switch, according to the table.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals NOTE: Resistance will vary slightly with
according to the table. temperature; specified resistance is at 70F (20C).
\ Terminal \ Terminal
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Brake Switch \ Resistance ( Q ) \
I VENT SOLENOID
DEPRESSED o O J r>
4060 Q KJ
RELEASED i r~)
U
VACUUM SOLENOID
3050 Q
4. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the pedal SAFETY SOLENOID

40-60 Q KJ
height, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 19-5).
4 1 3 2
4-50
Actuator Test
Special Tools Required 5. W i t h voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 in.Hg the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be
A973X-041-XXXXX able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective.
1. Disconnect the actuator cable f r o m the actuator rod

and disconnect the 4P connector (A).
Terminal side of
male terminals
6. Disconnect ground f r o m the No. 3 terminal. The

actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but
the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the
solenoid valve assembly is defective.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground

A973X-041-XXXXX
f r o m the No. 1 terminal. The actuator rod should
2. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and
ground the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 terminals. filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly
is defective.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose, then
apply vacuum to the actuator. 8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure
to use new O-rings on each solenoid.
4. The actuator rod (A) should pull in completely. If
the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for 9. Disconnect power and ground f r o m the 4P
a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid. connector. Disconnect the vent hose f r o m the
actuator. Connect a vacuum p u m p to the actuator
vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod
should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve
is stuck open. Replace the actuator.
4-51
Cruise Control
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement
Removal/Installation 6. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the

actuator cable (B) f r o m the throttle linkage (C).
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f r o m the actuator. B
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), and remove the

mounting bolt (C), then remove the actuator w i t h
the bracket.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D).
4. Remove the 3 nuts (A).
5. Disconnect the actuator cable (B) f r o m the actuator

rod (C) by releasing the clip (D) f r o m the rod w i t h a
screwdriver.
4-52
SOLENOID VALVES
4-53
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves s m o o t h l y 5. Turn the adjusting nut (A) until it is 3.75 + 0.5 m m
w i t h no binding or sticking. (0.150.02 in.) away f r o m the bracket (B).
3 . 7 5 0 . 5 m m ( 0 . 1 5 0 . 0 2 in.)
Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h 6. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (A) touches
no load (El or OS position) until the radiator fan the bracket, and tighten the locknut (B).
comes on, then let it idle.
Measure the amount of m o v e m e n t of the output

linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase.
A t first, the output linkage should be located at the
fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should be
3.75 + 0.5 m m (0.15 + 0.02 in.).
If the free play is not w i t h i n specs, move the cable

to the point where the engine speed starts to
increase, and tighten the locknut (A) and adjusting
nut (B).
4-54

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No.41 (100 A) No.42 (50A)
or>oo
WHT
UNDER-DASH
DRIVER'S
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
GRN/WHT
BLK
G101
4-56
Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required 4. Shift to M or E position.
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX 5. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the engine
m o u n t control solenoid valve.
NOTE: Check the v a c u u m hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting. 6. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal and
body g r o u n d .
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
w h e n idling. SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating

temperature (the cooling fan comes on 2 times).
W i r e side of
female terminals
Is the idle speed less than 800 rpm?
NOAdjust the idle speed (see page 11-86).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. W i t h the transmission in gear, have an assistant Is there battery voltage?

disconnect and reconnect the 2P connector f r o m
the engine mount control solenoid valve. Y E S - G o to step 7.
Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness NO Repair open in BLK/YEL wire between the 2P
when the 2P connector is disconnected? connector and No. 6 (15A) fuse in the under-dash
driver's fuse/relay box.
Y E S Reconnect the 2P connector to the solenoid
valve. The engine m o u n t control system is OK. 7. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals.
NO- Go to step 4.
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
ire s i d e o f
nale terminals
BLK/YEL
Is there battery voltage?
N O - R e p a i r open in GRN/WHT wire between PCM

(A2) and the 2P connector. If the wire is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer
to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
(cont'd)
4-57
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 r p m . 11. Release the v a c u u m , then apply vacuum again.
9. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2 Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
terminals. with and without vacuum applied?

SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
N O - Isolate and replace the leaking engine

mount.
12. Disconnect the lower vacuum hose (A) f r o m the

Wire side of engine mount control solenoid valve (B) and
female terminals
connect a v a c u u m pump/gauge to the hose.
BLK/YEL
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body g r o u n d in GRN/WHT

w i r e between PCM (A2) and the 2P connector. If the
w i r e is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 1 1 - 3 ) .
N O - Go to step 10.
Is there manifold vacuum?
10. Disconnect the upper v a c u u m hose (A) f r o m the
engine m o u n t control solenoid valve (B), and YES - Replace the engine mount control solenoid
connect a v a c u u m pump/gauge to the hose. A p p l y valve.
v a c u u m for 20 seconds.
NO Repeir as needed.
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?
Y E S - G o to step 1 1 .
NO - Either the v a c u u m hose or one of the engine

mounts has a v a c u u m leak. Repair as needed.
4-58
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal 5-2
Engine Installation 5-11
Cylinder Head 6-1

Engine Block 7-1
Engine Lubrication 8-1
Intake Manifold/Exhaust System 9-1
Engine Cooling 10-1
NOTE: Referto the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for items not shown in this section.
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Special Tool Required 5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
Belt Tension Release A r m , YA 9317, commercially hose (A) f r o m the throttle body.
available
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the w i r i n g connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
1. Remove the support struts f r o m the hood, then fix

the hood in a vertical position.
preset buttons.
C B
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then
the positive t e r m i n a l . Remove the battery. 6. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C),
then remove the intake air duct (D).
4. Remove the throttle body cover (A) and intake
manifold cover (B). 7. Remove the ground cable (A) and harness clamp
B A
F D
8. Remove 6 mounting bolts (C), and loosen the
mounting bolt (D), then remove the battery base (E)
and battery base bracket (F).
Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control 11. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care 12. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
not to bend the cables w h e n removing them. (B).
Always replace any kinked cable w i t h a new one.
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
10. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on

the left side of the engine compartment.
13. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and

the cruise control vacuum hose (B).
(cont'd)
5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)

14. Remove the engine wire harness clamps. 18. Remove the starter cable clamps.
15. Remove the battery cables (A), and disconnect the

connector (B) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box
(C).
19. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the PCM.
16. Remove the flange bolt (D), then remove the under-
hood fuse/relay box.
17. Remove the harness clamps (E).
5-4
20. Remove the g r o m m e t (A), then pull out the PCM 22. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), and remove the
connectors. locknut (B) and m o u n t i n g bolt (C), then remove the
power steering (P/S) p u m p belt (D) and p u m p
w i t h o u t disconnecting the P/S hoses.
21. Move the auto-tensioner (A) w i t h the belt tension

release arm (B) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt. C D B
23. Remove the P/S hose clamp (E).
24. Remove the radiator cap.
25. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned

properly. Raise the hoist to full height.
26. Remove the front tires/wheels.
27. Remove the splash shield.
(cont'd)
5-5
Engine Assembly
28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, drain the 35. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder
engine coolant (see page 10-10). (B), then remove the shift cable cover (C). To
prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure
29. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer (see before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
page 14-112). cover.
30. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
3 1 . Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (H02S)

connector (A), then remove exhaust pipe A (B).
36. Remove the lock bolt (D) securing the control lever
(E), then remove the shift cable (F) w i t h the control
lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable while
removing it.
37. Unplug the P/S hose clamps (A), and disconnect the
engine mount control vacuum hose (B).
32. Remove the damper fork, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 18-17).
33. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints;

refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page
18-17).
34. Remove the driveshafts; refer to the '98-01 Accord

Service Manual (see page 16-3). Coat ail precision-
finished surfaces w i t h clean engine oil. Tie plastic
bags over the driveshaft ends.
5-6
(cont'd)
5-7
Engine Assembly
5-8
4 4 . Remove the front mount bracket support nut. 4 7 . Make a mark (A) on the front beam (B) and rear
beam (C), then remove the front beam.
(cont'd)
Engine Assembly
49. Remove the rear mount. 5 1 . Check that the engine/transmission is completely
free of v a c u u m hoses, fuel and coolant hoses and
electrical w i r i n g .
52. Slowly lower the engine approximately 150 m m (6

in.). Check once again that all hoses and wires are
disconnected f r o m the engine/transmission.
53. Lower the engine all the way, and disconnect the
chain hoist f r o m the engine.
54. Remove the engine f r o m under the vehicle.
50. Remove the transmission lower rear mount.
5-10
Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
8x 1.25 mm
P/S PUMP 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-11
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach t h e 5. Install the A/C compressor.
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle.
mJOTICE
Reinstall the m o u n t i n g bolts/nuts in the
sequence given. Failure to f o l l o w this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the transmission lower rear mount.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6. Install the front beam. Align mark (A) on the rear

beam (B) and front beam (C), then tighten the bolts
(D).
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
4. Install the rear mount bracket.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 kgf-ri
28 Ibfft)
1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
u
10 x 1.25 m m 1 4 x 1.5 m m
3 8 N m {3.9 k g f - m , 103 N m (10.5 k g f - m ,
28 Ibfft) 76 Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Tighten the transmission lower rear mount

mounting nuts (E) and transmission lower front
mount mounting nuts (F).
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
5-12
8 . Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods. 11. Tighten the rear mount bracket support nut and
14x1.5 m m mounting bolt.
162 N m (16.5 k g f m , 119 I b f f t )
12 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
9. Lower the hoist.

10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
10. Tighten the front mount bracket support nut.
12 x 1.25 m m 12. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t ) the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
13. Remove the chain hoist f r o m the engine.
(cont'd)
5-13
Engine Assembly
14. Raise the hoist to full height. 19. Install the control lever (A) w i t h the shift cable on
the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable any
15. Install a new spring clip on the end of each more than is necessary to install the control lever.
driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure
each clip " c l i c k s " into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
16. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints. Use

new cotter pins; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 18-17).
17. Install the damper fork; refer t o the '98-01 Accord

18. Install exhaust pipe A (A); use a new gaskets (B)

and new self locking nuts (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
20. Install the lock bolt (B) w i t h a new lock washer (C),
then bend the lock tab of the lock washer.
2 1 . Install the shift cable cover (D), then install the shift
cable holder (E) on the shift cable cover.
22. Install the P/S hose into the clamps (A), and
connect the engine mount control vacuum hose (B).
C
10 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
5-14
(cont'd)
5-15
Engine Assembly
27. Install the front tires/wheels. 34. Install the starter cable clamps.
28. Lower the hoist.
29. Install the alternator belt.
30. Loosely install the P/S p u m p belt and p u m p .
3 1 . Adjust the P/S p u m p belt (see page 17-13).
32. Push in the PCM connectors, through the bulkhead

then install the g r o m m e t (A).
35. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A) and

harness clamps (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m
8.7 I b f f t )
33. Connect the PCM connectors.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 I b f f t )
36. Install the battery cables (C), and connect the

connector (D) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box
(A).
5-16
37. Install the engine wire harness clamps. 39. Install the fuel hose (A) and fuel return hose (B)
using new washers (C).
'98-99 models;
38. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the 22 N m (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft)
cruise control vacuum hose (B).
'00-01 models:
22 N m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
40. Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the

left side of the engine compartment
(cont'd)
5-17
Engine Assembly
41. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the 45. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
cable (see page 4-54). vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C).
42. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
page 11-98).
43. Install the battery base bracket (A), battery base (B),
then install the ground cable (C) and harness clamp
(D).
8x1.25 mm
C B
46. Install the EVAP canister hose (D) to the throttle

body.
47. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and

cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
48. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t ) 49. Refill the transmission with automatic transmission
fluid (ATF) (see page 14-113).
44. Install the throttle body cover (A) and intake
manifold cover (B). 50. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
air from the cooling system with the heater valve
B open (see page 10-10).
51. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
52. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn on (II) the ignition switch
(do not operate the starter) so that the fuel pump
runs for approximately 2 seconds and pressurizes
the fuel line. Repeat this operation 2 or 3 times,
then check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel
line.
5-18
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
D T C Troubleshooting - 6-6
V T E C S o l e n o i d Valve T e s t 6-9
V T E C Rocker A r m s T e s t 6-10
Valve C l e a r a n c e Adjustment 6-13
Crankshaft Pulley R e m o v a l and
Installation 6-17
T i m i n g Belt Inspection 6-18
T i m i n g Belt R e m o v a l 6-19
T i m i n g Belt Installation 6-22
Cylinder Head R e m o v a l 6-31
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage - 6-36
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y Removal 6-36
Rocker A r m s and Shafts D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y 6-37
Rocker A r m s and Shafts Inspection 6-38
V T E C Lost Motion A s s e m b l i e s
Inspection 6-39
C a m s h a f t Inspection 6-40
V a l v e s , S p r i n g s , and Valve S e a l s
Removal 6-43
V a l v e Inspection 6-44
Valve Stem-to-Guide C l e a r a n c e
Inspection - 6-44
V a l v e Guide R e p l a c e m e n t 6-45
V a l v e Seat Reconditioning 6-47
V a l v e s , S p r i n g s , and Valve S e a l s
Installation 6-49
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft
S e a l , and Pulley Installation 6-50
Cylinder Head Installation 6-51
T D C S e n s o r Replacement 6-55
CKP Sensor Replacement 6-56
Cylinder Head
Special Tools

07HAH-PJ7010B Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 1
07MAB-PY30100 Pulley Holder Attachment, 50 mm Offset 1
07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 1
07VAJ-P8A020A V T E C Air Stopper 1
-i 07406-0070300 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
-2 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
1
I
-3 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
@ 07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1
-1,-2,-3
6-2
IDLER P U L L E Y
(cont'd)
6-3
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
HEAD C O V E R G A S K E T
OIL C O N T R O L ORIFICE
6-4
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLIES
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-36
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-37
CAMSHAFT THRUST COVER
CAMSHAFT
VALVE KEEPERS
VALVE KEEPERS
SPRING RETAINER
SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE SPRING
INTAKE V A L V E SPRING EXHAUST VALVE SEAL

I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49
VALVE SPRING SEAT

INTAKE V A L V E S E A L
Installation, p a g e 6-49
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE

INTAKE V A L V E R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 6-45
GUIDE
Inspection, CYLINDER HEAD
page 6-44 R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-31
Replacement, W a r p a g e , p a g e 6-36
p a g e 6-45 Valve seat r e c o n d i t i o n i n g ,
p a g e 6-47
INJECTOR BASE
OIL S E A L
INTAKE V A L V E
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-43
EXHAUST VALVE I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49
6-5
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1259: A problem in the V T E C Oil 7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure
P r e s s u r e S w i t c h circuit or V T E C S o l e n o i d switch between the pressure switch connector
V a l v e circuit terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Special Tools Required V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH

CONNECTOR
Pressure Gauge Adaptor 07NAJ-P07010A
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070300
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset

procedure; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
2. Start the engine.

T e r m i n a l side of male
3. W a r m up the engine to normal operating terminals
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
4. Road test the vehicle:
Accelerate in \2\ position to an engine speed over Y E S - G o to step 8.
4,000 r p m . Hold that engine speed for at least 2
seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the NO Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch.
1st road test, repeat this test 2 more times.
Is DTC P1259 indicated?
9. Measure the voltage between the VTEC oil
Y E S - G o to step 5. pressure switch harness connector No. 1 terminal
and body ground.
NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH H A R N E S S
CONNECTOR
VTEC solenoid valve and PCM.H
6. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector.
NO Inspect for an open or short to ground in the

wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the
PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a known-
good PCM and recheck.B
6-6
10. Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure 14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and
switch harness 2P connector. install the special tools as s h o w n , then reinstall the
VTEC oil pressure switch.
V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E S W I T C H H A R N E S S
07NAJ-P07010A
07406-0070300
Wire side of female

terminals
07MAJ-PY40120
Y E S - G o to step 11. 15. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector

and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector.
NO Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil
pressure switch and G101. If the w i r e is OK, 16. Connect a tachometer.
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.B
17. W a r m up the engine to normal operating
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. temperature (cooling fan comes on).
12. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 18. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000, 2,000
and 3,000 r p m . Keep measuring t i m e as short as
13. Check for continuity on the VTEC solenoid valve possible because the engine is running w i t h no
between the solenoid valve 1P connector terminal load (less than 1 minute).
and body ground.
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE Is pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/crrf, 7 psi)?
NO Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-

9).B
20. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
2 1 . Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC

Terminal side of
solenoid valve terminal.
male terminal
22. Start the engine and check oil pressure at an engine
Is there 14-30 Q? speed of 3,000 r p m .
Y E S - G o to step 14. Is pressure above 390 kPa (4.0 kgf/crrf, 57 psi)?
NO Replace the VTEC solenoid valve. Y E S - G o to step 23.
NO Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-

9).B
(cont'd)
6-7
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

23. W i t h the battery positive terminal still connected to 27. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between valve 1P connector terminal and body ground.
C 1 0 and body g r o u n d .
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS
IP CONNECTOR
VTM (BLU/BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 12 ' 1 6 17 18 19 20 21
/
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
Wire side of female

W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals terminal
Is there battery voltage above 4,000 rpm?
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM
Y E S - G o to step 24. (B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector.
N O - R e p l a c e the VTEC oil pressure s w i t c h . N O - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good PCM and recheck.

If symptom/indication goes away, replace the
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF. original PCM.H
25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal f r o m the

VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
26. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid

valve harness 1P connector terminal and the PCM
connector terminal B 1 2 .
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS

VTS (GRN/YEL)
1 2 4 5
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
8
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM

(B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector
6-8
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test
1. Disconnect the 1 P connector from the VTEC 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid
solenoid valve. valve with your finger and check its movement. If
the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the
2 . Measure resistance between the terminal and body engine oil pressure.
ground. 6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
Resistance: 14 30 Q
3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the

VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the
oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter
(B) for clogging. If there is clogging, clean the filter
and replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6
CySinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

VTEC Air Adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A hose (A) f r o m the throttle body.
VTEC Air Stopper 07VAJ-P8A020A
1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),

ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
' 0 0 - 0 1 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
intake manifold covers (B) and intake manifold
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
C B
3. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C),

4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control

cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care
not to bend the cables w h e n removing t h e m .
6-10
5. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), 7. Remove the intake manifold.
vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
8. Remove the cylinder head covers.
9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page

6-18).
A
10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC (see step 10 on page 6-

6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models), 14).
breather hose (B) and water bypass hoses (C).
A 11. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and
secondary rocker arm (C).
If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the m i d , primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the
pistons in the m i d and primary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary, mid and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and retest.
If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 12.
B
(cont'd)
6-11
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker A r m Test (cont'd)
12. Repeat step 11 on the remaining intake mid rocker 18. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A)
arms w i t h each piston atTDC. W h e n all the m i d and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 13. mechanically connected by the piston and that the
m i d rocker arm (C) does not move w h e n pushed
13. Check that the air pressure on the shop air manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0 independently of the primary and secondary rocker
2
kgf/cm , 100 psi). arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
A
14. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
15. Cover the t i m i n g belt with a shop towel to protect

the belt.
16. Remove the 2 intake rocker shaft mounting bolts,

then connect the special tools and Valve Inspection
an air pressure regulator w i t h a 0 - 1 0 0 psi gauge
(A) as s h o w n below.
A
B C
19. Remove the tools.
20. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion

assembly (see page 6-37). Replace the lost motion
assembly if it does not move smoothly.
2 1 . After inspection, check that the MIL does not come

on.
07VAJ-P8A020A 07VAJ-P8A010A
17. Loosen the valve on the regulator and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:

2
390 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm , 57 psi)
NOTE: If the synchronizing pistons A and B do not

move after applying air pressure; move the primary
or secondary rocker arm up and d o w n manually by
rotating the crankshaft clockwise.
6-12
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Adjust the valves only w h e n the cylinder head 2. Remove the EVAP canister hose (A) f r o m the
temperature is less than 100F (38C). throttle body.
1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),

ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
C A
C B

4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control

cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care
(cont'd)
6-13
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), 7. Remove the intake manifold.
vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models), 8. Remove the cylinder head covers.
A 9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page
6-18).
10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. Align the pointer (A) on
the back cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B)
on the front camshaft pulley.
B C
6-14
11. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the 13. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
valves you're going to check. locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
Intake: 0.20 0.24 mm (0.008 0.009 in.) A
Exhaust: 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 mm (0.011 0.013 in.) 7 x 0.75 m m
20 N m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)
Adjusting screw locations:
EXHAUST
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
REAR:
14. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
INTAKE
15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
No. 4 No. 5 No. 6
(A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 4 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
FRONT:
No. 4 No. 5 No. 6
EXHAUST
12. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting

screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 4 cylinder.
(cont'd)
6-15
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
17. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 21. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 2 piston TDC (A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 3 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B A B
18. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 22. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 2 cylinder. on No. 3 cylinder.
19. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 23. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 5 piston TDC (A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 6 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B A B
20. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 24. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 5 cylinder. on No. 6 cylinder.
6-16
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to
Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A 245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibfft). Do not use an
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A impact wrench.
Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 m m socket - 1 Hold the pulley w i t h holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (B).
Removal - 2 Tighten the bolt w i t h a torque wrench and 19
m m socket (C).
1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder B
attachment (B). 07JAB-001020A 07MAB-PY3010A
B
07JAB-001020A 07MAB-PY30T0A
07JAA-001020A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
07JAA-001020A
2. Remove the bolt w i t h a heavy duty 19 m m socket

(C) and breaker bar.
Installation
1. Remove any oil f r o m the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B),

bolt (C) and washer (D). Clean and lubricate the
points shown below.
O : Clean
X : R e m o v e a n y oil
# . Lubricate
6-17
Cylinder Head
Timing Beit Inspection
1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A), 2. Remove the front upper cover.
ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold cover
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A)
and intake manifold cover (B).
'98-99 models:
6-18
Timing Belt Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the front tires/wheels.
Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A 4. Remove the splash shield.
Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 m m socket
Belt Tension Release A r m , YA9317,
commercially available
1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up

w i t h the pointer (B).
5. Move the auto-tensioner (A) w i t h the belt tension

release arm (B) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt.
2. Check that the rear camshaft pulley mark (A) and

rear upper cover mark (B) are aligned.
A
(cont'd)
6-19
Cyfinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
6. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), locknut (B) and 9. Remove the dipstick and tube (A); discard the O-
mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering ring (B).
(P/S) pump belt (D).
A
10. Hold the pulley w i t h holder handle (A) and holder

attachment (B).
B
7. Support the engine w i t h a jack and w o o d block 07MAB-PY3010A
under the oil pan.
8. Remove the side engine m o u n t bracket.
11. Remove the bolt w i t h a heavy duty 19 m m socket

(C) and breaker bar.
6-20
12. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover 14. To hold the timing belt adjuster its current position,
(B) and lower cover (C). screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown.
B Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench.
15. Remove the engine mount bracket.
13. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the

battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
(cont'd)
6-21
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd) Timing Belt Installation
16. Loosen the idler pulley bolt (A) about 5 or 6 turns, NOTE; The following procedure is for installing a new
then remove the timing belt. t i m i n g belt. If you are installing a used t i m i n g belt, refer
to the next procedure.
New Belt
1. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, and upper and lower

covers.
2. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning

the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t i m i n g belt
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
6-22
3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft 6. Hold the auto-tensioner (A) w i t h the maintenance
pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on bolt pointing up. Loosen and remove the
the camshaft pulleys w i t h the pointers (B) on the maintenance bolt (B).
back covers.
NOTE: Handle the auto-tensioner carefully so the
FRONT; oil inside does not spill or leak. If any of the oil has
spilled or leaked out of the auto-tensioner, refill it
w i t h 5 W-30 motor oil. The total capacity is 6.5 mfi
(0.22 fl oz).
7. Clamp the boss of the auto-tensioner in a soft-

jawed vise. Do not grip the housing of the auto-
tensioner.
8. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (C) into the

maintenance hole. Place the holder (D) (P/N 14540-
P8A-A01) on the auto-tensioner while turning the
screwdriver clockwise to compress the bottom.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the threads or the

gasket contact surface with the screwdriver.
9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a

new gasket (B).
A
8 N m (0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
B
4. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.
5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
(cont'd)
6-23
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Make sure no oil is leaking around the maintenance 12. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
bolt, then install the auto-tensioner (A).
NOTE: Make sure the holder (B) stays in place.
10x1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 I b f f t )
13. Remove the holder.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m ( 1 . 2 k g f m /
8.7 Ibfft)
11. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counter clockwise

sequence starting w i t h the drive pulley.
-1 Drive pulley (A).

-2 Idler pulley (B).
-3 Front camshaft pulley (C).
-4 Water p u m p pulley (D).
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E).
-6 Adjusting pulley (F).
D
6-24
14. Install the engine mount bracket. 16. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
17. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft
pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and
washer (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 kgf A
8.7 I b f f t )
18. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to

MO x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 kgf-m, 3 3 Ibfft) 245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibf-ft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
15. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B)
and rear upper cover (C). - 1 Hold the pulley w i t h holder handle (A) and
C holder attachment (B).
- 2 Tighten the bolt w i t h a torque wrench and 19
m m socket (C).
B
07JAB-001020A 07MAB-PY3010A
07JAA-001020A
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t ) 19. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions on the
pulleys.
(cont'd)
6-25
Cylinder Head
20. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its w h i t e mark (A) 22. Install the dipstick and tube (A) w i t h a new O-ring
lines up w i t h the pointer (B). (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m ( 1 . 2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
2 1 . Check the camshaft pulley marks.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to 23. Install and adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 17-
step 22. 10).
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the t i m i n g belt and repeat steps 2 24. Install the alternator belt.
through 20.
25. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY: the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
0 10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
6-26
Used Belt 3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft
pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on
Follow this procedure when installing a used t i m i n g the camshaft pulleys w i t h the pointers (B) on the
belt. back covers.
1. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, and upper and lower FRONT:

covers.
2. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning

the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t i m i n g belt
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
REAR:
(cont'd)
6-27
Cylinder Head

4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the t i m i n g 7. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.
belt cannot be installed, remove and compress the
auto-tensioner (refer to steps 6-23 of the N e w Belt
Installation Procedure).
5. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counter clockwise

sequence starting w i t h the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the t i m i n g belt w h e n installing it.
-1 Drive pulley (A).

-2 Idler pulley (B).
-3 Front camshaft pulley (C).
-4 Water p u m p pulley (D).
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E).
-6 Adjusting pulley (F).
D
8. Install the engine mount bracket.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
6. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
s
1 0 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N - m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6-28
9. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B) 12. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to
and rear upper cover (C). 245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 lbf-ft). Do not use an
C impact wrench.
- 1 Hold the pulley w i t h holder handle (A) and

holder attachment (B).
- 2 Tighten the bolt w i t h a torque wrench and 19
m m socket (C).
B
07JAB-001020A 07MAB-PY3010A
6x1.0 mm
07JAA-001020A
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
10. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. 13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns
clockwise so the t i m i n g belt positions on the
11. Clean any oil off the inside face (A) of the pulleys.
crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley
bolt (B) and washer (C). 14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up w i t h the pointer (B).
(cont'd)
6-29
Cylinder Head
15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A). 16. Install the dipstick and tube (A) w i t h a new O-ring
(B).
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to A
step 16.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the t i m i n g belt and repeat steps 2
through 14.
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
17. Install and adjust the P/S p u m p belt (see page 17-
10).
18. Install the alternator belt.
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY: 19. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
10x1.25 mm
44 N m ( 4 . 5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
6-30
Cylinder Head Removal
Special Tool Required '00-01 models:
Belt Tension Release Arm,YA9317, commercially
available
Engine removal is not required this procedure.
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the w i r i n g connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100F (38C)
before loosening the retaining bolts.
Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts. 5. Remove the EVAP canister hose (A) f r o m the
throttle body.
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the radio,
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-10).
4. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover ( A ) ,

ignition wire cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover ( A ) ,

cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
C B

(cont'd)
6-31
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control 10. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the v a c u u m hoses (B) and PCV hose (C).
cable ends out of the accelerator linkage.Take care
11. Remove the vacuum hose (A), ('98-99 models)

8. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88). A
9. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
(B).
'98-99 models:
6-32
12. Remove the ground cable (A). 16. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), then remove the
locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C). Remove the
power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and p u m p
w i t h o u t disconnecting the P/S hoses.
D
13. Move the auto-tensioner (B) w i t h the belt tension
release arm (C) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (D), then remove the alternator belt.
C D B
14. Support the engine w i t h a jack and w o o d block 17. Remove the P/S hose clamp (E).
under the oil pan.
15. Remove the side engine mount bracket.
19. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps f r o m the cylinder heads and
the intake manifold.
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector

Idle air control (IAC) valve connector
Throttle position sensor connector
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
connector
Radiator fan switch A connector
Radiator fan switch B connector
Coolant temperature gauge sending unit
connector ('98-99 models)
CKP sensor connector
TDC sensor connector
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
Distributor connector ('98-99 models)
VTEC solenoid valve connector
VTEC oil pressure switch connector
Oil pressure switch connector
20. Remove the spark plug caps and distributor f r o m

the cylinder heads.
(cont'd)
6-33
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
21. Remove the intake manifold. 24. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake air
bypass control thermal valve (B).
A
22. Disconnect the 6 injector connectors.
23. Remove the fuel rails.
'98-99 models: 25. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-19).
26. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower

radiator hose (B).
A
'00-01 models:
6-34
27. Remove the heater hoses. 30. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and back covers
(B).
B
28. Remove the front and rear exhaust manifolds (see

page 9-3).
3 1 . Remove the cylinder head covers.
29. Remove the water passage.
32. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE:

CD CD CD 0
CD CD
33. Remove the cylinder heads.
6-35
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
Warpage
1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A).
N O T E : If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 6- A
40) are not w i t h i n specifications, the cylinder head
cannot be resurfaced.
If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances are w i t h i n

specifications, check the cylinder head for warpage.
Measure along the edges, and three w a y s across the
center.
If warpage is less than 0.05 m m (0.002 in.), cylinder

head resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.05 m m (0.002 in.) and 0.2
m m (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
M a x i m u m resurface limit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in.) based A
on a height of 121 m m (4.76 in.).
2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
Cylinder Head Height:
Standard (New): 120.95-121.05 mm - 1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts 2
(4.762-4.766 in.) turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to
prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm
assembly.
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
- 2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING

SEQUENCE: 4
' ' ' @
6-36
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
9
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-38).
Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
Bundle the rocker arms w i t h rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
Prior to reassembling, clean ail the parts in solvent, dry t h e m and apply lubricant to any contact points.
INTAKE R O C K E R S H A F T
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
Ql O
TOO lOOOl
SPRING
EXHAUST ROCKER EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM B ARM A
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
L e t t e r B is s t a m p e d L e t t e r A is s t a m p e d
on rocker a r m . on rocker a r m .
6-37
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms arid Shafts Inspection
Measure the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker 3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
shaft. check it for an out-of-round condition.
1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
location. Standard (New):
Intake: 0.0260.067 mm
(0.0010-0.0026 In.)
Exhaust: 0.026-0.077 mm
(0.0010 0.0030 in.)
2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
Inspect rocker a r m
face for w e a r .
4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the

clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any intake
rocker arm needs replacement, replace all 3 rocker
arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary).
6-38
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies
Inspection
VTEC Rocker A r m s
Push on the lost motion assembly (A) w i t h y o u r finger.
5. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push them If it does not move smoothly, replace it.
manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace A
the rocker arm assembly.
NOTE:
Apply oil to the pistons w h e n reassembling.
When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
6-39
Cylinder Head
Camshaft inspection
1. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
2. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then
tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
Specified torque: read the end play.
8 X 1 . 2 5 mm
24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft) Camshaft End Play:
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange Standard (New): 0.05 0.20 mm
(0.002 0.008 in.)
6-40
6. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift 9. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, head. Measure the inside diameter of each
scored or excessively worn. camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-
round condition.
7. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal. 8
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, goto step 11.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
9
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 10.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance:

Standard (New): 0.050 0.089 mm
(0.0020-0.0035 In.)
8. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
(cont'd)
6-41
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
10. Check total runout w i t h the camshaft supported on 11. Measure cam lobe height.
V-blocks.
C a m Lobe Height Standard (New):
If the total runout of the camshaft is w i t h i n the
service limit, replace the cylinder head. INTAKE EXHAUST
If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil PRI 34.615 m m 36.076 m m
clearance. If the clearance is still out of tolerance, (1.3628 in.) (1.4203 in.)
replace the cylinder head.
MID 36.210 m m
Camshaft Total Runout: (1.4256 in.)
Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in.) SEC 31.188 m m
(1.2279 in.)
SEC MID PRI
FRONT BANK
Rotate camshaft
EX IN EX
while measuring.
T/B
PRI MID SEC
REAR BANK
EX IN EX
- T / B
Inspect this area f o r w e a r .
6-42
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment A
07757-PJ1010A
Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor
KD383 with No.32 jaws
Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover
KD3350
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
4. Remove the valve seal.
2. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the

spring and remove the valve keepers.
07757-PJ1010A
6-43
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
Measure the valve in these areas.
1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 m m , then
Intake Valve Dimensions measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial
A Standard (New); 3 3 . 9 0 - 3 4 . 1 0 mm indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of
(1.335-1.343 in.) normal thrust (wobble method).
B Standard (New): 114.85-115.15 mm If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
(4.522-4.533 in.) recheck it using a new valve.
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm If the measurement is now within the service
(0.2159-0.2163 In.) limit, reassemble using a new valve.
C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in. If the measurement with a new valve still
D Standard (New): 0.851.15 mm exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
(0.033-0.045 in.)
D Service Limit: 0.65 mm (0.026 in.) Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
Exhaust Valve Dimensions (0.002 0.004 in.)
A Standard (New): 2 8 . 9 0 - 2 9 . 1 0 mm Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
(1.138-1.146 in.)
B Standard (New): 112.85-113.15 mm Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
(4.443-4.455 In.) Standard (New): 0.11 0.16 mm
C Standard (New): 5.450 5.460 mm (0.004 0.006 in.)
(0.2146-0.2150 in.) Service Limit: 0.24 mm (0.009 in.)
C Service Limit; 5.420 mm (0.2134 In)
D Standard (New); 1.05-1.35 mm
(0.041 0.053 in.)
D Service Limit: 0.95 mm (0.037 in.)
2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured w i t h

a micrometer, f r o m the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured w i t h an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:

(0.0008 0.0018 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem -to-Guide Clearance:

(0.0022 0.0031 in.)
6-44
Valve Guide Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Working f r o m the camshaft side, use the driver and
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 m m 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m (0.1
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m 07HAH-PJ7010B in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. As illustrated below, use a commercially available easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line w i t h the
air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the safety goggles or a face shield.
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer. 5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward
the camshaft side of head.
5.3 m m
/ (0.21 in.)
_ 87 m m 57 m m
(3.43 in.] (2.24 in.)
10.8 m m
(0.42 in.)
2. Select the proper replacement guides and chill

t h e m in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300F (150C). Monitor the temperature
w i t h a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300F (150C); Excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
6. If a valve guide w o n ' t move, drill it out w i t h a 8 m m

(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
7. Remove the new guide(s) f r o m the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.
(cont'd)
6-45
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside 9. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide w i t h
of the new valve guide. Install the guide f r o m the cutting oil.
camshaft side of the head; use the special t o o l t o
drive the guide in to the specified installed height 10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to d o , valve guide bore.
you may have to reheat the head.
11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
Valve Guide Installed Height: removing it f r o m the bore.
Intake: 2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 mm (0.835 0.874 in.)
Exhaust: 2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 mm (0.812 0.852 in.) 12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
13. Check the clearance w i t h a valve (see page 6-44).

Verify that the valve slides in the intake and
exhaust valve guides w i t h o u t exerting pressure.
07742-0010100
6-46
Valve Seat Reconditioning
If the valve guides are w o r n (see page 6-44), replace After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve
t h e m (see page 6-45)before cutting the valve seats. seating: Apply Prussian Blue c o m p o u n d (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
valve seat cutter. seat several times.
- 1 Carefully cut a 45 seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric
seat.
- 2 Bevel the upper edge of the seat w i t h the 30
cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the
60 cutter. Check the w i d t h of the seat and
adjust accordingly.
- 3 Make one more very light pass w i t h the 45
cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by
the other cutters.
Valve Seat Width:

Standard (New): 1.25-1.55 mm
(0.049 0.061 in.)
Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.079 in.) 3. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the blue c o m p o u n d , should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you

must make a second cut w i t h the 60 cutter to
move it d o w n , then one more cut w i t h the 45
cutter to restore seat width.
If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut w i t h the 30 cutter to move it
up, then one more cut w i t h the 45 cutter to
restore seat w i d t h .
NOTE: The final cut should always be made w i t h

the 45 cutter.
(confd)
6-47
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and
measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height:

(1.841 1.872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height:

(1.838-1.869 in.)
5. If the valve stem installed height is over the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
6-48
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
9
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment end of the valve spring w i t h closely w o u n d coils
07757-PJ1010A t o w a r d the cylinder head.
9
Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor
KD383 w i t h No.32 jaws, commercially available 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the
9
Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover spring and install the valve keepers.
KD3372, commercially available 07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems w i t h engine oil. install the

valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and d o w n smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring

(D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
F D
7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem 2 or 3 times
w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of
the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem
only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
A
6-49
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. A p p l y a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil 5. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
seal.
6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
cylinder head. properly positioned on the valve stems.
- 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
- 2 Tap the oil seal into the cylinder head about 0.5 7. Tighten each bolt 2 turns at a t i m e in the sequence
- 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 in.) f r o m the surface of s h o w n below to ensure that the rockers do not bind
the cylinder head. on the valves.
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then Specified torque:
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). A l w a y s use a 8x1.25 mm
new O-ring (D). 24 N m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. (D
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
8. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new

gasket (B).
A
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6-50
Cylinder Head Installation
9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft Install the cylinder heads in the reverse order of
pulley (B). removal:
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N - m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
1. Clean the cylinder heads and block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) w i t h

new O-rings (B).
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head

gaskets (D).
D
12 x 1.25 m m
9 0 N - m (9.2 k g f - m , 6 7 I b f f t )
A p p l y engine oil to the bolt threads.
(cont'd)
6-51
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
4. Clean the t i m i n g belt drive pulley. 6. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft
pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on
5. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the
the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t i m i n g belt back covers.
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil p u m p .
B FRONT:
6-52
7. A p p l y clean engine oil to the threads and flange of 9. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the nuts in
the cylinder head bolts. a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, beginning w i t h
the inner nut (see page 9-3). Always use a new
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in 3 exhaust manifold gasket.
steps. Perform each step twice.
10. Install exhaust pipe A and bracket, then install the
1st step torque; 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibfft) cover (see page 9-4).
2nd step torque: 69 N-m (7.0 kgf-m, 51 Ibfft)
3rd step torque: 98.1 N-m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibfft) 11. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-22).
Use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a 12. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
preset-type torque w r e n c h , be sure to tighten
slowly and not to overtighten. 13. Install the cylinder head covers.
If a bolt makes any noise while y o u are torquing it,
loosen the bolt, and retighten it f r o m the 1st step. NOTE:
Before installing the cylinder head cover, clean
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE S E Q U E N C E : the cylinder head contacting surfaces w i t h a shop
(D (D towel.
Take care not to damage the spark plug seals
when installing the cylinder head cover.
Visually check the spark plug seals for damage.
Replace any washer that is damaged or
deteriorated.
(cont'd)
6-53
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
14. Tighten the nuts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step, 16. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and
tighten all nuts, in sequence, t o 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, nuts sequentially in 2 or 3 steps. A l w a y s use a new
8.7 Ibfft). intake manifold gasket.

Specified torque:
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

15. Install the water passage (A). Always use a n e w CD-

ring (B) and new gaskets (C).
17. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and

connectors are installed correctly.
8 x 1.25 mm
2 2 N-m(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
6-54
TDC Sensor Replacement
1. Set the No.1 piston at TDC (see page 6-22). 7. Remove the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor f r o m the back
cover.
2. Remove the upper covers. 5 x 0.8 m m
3. To hold the t i m i n g belt adjuster in its current

position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight
(see step 14 on page 6-21).
4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about 5 or 6 turns, then

remove the t i m i n g belt f r o m the front camshaft
pulley (see step 16 on page 6-22).
5. Remove the front camshaft pulley.
8. Install the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor in reverse order of

removal. Reinstall the timing belt and other
removed components (see page 6-22).
9 0 N m (9.2 k g f m , 6 7 I b f f t )
A p p l y engine oil t o
the bolt threads.
6. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor connector, then

remove the back cover.
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
6-55
Cylinder Head
CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the alternator belt, then remove the alternator belt
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt, locknut and mounting

bolt, then remove the power steering (P/S) pump
belt (see step 6 on page 6-20).
3 . Remove the dipstick and tube (see step 9 on page

6-20).
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 10 on page

6-20).
5. Remove the upper and lower covers (see step 12

on page 6-21).
6. Remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump.
7 . Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of

removal.
8-5S
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Component Location Index 7-3
Drive Plate R e m o v a l and Installation 7-6
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft E n d Play
Inspection 7-7
Crankshaft Main Bearing R e p l a c e m e n t ...................... 7-8
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement 7-10
Crankshaft and Pistons R e m o v a l 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection 7-14
Block and Piston Inspection 7-15
Cylinder Honing 7-17
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod R e p l a c e m e n t 7-18
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection 7-21
Piston Rings Replacement 7-22
Crankshaft and Piston Installation 7-24
Pulley E n d Crankshaft S e a l Installation-ln-car 7-29
T r a n s m i s s i o n E n d Crankshaft S e a l Installation-ln-car .7-29
Engine Block
Special Tools
07LAD-PT3010A Oil Seal Driver 1
07VAD-P8A010A Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 m m I.D. 1
(D 07749-0010000 Driver 1
VTEC SOLENOID
V A L V E / O I L FILTER A S S E M B L Y
Engine Block
Component Location index (cont'd)
MAIN BEARING CAPS
7-4
PISTON RINGS
SNAP RING
PISTON PIN
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-18
PISTON
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
M e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-15
CONNECTING ROD
E n d p l a y , p a g e 7-7
S m a l l e n d m e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-18
ENGINE BLOCK
C y l i n d e r b o r e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
W a r p a g e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
C y l i n d e r b o r e h o n i n g , p a g e 7-17
R i d g e r e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
CONNECTING ROD BEARING

C l e a r a n c e , p a g e 7-10
S e l e c t i o n , p a g e 7-10
D O W E L PIN
CONNECTING ROD BEARING CAP

CONNECTING ROD BOLT

T i g h t e n i n g , p a g e 7-24
7-5
Engine Block
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
Remove the 8 drive plate bolts, then separate the drive
plate from the crankshaft flange. After installation,
tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
7-6
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1, Measure the connecting rod end play w i t h a feeler 3. Push the crankshaft firmly away f r o m the dial
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft (C). crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
t o w a r d the indicator; dial reading should not
Connecting Rod End Play; exceed the service l i m i t
Standard (New): 0 . 1 5 - 0 , 3 5 mm (0.006 0.014 in.)
Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.) Crankshaft End Play:
Standard (New): 0 . 1 0 0 . 3 5 mm (0.004 0.014 in.)
C A
2. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance,

install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it still
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page 4. If end play is excessive, inspect the thrust washers
7-12). and the thrust surface on the crankshaft. Replace
parts as necessary. Thrust washer thickness is
fixed and must not be changed either by grinding
or s h i m m i n g .
7-
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
(remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the
remove the main caps and bearing halves. bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
clean shop t o w e l . adjust clearance.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
journal. incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car w h e n y o u bolt again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
the main cap d o w n to check the clearance, the by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten replace the crankshaft and start over.
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank w i t h a jack
under the counterweights, and check only 1
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the

bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft.
5. Remove the caps and bearing halves, and measure

the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:

(0.0008 0.0017 in.)
7 8
Main Bearing Selection 3. Use the crankshaft bore codes and journal codes to
select the appropriate main bearings f r o m the table.
Crankshaft Bore Code Location
Larger crank bore
1. Letters or Bars have been stamped on the end of
the block as a code for the size of each of the 4 Aorl B o r II C o r III D o r llll
main journal bores.
S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
If you cannot read the codes because of an
Red/ Pink/
accumulation of dirt and dust do not scrub them 1 or I Pink Yellow
Pink Yellow
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with
solvent or detergent. 2 o r II Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow/
Yellow Green
Pink/ Yellow/
3 or III Yellow Green
Yellow Green
Yellow/ Green/
4 o r llll Yellow Green
Green Brown
No. 4 B O R E Yellow/ Green/

No. 1 B O R E 5 o r Hill Green Brown
(PULLEY END) (DRIVE PLATE END) Green Brown
Green/ Brown/
6 o r llllll Green Brown
Brown Black
NOTE:
Smaller Smaller W h e n using bearing
main bearing h a l v e s of d i f f e r e n t c o l o r s ,
Journal (Thicker) it d o e s n o t m a t t e r w h i c h c o l o r
is u s e d in t h e t o p o r b o t t o m .
C o l o r c o d e i s o n t h e d e g e of
Main Journal Code Locations the bearing.
2. Number or bars have been stamped on the

crankshaft No. 1 web as a code for the main journal
sizes.
3 33\
No. 1 J O U R N A L No. 4 J O U R N A L
(PULLEY END) (DRIVE PLATE END)
7-9
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. complete bearing w i t h the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, s h i m , or scrape
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
w i t h a clean shop t o w e l .
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod j o u r n a l . incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft. obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure '
the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:

(0.0008 0.0017 in.)
7-10
Rod Bearing Selection 4. Use the connecting rod bore codes and journal
codes to select the appropriate rod bearing f r o m
1. Inspect the connecting rods for cracks and heat the table.
damage. L a r g e r big e n d b o r e
Bearing Identification
Connecting Rod Bore/Journal Code Locations Color c o d e is on the 1 orl 2 or II 3 or III 4 o r llll
2. Each rod has a tolerance range (from 0 to 0.024 m m e d g e of t h e b e a r i n g
(0.0009 in.), in 0.006 m m (0.0002 in.) increments) S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
depending on the size of its big end bore.
A or I Pink Pink/ Yellow Yellow/
It's then stamped w i t h a code (1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III,or Yellow Green
llll) indicating the range.
You may find any combination of 1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III, B o r II Pink/ Yellow Yellow/ Green
or llll in any engine. Yellow Green
Half of the code is stamped on the bearing cap and

C or III Yellow Yellow/ Green Green/
the other half is stamped on the rod. If the codes Green Brown
are indecipherable because of an accumulation of
dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m with a wire brush D or llll Yellow/ Green Green/ Brown
Green Brown
or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h solvent or
detergent. Green Green/ Brown
E or Hill Brown/
Brown Black
Normal Bore Size: 56.0 mm (2.20 in.)
F or llllll Green/ Brown Brown/ Black
Brown Black
f N O T E : W h e n using bearing halves

Smaller Smaller of d i f f e r e n t c o l o r s , it d o e s n o t
rod bearing m a t t e r w h i c h c o l o r i s u s e d in
Half of n u m b e r o r b a r Journal (Thicker) t h e top or b o t t o m .
is s t a m p e d o n b e a r i n g c a p
a n d t h e other half is
s t a m p e d on rod.
7-11
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the CKP sensor (A) f r o m the oil p u m p , then 4. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B) and oil
remove the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (B). p u m p (C).
a B
2. Remove the oil pan. 5. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon
around the top of any cylinder, remove it w i t h a
3. Remove the engine block end cover. ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the piston as it is pushed out.
7-12
Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the 7. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/
crank pin at BDC for each cylinder. Remove the bearings in order.
piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod.
Take care not to damage the crank journal or 8. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
cylinder with the connecting rod. connecting rods and set them aside with their
CORRECT respective caps.
9. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,

reinstall the cap on the rod.
10. To avoid mixup during reassembly, mark each

piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
11. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap
side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C).
A
INCORRECT
(cont'd)
7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft Inspection
(cont'd)
Straightness
12. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the cylinder block,
being careful not to damage the journals. 1. Clean the crankshaft oil passages w i t h pipe
A cleaners or a suitable brush.
2. Check the keyway and threads.
3. Support the crankshaft w i t h a lathe-type tool or V-

blocks.
4. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure

the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft 2
complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
that the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout:

13. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the

cylinder block in the proper order.
7-14
Block and Piston Inspection
Out-of-Round a n d Taper 1. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
1. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod 2. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm
and main journal in 2 places. The difference (0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit. Piston Diameter:
Standard (New): 85.975 - 85.985 mm
Journal Out-of-Round: (3.3848-3.3852 in.)
Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. Service Limit: 85.965 mm (3.3844 in.)
16.0 m m SKIRT DIAMETER

(0.63 in.)
TT
2. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:
(cont'd)
7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
3. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at 3 Oversize
levels in each cylinder as s h o w n . 0.25: 86.250 86.265 mm (3.3957 3.3963 in.)
0.50: 86.500-86.515 mm (3.4055 3.4061 in.)
If the measurements in any cylinder are beyond
the oversize bore service limit, replace the Bore Taper
cylinder block. Limit: (Difference between first and third
If the block is to be rebored, refer to Piston measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Clearance Inspection after reboring (refer to step
5). 4. Check the top of the cylinder block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Cylinder Block Warpage:

Cylinder Bore Size:

(3.3858 3.3864 in.)
Reboring Limit: 0.50 mm (0.02 in.)
7-16
Cylinder Honing
5. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore 1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-15). If the
diameter and piston diameter. cylinder block is to be reused, hone the cylinders
and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
Piston-to-Block Clearance: cylinder bores must be honed.
(0.0006-0.0016 in.) 2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree Crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:
* Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone,
S E R V I C E LIMIT
such as Sunnen, A m m c o , or equivalent.
9
0.08 m m (0.003 i n ) Do not use stones that are worn or broken.
Oversize Piston Diameter

0.25: 86.225-86.235 mm (3.3947-3.3951 in.)
0.50: 86.475-86.485 mm (3.4045-3.4049 in,)
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the
cylinder block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical
scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep
enough to catch your fingernail and does not run
the full length of the bore.
7-1
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly 3. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to

approximately 158F (70C), then remove the
1. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A) piston pin.
and turn t h e m in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up w i t h the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in

the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings
carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear
eye protection.
A
7-18
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
NOTE; Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod
when they are at room temperature. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. ( 0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter:
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance:

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. (0.0002 0.0006 in.)
(cont'd)
7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly 4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (B)
and connecting rod (C) w i t h the embossed marks
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A). (D) on the same side.
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in

the connecting rod, and the piston pin w i t h engine
oil.
3. Heat the piston to approximately 158F (70C).
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
7-20
Connecting Bod Bolt Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
35 m m
(1.38 in.)
20 m m d
(0.79 in.)
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
Point APoint B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0 0.1 mm ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 4 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,

replace the connecting rod bolt.
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the 3. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
cylinder bore 1 5 - 2 0 m m ( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in.) f r o m the rings (B).
bottom. B A
4. Clean all the ring grooves throughly w i t h a

squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner w i t h
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade if necessary. Top ring groove and 2nd ring
2. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) w i t h a feeler grooves are 1.2 m m (0.05 in.) wide, and the oil ring
gauge: groove is 2.8 m m (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire
brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have grooves deeper w i t h the cleaning tool.
the proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f r o m the
diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-15). connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder

block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap:
Top Ring
(0.008 0.014 in.)
2nd Ring
(0.016 0.022 in.)
Oil Ring
(0.008 0.028 in.)
7-22
Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1B 6. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
and the 2nd ring (B) is marked 2B. The ring-to-groove clearance:
manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
Top Ring Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0350.060 mm
(0.0014 0.0024 in.)
2nd Ring Clearance

(0.0012 0.0022 in.)
Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005in.)
Piston Ring Dimensions:
Top Ring (Standard)

A : 3.1 m m (0.12 in)
B: 1.2 m m ( 0 . 0 5 in)
2nd Ring (Standard)
A : 3.4 m m (0.13 in)
B: 1.2 m m ( 0 . 0 5 in)
(cont'd)
7-23
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd) Crankshaft and Piston Installation
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they Special Tools Required
do not bind. Driver 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 m m I.D.
8. Position the ring end gaps as s h o w n : 07VAD-P8A010A
1. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod

D O N O T position a n y ring gap
2ND RING G A P at piston thrust surfaces.
bearings.
2. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and

connecting rods.
A p p r o x . 90' 3. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the block.
OIL RING
15 GAP
TOP RING G A P SPACER GAP
DO N O T position any ring gap OIL RING G A P

in l i n e w i t h p i s t o n p i n h o l e .
4. Oil the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust

washers (A) in the No. 3 journal.
7-24
5. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with 8. Set the crankshaft to BDC for the cylinder you are
the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the working on.
engine.
o o 9. Remove the connecting rod caps. Install the ring
C\J CO
compressor, and check that the bearing is securely
o o o o in place.
10. Install the piston with the arrow (A) facing the
o timing belt side of the engine.

A
o o o o
<? o
10 x 80 m m
10 x 60 m m 11, Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in

using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor
10 x 109 m m (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
10x80 mm 10x60 mm
6. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange,

then install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing
cap side bolts (E).
7. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage

(see page 7-8).
12. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
(cont'd)
7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
13. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h 18. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the
plastigage (see page 7-10). bearing cap side bolts (B). Follow the numbered
sequence shown.
14. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap,
then install the cap. NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
15. Apply engine oil t o the bolt threads. Torque the reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
bolts (B) to 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 I b f f t ) . reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.
B
11 x 1.5 m m 10 x 1.25 m m
7 6 N - m (7.8 k g f - m , 4 9 N m (5.0 k g f - m ,
56 Ibfft) 36 Ibfft)
16. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as
shown.
17. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up w i t h the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90).
7-26
19. The seal mating surface on the engine block end 22. Clean and dry the left side cover mating surfaces.
cover should be dry. Apply a light coat of grease the crankshaft and to
the lip of the seal.
20. Drive the crankshaft oil seal sequarely into the left
side cover. 23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of
the left side cover and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B)
and the engine block end cover (C) on the cylinder
block.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more

have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
A
2 1 . Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way

around with a feeler gauge.
Clearance: 0 . 5 0 . 8 mm (0.02 0.03 in.)
0.50.8 m m
( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 3 in.) 6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
24. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before

IP filling the engine w i t h oil.
(cont'd)
7-27
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston installation (cont'd)
25. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces. 28. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
26. Install the oil pump (A). 29. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of
- 1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil p u m p the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
- 2 Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or 30. Install the oil pan w i t h a new gasket.
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil p u m p and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
- 3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-ring (B).
- 4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor w i t h the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
- 5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and
check the seal for distortion.
6 x 1.0 m m
6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
A p p l y liquid g a s k e t
a l o n g t h e b r o k e n line.
3 1 . Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,

tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibfft).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
27. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen
(E).
7-28
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Transmission End Crankshaft Seal
Installation - In-car installation In-car
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

Oil Sea! Driver 07LAD-PT301 OA Driver 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 m m I.D.
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 07VAD-P8A010A
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to 1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
the lip of the seal.
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal the lip of the seal.
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the 3. Using the special tools, drive the crankshaft oil seal
crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not into the engine block end cover until the driver
distorted. attachment bottoms against the crankshaft. Align
the hole in the driver attachment w i t h the pin on the
crankshaft.
07749-0010000
07VAD-P8A010A
4. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and

check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7-29
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools 8-2
Oil Pressure Switch Test 8-4
Oil Pressure Test 8-4
Engine Oil Replacement 8-5
Engine Oil Filter Replacement 8-5
Oil Pump Overhaul 8-7
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools

07GAD-PH70201 Oil Seal Driver 1
(D 07912-6110001 Oil Filter Wrench ... 1
8-2
8-3
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Test
1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) f r o m the engine oil If the oil pressure w a r n i n g light stays on w i t h the
pressure switch (B). engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil
B C level is correct:
1. Connect a tachometer.
2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install

an oil pressure gauge (A).
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

(C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity w i t h the engine stopped. There should 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
be no continuity w i t h the engine running. gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil
level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine 4. A l l o w the engine to reach operating temperature
oil pressure. (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176F (80C)

Engine Oil Pressure:
2
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,10 psi)
minimum
2
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm ,71 psi)
minimum
5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect

the oil p u m p (see page 8-7).
8-4
Engine Oil Replacement Engine Oil Filter Replacement
NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be Special Tools Required
replaced at every other oil change. Under severe Oil Filter Wrench 07912-6110001
conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil
change. 1. Remove the oil filter w i t h the special oil filter
wrench.
Change interval:
Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months 2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
(Normal conditions) new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block,
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal.
(Severe conditions). Use only filters w i t h a built-in bypass system.
1. W a r m up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
B
A
39 N m (4.0 kgf-m, 2 9 Ibfft)
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
4.0 G (4.2 U S qt, 3.5 Imp qt) at oil change.
4.4 fi (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 Imp qt) at oil change
including filter.
5.0 ft (5.3 U S qt, 4.4 Imp qt) after engine overhaul.
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check

for oil leakage.
(cont'd)
8-5
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside
of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter the filter.
clockwise w i t h the special tool.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
Tighten: 7/8 t u r n clockwise. the block, and note which number is at the
Tightening t o r q u e : 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft) bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 7
numbers f r o m the one you noted. For example, if
number 2 is at the bottom w h e n the seal is lightly
seated, tighten the filter until the number 1
comes around to the bottom.
Number w h e n rubber N u m b e r after tightening,

s e a l is s e a t e d .
Number when 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
rubber seal is
seated
Number after 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
tightening
6. After installation, fill the engine w i t h oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
8-6
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
6 x 1.0 m m
' ENGINE OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH 6 N - m (0.6 k g f - m , 4 Ibfft)
18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
1/8 i n . B S P T ( B r i t i s h s t a n d a r d p i p e t a p e r )
28 t h r e a d s / i n c h . U s e the
p r o p e r liquid s e a l a n t .
PUMP COVER
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
OIL S E A L
Replace.
PUMP HOUSING
A p p l y liquid gasket
to the mating surface of
the cylinder block
w h e n installing.
RELIEF VALVE
Valve m u s t slide freely
in t h e h o u s i n g b o r e . 6 x 1.0 m m
R e p l a c e if it is s c o r e d . 1 2 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
SEALING BOLT
3 9 N m (4.0 k g f m , 2 9 I b f f t )
SPRING
(cont'd)
8-7
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required Inspection
Oil Seal Driver 07GAD-PH70201 10. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If
Removal the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
1. Drain the engine oil.
2. Turn the crankshaft so that the No. 1 piston is at Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
TDC (see page 6-22). Standard (New): 0.04-0.16 mm
(0.002 0.006 in.)
3. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-19). Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
4. Remove the idler pulley.
5. Remove the CKP sensor, then remove the t i m i n g

belt drive pulley (see page 6-56).
6. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve and oil filter

assembly (see page 6-9).
7. Remove the oil pan and the oil screen (A).
11. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between

the rotors (A) and p u m p housing (B). If the housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

A (0.001 0.003 in.)
8. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and the oil p u m p
assembly (B).
9. Remove the screws f r o m the p u m p housing, then

separate the housing and cover.
8-8
12. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance Installation
between the outer rotor (A) and p u m p housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance 17. Reassemble the oil pump.
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil p u m p
assembly. 18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance 19. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
Standard (New); 0 . 1 4 - 0 . 1 9 m m
(0.006-0.007 In.) 20. Install the oil pump (A).
Service Limit: 0.20 m m (0.008 in.) - 1 Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003 evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
- 2 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-rings (B).
- 3 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor w i t h the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
- 4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check the seal for distortion.
13. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for

scoring or other damage. Replace parts if
necessary.
14. Remove the old oil seal f r o m the oil pump.
15. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the special tool
bottoms on the pump.
2 1 . Install the oil screen (D).
16. Apply liquid thread lock to the p u m p housing

screws.
(cont'd)
8-9
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
22. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-

0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the
block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
24. Install the oil pan w i t h a new gastet.
A p p l y liquid g a s k e t
a l o n g t h e b r o k e n line.
25. Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,

tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 I b f f t ) .
<D @ 0 CD
8-10
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold R e m o v a l and Installation
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation

NOTE:
Use new O-rings and gaskets when reassembling.
Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
Replace w i t h a new gasket if damaged.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
CHAMBER
R e p l a c e if i t is c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s
are d a m a g e d . 6 x 1.0 m m
8 x 1.25 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t ) 2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT) S E N S O R
18 N - m
(1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
12 x 1.5 m m
26 N m
(2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 I b f f t )
('98-99 m o d e l s )
INTAKE MANIFOLD
R e p l a c e if it is c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s a r e
damaged.
8 x 1.25 m m
THROTTLE 22 N-m
BODY (2.2 k g f - m ,
16 I b f f t )
9-2
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
Replace with a new gasket if damaged.
FRONT:
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft) Replace.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts w h e n reassembling.
MUFFLERS
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
1 0 x 1.25 m m
6 x 1.0 m m
54 N m
12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibfft) (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
4 4 N-m
SELF-LOCKING NUT (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
THREE W A Y CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
E X H A U S T PIPE A
GASKET
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t ) 6 x 1.0 m m
Replace. THREE WAY CATALYTIC 9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
CONVERTER TIGHTENING
SELF-LOCKING NUT
SEQUENCE
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m 10 x 1 2 5 m m
1 3 8 N m ( 3 9 k f m 2 8 l b f f t
Rejlale" ' ^ ' " ' ^ 9 < >
9-4
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Component Location Index . 10-2
Coolant Temperature Gauge Testing 10-5
Sending Unit Testing 10-7
Radiator Cap Test 10-7
Radiator Test 10-8
Fan Motor Test 10-8
Thermostat Test 10-9
Water Pump Inspection 10-9
Water Pump Replacement 10-10
Coolant Replacement 10-10
Thermostat Replacement 10-12
Radiator and Fans Replacement 10-13
Fan Controls
Symptom Troubleshooting Index 10-15
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting 10-17
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting 10-19
Fan control Module Input Test 10-20
Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test 10-21
Cooling System
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
RADIATOR FAN SHROUD

R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 10-13
10-2
(cont'd)
10-3
Cooling System
O-RING
10-4
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test
'98-99 models: '00-01 models:
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at
1. Check the No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ All
relay box before testing.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect PCM
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then connector terminal A1 to body ground w i t h a
disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f r o m the coolant jumper wire.
temperature gauge sending unit (B), and ground it
w i t h a jumper wire.
A
YEL/GRN
1 2 3 4 5 6
A 8 9 10
12 13 | 14
25
15
26
A27
17 18
28
19
29
20
30
21 23
32
24
After 30 seconds or more, does the temperature

gauge needle move to the Hot side ?
Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the YES Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck,
pointer of the coolant temperature gauge starts refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-
moving toward the " H " mark. Turn the ignition 5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace
switch OFF before the pointer reaches " H " on the the original PCM.
gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge.
NO G o t o step 3.
If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all,
check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM
wires are OK, replace the coolant temperature connector A (32P).
gauge.
If the coolant temperature gauge works, test the
coolant temperature gauge sending unit.
(cont'd)
10-5
Cooling System
#
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont d)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes Past the Hot
voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and Mark
body g r o u n d .
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
connector A (32P).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).and watch the

YEL/GRN
coolant temperature gauge.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 10
12 13 14
25
15
26
/
27
17 18
28 29
19 20
30
21 23
32
24
Does the temperature gauge needle move at all ?
(you may have to watch it for about 30 seconds.)
NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer
Wire side of female terminals to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
Is there approx. 5V ? PCM.B
Y E S - R e p l a c e the fuel and temperature gauge 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
assembly. again, and watch the coolant temperature gauge.
NO Go to step 5. Does the temperature gauge needle immediately

go past the Hot mark ?
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and Y E S Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
body g r o u n d . assembly.
NOThe temperature gauge needle w e n t past the
YEL/GRN Hot mark after about 30 seconds or more.Go to
step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the

gauge assembly connector C (16P).
G A U G E CONNECTOR C (16P) 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector
YEL/GRN
terminal aaA1 and gauge assembly connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
terminal C2.
8 9 10 11
X X 12 14 15 16
Wire side of female terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10

12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 19 20 21 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 32
Is there continuity ?
G A U G E CONNECTOR C (16P)
Y E S - Replace the fuel and temperature gauge YEL/GRN
assembly. 1 2 3
2xT 4 5 6 7
N O - R e p a i r open in the w i r e between PCM

8 9 10 11
X X 12 14 15 16
connector terminal A1 and gauge connector

terminal C2.B
Is there continuity ?
Y E S Replace short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal A1 and gauge connector
terminal C2.B
NO Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
10-6
Sending Unit Test Radiator Cap Test
'98-99 models: 1. Remove the radiator cap (A), w e t its seal w i t h
1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f r o m the coolant engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester
temperature gauge sending unit (B). (B) (commercially available).
2. Apply a pressure of 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5

2
kgf/cm , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the change in
resistance between the positive terminal (C) and 3. Check for a drop in pressure.
the engine (ground) w i t h the engine cold and with
the engine at operating temperature. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
Temperature 133F (56C) 185F ( 8 5 Q -

212F(100C)
Resistance ( 0 . ) 137 46-30
3. If the obtained readings are substantially different

f r o m the specifications above, replace the sending
unit.
10-7
Cooling System
Radiator Test Fan Motor Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully r e m o v e 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f r o m the radiator fan
the radiator cap and fill the radiator w i t h engine motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B).
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals
2. Attach the pressure tester (A) (commercially LOCK
available) to the radiator and apply a pressure of

2
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 kgf/cm , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
A^
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

B terminal, and ground to the A terminal.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
pressure. 3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,
replace it.
4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in

the engine oil.
10-8
Thermostat Test Water Pump Inspection
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room 1. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-19).
temperature.
2. Turn the water p u m p pulley counterclockwise.
To test a closed thermostat: Check that it turns freely.
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of " w e e p i n g " f r o m the bleed holes (A) is normal.
the hot container. A
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a

thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat w h e n it is

fully open.
STANDARD THERMOSTAT
Lift height: above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
Starts opening:
'98-00 models: 169~176F (76 - 8 0 C )
'01 model: 1 6 3 - 171F ( 7 3 - 7 7 C )
Fully open:
'98-00 models: 194F (90C)
'01 model: 190F(88C)
10-9
Cooling System
Water Pump Replacement Coolant Replacement
1. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-19). 1. Set the heater temperature control dial to
m a x i m u m heat. Make sure the engine and radiator
2. Remove the t i m i n g belt tensioner. are cool to the touch.
3. Remove the water p u m p (A) by removing 5 bolts. 2. Remove the radiator cap.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m 8.7 Ibfft)
r
4. Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and

mating surface on the cylinder block.
5. Install the water p u m p w i t h a new O-ring (B) in the

reverse order of removal.
4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B)
6. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen
the drain bolt.
5. W h e n the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain

bolt.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
10-10
7. Remove drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the 9. Install the radiator cap loosely.
tank to the M A X mark w i t h Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. 10. Start the engine and let it run until it w a r m s up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda All Season.
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if needed.
12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
again and check for leaks.
8. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Pre-
mixing is not required.
Engine Coolant Refill Capacity

[including the reservoir capacity of
(0.6 6 (0.6 U S qt, 0.5 Imp qt))] :
5.6 (5.9 U S qt, 4.9 Imp qt)
10-11
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
PIN
THERMOSTAT COVER
10-12
Radiator and Fans Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses.
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE

RADIATOR CAP
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f - m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
UPPER BRACKET
AND CUSHION
RADIATOR
O-RING
6x 1.0 m m
7 N m (0.7 k g f - m
5 Ibfft)
DRAIN P L U G
1.0 m m
N - m (1.0 k g f - m ,
Ibfft)
FAN MOTOR
4.4 N - m ( 0 . 4 5 k g f - m ,
3.3 I b f f t )
A/C CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
FAN CONNECTORS
3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.
4. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.
5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts f r o m radiator.
6. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.
7. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.
8. Fill the radiator w i t h engine coolant and bleed the air.
1
Fan Controls
10-14
Before performing any troubleshooting procedures check:
Fuses
Grounds
Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
SYMPTOM PROCEDURE
Radiator fan does not run at all. Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-17)
Both fans (radiator and condenser) do not run for Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting (see
engine cooling, but they do run w i t h the A/C on. page 10-19)
Both fans do not run with A/C on. Radiator and Condenser Fans C o m m o n Circuit
Troubleshooting, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual,
(see page 21-14)
10-15
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram

IGNITION
SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)
- WHT-
No.57 (20A) No.58 (20A)
YEL BLK/YEL
DRIVER'S
No.3 No.6 UNDER-DASH
(7.5A) (15A) FUSE/RELAY
RADIATOR CONDENSER BOX
FAN . FAN
RELAY RELAY
BLK/YEL
BLU/BLK BLU/YEL GRN YEL/WHT YEL WHT BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE
-GRN WHT/GRN BLK
GRN
v

RADIATOR RADIATOR AIR
RADIATOR CONDENSER FAN SWITCH A FAN SWITCH B CONDITIONING
FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR f Closed: Above f Closed ; Above 1 SYSTEM
L 199F (93C) o
L225 F(107C) J
BLK BLK BLK BLK
BLK BLK
A.
G201 G101 G401
10-16
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ 4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the
relay box. radiator fan relay 4P socket w i t h a jumper w i r e .
Is the fuse OK? RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y

4P S O C K E T
1
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.B
2
2. Remove the radiator fan relay f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and test it. Refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52).
3 4
Is the relay OK ?
female terminals
NO Replace the radiator fan relay.
Does the radiator fan run?
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground. Y E S - G o to step 9.
RADIATOR F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T N O - G o t o step 5.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire.

1
6. Disconnect the radiator fan connector.
2

3 4
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2
terminal of the radiator fan connector.
Terminal side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
4P S O C K E T
Terminal side of 1
female terminals
Is there battery voltage? 2
Y E S - G o to step 4. 3 4
BLU/BLK
N O - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box 1
Wire side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN
CONNECTOR
NO - Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the

under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan.
(cont'd)
10-17
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (conf*
8. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of 11. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the radiator fan connector and body g r o u n d . the radiator fan control module and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN CONNECTOR RADIATOR FAN CONTROL

M O D U L E 8P C O N N E C T O R
1 2
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
W i r e side of
female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
Y E S - Replace the radiator fan motor. Y E S - R e p a i r open in the YEL wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan
NO Check for an open in the BLK w i r e between control m o d u l e . *
the radiator fan connector and body g r o u n d . If the
w i r e is OK, check for a poor ground at G 2 0 1 . NO - Perform the radiator fan control module input
tests (see page 10-20).B
9. Disconnect the j u m p e r w i r e , and t u r n the ignition
switch on (II).
10. Measure the voltage between No. 3 terminal of the

radiator fan relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
RADIATOR F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
_1_
2
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES Replace the under-hood fuse/relay b o x . B
NO G o t o step 11.
10-18
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A connector. 5. Check the cooling system.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the cooling system OK?
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal on Y E S Replace the radiator fan switch A.
the radiator fan switch connector and body ground.
NO Repair the cooling system
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
IMO Repair open in the GRN w i r e between the

radiator fan switch A and under-hood fuse/relay
box.B
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for

continuity between the No. 1 terminal on the
radiator fan switch A connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
NO Check for an open in the BLK w i r e between

the radiator fan switch A connector and body
ground. If the w i r e is OK, check for poor ground at
G101.B
10-19
Fan Controls
Fan Control Module Input Test
Perform the f o l l o w i n g tests w i t h the radiator fan control m o d u l e 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II)
and the A/C switch OFF.
If you find the cause of a p r o b l e m , correct it before y o u continue.
2
BLK/YEL YEL/WHT
male terminals
Wire color Test condition Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not obtained
BLK Check for voltage to body There should be less than 1V. Poor ground(G401)
ground. An open in the wire
WHT Check for battery voltage to There should be battery Blown No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the
body ground. voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
BLK/YEL 1
Check battery voltage to Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the
body ground: Ignition under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
switch-ON (II) An open in the wire
BLK/YEL 2
Check battery voltage to Blown No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
body ground: Ignition under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
switch-ON (II) An open in the wire
YEL/WHT Check battery voltage to Faulty radiator fan control module
body ground: Ignition An open in the wire
switch-ON (II)
YEL Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (III)
GRN Connect body ground: Radiator fan and condenser Faulty radiator fan relay or
Ignition switch-ON (II) fan should come on. condenser fan relay
An open in the wire
WHT/GRN Check for voltage: Engine There should be approx. 11 V. Faulty radiator fan switch B
coolant temperature below Faulty radiator fan control module
225F(107C)
10-20
Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test
NOTE; Bleed air f r o m the cooling system after installing
the radiator fan switch (see page 10-10).
1 . Remove radiator fan switch A f r o m the water

passage and radiator fan switch B f r o m the cylinder
head (see page 10-2).
2. Suspend each radiator fan switch (A) in a container

of coolant as s h o w n .
3. Heat the coolant and check the temperature with a

thermometer (B). Do not let the thermometer touch
the bottom of the hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C)

and B terminal (D) according to the table.
\ Terminal
A 8
Operation Temperature \
196-203F
ON (91-95C)
SWITCH
A 5 - 1 5 F ( 3 - 8 C ) lower
OFF than the temperature
w h e n it g o e s o n
217-232F
ON
(103-111C) !
SWITCH
B 5 - 2 3 ( 3 - 1 3 ) lower !
OFF than the temperature
w h e n it g o e s o n
I
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools 11-2
DTC Troubleshooting Index 11-3
System Descriptions ........................................................ 11-7
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting 11-52
Injector Replacement 11-80
Primary H02S Replacement 11-84
Secondary H02S Replacement 11-84
Idle Control System

Idle Speed Adjustment 11-86
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Relieving 11-88
Fuel Pressure Test 11-89
Fuel Lines Inspection 11-91
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement 11-92
Fuel Gauge Test 11-94
Intake Air System

Throttle Body Test - - 11-96
Air Cleaner Element Replacement 11-97
Throttle Cable Adjustment 11-98
Throttle Body Removal/Installation 11-99
Throttle Body Assembly/Reassembly ............................ 11-100
Intake Air Bypass Control Valve Test 11-101
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test - 11-102
EVAP System
Refer to the 1998-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown in this section.
Outline of Accord V6 Model Change

J30A1 engine has been added.
Special Tools
A973X-041-XXXXX V a c u u m Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg 1
07VAJ-0040100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment 1
07406-004000A Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
11-2
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Note
(MIL indication*)
P0107 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Low Voltage Manual (see page 11-47)
P0108 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
High Voltage Manual (see page 11-48)
P0112 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Circuit Low Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Voltage Manual (see page 11-50)
P0113 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Circuit High Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0116 (86) P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Range/Performance Problem Manual (see page 11-52)
P0117 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Circuit Low Voltage Manual (see page 11-52)
P0118 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Circuit High Voltage Manual (see page 11-53)
P0122 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0123 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0131 (1) Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary (see page 11-55)
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage
P0133(61) P0133 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary (see page 11-57)
H02S) (Sensor 1) Slow Response
H02S) (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
P0137 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary (see page 11-58)
H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
P0138 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (see page 11-59)
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) High Voltage
P0139(63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary (see page 11-60)
H02S) (Sensor 2) Slow Response
P0141 (65) Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary (see page 11-61)
H02S) (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Lean Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-69)
P0172 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Rich Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0300 and P1399 Random Misfire (see page 11-63)
some of
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
*: These DTCs w i l l be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is jumped w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D 4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
(cont'd)
11-3
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Note

(MIL indication*)
P0301 (71) P1339 No. 1 Cylinder Misfire *1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*2 (see page 11-68)
P0335 (4) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No (see page 11-73)
Signal
P0336 (4) ! Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (see page 11-73)
Intermittent Interruption
P0401 (80) P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Insufficient Flow Manual (see page 11-136)
P0420 (67) P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Threshold Manual (see page 11-135)
P0451 (91)* 1
P0451 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/ Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Performance Problem Manual (see page 11-143)
P0452 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0453 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0505 (14) P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P0560 (34) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Back Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
up Circuit Low Voltage Manual (see page 11-76)
P0700** (70) Automatic Transaxle System Refer to the Automatic
P0715** (70) Malfunction Transmission DTC Troubleshooting
P0720** (70) Index
P0730** (70)
P0740** (70)
P0753** (70)
P0758** (70)
P0763** (70)
P0780** (70)
P1106(13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Range/Performance Problem Manual (see page 11-77)
P1107 (13) ! Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Circuit Low Input Manual (see page 11-77)
P1108 (13) __ Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
I Circuit High Input Manual (see page 11-77)
P1121 (7) P1121 ' Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Lower (see page 11-75)
| I Than Expected
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is j u m p e d w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
* 1 : '98-99 models
* 2 : '00-01 models
11-4
DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Page
(MIL indication*)
P1122 (7) P1122 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher (see page 11-75)
Than Expected
P1128 (5) P1128 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Sensor Lower Than Expected Manual (see page 11-49)
P1129 (5) P1129 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Sensor Higher Than Expected Manual (see page 11-49)
P1259 (22) VTEC System Malfunction (see page 6-6)
P1297 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P1298 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
P1361 (8) Top Dead Center (TDC) 1 Sensor (see page 11-76)
P1362 (8) Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 1 No (see page 11-76)
Signal
P1366 (58) Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2 (see page 11-76)
P1367 (58) Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2 No (see page 11-76)
Signal
P1456 (90) P1456 (90) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
System Leakage (Fuel Tank System) Manual (see page 11-147)
P1457 (90) P1457 (90) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
System Leakage (EVAP Canister Manual (see page 11-152)
System)
P1491 (12) P1491 (12) Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Insufficient Lift Manual (see page 11-136)
P1498 (12) Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage Manual (see page 11-140)
P1519 (14) Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Circuit Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Malfunction Manual (see page 11-100)
P1607 ( - ) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Internal Circuit Malfunction Manual (see page 11-90)
P1676(35)*3 FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-78)
P1678(35)*3 FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-78)
P1705** (70) Automatic Transaxle System Refer to the Automatic
P1706** (70) P1706 Malfunction Transmission DTC Troubleshooting
P1738** (70) Index
P1739** (70)
P1750** (70)
P 1 7 5 1 * * (70)
P1753** (70)
#
P 1 7 6 8 * (70)
P1773** (70)
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is j u m p e d with the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
* 3 : '01 model
11-5
T h e s e s y m p t o m s D O N O T t r i g g e r D i a g n o s t i c T r o u b l e C o d e s (DTCs) a n d c a u s e t h e M a l f u n c t i o n I n d i c a t o r L a m p (MIL) t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L is
r e p o r t e d o n , c h e c k f o r DTCs. If t h e v e h i c l e has o n e o f t h e s e s y m p t o m s , d o t h e d i a g n o s t i c p r o c e d u r e f o r it, in t h e s e q u e n c e l i s t e d , u n t i l y o u f i n d
the cause.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure A l s o c h e c k for

Engine will not start 1. T e s t t h e b a t t e r y (see p a g e 2 2 - 3 0 ) . Low compression
( M I L w o r k s O K , n o D T C s set) 2. T e s t t h e s t a r t e r (see p a g e 4-7). Intake air leaks
3. T e s t t h e f u e l p u m p , r e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see Locked up engine
p a g e 11-115). Slipped/
4. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22). b r o k e n t i m i n g belt
5. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22), o r f o r '00-01 Contaminated fuel
m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-23).
6. C h e c k t h e i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i n p u t s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s
(see p a g e 4-21).
7. T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e P G M - F l m a i n r e l a y c i r c u i t , refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 11-110).
Engine will not start (MIL c o m e s o n T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e M I L c i r c u i t , r e f e r t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
a n d s t a y s o n , o r n e v e r c o m e s o n at a l l , (see p a g e 11-91).
n o DTCs set)
Engine will not start (immobilizer ! T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
indicator liqht comes on) ) S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 2 2 - 2 0 4 ) .
Hard starting 1. T e s t t h e b a t t e r y (see p a g e 2 2 - 3 0 ) . Low compression
( M I L w o r k s O K , n o D T C s set) 2. C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89). Intake air leaks
i 3. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22). Contaminated fuel
i 4. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22), o r f o r '00-01
I m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-23).
i 5. C h e c k t h e i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i n p u t f o r '98-99 m o d e l s
(see p a g e 4-21).
Cold fast idle t o o l o w C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).
(MIL w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
Cold fast idle t o o high ! 1. C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e idle s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).
(MIL w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set) j 2. I n s p e c t / a d j u s t t h e t h r o t t l e c a b l e (see p a g e 11-98).
! 3. I n s p e c t a n d t e s t t h e t h r o t t l e b o d y (see p a g e 11-96).
Idle s p e e d f l u c t u a t e s 1. C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e idle s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86). Intake air leaks
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set) 2. I n s p e c t / a d j u s t t h e t h r o t t l e c a b l e (see p a g e 11-98).
| 3. I n s p e c t a n d t e s t t h e t h r o t t l e b o d y (see p a g e 11-96).
Low power i 1. C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89). Low compression
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set) 2. I n s p e c t a n d t e s t t h e t h r o t t l e b o d y (see p a g e 11-96).
! 3. I n s p e c t / a d j u s t t h e t h r o t t l e c a b l e (see p a g e 11-98).
E n g i n e stalls 1. C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89). Intake air leaks
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set) ' 2. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22). Faulty harness and
3. C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e idle s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86). sensor connectors
i 4. T r o u b l e s h o o t the brake switch signal circuit.
Difficult t o refuel I 1. T e s t t h e f u e l t a n k v a p o r c o n t r o l v a l v e , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
;
( M I L w o r k s O K , n o D T C s set) S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 11-159).
2. I n s p e c t t h e f u e l t a n k s i g n a l t u b e b e t w e e n t h e f u e l p i p e a n d t h e f u e l
tank vapor control valve.
3. I n s p e c t t h e f u e l t a n k v a p o r v e n t t u b e b e t w e e n t h e EVAP c o n t r o l
canister and the fuel tank vapor control valve.
4. C h e c k t h e E V A P c a n i s t e r , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 11-136).
Fuel o v e r f l o w s d u r i n g r e f u e l i n g R e p l a c e t h e f u e l t a n k v a p o r c o n t r o l v a l v e , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
( N o DTCs set) S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 11-161).
11-6
System Descriptions
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in a signal f r o m a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed
value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the system in
order to permit minimal driving.
Self-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor, the PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable m e m o r y . W h e n the ignition is first turned on, the PCM
supplies ground for the MIL for 2 seconds to check the MIL bulb condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method

To prevent false indications, the " t w o driving cycle detection m e t h o d " is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the PCM stores it in its memory. W h e n the same abnormality recurs after the ignition
switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the PCM informs the driver by turning on the MIL.
(cont'd)
11-7
System Descriptions (cont'd)
PCM Data
You can retrieve data f r o m the PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below c o n f o r m to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester
also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE. Understanding this data may help you find the causes of
intermittent problems.
NOTE:
The " o p e r a t i n g v a l u e s " listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual
vehicle.
Unless noted otherwise, " a t idle s p e e d " means idling w i t h the engine completely w a r m e d up, transmission in Park
or neutral and the A/C and all accessories turned off.
Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data

Diagnostic If the PCM detects a p r o b l e m , it w i l l store it as a If no problem is detected, YES
Trouble Code code consisting of one letter and four numbers. there is no output.
(DTC) Depending on the problem, an SAE-defined code
(POxxx) or a Honda-defined code (P1xxx) w i l l be
output to the tester.
Engine Speed The PCM computes engine speed f r o m the signals Nearly the same as YES
sent f r o m the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. tachometer indication
This data is used for determining the t i m e and At idle speed: 680 + 50
amount of fuel injection. rpm
Vehicle Speed The PCM converts pulse signals f r o m the Nearly the same as YES
countershaft speed sensor into speed data. speedometer indication
Manifold The absolute pressure caused in the intake With engine stopped: YES
Absolute manifold by engine load and speed. Nearly the same as
Pressure (MAP) atmospheric pressure
At idle speed: 2 0 - 3 4 kPa
(150 260 m m H g , 6 - 1 0
in.Hg)
Engine Coolant The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into With cold engine: Same YES
Temperature voltage and signals the PCM. The sensor is a as ambient temperature
(ECT) thermistor whose internal resistance changes w i t h and I AT
coolant temperature. The PCM uses the voltage With engine w a r m e d up:
signals f r o m the ECT sensor to determine the approx. 1 7 6 - 2 1 2 F ( 8 0 -
amount of injected fuel. 100C)
Primary Heated The H02S detects the oxygen content in the 0.0-1.25 V NO
Oxygen Sensor exhaust gas and sends voltage signals to the PCM. At idle speed:
(Primary H02S) Based on these signals, the PCM controls the air/ about 0 . 1 - 0 . 9 V
(Sensor 1), fuel ratio. When the oxygen content is high (that is,
Secondary w h e n the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric
Heated Oxygen ratio), the voltage signal is lower. When the oxygen
Sensor content is low (that is, w h e n the ratio is richer than
(Secondary H 0 2 the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is
S) (Sensor 2) higher.
11-8
Data Description Operating Valve Freeze Data
Fuel System Fuel system status is indicated as " o p e n " or At idle speed: closed YES
" c l o s e d " . Closed: Based on the H02S output, the
PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the
amount of injected fuel.
Open: ignoring H02S output, the PCM refers to
signals f r o m the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature
(IAT), Barometic Pressure (BAR0) and Engine
Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the
amount of injected fuel.
Short Term The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for 0.731.47 YES
Fuel Trim correcting the amount of injected fuel w h e n Fuel
System Status is " c l o s e d " . When the ratio is leaner
than the stoichiometric ratio, the PCM increases
short tern fuel t r i m gradually, and the amount of
injected fuel increases. The air/fuel ratio gradually
gets richer, causing a lower oxygen content in the
exhaust gas. Consequently, the short term fuel t r i m
is lowered, and the PCM reduces the amount of
injected fuel. This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio
close to the stoichiometric ratio w h e n in closed
loop status.
Long Term Long term fuel t r i m is computed f r o m short t e r m 0.811.19 YES
Fuel Trim fuel trim and indicates changes occuring in the fuel
supply system over a long period. If long term fuel
trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of injected fuel
must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the
amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
Intake Air The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into With cold engine: Same YES
Temperature voltage and signals the PCM. When intake air as ambient temperature
(IAT) temperature is low, the internal resistance of the and ECT
sensor increases, and the voltage signal is higher.
Throttle Based on the accelerator pedal position, the At idle speed: YES
Position opening angle of the throttle valve is indicated. approx. 10%
Ignition Ignition t i m i n g is the ignition advance angle set by At idle speed: 1 0 2 NO
Timing the PCM. The PCM matches ignition t i m i n g to the BTDC w i t h the SCS
driving conditions. service signal j u m p e d .
Calculated CLV is the engine load calculated f r o m the MAP At idle speed: YES
Load Value data. 16 33%
(CLV) At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
17-25%
(cont'd)
11-9
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)

P G M - F I MAIN R E L A Y
rti m
FUSES:
(D B A C K UP, A C C ( 4 0 A ) *A
S T O P (20A)* A
(DACGS (15A)* A
(D BATTERY (100A) * A
A
(DIG MAIN ( S O A ) *
To E C T G A U G E
N o . 1 F U E L PUMP ( 1 5 A ) * B
<2) No.9 BACK UP LIGHT

INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A)* 8
(D No.6 ECU (PCM)

CRUISE CONTROL ( 1 5 A ) * 8
(DNo.11 IG COIL (15A)*

No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)* B
<0) No.13 C L O C K BACKUP (7.5A)* C
* 1 : '9899 models
* i n the under-hood fuse/relay box
A
* 2 : '00 model
* : in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
B
* 3 : "01 model
* : in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c
11-10
> C28 V C C 2 1
* ICMB13 <
> C27 T P S
> C18 S G 2
"1 To G A U G E
ASSEMBLY,
ABS/TCS * 3
C O N T R O L UNIT
TEST TACHOMETER
> C6 EGRL NEPA19 <
CONNECTOR
w To C R U I S E
> B7 E-EGR CRSA5 <
C O N T R O L UNIT
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE

> A2S P T A N K P C S A6 < o_^5$\_o-
ENGINE MOUNT C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E
C19 V C C t MCSA2 < o-r^lpu-o . .
> C17 MAP VBSOLD5 <
C 7 SG1
EVAP B Y P A S S SOLENOID VALVE
2WBSA3 <
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
C26ECT VSVA4 < o-^Wô
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE
VTSB12 < o-^W^-o
C 2 5 IA T
"1
1> A 2 6 PSPSW
Dp
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
(BPP) SWITCH
A32 B K S W * 2 , *3 | G P L S 1 C 4 ,
VTEC PRESSURE 2
* * 3
I G P L S 2 C14 <
^4 icm **SPARK
iPLUG
SWITCH
*2, *3 | p L S 3 C 3 <
G
No. 1 IGNITION C O I L
> C10 VTM
*2.*3 I Q P L S 4 C 1 3 <
To
I Q P L S 5 C12 < "SPARK
PRIMARY
PLUG
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1) 2
* * 3
IGPLS6 C23 <
C1P02SHTC
To
> C16 P H 0 2 S **SPARK
PLUG
SECONDARY No. 3 IGNITION C O I L

H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
To
6 o->> *** * S P A R K
BARO 11 i c m
p^n^r; P L U G
SENSOR
(Built Into
the PCM)
a "ft- H-ts_a-H>
St P A R K
PLUG
14
ICM
p-^T;
ICM 5 SPARK
,-4 F ^' PLUG
(cont'd)
11-11
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H
To IMMOBILIZER 1
> A 2 5 JMOCD | o P 2 S W B14,' olf
UNIT **
To IMMOBILIZER
UNIT " I *1.*2 *3
"1
3RD CLUTCH P R E S S U R E SWITCH
To M U L T I P L E X
C O N T R O L UNIT " J
AA13,
2 8 I LA161
U MO E N | OP3SW B24 <
(DRIVER'S)
"1
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
SOLENOID VALVE A S S E M B L Y
LCD1 < o-^Wv-o
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y A
SHAD7 < ons$^-o - .
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y B

i A14 D4IND SHBD2
oqfû_o .
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y C
SHCD3 <
_o_qfPo .
. *2,*3 *1
' B14, D13 A T P N P
i 06 ATPR LSA+B17 <
m
i D8ATPD4 LSA-B8 <
m A U T O M A T I C T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
D8ATPD3
5 n > D14ATP2 LSB+B25 <

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY A
11
11 i D15ATP1 LSB-B18 <
A U T O M A T I C T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A S S E M B L Y B
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
El
NM 011 <
\ MAINSHAFT
NMSGD12 < 7 SPEED SENSOR
NCD10 (
\ COUNTERSHAFT
NCSGD16 < ) SPEED SENSOR
3
* A T S F T P A11 i
3
* V R E F A7 i
ABS/TCS
3
* T H L O U T A31 < CONTROL
3
3
UNIT*
* P F I N H A13 <
3
* F P T D R A22 <
PCM A (32P) PCM B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
/
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 20 21 22 23 24 25
PC m c ( 3 i P) P C M D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1C 1 2 3 / 5
/ '12 13 14 '16 17 18 IS 20 21 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
22 / *2l ?
26 27 2 8 2 30 / 13 14 15 16
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-12
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)
8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S02S VSS 10 11
MTRTW MCS 2WBS VSV CRS PCS VREF HTC OUT SCS ATSFTP
12 13 14 16 17 24
IMO IMO D5 15 IMO 18 19 20 21 22 23
LMP EHfflNH IND FLR EN ACC MIL NEP FANC K-LINE FPTDR SHQ2S STS
25
IMO 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CD PSPSW ACS ILU PTANK ELD THIDUT BKSW
W i r e side of female terminals
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V.
Terminal W i r e color Terminal n a m e Description Signal
number
YEL/GRN MTRTW Sends engine coolant W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
temperature signal.
2 GRN/WHT MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine m o u n t At idle: 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE) control solenoid valve. A b o v e idle: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
3 BLU 2 W B S (EVAP B Y P A S S Drives EVAP bypass W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve.
4 LT GRN/ VSV (EVAP CANISTER VENT Drives EVAP canister vent W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
WHT SHUT VALVE) shut valve.
5 BLU/GRN CRS (CRUISE C O N T R O L Detects c r u i s e c o n t r o l s i g n a l . W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
SIGNAL)
6 RED/YEL PCS (EVAP C A N I S T E R Drives EVAP canister purge W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t , b e l o w 147F (64
PURGE V A L V E ) valve. C): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t , a b o v e 147F (64
C): d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
ORN/GRN VREF (REFERRENCE Provides reference voltage W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
VOLTAGE) to ABS/TCS control unit. W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
8 BLK/WHT S02SHTC (SECONDARY Drives secondary heated W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR o x y g e n sensor heater. With fully w a r m e d up engine running: duty controlled
HEATER C O N T R O L )
9 BLU/WHT V S S O U T (VEHICLE SPEED Sends vehicle speed sensor Depending o n vehicle speed: pulses
SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL) signal.
10 BRN S C S (SERVICE CHECK Detects s e r v i c e c h e c k W i t h the service check signal shorted w i t h t h e Honda
SIGNAL) c o n n e c t o r s i g n a l (the s i g n a l P G M Tester: 0 V
c a u s i n g a DTC i n d i c a t i o n ) W i t h t h e s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5 V or
battery voltage
3
11* LT G R N ATSFTP (TRANSMISSION Sends transmission gear W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in p a r k p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 4 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. W i t h t h e s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5 V or
battery voltage
12 PNK IMOLMP (IMMOBLIZER Drives immobilizer W i t h immobilizer indicator light turned O N : 0 V
I N D I C A T O R LIGHT) indicator light. With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery voltage
13* 1
* 2
BLU IMOEN (IMMOBILZER Sends immobilizer enable
ENABLE SIGNAL) signal.
14 GRN/BLK D 4 I N D (D4 I N D I C A T O R ) Drives D4 indicator light. W i t h D4 i n d i c a t o r l i g h t t u r n e d O N : 0 V
W i t h D 4 i n d i c a t o r l i g h t t u r n e d OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
15 GRN/YEL FLR ( I M M O B I L I Z E R F U E L D r i v e s f u e l p u m p relay. 0 V f o r t w o s e c o n d s after t u r n i n g i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N
P U M P RELAY) (II), t h e n b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
3
16* BLU IMOEN (IMMOBILIZER Sends immobilizer enable
ENABLE SIGNAL) signal
17 RED A C C (A/C C L U T C H RELAY) D r i v e s A / C c l u t c h relay. With compressor ON: 0 V
W i t h c o m p r e s s o r OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-1

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 S02S VSS 10 11
MTRTW MCS 2WBS VSV CRS PCS VREF HTC OUT scs ATSFTP
12 13 14 16 19 20 22
IMO IMO D5 15 IMO
17 18 21 23 24
LMP ENfRNH FLR EN ACC MIL NEP FANC K-LINE FPTDR SHQ2S STS
IND
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
IMO
CD PSPSW ACS ILU PTANK ELD THLOUT BKSW
N O T E : S t a n d a r d battery voltage is 12 V .
Terminal W i r e color Terminal name Description Signal

number
18 GRN/ORN MIL (MALFUNCTION Drives MIL. With MIL turned O N ; 0 V
I N D I C A T O R LIGHT) With M I L t u r n e d OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
19 BLU NEP {ENGINE SPEED PULSE) Outputs engine speed pulse. With engine running: pulses
20 GRN FANC (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay. With radiator fan running: 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
21 GRY K-LINE Sends and receives scan With i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
tool signal.
22* 3
GRN/RED FPTDR ( F R A M E T O Detects engine retard W i t h TCS operating: about 5 V
POWERTRAIN TORQUE request signal. W i t h T C S n o t o p e r a t i n g : a b o u t 2.5 V
D O W N REQUEST)
23 WHT/RED S H 0 2 S (SECONDARY Detects secondary heated W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n e d f r o m idle w i t h f u l l y
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR, o x y g e n s e n s o r ( s e n s o r 2) w a r m e d u p e n g i n e : a b o v e 0.6 V
S E N S O R 2) signal. W i t h t h r o t t l e q u i c k l y c l o s e d : b e l o w 0.4 V
24 BLU/ORN STS (STARTER SWITCH D e t e c t s s t a r t e r s w i t c h s i g n a l . W i t h s t a r t e r s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
SIGNAL) W i t h s t a r t e r s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
25 RED IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER CODE) Detects i m m o b i l i z e r signal.
26 GRN P S P S W (P/S PRESSURE D e t e c t s PSP s w i t c h s i g n a l . At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position: 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAL) A t i d l e w i t h s t e e r i n g w h e e l at f u l l lock: b a t t e r y
voltage
27 BLU/RED A C S (A/C S W I T C H S I G N A L ) Detects A/C switch signal. W i t h A/C switch O N : 0 V
W i t h A / C s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 5V
28 WHT/RED ILU ( I N T E R L O C K C O N T R O L Sends Interlock control W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b r a k e p e d a l
UNIT) signal depressed: about 0 V
29 LTGRN P T A N K (FUEL T A N K D e t e c t s FTP s e n s o r s i g n a l . W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d f u e l f i l l c a p :
PRESSURE SENSOR) o p e n e d : a b o u t 2.5 V
30 GRN/RED ELD (ELECTRICAL L O A D D e t e c t s ELD s i g n a l . W i t h p a r k i n g l i g h t s t u r n e d o n at i d l e : a b o u t 2.5
DETECTOR) 3.5 V
With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.5-
2.5 V
31 * 3
YEL/GRN T H L O U T (THROTTLE Sends TP sensor signal. W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n : a b o u t 4.8 V
POSITION SENSOR O U T P U T W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y c l o s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
SIGNAL)
32 WHT/BLK B K S W (BRAKE PEDAL Detects b r a k e p e d a l W i t h brake p e d a l r e l e a s e d : 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal. W i t h brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
11-14
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P)
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
IGP1 PG1 INJ5 INJ4 INJ2 INJ6 E-EGR USA-
9 10 13 14 18
11 12 15 17
IGP2 PG2 INJ1 VTS ICM OR2SW*!
ATPNK
INJ3 LSA+ LSB-
20 24
21 22 23 25
LG2 OP
LG1 VBU IACV LSB+
3SW

number
1 YEL/BLK IGP1 (POWER S O U R C E ) Power source for the PCM With t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
circuit. With t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V
2 BLK PG1 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit. Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
3 BLK/RED INJ5 ( N o . 5 INJECTOR) Drives N o . 5 injector. With engine r u n n i n g : pulses
4 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector.
5 RED INJ2 ( N o . 2 I N J E C T O R ) Drives N o . 2 injector.
6 WHT/BLU I N J 6 ( N o . 6 INJECTOR) Drives N o . 6 injector.
7 PNK E-EGR D r i v e s EGR v a l v e . W i t h EGR o p e r a t i n g : d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
W i t h EGR n o t o p e r a t i n g : a b o u t 0 V
8 WHT LSA - (A/T CLUTCH A/T clutch pressure control W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
PRESSURE C O N T R O L solenoid valve A p o w e r
S O L E N O I D V A L V E A - SIDE) supply negative terminal
9 YEL/BLK IGP2 (POWER S O U R C E ) Power source for the PCM W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
circuit. W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
10 BLK PG2 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit. Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
11 BRN I N J 1 ( N o . 1 INJECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector. W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
12 GRN/YEL V T S (VTEC S O L E N O I D D r i v e s VTEC s o l e n o i d v a l v e . W i t h e n g i n e at l o w r p m : 0 V
VALVE) W i t h e n g i n e at h i g h r p m : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
13* 1
YEL/GRN ICM (IGNITION CONTROL Sends ignition pulse. W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
MODULE) W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 10 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n
engine speed)
!
14* BLU/BLK I O P 2 S W ( 2 N D OIL PRESSURE Detects 2 n d oil p r e s s u r e W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
SWITCH) switch.
:
14* BLU/WHT ATPNP (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In Park o r N e u t r a l : 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
15 BLU INJ3 ( N o . 3 INJECTOR) Drives No. 3 injector. W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
17 RED LSA + (A/T CLUTCH A/T clutch pressure control W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
PRESSURE C O N T R O L solenoid valve A power
S O L E N O I D V A L V E A + SIDE) supply positive terminal
18 GRN LSB - (A/T C L U T C H A/T clutch pressure control W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
PRESSURE C O N T R O L solenoid valve B power
S O L E N O I D V A L V E B - SIDE) supply negative terminal
20 BRN/BLK LG1 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) G r o u n d for the PCM circuit. Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
21 VVHT/YEL V B U ( V O L T A G E B A C K UP) Power source for the PCM B a t t e r y v o l t a g e at all t i m e s
circuit.
P o w e r s o u r c e f o r t h e DTC
memory.
22 BLK* 1
LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit. Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
7
BRN/BLK*
23 BLK/BLU IACV (IDLE AIR C O N T R O L D r i v e s IAC v a l v e . W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
VALVE)
24 BLU/WHT O P 3 S W (3RD OIL PRESSURE Detects 3 r d oil p r e s s u r e W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
SWITCH) switch.
25 ORN LSB + (A/T C L U T C H A/T clutch pressure control W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
PRESSURE C O N T R O L solenoid valve B p o w e r
SOLENOID VALVE B SIDE) supply positive terminal
'98-93 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-1
PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C {31P)
1 2 3 4 5 7
6 8 9 10
P02S IGPLS1 SG1
HTC ALTC IGPLS3 ALTF EGRL CKPP CKPM VTM
12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21
IGPLS5 IGPLS4 IGPLS2 PH02S MAP SG2 VCC1 TDC1P TDC1M
23
IGPLS6
25
IAT
26
ECT
27
TPS
28
VCC2
29 30
TDC2P TDC2M /

number
1 BLK/WHT P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
O X Y G E N S E N S O R HEATER o x y g e n sensor heater. With fully w a r m e d up engine running: duty
CONTROL) controlled
2 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 0 V 5 V ( d e p e n d i n g
CONTROL) signal. o n electrical load)
3*2, *3 WHT/BLU I G P L S 3 (No. 3 IGNITION COIL Drives No. 3 ignition coil. W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0 V
PULSE) W i t h engine running: pulses
4*2, *3 YEL/GRN IGPLS 1 ( N o . 1 I G N I T I O N COIL Drives No. 1 ignition coil.
PULSE)
5 WHT/RED A L T F ( A L T E R N A T O R FR D e t e c t s a l t e r n a t o r FR s i g n a l . With engine running: about 0 V5 V (depending
SIGNAL) o n electrical load)
6 WHT/BLK E G R L (EGR V A L V E LIFT D e t e c t s EGR v a l v e lift A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.2 V
SENSOR) sensor signal.
7 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) G r o u n d for M A P sensor. Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
8 BLU CKPP (CKP S E N S O R P SIDE) D e t e c t s CKP s e n s o r . W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
9 WHT C K P M (CKP S E N S O R M SIDE) G r o u n d f o r CKP s e n s o r .
10 BLU/BLK V T M (VTEC P R E S S U R E Detects VTEC pressure With e n g i n e at l o w r p m : 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAL) switch signal. With e n g i n e at h i g h r p m : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
2 3
12* ' * BLK/RED IGPLS 5 ( N o . 5 I G N I T I O N COIL Drives No. 5 ignition coil. With i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0 V
PULSE) With engine r u n n i n g : pulses
13* ' * 2 3
BRN IGPLS 4 ( N o . 4 I G N I T I O N COIL Drives No. 4 ignition coil.
PULSE)
U * 2 . *3 BLU/RED IGPLS 2 ( N o . 2 I G N I T I O N COIL Drives No. 2 ignition coil.
PULSE)
16 WHT P H 0 2 S (PRIMARY HEATED Detects p r i m a r y heated W i t h throttle fully o p e n e d f r o m idle w i t h fully,
OXYGEN SENSOR, SENSOR o x y g e n s e n s o r ( s e n s o r 1) w a r m e d u p e n g i n e : a b o v e 0.6 V
1) sigal. W i t h t h r o t t l e q u i c k l y c l o s e d : b e l o w 0.4 V
17 RED/GRN MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Detects M A P sensor signal. W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 3 V
PRESSURE S E N S O R ) A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n e n g i n e s p e e d )
18 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor ground. Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s .
19 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Power source to MAP W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
sensor. W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
20 GRN T D C 1 P C T D C S E N S O R 1P Detect TDC sensor 1. W i t h engine running: pulses
SIDE)
21 RED T D C 1 M (TDC S E N S O R 1 M G r o u n d f o r T D C s e n s o r 1.
SIDE)
23*2. * 3 BRN/WHT IGPLS 6 ( N o . 6 I G N I T I O N COIL Drives No. 6 ignition coil. W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0V
PULSE) W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
25 RED/YEL IAT ( I N T A K E AIR Detects I A T s e n s o r s i g n a l . W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1 - 4 . 8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) ( d e p e n d i n g o n i n t a k e air t e m p e r a t u r e )
26 RED/WHT ECT ( E N G I N E C O O L A N T D e t e c t s ECT s e n s o r s i g n a l . W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
27 RED/BLK TPS (THROTTLE POSITION Detects T P s e n s o r s i g n a l . W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n : a b o u t 4.8 V
SENSOR) W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y c l o s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
28 YEL/BLU VCC2 ( S E N S O R V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor voltage. W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
29 YEL T D C 2 P (TDC2 S E N S O R P Detects T D C s e n s o r 2. W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
SIDE)
30 BLK T D C 2 M (TDC2 S E N S O R M G r o u n d f o r T D C s e n s o r 2.
SIDE)
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
11-16
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P)
1 2 3 5
LC SHB SHC VBSOL
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ATPR SHA ATPD3 ATPD4 NC NM NMSG
13
1
14 15 16
ATPNP*
2
ATPD2 ATP1 NCSG
OP2SW*
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 1 2 V .

number
1 YEL LC ( T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R Drives torque converter clutch W i t h lock-up O N : battery voltage
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve. W i t h l o c k - u p OFF: 0 V
2 GRNAA/HT S H B (SHIFT S O L E N O I D D r i v e s s h i f t s o l e n o i d v a l v e B. W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st, 2 n d g e a r s : b a t t e r y
V A L V E B) voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 3 r d , 4th g e a r s : a b o u t 0 V
3 GRN SHC (SHIFT C O N T R O L Drives shift control solenoid W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st a n d 3 r d g e a r s : b a t t e r y
S O L E N O I D V A L V E C) v a l v e C. voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 2 n d a n d 4th g e a r s : 0 V
5 BLK/YEL VBSO L (BATTERY V O L T A G E Power source for solenoid W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
FOR S O L E N O I D V A L V E ) valve.
6 WHT ATPR ( T R A N S M I S S I O N Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In R p o s i t i o n : 0 V
7 BLU/YEL S H A (SHIFT S O L E N O I D Drives shift solenoid valve A. W i t h engine r u n n i n g in 2 n d , 3rd gears: battery
VALVE A) voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st, 4 t h g e a r s : a b o u t 0 V
8 PNK ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In D3 p o s i t i o n : 0 V
9 YEL ATPD4 (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In D 4 p o s i t i o n : 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 5 V o r b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
10 BLU NC ( C O U N T E R S H A F T SPEED Detects countershaft speed W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), a n d f r o n t w h e e l s
SENSOR) sensor signals. rotating: battery voltage
11 RED N M ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED Detects m a i n s h a f t speed W i t h engine running: pulses
SENSOR) sensor signals.
12 WHT N M S G ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED G r o u n d for mainshaft speed
SENSOR GROUND) sensor.
13* * 2 3
BLU/WHT ATPNP (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In Park o r N e u t r a l : 0 V
13*Y* 3
BLU/BLK O P 2 S W ( 2 N D OIL P R E S S U R E D e t e c t s 2 n d oil p r e s s u r e W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
SWITCH) switch.
14 BLU ATP2 (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In 2nd position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: battery voltage
15 BRN ATP1 (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In 1st p o s i t i o n : 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: battery voltage
16 GRN NCSG (COUNTERSHAFT Ground for countershaft
SPEED S E N S O R G R O U N D ) speed sensor.
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-17
Vacuum Hose Routing '98-99 models:

CRUISE CONTROL DIAPHRAGM
F U E L I N J E C T I O N A I R (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E
11-18
'00-01 models:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
INTAKE AIR B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E
(cont'd)
11-19
PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N S E N S O R {PRIMARY P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E

H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 1) @ THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
(2) S E C O N D A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
( S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 2) CANISTER
M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R @ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R CANISTER FILTER
I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R @ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) P U R G E C O N T R O L
(D F U E L I N J E C T I O N A I R (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E SOLENOID VALVE
I D L E A I R C O N T R O L (IAC) V A L V E @ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
T H R O T T L E B O D Y (TB) CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL INJECTOR E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) T W O W A Y V A L V E
FUEL PULSATION DAMPER E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) B Y P A S S
@ FUEL FILTER . SOLENOID VALVE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR F U E L TANK PRESSURE SENSOR'
F U E L P U M P (FP) > O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y ( O R V R )
F U E L TANK VENT SHUT VALVE
AIR C L E A N E R @ O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y (ORVR)
(RESONATOR VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
(if) E X H A U S T G A S R E C I R C U L A T I O N ( E G R ) V A L V E a n d () E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E
LIFT S E N S O R
11-20
PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N S E N S O R (PRIMARY P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E
H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 1) @ THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
( S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 2) E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R FILTER
M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R PURGE VALVE
I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R @ E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R V E N T
INTAKE AIR B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E SHUT VALVE
I D L E A I R C O N T R O L (IAC) V A L V E E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O W A Y V A L V E
THROTTLE BODY E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S
INJECTOR SOLENOID VALVE
@ FUEL PULSATION DAMPER FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
FUEL FILTER FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
F U E L P U M P (FP) ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
F U E L TANK
AIR C L E A N E R
RESONATOR
E X H A U S T G A S RECIRCULATION (EGR) V A L V E and
POSITION S E N S O R
(cont'd)
11-21
PGM-FI S y s t e m Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as
sequential multiport fuel injection system. the Engine Coolant temperature increases.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

W h e n the PCM receives a demand for cooling f r o m the
A/C system, it delays the compressor f r o m being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure s m o o t h
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch

The A/C switch signals the PCM whenever there is a
d e m a n d for cooling.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the Powertrain Control Module THERMISTOR
(PCM) during charging. The PCM then controls the
voltage generated at the alternator assording to the
electrical load determined by the Electrical Load
Detector (ELD) and driving mode. This reduces engine Ignition Timing Control
load to improve fuel economy. The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic ignition t i m i n g
at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor pressure. It also adjusts the t i m i n g according to engine
The Baro sensor is inside the PCM. It converts coolant temperature.
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection Injector Timing and Duration
discharge. The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
The CKP sensor determines t i m i n g for fuel injection of read out f r o m the m e m o r y , is further modified by
each cylinder and also detects engine speed. signals sent f r o m various sensors to obtain the final
The PCM detects misfiring by using the CKP sensor to discharge duration.
monitor fluctuations in crankshaft speed. It will then set By monitoring long term fuel t r i m , the PCM detects long
DTCs depending on how much misfiring occurs. term malfunctions in the fuel system, and will set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
11-22
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Primary Heated Oxygen sensor (Primary H02S)
The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor The primary H 0 2 S detects the oxygen content in the
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases exhaust gas and sends signals to the PCM which varies
as the intake air temperature increases. the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its
output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary
H02S is installed in the exhaust manifold.
By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary H02S and
secondary H 0 2 S , the deterioration of the primary H02S
can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the
feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable
driving conditions, the sensor is considered
deteriorated and the PCM sets a DTC.
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
ELEMENT TERMINALS
THERMISTOR
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation

to Readiness Codes)('01 model)
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, these codes are erased. In some states, part of
HEATER HEATER
the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are TERMINALS
s e t If all of them are not set, the test cannot be
completed.
To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition Secondary Heated Oxygen sensor (Secondary H02S)
switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
come on for 15 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic
readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, the Converter (TWO and sends signals to the PCM which
readiness codes are not set completely. To reset each varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To
code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
the procedures to set them. Refer to the '98-01 Accord The secondary H02S is installed in the TWC.
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor ELEMENT TERMINALS
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
3br
Starting Control
When the engine is started, the PCM provides a rich
mixture by increasing injector duration.
(cont'd)
11-23
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Idle Control System

The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the
throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the W h e n the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the
sensor varies the signal voltage to the PCM. The TP transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is depressed,
sensor is not replaceable apart f r o m the throttle body. the P/S load is high, or the alternator is charging, the
BRUSH HOLDER PCM controls current to the I AC valve to maintain the
correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see
the functional layout of the system.
BRUSH
Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM w h e n
RESISTOR
the brake pedal is pressed.
TERMINAL Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve

To maintain the proper idle speed, the IAC valve
changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body
in response to an electrical signal f r o m the PCM.
F r o m AIR To INTAKE
CLEANER MANIFOLD
Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor

The TDC1/TDC2 sensor determines ignition t i m i n g at
start up (cranking) and w h e n crank angle is abnormal.
TDC2 S E N S O R
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch

The PSP switch signals the PCM w h e n the power
steering load is high.
Starter (Ignition) Switch

The starter switch signals the PCM w h e n the engine is
cranking.
11-24
Fuel Supply System Intake Air System
Fuel Cut-off Control Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
During deceleration w i t h the throttle valve closed, layout of the system.
current to the fuel injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at speeds over 1,100 r p m . Intake Air Bypass Control System (Fuel Air (FIA)
Fuel cut-off action also occurs w h e n engine speed Control System)
exceeds 6,600 r p m , regardless of the position of the W h e n the engine is running, the Intake Air Bypass
throttle valve, to protect the engine f r o m over-revving. control valve sends air to the fuel injectors.
When the vehicle is stopping, then PCM cuts the fuel at
engine speed over 5,000 rpm. '98-99 models.
Fuel Pump Control

When the ignition is turned on, the PCM grounds the
PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to the fuel pump
for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the
engine running, the PCM grounds the PGM-FI main
relay and feeds current to the fuel pump. When the
engine is not running and the ignition is on, the PCM
cuts ground to the PGM-FI main relay which cuts
current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay

The PGM-FI relay contains 2 separate relays. One is
energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies
battery voltage to the PCM, power to the fuel injectors,
and power for the second relay. The second relay is
energized to supply power to the fuel p u m p for 2
seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when
the engine is running.
(cont'd)
11-25
Throttle Body Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, is located manifold.
on the top of the throttle body.
IDLE A D J U S T I N G THROTTLE
SCREW P O S I T I O N (TP)
SENSOR
<- : BLOW-BY VAPOR

: F R E S H AIR
PCV
VALVE
Evaporative Emission Control System
Catalytic Converter System Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of
the system.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter { T W O
The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon EVAP Canister
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), dinitrogen (N2), the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and water vapor. and burned (Refer to System Diagram to see the
functional layout of the system).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is above 167F
(75C), the PCM controls the EVAP canister purge valve
which provides vacuum to the EVAP canister.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM.
HOUSING
S E N S O R CHIP
THREE-WAY
CATALYSTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of

the system.
EGR Valve
The EGR valve is designed to lower peak combustion
temperatures and reduce oxides of nitrogen emissions
(NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake
manifold and into the combustion chambers.
11-26
Idle Control System Diagram
The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the IAC (Idle Air Control) valve:
After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the
idle speed by about 150^-300 rpm.
When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The
amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.
SENSORS
BLK
Intake Air System Diagram
This system supplies air to the engine. A resonator in the intake air pipe provides additional silencing as air is drawn
into the system.
'98-99 models:
INTAKE MANIFOLD THROTTLE BODY
ACL
AIR
INTAKE
DUCT
RESONATOR
From
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
VARIOUS
SENSORS
(cont'd)
11-27
FueS and Emissions Systems
'00-01 models:
"1
BLK
I *1: ' 0 0 model
*2: '01 model
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM m e m o r y includes the ideal EGR valve position for
varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the a m o u n t of EGR valve position and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then
compares it w i t h the ideal lift in its m e m o r y (based on signals sent f r o m other sensors). If there is any difference
between the t w o , the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
YEL/
VARIOUS
SENSORS
11-28
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor f r o m the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f r o m the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is
above 147F (64C).
When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP t w o w a y valve, the valve opens and
regulates the f l o w of fuel vapor to the EVAP control canister.
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens w i t h the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
From
EVAP CANISTER / EVAP CANISTER No. 6
VENT SHUT VALVE PURGE VALVE ECU(PCM)
BLK/ CRUISE
FUEL TANK VAPOR YEL CONTROL
RECIRCULATION VALVE (15 A)
(in the
YEL/
driver's
FUEL TANK BLU
under-
SIGNAL dash
TUBE Q R N / fuse/relay
BLK box)
I VARIOUS
|SENSORS
11-29
Circuit Diagram
PCM Circuit Diagram - '98-99 models.
* 5
!
f
To CLIMATE
C O N T R O L UNIT
T JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
1 YEL/
BLU
- YEL/8LU -
2
-WHT/BLKo"
EGR VALVE
LIFT S E N S O R
3
- GRN/BLK -
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
JT
a
( T o p a g e 11-31 )
11-30
(cont'd)
11-31
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) - '98-99 models:
ALT
A ^ CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE B
11-32
No. 1 F U E L I N J E C T O R
r -V I N J 2
B5J R E D -
'K No. 2 F U E L I N J E C T O R
<B15) BLU -
'K No. 3 F U E L I N J E C T O R
>IT No. 4 F U E L I N J E C T O R
1
-YEL/BLK -
it No. 5 F U E L I N J E C T O R
No. 6 F U E L I N J E C T O R
IACV
'B23) BLK/BLU
1
- YEL/BLK -
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
IGP2 ,
-\B9) YEL/BLK -
(cont'd)
11-33
A/T G E A R POSITION SWITCH
11-34
- GRN/BLK -
z
1
- BLK/WHT -
- BLK/YEL
- BLK/WHT-
1
a"
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
C302
1 - BLK/YEL
no:
ba
/Nil 1
-GRN/WHT - -GRN/WHT'
ENGINE MOUNT
!T~ CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
- RED YEL 1
RED/YEL
BLK/YEL 'HE EVAP PURGE

CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
CRUISE
C O N T R O L UNIT
a"'
-
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR LIGHT
To
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
r TEST
I TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
C204
- GRN -
- BLK -
From
AF RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y ,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
(cont'd)
11-35
LT GRM/WHT -
- BLK/YEL J
EVAP CONTROL
CANISTER VENT
SHUT V A L V E
- YEL/BLU
- LT GRN
3
F U E L TANK
PRESSURE SENSOR
3
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
00000
JST jKT jST jKT
CONNECTOR F
D R I V E R S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
GRN YEL BLK/YEL

2
BLK BLU 2
GRN/BLK
.J L.
YEL/BLU
CONNECTOR D
YEL/BLU -
2
GRN/BLK -
BLK/YEL -
BLK/YEL -
WHT/YEL -
CONNECTOR
2
GRN/BLK -
A
YEL
B
BLK/YEL -
CONNECTOR K
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
CONNECTOR A
IGNITION
SWITCH
FUSES
A : No. 9 B A C K U P L I G H T
I N S T R U M E N T L I G H T (7.5A)
B I No. 6 E C U (PCM)
C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A)
C : No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L
(7.5A) ( T o page 11-37 )
D : No. 1 F U E L P U M P (15A)
11-36
( F r o m p a g e 11-36 )
CONNECTOR I
1
- BRN
- BLU/ORN
CONNECTOR M^Z
- RED/WHT
- B L K / Y E L
- WHT/BLK'
- WHT/YEL
C O N N E C T O R N
- W H T \
C O N N E C T O R E
-[
a DRIVER S
FUSE/RELAY
UNDER-DASH
BOX
- BRN
DATA LINK
1
B R N / B L K -
CONNECTOR
- WHT/GRN -
r
a WHT/BLK -
- W H T / Y E L -
B R A K E SWITCH
m an B L K / Y E L
BLK
=0
C103 C104 - WHT/GRN |
C201
WHT/GRN -
r
1
- YEL/BLK - YEL/BLK 1
-
- BLK 1
BLK*
- B R N / B L K ' - BRN/BLK - 1
' C301
- B L U / O R N -
- G R N / Y E L -
H - B L K / Y E L -
a PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
(cont'd)
11-37

m CONNECTOR B
- BLK/YEL
- BLK/YEL
- YEL
^ BRN/BLK
To A/C -4 BLU RED

PRESSURE SWITCH
X CONNECTORG
BLU RED
-BRN/BLK 1
- WHT/YEL
CONNECTORH
- BLK/YEL -
CONNECTOR I
- WHT/YEL
1
-BRN/BLK
P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
5
CONNECTOR C
-WHT
CONNECTOR A
- WHT/GRN
CONNECTORB
- WHT/YEL
- YEL
- BLK/YEL
A30) GRN/RED - -GRN/RED
- BLK
CONNECTORD
. T o A/C
CLUTCH RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSES
E : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K U P (7.5A)
F I I G MAIN (50A)
G : A C G S (15A)
H : S T O P (20A)
I: B A C K U P A C C (40A)
J : B A T T E R Y (100A)
11-38
'00-01 models:
)* toj)
3=
MAP SENSOR
2
- GRN/WHT -
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
ECTSENSOR
To CLIMATE
C O N T R O L UNIT
-frte 1
3
f a (C27>-
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
7 YEL/
BLU
- YEL/BLU
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
- WHT/BLIC-
- GRN/BLK 5
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
a
( T o p a g e 11-40 )
(cont'd)
11-39

( F r o m p a g e 11-39 )
, .PH02S .
I (as)" WHT* -GRN/BLK -

- BLK/YEL-
3
BLK/WHT
PRIMARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL -
C104
(eM2}- 1RP 1
~vric X
SOLENOID
VALVE
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
I0*
B L K
C107
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
3 TDC
SENSOR 1
3 TDC
SENSOR 2
W H T 2
- 3 CKP
SENSOR
11-40
T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H (TCC)
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY
0 SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE ASSEMBLY A
(SS)
3
- GRN/WHT -
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS)

VALVE ASSEMBLY B
5
- G R N -
I SHIFT SOLENOID (SS)

VALVE ASSEMBLY C
3
MAINSHAFT S P E E D S E N S O R
3
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E (A/T)
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE ASSEMBLY A
AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E (A/T)
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE ASSEMBLY B
(cont'd)
11-41
FueS and Emissions Systems
3
No. 1 I N J E C T O R
3
' K No. 2 I N J E C T O R
1
- YEL/BLK -
> e lNJ3
BLU
,
1
- YEL/BLK -
'K No. 4 I N J E C T O R
1
-YEL/BLK -
'I? No. 5 I N J E C T O R
13
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
11-42
2ND
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
1

3RD
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
1

To
V IMMOBILIZER
UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
* 1 : '00 model
* 2 : '01 model
(cont'd)
11-43
. . s .
- GRN/BLK -
BLK/YEL -
- BLK/WHT 1
- - BLK/WHT -
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
e i
C302 - BLK/YEL -
1
-GRN/WHT -
E N G I N E MOUNT
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
1 1
RED/YEL RED/YEL -
BLK/YEL -
EVAP CANISTER
a
PURGE ALVE
I [I I
(A5>
CRUISE
C O N T R O L UNIT
-
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR LIGHT
To
- > TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TEST
4
- BLU
C TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
4
- BLU -
hL MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
x
(DRIVER'S)
- GRN -
- BLK -
From
/ \ F
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y ,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
* 2 : '01 model
11-44
- LT GRN/WHT -
- BLK/YEL *
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
*5
- YEL/'BLU -
2
-LTGRN
2
-GRN/BLK
FTP SENSOR
3
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
0 0 E 0 CONNECTOR F
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
GRN/YEL/ BLK/YEL
2
BLK BLU
GRN/BLK'
YEL/BLU -
CONNECTOR D
YEL/BLU -
GRN/BLK'
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
- WHT/YEL -
a
CONNECTOR J
- G R N / B L K '
YEL -o<\>o
c
BLK/YEL
a CONNECTORK
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
CONNECTOR A
IGNITION
SWITCH I ST O -
\ + B
FUSES
A : No. 11 IG C O I L (15 A)
B : No. 9 B A C K U P L I G H T
I N S T R U M E N T U G H T (7.5A)
C : No. 6 E C U ( P C M )
C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A)
D ! No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L
(7.5A) ( T o p a g e 11-46 )
E : No. 1 F U E L P U M P (15A)
(conf
11-

( F r o m page 11-45 )
CONNECTOR I
1
- BRN
- BLU/ORN
CONNECTORM
- RED/WHT
- BLK/YEL
- WHT/BLK'
-WHT/YEL
CONNECTORN
- WHT
CONNECTORE
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
"1 1
DATA LINK
BRN/BLK -
CONNECTOR
WHT/GRN -
BLK -
r
a - WHT/BLK 1
- WHT/YEL -
a
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
(BPP) SWITCH
np a n BLK/YEL -
BLK
C201
r- WHT/GRN A I WHT/GRN
r
YEL BLK
1
-BLK' BLK
1
-BRN/BLK BRNBLK-
1
C301
C
~1 -BLU/ORN -
^{ATj}-^? GRN/YEL - GRN/YEL -
- BLK/YEL -
PGM-FI
a MAIN R E L A Y
11-46
0
CONNECTOR B
BLK/YEL
- BLK/YEL
- YEL
B R N / B L K '1
To A / C BLU/RED -
P R E S S U R E SWITCH
X 99t CONNECTOR H
BLU/RED
1
BRN/BLK
9
WHT/YEL -
CONNECTOR I
- BLK/YEL ^
CONNECTOR J
- WHT/YEL
P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
9
WHT
CONNECTORC
CONNECTOR A

G
H
- WHT/GRN
OwO 1
CONNECTORB
I
- WHT/YEL
-0- - YEL
J
o--o
>
ELD
J
BLK/YEL -
GRN/RED -
rBLK
CONNECTORD
w To A / C
t " " ^ C L U T C H RELAY
_LL_
UNDER-HOOD
G202 F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
FUSES
F : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K UP (7.5A)
G : i G MAIN (50A)
I
H I A C G S (15A)
I: S T O P (20A)
J : B A C K U P A C C (40A)
K : B A T T E R Y (100A)
(cont'd)
11-47

GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
11-48
1
- LT G R N -
"L.
3L
J .
r
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT
PGM-FI System
NOTE: The illustration shows '00 model.
/ELECTRICAL LOAD
' D E T E C T O R (ELD)
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-84
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
INTAKE AIR T E M P E R A T U R E
(IAT) S E N S O R
Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-50
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
Service Manual
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R
Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-47
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d
Service Manual
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) S E N S O R
TOP D E A D C E N T E R 1 (TDC1)/ T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-54
T O P D E A D C E N T E R 2 (TDC2) a n d p a g e 11-56
SENSOR n the '98-01 A c c o r d
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , page 11-76 Service Manual
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (ECT) S E N S O R
(CKP) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-52
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-73 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
11-50
NOTE: The illustration shows '00 model.
P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)
General Troubleshooting Information,
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (DLC) p a g e 11-3
General Troubleshooting Information, in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
p a g e 11-3 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-90
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0122: TP S e n s o r Circuit L o w Voltage

? 9. A t the sensor side, measure resistance between the
TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h w i t h the throttle fully closed.
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
comes o n , then t u r n the ignition switch OFF. TP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
2. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
3. Check the throttle position w i t h the scan tool.
Is there approx. 10% or 0.5 V when the throttle is

fully closed and approx. 90% or 0.5 V when the
throttle is fully opened?
Y E S Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and the PCM. Terminal side of male terminals
NO Go to step 4. Is there approx. 0.5~ 0.9 kQ?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Y E S - G o to step 10.
5. Disconnect the TP sensor connector. NO Replace the throttle b o d y . B
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Measure resistance between the TP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 w i t h the
7. Measure voltage between the TP sensor 3P throttle fully closed.
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
TP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
VCC2
SG2 (GRN/BLK) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Terminal side of male terminals

Is there approx. 4.5kQ?
YES Go to step 11.
N O - R e p l a c e the throttle body.
NO Go to step 19.
11. Disconnec the PCM connector C (31P) connector.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11-52
12. At the wire harness side, check for continuity 15. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.
between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and body ground. 16. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminal A 3 1 .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
THL
TPS (RED/BLK) OUT
(YEL/GRN)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Y E S - Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (C
27) and the TP sensor. Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and PCM (A31).
NO Go to step 13 {'01 model). Go to step 17 {'98-
00 models). IMO-Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
13. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit. I
14. Check for continuity between body ground and 17. Connect PCM connector terminal C27 and body
PCM connector terminal A 3 1 . ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P) P C M C O N N E C T O R C {3 IP)-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 23
/25 26 27 28 29 30 /
THL TPS (RED/BLK)
OUT
(YEL/GRN) JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals W i r e side of female terminals
N O - G o t o step 17.
(cont'd)
11-53
PGM-FI System
18. At the wire harness side, check for continuity
between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and body ground.
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Y E S Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

Refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5). If prescribed voltage is now available,
replace the original PCM.
NORepair open in the wire between the PCM (C

27) and the TP sensor.
19. Measure voltage between PCM connector

terminals C18 and C28.
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 r 8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21 /
/ 12 13 14
/
23
/25 26 27 28 29 30
/
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C

28) and the TP sensor.
NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

Refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the original
PCM.B
11-54
DTC P0131: Primary H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 1) Circuit 11. Check for continuity between the primary H 0 2 S
L o w Voltage (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.
P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
comes on. P H 0 2 S (WHT)
1 2
3. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage
w i t h the scan tool during acceleration using wide 3 4
open throttle.
Does the voltage stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES- Go to step 4.
N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the Is there continuity?
primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM
4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-89). (C16) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1).B
Is It normal? NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
Y E S - G o to step 5. (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM.
NO Repair the fuel supply system.
6. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P

connector.
7. Start the engine and let it idle.

w i t h the scan tool.
Does it stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES Go to step 9.
NO -Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1).B
10. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).
11-55
PGM-FI System
DTC P0132: Primary H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 1) Circuit 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

High Voltage
10. Connect PCM connector terminals C16 and C18
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure. w i t h a jumper wire.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator f a n
comes o n .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3. Check the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1) output voltage / 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21
w i t h the scan t o o l . 23 /
25
P H 0 2 S (WHT)
26 27 2S 29 30
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
Does the voltage stay at 0.9 V or more?
J U M P E R WIRE
IMO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e . Wire side of female terminals

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the P C M . B 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage
5. Disconnect the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector. Is there 0.9 V or more?
6. Connect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good PCM and recheck.
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e . Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1) (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
4P C O N N E C T O R away, replace the original PCM.B
JUMPER WIRE NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C16 or C18) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1). B
1 2
P H 0 2 S (WHT) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
3 4

Is there 0.9 V or more?
N O - R e p l a c e the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1 ) . B
11-56
DTC P0133: Primary H02S {Sensor 1) Circuit
Slow Response
NOTE: If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at

the same time as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0133.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm w i t h

comes on.
3. Test-drive under following conditions.
55 m p h (89 km/h) steady speed

Transmission in D4 position
Until readiness code or Temporary DTC P0133
comes on
4. Check for a Temporary DTC w i t h the scan tool.
Is Temporary DTC P0133 indicated?
YES - Replace the primary H02S (Sensor \)M
NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at C104
(located at the right side of the engine
compartment), the primary H02S (Sensor 1) and
the PCM.B
PGM-FI System
D T C P0137: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2) 10. Check for continuity between the secondary H02S

Circuit L o w Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
SECONDARY H02S
( S E N S O R 2) 4P C O N N E C T O R
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator f a n
comes on.
S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)
3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output
voltage at 3,000 rpm w i t h the scan t o o l .
NOIntermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e . Terminal side of male terminals

(located under the right side of the dash), C104 Is there continuity?
compartment), the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) and Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM
the P C M . B (A23) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2).
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away,
connector. replace the original PCM.

voltage w i t h the scan tool.
N O - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) . f l
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
11-58
DTC P0138: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2) 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit High Voltage
10. Connect PCM connector terminals A23 and C18
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure. w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
PCM CONNECTORS
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan A (32P)
comes on. 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 19 20 21 23 24
3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output 25 26 27 28 29 30 32

SH02S
voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool. (WHT/RED)
J U M P E R WIRE
SG2
Does the voltage stay at 0.8 V or more? C(31P) (GRN/BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 12 13 14
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204 W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
(located under the right side of the dash), C104

(located at the right side of the engine 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM.B 12. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output
voltage w i t h the scan tool.
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector. Y E S Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
6. Connect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper away, replace the original PCM.B
wire.
SECONDARY H02S NO- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
( S E N S O R 2) 4 P C O N N E C T O R (A23 or C18) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I
JUMPER WIRE
S G 2 (GRN/BLK)
S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)

voltage with the scan tool.
N O - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I
11-59
PGM-FI System
D T C P0139: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit S l o w R e s p o n s e

comes o n .
3. Check the secondary H 02 S (Sensor 2) output

voltage at 3,000 r pm w i t h the scan tool.
Does the voltage stay within 0.3 0.8 V for two

minutes?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2).
NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .

compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM.B
11-60
DTC P013: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater 6. Check continuity between body ground and the
circuit Malfunction H02S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4
individually.
DTC P0141: Secondary H02S(Sensor 2)
Heater circuit Malfunction H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R
NOTE; Information marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) applies

to DTC P0141.
Is DTC P0135 or P0141 indicated?

T e r m i n a l side of W i r e side of
Y E S - G o to step 3. male terminals female terminals
NOIntermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204 Is there continuity?
(located at the right side of the engine Y E S - R e p l a c e the H02S (primary or secondary * )
compartment), the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1), the (Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) . B
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . B
4. Disconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector. 8. Measure voltage between the H 0 2 S 4P connector
terminal No. 4 and body ground.
5. At the H02S side, measure resistance between the
P R I M A R Y / S E C O N D A R Y * H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1/
H02S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4. S E N S O R 2*) 4P C O N N E C T O R
H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R
IG1 IG1
(BLK/YEL) (BLK/YEL)
1 2 1 2
- 3 4 - 3 4
W i r e side of T e r m i n a l side of
female terminals male terminals
Terminal side of Wire side of

male terminals female terminals
Is there 5~ 15 Q (10-40 &)* ? Y E S - G o to step 9.
Y E S - G o to step 6. NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 6

ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse and the
N O - R e p l a c e the primary H02S (Sensor 1) or H02S.B
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * . B
(cont'd)
11-61
PGM-FI System
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Reconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
10. Check for continuity between the H 0 2 S 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d . 14. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P) (PCM
connector A, 32P) * .
S E N S O R 2*) 4P C O N N E C T O R
P02SHTC S02SHTC 1 2 16. Measure voltage between the PCM connector

(BLK/WHT) (BLK/WHT) terminal C1 (A8) * and body ground.
- 3 4
PCM CONNECTORS
P02SHTC ^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 12 13 14
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
W i r e side of T e r m i n a l side of
23
/ 25 28 27 28 29 30 /
S 0 2 S H T C (BLK/WHT)
Is there continuity? 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24
Y E S - G o t o step 11. 25 26 27 28 29 30 | 32
NO G o t o step 13. Wire side of female terminals
1 1 . Disconnect PCM connector C (31P) (PCM connector Is there battery voltage?

A, 32P) * .
Y E S - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
12. Check for continuity between the H 0 2 S 4P Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
connector terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d . (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original P C M . B
S E N S O R 2 * ) 4P C O N N E C T O R
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM
(C1, A8 * ) and the H02S (primary or secondary * )
P02SHTC S02SHTC 1 2 (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) . B
(BLK/WHT) (BLK/WHT)
- 3 4
Wire side of Terminal side of

Y E S Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C1,

A8 * ) and H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor
1, Sensor 2 * ) . B

(see page 11-5). If the s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n goes
away, replace the original P C M . B
11-62
D T C P0300: R a n d o m misfire
and a n y combination of the following:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder misfire
NOTE:
If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during t w o consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored.
If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the f o l l o w i n g DTCs first if any of them were stored along w i t h the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P0131, P0132: Primary H02S
P0171, P0172: Fuel metering
P 0 4 0 1 , P1491, P1498: EGR System
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC System
P1361, P1362, P1366, P1367: TDC 1/TDC 2 Sensor
P1519: IAC Valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the s y m p t o m .
3. Find the s y m p t o m in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the sequence listed, until you find the
cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:

Random misfire only 1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89). Low compression.
at low RPM and 2. Inspect the distributor ignition housing.* Low quality fuel.
under load
Random misfire only 1. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).* Malfunction in the
during acceleration 2. Inspect the distributor ignition housing.* VTEC system (see
3. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89). page 6-9).
4. Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or
for '00-01 models (see page 4-23).
5. Test the ignition control module (see page 4-19).*
Random misfire at 1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89). Correct valve
high RPM and under 2. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).* clearance (see page
load, or under 3. Inspect the distributor ignition housing.* 6-13).
random conditions 4. Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or
for '00-01 models (see page 4-23).
5. Test the ignition control module (see page 4-21).*
*: '98-99 models
11-63
PGM-FI System
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99 7. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder
models) w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99 8. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of
models) the freeze data or under various conditions if there
w a s no freeze data.
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99
models) 9. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the
scan tool.
DTC P0304; No. 4 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99
models) Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
DTC P0305; No. 5 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99
models) Y E S - G o to step 10.
DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99 NO Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,
models) etc. (no misfire at this time).
1. Remove the intake manifold cover (see step 4 o n 10. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
page 6-31).
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset spark plug was exchanged?
the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misfiring, just
clear the DTC. Y E S Replace the faulty spark p l u g . a
3. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound at the N O - G o to step 11.
injector in the problem cylinder.
Does it click?
12. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder
Y E S - G o t o step 4. w i t h one f r o m the another cylinder.
N O - G o to step 19. 13. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of
the freeze data or under various conditions if there
5. Inspect the ignition w i r e on the p r o b l e m cylinder was no freeze data.
(see page 4-22).
15. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the
Is it OK? scan tool.
Y E S - G o to step 6. Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

N O - R e p l a c e the faulty ignition wire
6. Check the distributor cap for cracks, wear, damage,
and fauling. NO Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this time)
Is it OK?
NO Clean or replace the distributor cap.
11-64
16. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. Is there battery voltage?
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose YES Go to step 23.
injector was exchanged?
N O - G o to step 3 1 .
Y E S Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-80). 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
N O - G o to step 17. 24. Disconnect the injector 2 P connector on the

problem cylinder.
25. Measure resistance between the injector 2P
18. Check the engine compression. connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Is the engine compression OK ? I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Y E S Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual 1 2
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM.B
INJ IGP
N O - Repair the engine.

20. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there 10 Q - 13 Q ?
22. Measure voltage between body ground and the YES Go to step 26.
PCM connector terminal (see table).
N O - Replace the injector (see page 11 -80).
INJ4 (YEL) INJ2 (RED)
26. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder
w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
27. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
20 21 22 23 24 25
28. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6 the freeze data or under various conditions if there
(BLK/ (BRN) (BLU) (WHT/
RED) BLU) was no freeze data.
X X X X
Cv) Cv) 29. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the
scan tool.
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN Y E S - G o to step 30.
No. 2 P0302 B5 RED
No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU NO Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL etc.B
No. 5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED
No. 6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
(cont'd)
11-65
PGM-FI System

30. Determine w h i c h cylinder had the misfire. 36. Check for continuity between body ground and the
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
injector was exchanged? INJ4 (YEL) INJ2 (RED)
Y E S Replace the faulty injector.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
20 21 22 2 3 24 25
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes (BLK/ (BRN) (BLU) (WHT/
away, replace the original PCM.B RED) BLU)
3 1 . Turn the ignition switch OFF. X X X X

32. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the

problem cylinder. PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
33. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B5 RED
34. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU
terminals No. 2 and body g r o u n d . No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R No. 6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
1 2
IGP Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(YEL/BLK) and the injector.
37. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to

Wire side of female terminals body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire (see table).
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the injector
JUMPER WIRE
and the PGM-FI main relay.

Wire side o f female terminals
PROBLEM DTC WIRE

CYLINDER COLOR
No. 1 P0301 BRN
No. 2 P0302 RED
No. 3 P0303 BLU
No. 4 P0304 YEL
No. 5 P0305 BLK/RED
No. 6 P0306 WHT/BLU
11-66
38. Check for continuity between body ground and the
PCM connector terminals (see table).
INJ4 (YEL) I N J 2 (RED)
3 4 5 6 7
10 12 13 14 15 17
20 21 2 2 23 2 4 25
INJ5 1NJ1 INJ3 INJ6
RED) BLU)
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE

No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B5 RED
No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU
No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL
YES Replace the injector (see page 11-80). then

recheck.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and

the injector.
11-
PGM-FI System
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01 8. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
models)
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01 ignition coil was exchanged?
models)
Y E S - Replace the faulty ignition coil.
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01
models) NO Go to step 9.
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
models)
10. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder
DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01 w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
models)
DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01 the freeze data or under various conditions if there
models) w a s no freeze data.
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the ignition 12. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the
coil cover (see step 4 on page 6-31). scan tool.
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misfiring, just P0306, or Temporary DTC PI399 indicated?
clear the DTC.
3. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound at the
injector in the problem cylinder. NO - Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,
etc. (no misfire at this time).
Does it click?
13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
YES - G o t o step 4.
N O - Go to step 3 1 . spark plug was exchanged?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Y E S - Replace the faulty spark plug.
5. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem NO Go to step 14.

cylinder w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
the freeze data or under various conditions if there 15. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder
was no freeze data. w i t h one f r o m the another cylinder.
7. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the 16. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
scan tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or the freeze data or under various conditions if there
P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated? was no freeze data.
NO Intermittent misfire due to ignition coil fouling,

etc. (no misfire at this time).
11-68
18. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the 25. Check for continuity between the ignition coil 3P
scan tool. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
P0306, or Temporary DTC PI399 indicated?
GND
(BLK)
NO Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the

injector connector (no misfire at this t i m e ) . B

injector was exchanged?
Js there continuity?
Y E S Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-82) Y E S - G o to step 26.
N O - G o to step 20. NO Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and G101 (or G102).B
2 1 . Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector f r o m the
problem cylinder. 27. Check for continuity between body ground and the
PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
23. Measure voltage between the ignition coil 3P IGPLS5
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. (BLK/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RED)
I G N I T I O N C O I L 3P C O N N E C T O R
12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
23 / / 2 5 26 27 28 29 30 /
I1,
IG1
(BLK/YEL)

No. 1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN
No. 2 P0302 C14 BLU/RED
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s No. 3 P0303 C3 WHT/BLU
No. 4 P0304 C13 BRN
Is there battery voltage? No. 5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED
No. 6 P0306 C23 BRN/WHT
NO Repair open or short in the wire between the
No. 11 COIL (15 A) fuse and the ignition c o i l . S Y E S Repair short in the wire between the PCM
and the ignition coil.H
(cont'd)
11-69
PGM-FI System
28. Connect the ignition coil 3P connector terminal 30. Check the engine compression.
No. 1 and body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire (see
table). 7s the engine compression OK?
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR Y E S - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

JUMPER WIRE NO Repair the engine.
3 1 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s 32. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).

PROBLEM ! DTC WIRE
CYLINDER COLOR 34. Measure voltage between body ground and the
No. 1 P0301 YEL/GRN PCM connector terminal (see table).
No. 2 i P0302 BLU/RED
No. 3 | P0303 WHT/BLU
No. 4 I P0304 BRN
No. 5 | P0305 BLK/RED
No. 6 : P0306 BRN/WHT
10 11 12 13 14 17
20 21 22 23 24 25
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6
PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) (BLK/ (BRN) (BLU) (WHT/
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN) RED) BLU)
(V) (V) (V) (Y)

CYLINDER i TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B5 RED
No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU
No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE No. 5 I P0305 B3 BLK/RED
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR No. 6 ! P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
No. 1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN
P0302 C14~ 1 BLU/RED^ Is there battery voltage?
No. 3 P0303 C3 WHT/BLU
No. 4 P0304 C13 BRN Y E S - G o to step 35.
No. 5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED
No. 6 P0306 C23 BRN/WHT N O - G o to step 43.
Is there continuity? 35. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES G o t o step 30. 36. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the

problem cylinder.
NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ignition c o i l . a
11-70
37. Measure resistance between the injector 2P 46. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. terminals No. 1 and body ground.
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
IGP
(YEL/BLK)

Is there 10 Q - 13 Q?
YES G o t o step 38.
NO- Replace the injector (see page 11-82). Y E S - G o t o step 47.
38. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder NO Repair open in the wire between the injector
with one f r o m another cylinder. and the PGM-FI main relay. B
39. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes. 47. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
40. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of 48. Check for continuity between body ground and the
the freeze data or under various conditions if there PCM connector terminal (see table).
was no freeze data.
41. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the
scan tool.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18
20 | 21 22 2 3 24 25
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6
RED) BLU)
NO- Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
etc.B

Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
injector was exchanged ? No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B5 RED
Y E S - Replace the faulty injector. No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU
NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual No. 5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes No. 6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
YES Repair short in the wire between the PCM
44. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the and the injector. B
problem cylinder.
NO G o t o step 49.
(cont'd)
11 71
PGM-FI System
49. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to

body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table).
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ
JUMPER WIRE
PROBLEM DTC WIRE

CYLINDER COLOR
No. 1 P0301 BRN
No. 2 P0302 RED
No. 3 P0303 BLU
No. 4 P0304 YEL
No. 5 P0305 BLK/RED
No. 6 P0306 WHT/BLU

PCM connector terminals (see table).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10
20
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
/ 17
2 3 24 25
18
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6

RED) BLU)
(o) (a)

No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B5 RED
No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU
No 4 P0304 B4 YEL
YES - Replace the injector (see page 11-82). then

recheck.
NO- Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and

the i n j e c t o r .
11-72
D T C P0335; C K P Sensor No Signal 6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP
sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
D T C P0336: CKP Sensor intermittent individually.
interruption C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N K l E C T O R

CKPP CKPM
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0336 indicated?
N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
CKP sensor and the PCM.

is there continuity?
4. Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
Y E S - R e p l a c e the CKP sensor (see page 6-56).
5. Measure resistance between the CKP sensor 2P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. N O - G o to step 7.
C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
7. Reconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
9. Measure resistance between PCM connector

terminals C8 and C9.
CKPP CKPM
CKPP CKPM
T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Is there 1,850-2,450 Q?
12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21
Y E S - Go to step 6. 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 /
NO - Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-56).
Is there 1,850-2,450 Q?
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (C8,

C9) and the CKP sensor.
(cont'd)
11-73
PGM-FI System
10. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminal C8.
CKPP (BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21
23 25 26 27 28 29 30 /
YES Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (C

8) and the C K P s e n s o r . B

11-74
DTC P1121: TP Sensor Lower T h a n Expected DTC P1122: T P S e n s o r Higher T h a n E x p e c t e d
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. 2. Check the throttle position w i t h the scan t o o l .
Is 13.7 % or higher indicated when the throttle is Is 16.9 % or less indicated when the throttle is
fully opened? fully closed?
YES Intermittent failure, system is OK at this Y E S - I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, system is OK at this

time.H time.H
NO Replace the TP sensor. NO Replace the TP sensor
11-75
PGM-FI System
DTC P1361: TDC1 Sensor Intermittent 6. Check for continuity to body ground on both
Interruption terminals of the indicated sensor individually.
DTC P1362: TDC1 Sensor No Signal T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
DTC PI366: TDC2 Sensor Intermittent

Interruption
TDC1P TDC1M
DTC P1367: TDC2 Sensor No Signal
Is DTC P1361, P1362, P1366 or P1367 indicated?

Y E S - G o to step3.
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the Y E S - R e p l a c e the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 6-
TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor and the PCM. 55).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. N O - G o to step 7.
4. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC2 sensor 4P connector. 7. Reconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor 4P connector.
5. Measure resistance between the terminals of the 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).
indicated sensor (see table).
9. Measure resistance between the terminals of the
T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table).
TDC1P TDC1M
TDC2P TDC2M
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
SENSOR DTC SENSOR PCM WIRE

TERMINAL TERMINAL COLOR Wire side of female terminals
TDC1 P1361 1 C20 GRN

P1362 2 C21 RED Is there 1,850-2,450 Q?
TDC2 P1366 3 C29 YEL
P1367 4 C30 BLK Y E S - Goto step 10.
Is there 1,850-2,450 Q? NO Repair open in the indicated sensor wires (see

table).
N O - R e p l a c e the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 6-

55).
11-76
10. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals C20 and/or C29
individually.
T D C 1 P (GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 5 9 10
12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /
YES Repair short in the indicated sensor wires

(see t a b l e ) .

11-77
PGM-FI System
D T C P1676: F P T D R S i g n a l Line Malfunction 6. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure. connector terminal A22.
2. Start the engine and wait 10 seconds.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
Is DTC P1676 indicated? 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Y E S - G o to step 3. FPTDR (GRN/RED)
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT 16P

NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this t i m e . 0 ) CONNECTOR
ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.B
1 2
/
9 10 11
4
13 14 15 16
/ /
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and the Is there continuity?

ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.
5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM
connector terminal A22. NO Repair open in the wire between the ABS/TCS
control unit and the PCM (A22).
7. Reconnect PCM connector E (32).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 23 24 8. Connect PCM connector terminals A22 and C28
25 26 2 7 28 29 30 31 32 w i t h a jumper wire.
FPTDR PCM CONNECTORS
(GRN/RED)
A (32P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12(13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
FPTDR
(GRN/RED)
C(31P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
JUMPER
Is there continuity? WIRE / 12 13 14 / 1617 18 19 20 21 /
23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES Repair short in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and the PCM (A22).
N O - G o t o step 6. 9. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good ABS/TCS control

away, replace the original ABS/TCS control u n i t
NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

11-78
D T C P1678: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
YES Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control

away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit.

ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
'98-99 models:
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (B). Place a rag or shop towel
over the hoses before disconnecting them.
5. Disconnect the fuel hose (C) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the retainer bolts (E) from the fuel rails and harness holders (F), then replace the O-rings (G).
7. Disconnect the fuel rails.
8. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
11-80
9. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).
10. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
11. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.
12. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold.
13. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake manifold.
14. Install and tighten the retainer bolts.
15. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail with new washers.
16. Connect the v a c u u m hose and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator.
17. Install the connectors on the injectors and harness holders.
18. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-81
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont'd)
'00-01 models:
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake m a n i f o l d .
3. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the injectors (A).
4. Remove the retainer bolts (D) f r o m the fuel rails (C) and harness holders (E), then replace the O-rings (F).
5. Disconnect the fuel rails.
6. Remove the injectors f r o m the fuel rails.
11-82
7. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).
8. Coat new O-rings (C) w i t h clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
9. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.
10. Coat new seal rings (E) w i t h clean engine oil, and press t h e m into the intake manifold.
11. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the fuel injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake
manifold.
12. Install bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-83
PGM-FI Sy stem
Primary H02S Replacement Secondary H02S Replacement

Special Tools Required Special Tools Required
Commercially available 0 2 sensor w r e n c h , Commercially available 0 2 sensor wrench,
Snap-on YA8875 or SP Tools 93750 or equivalent Snap-on YA8875 or SP Tools 93750 or equivalent
1. Disconnect the primary H02S 4P connector (A), 1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A),
then remove the primary H02S (B). then remove the secondary H02S (B).
B
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
Ibfft)
2. Install the primary H02S in reverse order of
removal.
2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of
removal.
11-84
Idle Control System
NOTE: The illustration shows '00-01 models.
11-85
Idle Control System
Idle Speed Adjustment

Adjust the idle speed using the Honda PGM Tester 6. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn,
procedure if possible. If not, use the f o l l o w i n g check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn
procedure: the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn again.
NOTE: 7. Idle the engine for one minute w i t h heater fan

Leave the IAC valve connected. switch at HI and air conditioner o n , then check the
Before setting the idle speed, check these items: idle speed.
- The MIL has not been reported on.
- Ignition t i m i n g Idle speed should be:
- Spark plugs 680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
- Air cleaner
- PCV system NOTE:
Do not turn the idle adjusting screw w h e n the air
1. Disconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve conditioner is on.
2P connector. If the idle speed is not within specification, see
the S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index.
2. Connect a tachometer.
8. Reconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm w i t h 2P connector.
no load (transmission in Park or neutral position)
until the radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
4. Check the idle speed w i t h no-load conditions:

headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan,
and air conditioner are not operating.
Idle speed should be:

680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the

idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more

than 1/4-turn w i t h o u t checking the idle speed.
11-86
Fuel Supply System
F U E L F E E D PIPE F U E L FILL C A P
F U E L V A P O R PIPE
F U E L RAIL
FUEL PUMP
Test, p a g e 11-115
n the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
FUEL FILTER
FUEL G A U G E SENDING UNIT

Test, p a g e 11-94
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
FUEL TUBE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS

Precautions, page 11-118
R e m o v a l , p a g e 11-118
n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
Installation, p a g e 11-119
FUEL TANK in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
in the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
F U E L R E T U R N PIPE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

R e p l a c e m e n t f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-92
R e p l a c e m e n t f o r '00-01 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-93
11-87
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving

Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release
pressure from the system by loosening the fuel
pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail.
then write down the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the

battery negative terminal.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at

the fuel rail.
A
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper (A) one

complete turn.
NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel

pulsation damper is loosened or removed.
11-88
Fuel Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 8. Attach the fuel pressure gauge.
Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040001
Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-0040100 '98-99 models:
07406-0040001
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable f r o m the

battery negative terminal.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at

the fuel rail.
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper 1

complete turn.
7. Remove the fuel pulsation damper f r o m its fitting, 9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) of the fuel
and attach the fuel pressure gauge attachment. pressure regulator and pinch it closed w i t h a clamp
<B).
If the engine starts, go to step 12.

If the engine does not start, go to step 11.
11. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: remove

the fuel fill cap and listen to the fuel fill port while
an assistant turns the ignition switch ON (ll)-you
should hear the pump run for about 2 seconds
w h e n the ignition turned ON (II).
If the pump runs, go to step 12.

If the p u m p does not run, test it, refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-
115).B
(cont'd)
11-89
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test (cont'd)
12. Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure
regulator v a c u u m hose disconnected and clamped).
The pressure should be:
2
'98-00 models: 2 8 0 - 3 3 0 kPa ( 2 . 9 - 3 . 4 kgf/cm , 41 -
48 psi).
2
'01 model: 3 2 0 - 3 7 0 kPa ( 3 . 3 - 3 . 8 kgf/cm , 4 8 - 5 4
psi).
If the pressure is OK and engine is running, go to

step 13. If not running, repair the cause, then
continue this test.
If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.
13. With the engine running, reconnect the v a c u u m

hose and read the gauge again.
The pressure should be:
2
'98-00 models: 2 2 0 - 2 7 0 kPa (2.25-2.75 kgf/cm ,
3 2 - 4 0 psi).
2
'01 model: 2 6 0 - 3 1 0 kPa ( 2 . 7 - 3 . 2 kgf/cm , 3 8 - 4 6
psi).
If the fuel pressure is OK, the test is complete. Go

to step 15.
If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.
14. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose f r o m the pressure

regulator again w h i l e you watch the pressure
gauge. The pressure should rise w h e n you
disconnect the hose.
If the pressure did not rise, replace the fuel

pressure regulator for '98-99 models (see page
11-92) or for'00-01 models (see page 11-93), and
recheck the fuel pressure.
If the pressure rose, and all your readings were
w i t h i n spec, go to step 15.
If the pressure rose, but your readings were out
of spec, check for these problems:
- If the pressure is too low, check for a clogged
fuel filter and for leaks in the fuel l i n e s .
- If the pressure is too high, check for a pinched
or clogged fuel return hose or line.
15. Reconnect the vacuum hose, remove the pressure

gauge, and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper and
a new washer.Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to
22 N-m (2.2kgf-m, 16 I b f f t ) .
NOTE: Disassemble and clean the fuel pressure

gauge attachment thoroughly after use.
11-90
Fuel Lines Inspection
Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration, and replace if necessa

Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
'98-99 models: 7. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)

counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake A
manifold.
2. Place a shop t o w e l under the fuel pressure

regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 1 1 -
88).
3. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (A) and fuel return

hose (B).
8. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22

Ibfft).
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring.
W h e n assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
4. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel it into its proper position, taking care not to
pressure regulator (D). damage the O-ring.
5. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and

carefully install it into its proper position.
6. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail.

Turn it by hand until stops.
11-92
'00-01 models: 6. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)
counterclockwise to set the angle as s h o w n .
1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure
regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-
88).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return

hose (B).
7. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22

Ibf-ft).
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring.
When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
3. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel

pressure regulator (D).
4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and

carefully install it into its proper position.
5. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel joint.

Turn it by hand until stops.
11-93
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Test

NOTE; For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram , refer 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
t o the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-60).
7. Install a 2 Q, resistor between the fuel p u m p 5P
1. Check the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, then turn the
LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/ ignition switch ON (II).
relay box before testing.
F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O R
2. Remove the spare tire lid.

JUMPER VVV
WIRE
3. Remove the access panel f r o m the floor. 2Q RESISTOR
(YEL/BLU)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the

fuel p u m p 5P connector.
(BLK) I 1
2 3 J
5. Measure voltage between the fuel p u m p 5P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5
\ 4 5 /
and 8 V.
If the voltage is as specified, go to step 6.
If the voltage is not as specified, check for: 8. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts
m o v i n g toward the " F " mark.
- an open in the YEL/BLU or BLK wire.
- poor ground (G552). If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at
all, replace the gauge.
F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O R
If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending
unit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-127).
NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer
reaches " F " on the gauge dial. Failure to do so
may damage the fuel gauge.
The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, so
the fuel level is continuously indicated even
w h e n the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer
moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type.
11-94
Intake Air System 4T>
THROTTLE BODY
Test, p a g e 11-96
R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 11-99
D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 11-100
11-95
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test

Special Tools Required 5, Operate the throttle lever by hand to see if the
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 . - 3 0 in.Hg throttle valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight.
A973X-041-XXXXX
If there is excessive play in the throttle valve
1. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (A) between the t o p of shaft or the throttle valve binds at the fully
the throttle body at the intake air bypass control closed position, replace the throttle body.
valve, and connect it to a vacuum gauge. If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 6.
6, Check for clearance (A) between the throttle stop

screw (B) and the throttle lever (C) at the fully
closed position. If there is any clearance, replace
the throttle body (see page 11-99). Do not adjust the
A973X-041-XXXXX
throttle stop screw.

comes on, then let it idle. The gauge should not
indicate any v a c u u m .
If the gauge indicates v a c u u m , check and if

necessary adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-
98), then go to step 3.
If the gauge does not indicate v a c u u m , go to
step 3.
3. Open the throttle slightly f r o m idle and check the

gauge again. The gauge should indicate v a c u u m .
If the gauge indicates v a c u u m , go to step 4.

If the gauge does not indicate v a c u u m , check the
throttle body port. If it's clogged, clean it w i t h
carburetor cleaner, then go to step 4.
4. With the engine OFF, check the throttle cable

operation. The cable should operate w i t h o u t
binding or sticking.
If the cable is OK, go to step 5.

If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.
If it's faulty, reroute it or replace it and adjust it
(see page 11-98), then go to step 5.
11-96
Air Cleaner Element Replacement
AIR C L E A N E R H O U S I N G C O V E R
11-97
Intake Air System
Throttle Cable Adjustment

comes o n , then let it idle.
2. Hold the throttle link (A) to the throttle lever (B).

There should be no clearance.
3. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable

deflection (A) should be 10 12 m m ( 3 / 8 - 1 / 2 in.)
4. If deflection is not w i t h i n spec (1012 m m , 3/8

1/2 in.) loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting nut
(C) until the deflection is as specified, then
retighten the locknut.
5. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle

valve to be sure it opens fully w h e n you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns t o the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
11-98
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Do not adjust the throttle stop screw.
9
After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-54) and the throttle cable (see page 11 -98).
The TP sensor is not removable.
'98-99 models:
11-99
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
11-100
Intake Air (IA) Bypass Control Valve Test
Special Tools Required; '00-01 models:
Vacuum p u m p gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX 1. Start the engine, then let it idle.
"98-99 models: NOTE: Engine coolant temperature must be below

104F(40C).
no load (in Park or neutral position) until the 2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the install pipe,
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the install pipe,

and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
A
3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure

the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm
changes.
3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure If the vacuum reading does not change, check for
the vacuum gauge reading changes as the r p m these problems:
changes.
If the vacuum reading does not change check for Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air
these problems: bypass control system vacuum lines.
A cracked or damage intake air bypass control
* Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air valve.
bypass control system vacuum lines.
A cracked or damaged intake air bypass control 4. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h no load (in Park
valve. or neutral position) until the radiator fan comes o n ,
then let it idle.
5. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure

the vacuum gauge reading does not change as the
rpm changes.
If the vacuum reading changes check for these

problems:
Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air

bypass control system vacuum lines.
A cracked or damage intake air bypass control
valve.
11-101
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
1. Check the PCV valve (A) and hoses (B) and 2. A t idle, make sure there is a clicking sound f r o m the
connections for leaks and restrictions. PCV valve w h e n the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) w i t h your
'98-99 models: fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
g r o m m e t for cracks or damage. If the g r o m m e t is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
11-102
Evaporative Emission Control System
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE

Test, page 11-159
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 11-161
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O - W A Y V A L V E
11-103
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Transmission End Cover
Special Tools 14-2 End Cover Removal 14-151
General Troubleshooting Information 14-3 Park Lever Stop Inspection and A d j u s t m e n t 14-153
DTC Troubleshooting Index 14-7 E n d C o v e r and Idler G e a r s Instllation 14-195
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index 14-8
System Description 14-18 Transmission Housing
DTC Troubleshooting 14-64 Housing and Shaft A s s e m b l i e s R e m o v a l 14-154
S Indicator Light Circuit Bearing Replacement 14-156
Troubleshooting 14-93 Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation 14-192
Interlock S y s t e m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit 14-96 Valve Body
Key Interlock System Circuit 14-99 Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal 14-157
Road Test 14-101 Valve Body Repair 14-159
S t a l l Speed Test 14-103 V a l v e B o d y V a l v e Installation 14-160
Pressure Tests 14-104 M a i n V a l v e Body D i s a s s e m b l y ,
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve- Inspection a n d R e a s s e m b l y 14-161
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A T e s t 14-106 A T F P u m p Inspection 14-163
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve- Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
S h i f t S o l e n o i d V a l v e A R e p l a c e m e n t ........ 14-106 Inspection a n d R e a s s e m b l y 14-164
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e s B a n d C T e s t 14-107 Servo Body Disassembly,
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e s B a n d C I n s p e c t i o n and R e a s s e m b l y 14-165
Replacement 14-107 Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid and Reassembly 14-166
Valves A and B Test 14-108 Valve Bodies a n dA T F Strainer
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Installation 14-190
Valves A and B Replacement 14-109
Speed Sensor Replacement 14-110 Torque Converter Housing
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch Mainshaft Bearing/Oil Seal
Replacement 14-111 Replacement 14-167
3rd Clutch P r e s s u r e S w i t c h Countershaft Bearing Replacement 14-168
Replacement 14-111 S e c o n d a r y Shaft B e a r i n g R e p a c e m e n t 14-168
ATF Level Check 14-112
A T F Replacement 14-113 Shafts and Clutches
Transmission Removal 14-114 Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
T r a n s m i s s i o n Installation 14-121 and Reassembly 14-169
ATF Cooler Flushing 14-127 3rd/4th Clutch C l e a r a n c e Inspection 14-170
ATF Cooler Hoses R e p l a c e m e n t 14-128 Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement 14-171
Shift L e v e r R e m o v a l 14-129 Countershaft Disassembly,
Shift L e v e r Installation 14-130 Inspection, a n d R e a s s e m b l y 14-172
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly 14-132 C o u n t e r s h a f t R e v e r s e S e l e c t o r Hub,
Shift C a b l e R e p l a c e m e n t 14-133 3rd G e a r , a n d 1st G e a r R e p l a c e m e n t 14-173
Shift Cable Adjustment 14-136 Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing
Replacement 14-175
A / T Gear Position Indicator S e c o n d a r y Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 14-138 and R e a s s e m b l y 14-176
Circuit Diagram 14-139 S e c o n d a r y Shaft Clearance Inspection 14-177
Transmission Range Switch Test 14-140 S e c o n d a r y S h a f t Idler G e a r B e a r i n g
Transmission Range Switch Replacement 14-179
Replacement 14-141 Clutch Disassembly 14-180
Indicator Input T e s t 14-143 Clutch Inspection 14-183
Indicator Bulb Replacement 14-144 Clutch R e a s s e m b l y . - 14-185
A / T interlock System A / T Differential

C o m p o n e n t Location Index 14-145 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 14-201
Circuit Diagram 14-146 Backlash I n s p e c t i o n 14-201
Control Unit Input T e s t 14-147 Final Driven G e a r / C a r r i e r R e p l a c e m e n t 14-202
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test 14-149 Carrier Bearing Replacement 14-202
Shift Lock Solenoid Test 14-149 Oil S e a l R e p l a c e m e n t 14-203
Shift L o c k S o l e n o i d R e p l a c e m e n t 14-150 Carrier Bearing Outer Race R e p l a c e m e n t 14-204
Park Pin S w i t c h Test 14-150 Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection 14-205
Outline of V6 Model Change
T h e B 7 X A automatic t r a n s m i s s i o n h a sbeen a d d e d .
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty

07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 1
07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG4010G Seal Driver Attachment 1
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 1
07HAJ-PK40201 Preload Inspection Tool 1
07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07JAD-PH80400 Pilot 2 8 x 3 0 mm 1
07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1
** 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2
07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 4
07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter 4
07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
07SAZ-001000A BackprobeSet 2
07WAZ-002010A S C S Service Connector (DLC) 1
07406-0020400 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set W/Panel 1
*** 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2 5 - 4 0 mm 1
07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
07746-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
@@
14-2
<3
General Troubleshooting Information
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester/Scan Tool
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the (H indicator light in the gauge assembly will
blink. W h e n the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester as s h o w n , the scan tool or tester will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON(II).
HONDA P G M T E S T E R or
OBD II S C A N T O O L
If the E indicator light or the MIL has been reported o n , or if a driveability problem is suspected, f o l l o w this procedure:
1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and observe the DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700). DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
5. Get the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n the radio station presets.
6. Reset the m e m o r y w i t h the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minuites in the freeze data conditions or at speeds over 30mph (50 km/hr), and then
recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index on page 14-7. If the DTC does not
return, there was an intermittent problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight,
and then go to step 8.
8. Enter the radio code, reset the radio preset stations, and set the clock.
(cont'd)
14-3
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Check for DTCs
W h e n the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the H indicator light in the gauge assembly will
usually blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may come on. W h e n the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located
next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the B indicator light will blink the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
W h e n the B indicator light has been reported on, connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the ignition switch
ON (II), select Honda Systems, and then the SCS m o d e , then observe the H indicator light.
IS I N D I C A T O R L I G H T
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. A d d the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After
determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
S h o r t blink (once)
OFF See DTC 1
OFF See DTC 2
L o n g blink S h o r t b l i n k s (five t i m e s )
OFF S e e D T C 15
If the IS indicator light or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel/emissions DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
2. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write d o w n the numbers of the radio station presets.
4. Reset the m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed over 30 m p h (50 km/h), and then recheck for DTCs.
If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does no return, there was an intermittent
problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.
14-4
H o w to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Special Tools Required
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the S R S components locations, precautions, and procedures in the
S R S section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital
multimeter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a multimeter (C).
Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
07SAZ-001000A
A
07SAZ-001000A
(cont'd)
14-5
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n the radio station presets.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM m e m o r y :

Use the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester.
Remove the BACK UP fuse (7.5 A)(A) f r o m the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session
This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
2. Disconnect the OBD II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester (C) f r o m the DLC (D).
3. Reset the PCM.
5. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minuites at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).
14-6
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
DTC* H Indicator MIL Detection Item Page

Light 8
r
P0715O5) Blinks ON Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-77)
P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-76)
P0730(41) OFF ON Shift control system (see page 14-90)
P0740 (40) OFF ON Lock-up control system (see page 14-89)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-72)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-74)
P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-81)
P0780 (45) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-91)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-66)
P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-69)
P1738 (25) OFF OFF 2nd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-85)
P1739 (26) OFF OFF 3rd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-87)
P1750(46) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-92)
P1751 (47) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-92)
P1753 0 ) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-64)
P1768(16) Blinks ON A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-79)
P1773 (23) Blinks ON A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-83)
The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the H indicator light indicates w h e n the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester.
NOTE: Codes P0780 (45), P1750 (46), and P1751 (47) are applied to the '00-01 models.
14-7
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
These s y m p t o m s DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the E indicator light to blink. If the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w a s reported ON or the S indicator light has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if
the vehicle has one of the s y m p t o m s in the f o l l o w i n g chart, check the probable causes(s) for it, in the sequence listed,
until y o u find the problem.
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
W h e n you turn the A problem in the B indicator Check the B indicator light circuit (see page 14-93).
ignition switch ON (II), light circuit
the B indicator light
comes on and stays on
or never comes on at
all
Shift lever cannot be A problem in shift lock Check interlock system shift lock system circuit (see
moved from B system of interlock system page 14-96).
position while you're
pushing on the brake
pedal
Ignition key cannot be A problem in key interlock Check interlock system key interlock system circuit
m o v e d f r o m ACC (1) system of interlock system (see page 14-99).
position to LOCK (0)
position w h i l e you're
pushing the ignition
key w i t h the shift lever
in I B position
14-8
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
move in any gear adjustment ATF cooler lines.
3. Joint in shift cable and Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
transmission or body w o r n transmission control shaft.
4. ATF pump w o r n or binding Improper alignment of ATF p u m p and torque
5. Regulator valve stuck or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
spring w o r n s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
6. ATF strainer clogged a high pitched squeak.
7. Mainshaft w o r n or Measure line pressure.
damaged If the strainer is clogged, find the damaged
8. Final gears w o r n or components that caused debris.
damaged Inspect the differential pinion shaft for wear under the
9. Transmission-to-engine pinion gears. If the differential pinion shaft is w o r n ,
assembly error overhaul the differential assembly, replace the ATF
10. Axle disengaged strainer, thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush
the torque converter, cooler, and lines.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF p u m p w h e n you torque
d o w n the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
Install the main seal flush w i t h the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in \2\ 1. 1st accumulator defective Inspect 1st clutch pressure.
and ID, but not in H , 2. 1st gears w o r n or damaged Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
IE, or HI position 3. 1st clutch defective assembly for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are w o r n
or damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-9
Vehicle moves in S3, 1. Shift solenoid valve A Check the SI indicator light indication, and check for
H, [EEL but not in defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
[3 position 2. Shift valve A defective shift solenoid valve for seizure.
3. 2nd accumulator defective Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
4. 2nd gears w o r n or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
5. 2nd clutch defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are w o r n
or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
Vehicle moves in H, 1. Shift fork shaft stuck Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure.
HI/but not in 2. Modulator valve defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
SI position 3. Reverse CPC valve shaft.
defective If the ATF strainer is clogged w i t h particles of steel or
4. 4th accumulator defective a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is
5. 4th clutch defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
6. Reverse gears w o r n or replace the torque converter.
damaged Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the
reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are
w o r n or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking,
grinding, or whirring noises, also replace the
mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.
If the 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If
the ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is
dented. The O-ring under the guide is probably w o r n .
Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd and
4th clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th
clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace
the end cover.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
the discs and plates are w o r n or damaged, replace
t h e m as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end plate.
14-10
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
flares on starting off 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
in fi and H adjustment ATF cooler lines.
positions: 3. ATF pump worn or binding Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
Stall speed high in E , 4. Regulator valve stuck or transmission control shaft.
E, HI, and \%1 spring worn Check line pressure.
positions 5. ATF strainer clogged Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
6. Torque converter check converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
valve defective symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
pitched squeak.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
flares on starting off adjustment transmission control shaft.
in B and H 2, 1st clutch defective Check 1st clutch pressure.
positions: Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
Stall speed high in S , spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
fi, and GO positions clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
Poor acceleration- 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
flares on starting off adjustment transmission control shaft.
in 03 position: 2. 2nd clutch defective Check 2nd clutch pressure.
Stall speed high in 1JD Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
position spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
Poor acceleration; 4th clutch defective Check 4th clutch pressure.

flares on starting off Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
in M position: and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
Stall speed is in damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
specification in E , S , clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
1JD, and US positions, the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
but high in El the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
position them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-11
Poor acceleration; 1. Torque converter clutch Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Stall speed low solenoid valve defective
2. Torque converter one-way
clutch defective
3. Engine output low
4. Lock-up clutch piston
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve
defective
6. Restricted cooler
Engine idle vibration 1. Low ATF level Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
2. Torque converter clutch no g o o d , adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
solenoid valve defective engine section of this service manual.
3. Drive plate defective or Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
transmission misassembed leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
4. Engine output low ATF cooler lines.
5. Lock-up clutch piston Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
6. ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
defective
Vehicle moves in El 1. Excessive ATF Check ATF level, and drain ATF if necessary.
position 2. Foreign material in Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
separator plate orifice and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
3. 1st clutch defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
4. 2nd clutch defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
5. 3rd clutch defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
6. 4th clutch defective the discs and plates are w o r n or damaged, replace
7. Clutch clearance incorrect t h e m as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
8. Needle bearing seized up, plate clearance.
w o r n , or damaged Check for clutch pressure in neutral.
9. Thrust washer seized up,
w o r n , or damaged
14-12
<2
Late shift f r o m M 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the S indicator light indication, and check for
position to H and E defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
positions 2. A/T clutch pressure control shift solenoid valve for seizure.
solenoid valves A and B Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
defective body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
3. Shift cable broken or out of If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is
adjustment stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Shift fork shaft stuck If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. CPC valve A stuck a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is
7. Foreign material in OK, and no cause for the contamination is f o u n d ,
separator plate orifice replace the torque converter.
8. Shift valve C defective Check 1st clutch pressure.
9. Servo control valve Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
10. 1st accumulator defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
11. 1st check ball stuck clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
12. 1st clutch defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
t h e m as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
Late shift from ED 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the S indicator light indication, and check for
position to SI defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
position 2. A/T clutch pressure control shift solenoid valve for seizure.
solenoid valves A and B Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
defective body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
3. Shift cable broken or out of If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is
adjustment stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Shift fork shaft stuck If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. Foreign material in a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
separator plate orifice OK, and no cause for the contamination is f o u n d ,
7. Reverse CPC valve replace the torque converter.
defective Check 4th clutch pressure.
8. 4th accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
9. 4th clutch defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-13
No shift Modulator valve defective Measure line pressure.
Erratic shifting gears; 1. Shift solenoid valve A Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve
Fails to shift in I B defective for seizure.
position; does not 2. Mainshaft speed sensor Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
upshift to 4th defective loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
3. Countershaft speed sensor switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
defective replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
4. Shift valve A defective adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
5. Shift valve D defective
Erratic shifting gears: 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
Fails to shift in Band defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
B positions; does 2. Shift fork shaft stuck shift solenoid valve for seizure.
not upshift to 3rd and 3. Shift valve B defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
4th 4. Servo control valve shaft.
defective
Erratic shifting gears: 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
Fails to shift in B , B defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
and [D positions; 2. Shift valve B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
starts off in 3rd 3. Shift valve E defective
Excessive shock, or 1. A/T clutch pressure control Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
flares on all upshifts solenoid valves A and B loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
and downshifts defective control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
2. CPC valve A defective pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure
3. CPC valve B defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. Foreign material in If the ATF strainer is clogged w i t h particles of steel or
separator plate orifice a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
OK, and no cause for the contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
flares on 1-2 upshift defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
or 2-1 downshift 2. 2nd clutch pressure switch shift solenoid valve for seizure.
defective Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
3. Foreign material in loose connectors. Check that the outlet is not clogged
separator plate orifice inside of the connector.
4. Shift valve C defective Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
5. 1st accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
6. 2nd accumulator defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
7. 1st check ball stuck clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
8. 2nd check ball stuck is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
9. 1st clutch defective for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are w o r n
10. 2nd clutch defective or damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If they are OK,
14-14
Excessive shock, or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the H indicator light indication, and check for
or 3-2 downshift 2. 3rd clutch pressure switch shift solenoid valve for seizure.
defective Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
3. Foreign material in Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
separator plate orifice and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
4. Shift valve C defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
5. 2nd accumulator defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
6. 3rd accumulator defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
7. 2nd check ball stuck the discs and plates are w o r n or damaged, replace
8. 2nd clutch defective t h e m as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
9. 3rd clutch defective plate clearance.
Excessive shock, or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the H indicator light indication, and check for
or 4-3 downshift 2. Foreign material in shift solenoid valve for seizure.
separator plate orifice Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
3. Shift valve C defective If the ATF strainer is clogged w i t h particles of steel or
4. 3rd accumulator defective a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is
5. 4th accumulator defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is f o u n d ,
6. 3rd clutch defective replace the torque converter, and check the stall
7. 4th clutch defective speed.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
plate clearance.
Noise f r o m 1. ATF p u m p w o r n or binding Improper alignment of ATF p u m p and torque

transmission in all 2. Torque converter housing converter housing may cause ATF p u m p seizure. The
shift lever positions or transmission housing s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
bearing w o r n or damaged pitched squeak.
Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary
shaft w i t h the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates
for damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe
for damage and out of round. If the 1st clutch feed
pipe is damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace
the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st clutch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate more than defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
(cont'd)
14-15
Vibration in all shift Drive plate defective or Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
lever positions transmission misassembled no g o o d , adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
engine section of the service manual.
Check the stall speed.
Shift lever does not 1. A/T gear position switch Check the S3 indicator light indication, and check for
operate smoothly defective or out of loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
adjustment switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
2. Shift cable broken or out of replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
adjustment adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
not shift into E adjustment transmission control shaft.
position 2. Joint in shift cable and Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
transmission or body w o r n lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
3. Park mechanism defective install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
lever stop is not installed upside d o w n . Check the
distance between the park pawl and the park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance w i t h the park lever stop.
Lock-up clutch does 1. Torque converter clutch Check the H indicator light indication, and check for
not disengage solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. A/T clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
solenoid valves A and B pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure
defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. Lock-up clutch piston Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
defective
5. Lock-up control valve
defective
6. Lock-up t i m i n g valve
defective
14-16
Lock-up clutch does 1. Torque converter clutch Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
not operate smoothly solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. A/T clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
solenoid valves A and B pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure
defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. Lock-up clutch piston Center all engine mounts.
defective
4. Torque converter check
valve defective
defective
defective
7. Lock-up t i m i n g valve
defective
Lock-up clutch does 1. Torque converter clutch Check the E indicator light indication, and check for
not engage solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. A/T clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes
solenoid valves A and B for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control
defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. Mainshaft speed sensor
defective
4. Countershaft speed sensor
defective
5. Lock-up clutch piston
defective
6. Torque converter check
valve defective
defective
defective
A/T gear position 1. Transmission range switch Check the E indicator light indication, and check for
indicator does not defective or out of loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
indicate shift lever adjustment switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
positions 2. Shift cable broken or out of replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
adjustment adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
Speedometer does Countershaft speed sensor Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
not operate defective loose connectors.
14-17
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
automatic transmission w h i c h provides 4 speeds f o r w a r d and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line w i t h the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a p u m p , turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. A r o u n d the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes w i t h the starter pinion w h e n the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line w i t h the engine crankshaft. The
mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral w i t h the
4th gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive gear
is integral w i t h the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd and
idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center,
providing 4th gear or reverse, depending w i t h w h i c h w a y the selector m o v e d . The gears on the mainshaft and the
secondary shaft are in constant mesh w i t h those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted f r o m the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the
countershaft to provide H, 33, HI, LE and El positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the f r o n t lower panel behind the center console.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up t i m i n g valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo
body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and 3rd and 4th
accumulators. The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid f r o m
the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive
fluid f r o m their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid f r o m the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B while
receiving input signal f r o m various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the
positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift smoothly between lower gear and higher gear. This
pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In H position (3rd and 4th), and S3 position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the t i m i n g of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve control the range of
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
14-18
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions: B PARK, S REVERSE, M NEUTRAL, B 1st through 4th gear ranges, H 1st through
3rd gear ranges, [2] 2nd gear, and |T) 1st gear.
Position Description
E PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches released.
mREVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.
I I NEUTRAL All clutches released.
B DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
(1st through 4th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
B DRIVE Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
(1st through 3rd) driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
(U SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear; does not shift up or d o w n .
DO FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in OB and M positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (A/T) Gear Position Indicator

The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look
down at the console.
(cont'd)
14-19
System Description (cont'd)
Clutches
The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
14-20
Transmission Sectional View
MAINSHAFT 4TH CLUTCH

4TH G E A R ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
PITOT FLANGE
('00-01 m o d e l s 3RD CLUTCH
RING GEAR
LUBRICATION
P I T O T PIPE TORQUE CONVERTER
('00-01 m o d e l s
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
PISTON
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
P I T O T PIPE
('00-01 m o d e l s )
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE
SELECTOR H U B
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER G E A R DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER G E A R
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
14-21
Power Flow
POSITION PART
TORQUE 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RD GEAR 4TH REVERSE PARK
CONVERTER 1ST CLUTCH 2ND 3RD GEAR CLUTCH GEAR GEAR
CLUTCH CLUTCH
OS
o X X X X X X O
m o X X X X O O X
m o X X X X X X X
B 1ST O X X X X X X
2ND O X O X X X X X
3RD O X X o X X X X
4TH O X X X o O X X
B 1ST O O X X X X X X
2ND O X O X X X X X
3RD O X X O X X X X
m o X O X X X X X
m o O X X X X X X
OiOperates
X-.Doesn't operate
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.

The 4th gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The reverse gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The idler gear is splined w i t h the mainshaft and rotates w i t h the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft
The final drive gear is integral w i t h the countershaft.

The 1st gear, 3rd gear, 2nd gear, and park gear are splined w i t h the countershaft and rotate w i t h the countershaft.
The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely f r o m the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear w i t h the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined w i t h the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage w i t h the countershaft.
The idler gear rotates freely f r o m the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft
The 1st gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
The 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
The idler gear is splined w i t h the secondary shaft and rotates w i t h the secondary shaft.
14-22
OB Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
HI Position
Engine power transmitted f r o m the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted t o the
countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged w i t h the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, w h e n the shift lever is shifted in El position f r o m B position. The countershaft reverse gear is engaged when
shifted f r o m E position.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-23
Power Flow (cont'd)
In H or H position, the o p t i m u m gear is automatically selected f r o m the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
S or H Position in 1st gear and 0Q Position

Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
14-24
El or S Position in 2nd gear and OB Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-25
Power Flow (cont'd)
B or B Position in 3rd gear

Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVEN G E A R
14-26
S Position in 4th gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft 4th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range (B, B, U] and Q] position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, w h i c h drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-27
Power Flow (cont'd)
SB Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft (reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the OH position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
14-28
Electronic Control System
Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Model (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console.
PCM
Throttle Position S e n s o r Data Link C o n n e c t o r

Signal
PGM-FI
Control S y s t e m
Engine Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal
A / T Control S y s t e m
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A
INTERLOCK Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e B
CONTROL UNIT
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e C
Automatic Transaxle Clutch

Shift C o n t r o l Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A
D4
Automatic Transaxle Clutch
Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve B
D3
2nd Clutch Pressure
Switch
3rd C l u t c h P r e s s u r e
>4 Switch
Torque Converter Clutch

Lock-up C o n t r o l
Solenoid Valve
H Indicator Light
Mainshaft S p e e d S e n s o r
Signal
Self-Diagnosis Signal Self-Diagnosis

Function
Countershaft S p e e d
Sensor Signal
(cont'd)
14-29
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Electronic Controls Location
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E C
14-30
Shift Control
Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly
determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent f r o m sensors, and actuates the shift solenoid valves
A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System to controls shifting in E and B positions while the
vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C is s h o w n in the table below.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves

A B C
B,S Shifting f r o m M position ON ON ON
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON OFF OFF
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON
B Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF
m 2nd ON ON OFF
m 1st OFF ON ON
m Shifting f r o m E and M position OFF ON ON
Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF
Reverse inhibit OFF ON ON
m Park OFF ON OFF
m Neutral OFF ON OFF
NOTE: For a description of the reverse inhibit mode, refer to page 14-56.
Lock-up Control
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned O N , the condition of lock-up starts. The A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure, and apply the
pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd, and
4th gear in B and in 3rd gear in B positions.
(cont'd)
14-31
automatic Transmission
Grade Logic Control System
How it works:
The PCM compares actual driving conditions w i t h memorized driving conditions, based on the input f r o m the
countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, and the shift level position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or
descending a slope, or reducing speed.
SENSORS/SWITCHES SIGNALS DETECTED PCM
Countershaft Speed
Sensor
Throttle Position
Sensor
Driving Resistance
D e t e c t i o n of
o Calculation standard Calculation
o of a c t u a l of d e c e l e r a -
o acceleration
c acceleration (in M e m o r y ) tion
">
a Engine Coolant
Coolant Temperature
Temperature Sensor C a l c u l a t i o n of g r a d i e n t
Transmission Range
B o r IPJI P o s i t i o n
Switch S e l e c t i o n of S h i f t i n g M o d e
X
N o r m a l M o d e (Flat r o a d m o d e )
Ascending Mode
Fuzzy Logic
Descending Mode
> Gradual Descending Mode
Steep Descending Mode
Deceleration Mode
Automatic 4 Speeds
14-32
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in B and E positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission f r o m frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power w h e n needed.
NOTE:
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable the PCM's
fuzzy logic to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
Fuzzy logic is a f o r m of artificial intelligence that lets computers respond to changing conditions much like a human
mind w o u l d .
100%
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
FLAT ROAD MODE

GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
STEEP ASCENDING MODE
3RD-4TH SHIFTING CHARACTERISTICS

CONTROL AREA
Vehicle speed
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in B and B positions, the shift-up speed f r o m 3rd to
4th gear and f r o m 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to
widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination w i t h engine braking f r o m the deceleration lock-up,
achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are t w o descending modes w i t h different 3rd gear
driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. W h e n the
vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating w h e n you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will
downshift to 3rd gear. W h e n you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100%
3RD44TH
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
FLAT ROAD MODE

GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
STEEP DESCENDING MODE
Vehicle speed
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating f r o m
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission f r o m 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope w i t h
upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
14-33
PCM Electrical Connections

PGM-FI
IGNITION SWITCH MAIN
RELAY
BATTERY IG1
(+) 3 - PG1 I A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
PG2 VALVE A
TTT
. LS A
IGP1 LSB4-
, A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
1GP2 j CONTROL SOLENOID
1
VALVE B
VBU LS B
THROTTLE VCC2 SHA

POSITION TPS
SENSOR SG2
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE PGM-FI
SENSOR CONTROL
SYSTEM AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
LG1
I TORQUE CONVERTER
LG2 CLUTCH SOLENOID
' VALVE
77T IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 - VBSOL
VSS OUT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(b d) <h <k <& 0

NMSG
NC
COUNTERSHAFT
'SPEED SENSOR*
NCSG
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
ILU
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH
824 C9 -99l
8 PRESSURE SWITCH
D13 (00-01)
('01 model)
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 10 (11) 2

/ 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ / /
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32
/ /A 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
A (32P) 3 (25P) C(31P) D(16P)
4-34
PCM Inputs and Outputs
The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals related to the A/T control
system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 1 1 .
/ 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 10
/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
/ 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3
/ 5
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/ 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
/ / / 16 17 18 19 20 21
/ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
25 26 27 28 29 30
/ 32
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/ 13 14 15 16
A (32P) B (25P) C(31P) D (16P)
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage

Number
A5 BLU/GRN CRS Downshift signal input f r o m When cruise control is used: Pulsing signal
cruise control unit
A9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT Vehicle speed signal detected Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
f r o m countershaft speed
sensor
A10 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
service check signal connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected with Honda PGM
tester: 0 V
A14 GRN/BLK D4IND D4 indicator light control When ignition switch is first turned ON (II):
Battery voltage for t w o seconds
In 11 position: Battery voltage
A28 WHT/RED ILU Interlock control When ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
A32 WHT/BLK BKSW Brake pedal position switch Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
signal output Brake pedal released: 0 V
(cont'd)
14-35
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 / 5

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
// // 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32 / 20 21 22 23 24 25 / A25 26 27 28 29 30 / 13 14 15 16
A (32P) B (25P) C(31P) D(16P)

Number
B1 YEL/BLK IGP1 Power supply circuit f r o m With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
main relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B2 BLK PG1 Ground
B8 WHT LS A - A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A power
supply negative electrode
B9 YEL/BLK IGP2 Power supply circuit f r o m With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
main relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B10 BLK PG2 Ground
B14 BLU/BLK OP2SW A/T 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
C98-99) switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure)
B14 BLU/BLK ATPNP Transmission range switch [P] In IE and \M positions: 0 V
('00-01) and ID positions input In other than 00 and fNj position: Battery
voltage
B17 RED LSA+ A/T clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
solenoid valve A power
supply positive electrode
B18 GRN LSB - A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B power
supply negative electrode
B20 BRN/BLK LG1 Ground
B21 WHT/YEL VBU Back-up power supply Always battery voltage
B22 BLK LG2 Ground
C98-99)
BRN/BLK
('00-01)
B24 BLU/WHT OP3SW A/T 3rd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
switch signal input (No 3rd clutch pressure)
B25 ORN LSB + A/T clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
solenoid valve B power
supply positive electrode
14-36
<S0
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

Number
D1 YEL LC Torque converter clutch During lock-up conditions: Battery voltage
solenoid valve control During no lock-up condition: 0 V
D2 GRN/WHT SHB Shift solenoid valve B control Battery voltage in following positions:
H , BO positions.
E, and S positions in 1st and 2nd gear
OB, \E\, and M positions
0 V in following positions:
E, and S3 positions in 3rd gear
E position in 4th gear
D3 GRN SHC Shift solenoid valve C control Battery voltage in f o l l o w i n g positions:
111 position
E, and B positions in 1st and 3rd gear
H] position
E, and H positions in 2nd gear
S position in 4th gear
H, OB, and M positions
D4 Not used
D5 BLK/YEL VBSOL Power supply for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
under-dash fuse/relay box)
D6 WHT ATPR Transmission range switch H In OH position: 0 V
position input
D7 BLU/YEL SHA Shift solenoid valve A control In other voltage
Battery than El in
position:
f o l l o w i nBattery voltage
g positions:
S] position
H, and E positions in 2nd and 3rd gear
H] position
E, and B positions in 1st gear
B position in 4th gear
B, M, and M positions
(cont'd)
14-37
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2

/ 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3
/ 5
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22) 23 24 9
A
10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21
/ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32 20 21 2 2 2 3 24 25
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
/ 13 14 15 16
A (32P) B (25P) C(31P) D (16P)
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

Number
D8 PNK ATPD3 Transmission range switch B In H position: 0 V
position input In other than E position: Battery voltage
D9 YEL ATPD4 Transmission range switch E In B position: 0 V
position input In other than B position: Battery voltage
D10 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
input When vehicle is stopped: Approx. 0 V
D11 RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
When engine is stopped: Approx. 0 V
D12 WHT NMSG Mainshaft speed sensor
ground
D13 BLU/WHT ATPNP Transmission range switch OS In E and H positions: 0 V
C98-99) and 03] positions input In other than [Pj and M position: Battery
voltage
D13 BLU/BLK OP2SW A/T 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
('00-01) switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure)
D14 BLU ATP2 Transmission range switch [2] In [JO position: 0 V
position input In other than \2\ position: Battery voltage
D15 BRN ATP1 Transmission range switch CD In [T| position: 0 V
position input In other than \T\ position: Battery voltage
D16 GRN NCSG Countershaft speed sensor
ground
14-38
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The
ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve directing
pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves B and C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter
housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the torque
converter housing as an assembly. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
transmission housing.
(cont'd)
14-39
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
M a i n Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the m o d u l a t o r valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve
E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up
shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The primary function of the main valve body are to switch fluid
pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
MODULATOR VALVE SHIFT V A L V E D
SHIFT V A L V E E
SHIFT V A L V E C
RELIEF VALVE
REVERSE CPC VALVE
MANUALVALVE LOCK-UP SHIFT V A L V E
MAIN V A L V E BODY
COOLER CHECK VALVE

SERVO CONTROL VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up t i m i n g valve and the lock-up control valve.
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
REGULATOR VALVE
LOCK-UP TIMING V A L V E LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
14-40
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure f r o m the ATF p u m p to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid f r o m the ATF p u m p flows through B and B\
Fluid entering f r o m B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the
left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and
the amount of fluid f r o m B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line
pressure.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the illustration below.
From A T F PUMP
To T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R To LUBRICATION
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its m a x i m u m w h e n the stator torque reaction reaches its m a x i m u m .
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
STATOR
REGULATOR VALVE
REGULATOR
SPRING CAP
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR SHAFT ARM

STATOR SHAFT
(cont'd)
14-41
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, shift valve A, shift valve B, CPC valves A and B,
and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.
CPC VALVE A
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and 2nd
accumulators and the lubrication check valve.
14-42
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure

As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn t h r o u g h the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF f l o w i n g f r o m the ATF p u m p becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure f r o m the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged f r o m the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure
to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and
switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulated the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the CPC pressure mode.
The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This m o v e m e n t switches the
port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted.
Engaging the clutch w i t h line pressure happens w h e n shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the parts is as follows:
PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF

NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE
1 LINE 5H CPC B or LINE 57 LS B
3 LINE 5J CPC B or LINE 58 LS A o r LS B
3' LINE 5K CPC B or LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
3" LINE 5K' CPC B or LINE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER
4 LINE 6 MODULATE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
4' LINE SA SHA 91' TORQUE CONVERTER
4" LINE SB SH B 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
4A CPC A SC SHC 93 ATF COOLER
4B CPC B LA LC 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
5A CPC A 9 LINE 95 LUBRICATION
5D CPC B 10 1ST CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION
5B CPC A or LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
5E CPC A or LINE 25 LINE 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
5F CPC A or LINE 30 3RD CLUTCH 99 SUCTION
5F' CPC A or LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH X DRAIN
5C CPC B or LINE 41 4TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5G CPC B or LINE 56 LS A AX AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
SH: Shift Solenoid pressure
LS: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure
LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
14-43
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
SO Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is m o v e d to the left side.
The shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and the shift valve B remains in the right side.
The shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at shift valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the
modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift solenoid valves and
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
14-44
H Position; 1st gear shifting f r o m M position
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and C ON w h e n shifting to S position f r o m SO. Shift solenoid valve B
remains O N . Shift solenoid valve C is turned O N , and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of the shift valve C is
released, then the shift valve C is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid valve A is turned O N , and SH A pressure (SA)
in the left side of the shift valve A is released, then shift valve A is moved to the right side. The A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A regulates LS A pressure (56) and applies it to CPC valve A. Line pressure (1) becomes line
pressure (4) at the manual valve, and flows to shift valve C and CPC valve A. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A
pressure (4A) and passes through shift valve C, A, and B, then CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at
shift valve B. 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch is engaged w i t h pressure of the
CPC pressure mode. Line pressure (4) passes through shift valve A and B, then stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-45
H Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves B and C remain O N . SH A pressure (SA) is applied
to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is m o v e d t o the left side. This movement switches the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 1st
clutch is engaged securely. CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
1ST ACCUMULATOR 4TH ACCUMULATOR

3RD CLUTCH *TH CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE a
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
14-46
B Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, Shift solenoid
valves B and C remain ON. Then shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift
valve A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The
PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and B. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at the CPC valve
B, and CPC B pressure passes through shift valves C, B, and A, to become 2nd clutch pressure. The 1st and 2nd
clutches are engaged with the CPC pressure mode.
NOTE:
* When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
* Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-47
B Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain O N . Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC A
pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u m d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the
right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is m o v e d t o the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC
pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure m o d e , and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC
B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
14-48
E Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also
control A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A
remains O N , and C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and SH B pressure (SB) is applied to the right
side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at the CPC valve A. The CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 3rd clutch
pressure (30) at shift valve B, and flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by
switching the position of shift valve B.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-49
S3 Position; Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B
pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in the CPC valve B
releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC)
in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged
securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.
NOTE:
When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14 -50
IE Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also
controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valve B
remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left
side of shift valve A. Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch line pressure and CPC pressure. Line
pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes 4th clutch pressure (41)
at shift valve D, and flows to the 4th clutch via the manual valve. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure
mode by switching the position of shift valve A.
NOTE:
When used, ' l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-51
E Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the 3
rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u r n e d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of
shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
The CPC B pressure (5B) changes to line pressure (5B) at shift valve C, and flows to the 4th clutch via shift valve B, shift
valve C, shift valve D, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching
the position of shift valve C, and 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve A.
14-52
OH Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned O N , and the shift valve A is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and the shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C is moved to the left side.
The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) f r o m the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve
A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and
2nd clutch is engaged.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-53
H] Position
The PCM the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift
solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as f o l l o w s :
Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is m o v e d to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned O N , and shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (5B) at shift valve C. Line pressure <5C) flows to shift valve B via shift valve A,
and becomes 1st clutch pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then 1st clutch is engaged.
14-54
El Position: Shifting to E position from E or H position
Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the
reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40). The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and 4th clutch is engaged w i t h the reverse CPC
pressure mode.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-5
El Position: Driving in reverse gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is same as shifting to El position,
and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
14-56
OS Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SO is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC
valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo
valve. Line pressure (3'} passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
. Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-57
Lock-up System
In H position (3rd and 4th), and S position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the t i m i n g of the lock-up mechanism. W h e n the t o r q u e converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve control the range of
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.
General Operation
1. Operation (clutch on)

W i t h the lock-up clutch on, fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is
drained off, and the converter fluid exerts pressure t h r o u g h the piston against the torque converter cover. As a
result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the
vehicle in direct drive.
MAINSHAFT
2. Operation (clutch off)

W i t h the lock-up clutch off, fluid flows in the reverse of CLUTCH ON. As a result, the lock-up piston moves away
f r o m the converter cover, and torque converter lock-up is released.
MAINSHAFT
14-58
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA)
on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the
port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92)
becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up
clutch. The lock-up clutch is OFF.
NOTE:
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
(cont'd)
14-59
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the
left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter.
Torque converter pressure (92) f l o w s to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM
also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter
pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) f r o m the
lock-up t i m i n g valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. LS A or LS B (58) increases, and the lock-up
t i m i n g valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch
is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the right side of the
torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
NOTE:
14-60
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to
increase LS A o r LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the
lock-up timing valve, and moves t h e m to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure is released
fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-61
Circuit Diagram
QNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
14-62
MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR SPEED SENSOR
' KEY
INTERLOCK ENGINE
SWITCH CRUISE THROTTLE
ri
COOLANT
CONTROL BSU UNIT POSITION
TEMPERATURE
UNIT SENSOR
SENSOR
KEY
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID
STEERING LOCK
ASSEMBLY
V H
PARK
PIN
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
H 3
SWITCH SWITCH .
BLK
A WHT/BLK BRN BLU/GRN RED WHT BLU GRN RED/WHT
Li I
STOP SW CPS NM NMSG NC NCSG
H LT
T
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
LS1P LC SHA SHB SHC
B25 D1 ' >D7 C

D2 D3
WHT RED GRN ORN YEL BLU/YEL GRN/WHT BRN/BLK BLK {'98-99)
BRN/BLK COO 01)
BLU/YEL GRN/WHT
2 1
Q 2ND CLUTCH Q 3RD CLUTCH

\ PRESSURE \ PRESSURE
r\ SWITCH n \ SWITCH
A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH . SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID

PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE CONTROL TORQUE SHIFT VALVE B VALVEC
SOLENOID VALVE A SOLENOID VALVE B CONVERTER SOLENOID
CLUTCH VALVE A
SOLENOID BRN/BLK BRN/BLK
VALVE
G101 G101 G101
/ /
Fl
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) e 9 10 (11) 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (22) 23 24
/ / 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21
/ 6 7 a 9 10
25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32
/ / 25 26 27 28 29 30
/ 13 14 15 16
"hi
A(32P) C(31P) D(16P)
14
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P1753: Problem in T o r q u e Converter 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Clutch S o l e n o i d V a l v e Circuit
6. Measure the resistance between the D1 and B20 or
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
fr^\ LC (YEL)
2. Disconnect the B (25P) and D (16P) connectors f r o m B (25P)
D (16P)
the PCM.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3
/ 5
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18 6 7
13 14 15
8 9 10 11 12
16
4. Measure the voltage between the D1 and B20 or L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
B22 terminals. ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
LG1 ^
LC (YEL) (BRN/BLK)
D (16P) W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3
/ 5
Is the resistance 12-250, ?
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
13 14 15 16 Y E S - G o to step 11.
( B R N / B L K : '00-01) N O - G o to step 7.
LG1 7. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22

(BRN/BLK) terminals and body ground.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
Is there voltage? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Y E S -Repair short to power in the w i r e between 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
/
the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch 20 21 22 23 24 25
solenoid valve.
LG1 L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
N O - G o to step 5. (BRN/BLK) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
N O - Repair open in the wires between the B20 and

B22 terminals and ground (G101).B
14-64
8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.
12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or
9. Check for continuity between the D1 and B20 or B22 terminals.
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL
PCM CONNECTORS (BLK/YEL)
/^x L C (YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D(16P)
B (25P) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3
/ 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15 16
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
13 14 15 16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK) W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM
Y E S - Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch PCM and recheck.
solenoid v a l v e .
NO - Check for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
N O - G o to step 10. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal
10. Measure the resistance between the No.3 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x .
of the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift solenoid
valve A connector and body ground.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE/

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R (3P)
Terminal side of male t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance 12-250, ?
Y E S Check for open in the w i r e between the D1

terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve.
NO Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid

valve/shift solenoid valve A . H
14-65
DTC P1705: Short In Transmission R a n g e 8. Shift to all positions other than \E or H.

S w i t c h Circuit
9. Measure ATP NP voltage between these terminals:
'98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). or B22.
'00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
2. Observe the A/T gear position indicator, and shift or B22.
each position separately.
'98-99 models
Do any indicators stay on when the shift lever is
PCM CONNECTORS
not in that position?
B (25P) D (16P)
Y E S - G o to step 3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO The system is OK at this time. Check the w i r e
harness for damage.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15
ATPNP
16
connector. (BLU/WHT)
L G 2 (BLK)
Do all gear position indicators go out?

LG1 (BRN/BLK)
Y E S Replace the transmission range switch.
N O - G o to step 4. W i r e side of female terminals
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect the '00-01 models:
transmission range switch connector.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6. Shift to all positions other than El. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

/ 17 18
20 21 22 23 24 25
LG1 ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
B22 terminals. (BRN/BLK)
PCM CONNECTORS
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
(BRN/BLK) Is there approx. 5 V?

N O C h e c k for short in the wire between the D13
Y E S - G o to step 8. terminal and the transmission range switch, and in
the OB and M position signal wires between the A/T
NO Check for short in the w i r e between the D6
gear position indicator and the transmission range
terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T
switch. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit
gear position indicator, and check for an open in
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a
the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and
known-good PCM and r e c h e c k .
body ground (G101). If wires are OK, check for
loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If
10. Shift to all positions other than H.
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck.
14-66
Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or 12. Shift to all positions other than H .
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B22 terminals.
B (25P) D (16P)
PCM CONNECTORS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B (2SP) D (16P)
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25 14 15
10 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
A
LG2 (BLK:'98-99) ATP D4 (YEL)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01) 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 16
LG1
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ATP D3 (PNK)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there approx. 5 V? W i r e side of female terminals
Y E S - G o to step 12. Is there battery voltage?
NOCheck for short in the wire between the D9 YES - G o t o step 14.
terminal and the transmission range switch. If w i r e
is OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM NO Check for short in the w i r e between the D8
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T
PCM and recheck. gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for
loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If
recheck.
(cont'd)
14-67
14. Shift to all positions other than HI. 17. Measure the voltage between the D15 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B22 terminals.
B (25P) D (16P)
PCM CONNECTORS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B (25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 18 10 12
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) A T P 1 (BRN)
/ 20 21 22
LG2
23 24 25 14 15 16
ATP 2 (BLU)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BLK: '98-99) (BRN/BLK)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK) W i r e side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
Is there battery voltage? Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM

connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
Y E S - G o to step 16. PCM and recheck.
NO Check for short in the w i r e between the D14 N O - Check for short in the wire between the D15
terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T
gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for
loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck. H recheck.
16. Shift to all positions other than [TQ.
14-68
D T C P1706: O p e n In T r a n s m i s s i o n Range 5. Shift to B position.
Switch Circuit (no gear position inputs)
NOTE: Record ail freeze data before y o u troubleshoot. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-
B (25P) D (16P)
140).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Is the switch OK? 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
A 17 18
23 24 25 13 14 15
10
16
12
Y E S - G o to step 2. L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) A T P D4 (YEL)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
NO Replace the transmission range switch.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
3. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22
terminals and body ground. W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there voltage?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Y E S Repair open in the wire between the D9
A
terminal and the transmission range switch.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
LG1
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
(BRN/BLK) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
7. Shift to OB position.

B22 terminals.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 17 18 10 12
/
20 21 22 23 24 25 14 15 16
NO -Repair open in the wires between the B20 and LG2 A T P R (WHT)
B22 terminals and ground (G101), or repair poor (BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
ground ( G 1 0 D . B
LG1
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (BRN/BLK)
Is there voltage?
Y E S Repair open in the wire between the D6

9. Shift to B or 1 ] position.
(cont'd)
14-69
10. Measure ATP NP voltage between these t e r m i n a l s : 11. Shift to E position.
'98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20 12. Measure the voltage between the D8 and B20 or
or B22. B22 terminals.
'00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
PCM CONNECTORS
or B22.
B (25P) D (16P)
'98-99 models: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PCM CONNECTORS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
B (25P) D(16P) / 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) A T P D3 (PNK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 8 9 11 12
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 (BLK)
13 14 15
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
LG1 Wire side of female terminals

(BRN/BLK)
Is there voltage?
W i r e side of female terminals Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the D8

'00-01 models:
13. Shift to [ 2 position.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 14. Measure the voltage between the D14 and B20 or
LG1
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
(BRN/BLK)
B (25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15 16
LG2 ATP 2 (BLU)

(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there voltage?
LG1
Y E S Repair open in the w i r e between the D13 (BRN/BLK)
C98-99) or B14 ('00-01) terminal and the
transmission range switch. Wire side of female terminals
N O - G o to step 11. Is there voltage?
Y E S Repair open in the wire between the D14

14-70
15. Shift to Q] position.

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25 13 14 15
10
16
12
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ATP 1 (BRN)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there voltage?
YES Repair open in the w i r e between the D15

IMO - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
14-71
DTC P0753: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
2. Disconnect PCM connectors B (25P) and D (16P). B (25P)

D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18
13 14 15
10
16
12
B22 terminals. L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
LG1 ^
D(16P) (BRN/BLK)
B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
Is the resistance 12-25 Q?
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
14 15 16
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK) 7. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22
terminals and body ground.
Is there voltage?
Y E S Repair short to power in the w i r e between 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the D7 terminal and the shift solenoid valve A. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

/ 17 18
N O - G o to step 5. /
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
NO Repair open in the wires between the B20 and

B22 terminals and ground (G101).B
14-72
<3
8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D7 and B20 or B22 terminals.
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS (BLK/YEL)
SH A (BLU/YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25 13 14 15
10
16
12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
13 14 15 16
LG2IBLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
(BRN/BLK)

Is there continuity? Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM
Y E S Repair short to ground in the w i r e between connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
the D7 terminal and shift solenoid valve A H PCM and recheck.
N O - G o to step 10. N O - C h e c k for b l o w n No. 6 (15A) fuse in the

driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
10. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal
of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
solenoid valve A connector and body g r o u n d .
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE/

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R (3P)
S H A (WHT)
Y E S Check for open in the wire between the D7

terminal and shift solenoid valve AM
NO Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid

valve/shift solenoid valve A.
14-73
D T C P0758: Problem in Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

B Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
2. Disconnect PCM connectors B (25P) and D (16P). B (25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)*

/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18
13 14 15
10
16
12
B22 terminals. L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
LG1
D (16P) (BRN/BLK)
B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
13 14 15 16
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
terminals and body ground individually.
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there voltage?
Y E S - Repair short to power in the w i r e between 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B.
N O - G o t o step 5. /
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BLK:'98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
N O - R e p a i r open in the wires between the B20 and

B22 terminals and ground (G10D.H
14-74
0
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Check for continuity between the D2 and B20 or 12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or
B22 terminals. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL

S H B (GRN/WHT) (BLK/YEL)
B (25P)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18
13 14 15
10
16
12
/
9 10
20
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25 13 14 15
10 12
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) LG2 (BLK;'98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1 ^ LG1 w
(BRN/BLK) (BRN/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity ? Is there approx. battery voltage?

YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM
the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck.
NO - Go to step 10.
N O - C h e c k f o r blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
10. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
solenoid valve connector. repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E
B CONNECTOR
YES Check for open in the wires between the D2

terminal and the shift solenoid valve B and
between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid
valve B connector and ground (G101).
NO Replace the shift solenoid valve B.
14-75
D T C P0720: Problem in Countershaft S p e e d 5. Check for continuity between body ground and the
S e n s o r Circuit D10 terminal and D16 terminal individually.
P C M C O N N E C T O R D (16P)
NOTE: Record ail freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.
1. Check the countershaft speed sensor installation. N C (BLU)
Is the countershaft speed sensor installed

properly?
Y E S - G o to step 2. N C S G (GRN)
NOReinstall and recheck
2. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor 2P

connector.
3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at Is there continuity?

the sensor connector.
YES Repair short to ground in the wires between
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
the D10 and D16 terminals and the countershaft
SENSOR CONNECTOR
speed sensor.
6. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector.
7. Measure the resistance between the D10 and D16

terminals.
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
N C (BLU)
Is the resistance 400- 600 Q ?
Y E S - G o to step 4. 11 12
13 14 15 16
NO Replace the countershaft speed sensor.
N C S G (GRN)
4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).

PCM and recheck.
NO Repair loose terminal or open in the wires

between the D10 and D16 terminals and the
countershaft speed sensor.
14-76
D T C P0715: Problem in Mainshaft S p e e d 4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).
S e n s o r Circuit
NOTE; D11 terminal and D12 terminal individually.
Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot,
* Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn't always mean
there's an electrical problem in the mainshaft or
countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15)
may also indicate a mechanical problem in the
1
6 7
2
8
3
/
9 10 11
5
12
transmission. A n y problem causing irregular
13 14 15 16 N M S G (WHT)
countershaft to mainshaft speed difference can cause
this code. N M (RED)
1. Check the mainshaft and countershaft speed

sensor installation.
Are the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensor

installed properly? W i r e side of female terminals
Y E S - G o to step 2. Is there continuity?
NO Reinstall and recheck. Y E S Repair short to ground in the wires between

the D11 and D12 terminals and the mainshaft speed
2. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P sensor.
connector.
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the
sensor connector. 6. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector.
MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR

7. Measure the resistance between the D11 and D12
CONNECTOR
terminals.
1 2 1
6 7
2
8
3
9
/
10 11
5
12
13 14 15 16 N M S G (WHT)
N M (RED)

NO Replace the mainshaft speed sensor.
Y E S Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart
for code P0720 (code 9). Check for loose terminal fit
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good PCM and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-77
8. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P

connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D11 terminal and

the No. 1 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
6 7 8
2 3
/
9 10 11 12
5
13 14 15 16 NM (RED)
MAINSHAFT SPEED RED

SENSOR CONNECTOR f
YES Go to step 10.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the D11

terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor.
10. Check for continuity between the D12 terminal and

the No. 2 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
6
1
7 8
2 3
/
9 10 11 12
5
13 14 15 16 N M S G (WHT)
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
1 2
Y E S - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the D12

terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor.
14-78
DTC P1768: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 5. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit valve A connector.
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you t r o u b l e s h o o t 6. Measure the resistance between the B8 and B17
terminals.
1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A 2P connector.
2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid LS A - (WHT)
resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L S A + (RED)
Is the resistance approx. 5 Q ?
YES- G o t o step 7.
NO Repair loose terminal or open in the wires
between the B8 and B17 terminals and A/T clutch
Is the resistance approx. 5 Q? pressure control solenoid valve A
YES Go to s t e p 3 . 7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).

NO Replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). 9. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
B8 terminal and the B17 terminal individually.
(BLK/YEL)
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P) D (16P)
B (25P)
LS A - (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 10 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15
9
/
10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 2 5
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
L S A + (RED)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there approx. battery voltage?
YES Repair short to ground in the wires between N O - C h e c k for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
the B8 and B17 terminals and A/T clutch pressure driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
control solenoid valve A repair open in the w i r e between the D5 terminal
NO - G o t o step 5. and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
(cont'd)
14-79
11. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22

terminals and body g r o u n d .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK) L G 2 (BLK: ' 9 8 - 9 9 )

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals

PCM and recheck.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the B2, B10,

B20 and B22 terminals and g r o u n d (G101). Repair
poor ground ( G 1 0 D . H
14-80
0 0
DTC P0763: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
C Circuit
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
S H C (GRN)
2. Disconnect PCM connectors B (25P) and D (16P). D (16P)

B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1
7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 10 12

B22 terminals.
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
14 15 16
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
S H C (GRN)
LG1
D(16P) (BRN/BLK)
B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12 Is the resistance 12- 25 Q ?
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
13 14 15 16
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
terminals and body ground.
Is there voltage?
Y E S - Repair short to power in the w i r e between 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve CM 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

/ 17 18
NO Go to step 5. / 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK) L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
NO Repair open in the wires between the B20 and

B22 terminals and ground (G10D.B
(cont'd)
14-81
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Check for continuity between the D3 and B20 or 12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or
B22 terminals. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL

S H C (GRN) (BLK/YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P) D (16P)
B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
A
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
13 14 15 16
( B R N / B L K : '00-01) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1 LG1 ^
(BRN/BLK) (BRN/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there continuity? Is there approx. battery voltage?

Y E S Repair short to ground in the w i r e between Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM
the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve C. connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and r e c h e c k .
N O - C h e c k for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
solenoid valve connector. repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E
C CONNECTOR
Y E S Check for open in the wires between the D3

terminal and the shift solenoid valve C and
between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid
valve C connector and g r o u n d (G101).H
NO Replace shift solenoid valve C.B
14-82
DTC P1773: Problem in A / T Clutch Pressure 3. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).
Control S o l e n o i d Valve B Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. B18 terminal and the B25 terminal individually.
1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B 2P connector.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25 L
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL LS B + (ORN)
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
1 2
L Is there continuity ?
Y E S - Repair short to ground in the wires between

the B18 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch pressure
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s control solenoid valve B.M
Is the resistance approx. 5 q? NO G o t o step 5.
Y E S - G o t o step 3. 5. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve B 2P connector.
NO - Replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B . B 6. Measure the resistance between the B 1 8 and B25
terminals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
/ 20 21 22
LS B +
23 24 25
(ORN)
L1 S B - (GRN)
Is the resistance approx. 5 q?
N O - Repair loose terminal or open in the wires

between the B 1 8 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B . B
(cont'd)
14-83
7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22
terminals and body ground individually.
B22 terminals.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(BLK/YEL)
D (16P)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK) L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)

9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12 ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15 16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there approx. battery voltage? connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck.
N O - C h e c k for b l o w n No. 6 (15A) fuse in the NO Repair open in the wire between the B2, B10,
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101). Repair
repair open in the w i r e between the D5 terminal poor ground ( G 1 0 D . B
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. a
14-84
DTC P1738: Problem In 2nd Clutch Pressure 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) ('98-99) or D
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. (16P) COO-01).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
2. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals.
6. Check OP2SW for continuity to ground:
'98-99 models; Terminals B14 and B20 or B22.
'00-01 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22. '98-99 models: Between B14 terminal and body
ground.
'98-99 models: '00-01 models: Between D13 terminal and body
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P) ground.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 '98-99 models:
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
/ 20 21 22 23 2 4 25
OP2SW (BLU/BLK) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
9 10
20
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
'00-01 models: Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTORS
'00-01 models:
B (25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 10 12 1 2 3
/ 5
/ 20 2122 23 24 25 13 14 15 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
OP2SW (BLU/BLK) 13 14 15 16
LG2
(BRN/BLK) OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK) ^ r

YES - G o t o step 7.
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between
NO - G o t o step 3. the B14 C98-99) or D13 ('00-01) terminal and the
2nd clutch pressure s w i t c h .
N O - C h e c k f o r loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-85
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 12. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch
securely supported. connector.
8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
securely.
14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
9. Start the engine, then shift to \H position and drive pressure switch connector terminal and body
for more than five seconds. ground.
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
10. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals: SWITCH CONNECTOR
'98-99 models: Terminals B14 and B20 or B22.

'00-01 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22.
1
'98-99 models: BLU/BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
LG1
/
(BRN/BLK)
20 21 22 23 24 25
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l
Is there approx. battery voltage?
N O - Repair open in the wire between the 2nd

W i r e side of female terminals clutch pressure switch and the PCM.
'00-01 models: 15. Measure the resistance between the 2nd clutch
pressure switch connector terminal and body
PCM CONNECTORS
ground.
B (25P) D (16P)
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
/
SWITCH CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 10 12
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15 16
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there approx. 0 V? T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM Is the resistance 10 MQ or more?

PCM and recheck. Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM
NO - Go to step 11. PCM and recheck.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOReplace the 2nd clutch pressure switch.
14-86
D T C PI739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).
NOTE: Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.
5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector.
2. Measure the voltage between the B24 and B20 or 6. Check for continuity between the B24 terminal and
B22 terminals. body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P) P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
/
9 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG1 OP3SW (BLU/WHT) OP3SW (BLU/WHT)

(BRN/BLK)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-01)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES ~ G o to step 7. YES Repair short to ground in the wire between

the B24 terminal and the 3rd clutch pressure
N O - G o to step 3. switch.
N O - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-87
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
securely supported. pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels
3RD C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
securely. SWITCH CONNECTOR
9. Start the engine, then shift to E position and drive

in 3rd gear for more than five seconds.
10. Measure the voltage between the B24 and B20 or BLU/WHT
B22 terminals.
PCM C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l
LG1 OP3SW (BLU/WHT) Is there battery voltage?

(BRN/BLK)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: Y E S - G o to step 15.
'00-01)
NO Repair open in the wire between the 3rd
& -
clutch pressure switch and the PCM.B
15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch

Is there approx. 0 V? pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
3RD CLUTCH P R E S S U R E
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good SWITCH CONNECTOR
PCM and recheck.
12. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch

connector.
Terminal side of male terminal
Is the resistance 10 MQ or more?

PCM and recheck.
NO Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch.
14-88
DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control
System
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates

another code.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another code?
Y E S Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after
troubleshooting.
NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected.
2. Measure the line pressure.
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
NORepair the hydraulic system as necessary (see

page 1 4 - 1 0 4 ) .
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve

(lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve
A (see page 14-106).
4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B (see page 14-109).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM

m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
6. Using the scan t o o l , check to be sure that the

engine coolant temperature is in 176F (80C) and
above.
7. Drive the vehicle at 55 m p h (88 km/h) constantly for

more than one minute.
8. Recheck for code P0740.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code P0740?
Y E S Replace the transmission and torque

converter.
N O - T h e system is OK at this t i m e . H
D T C P0730: P r o b l e m in Shift Control S y s t e m

another code.

troubleshooting
NOTE: Do not continue w i t h this troubleshooting
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected.
2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch pressure

(see page 14-104).
Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?
NO Repair the hydraulic system as necessary
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve

(lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve
A (see page 14-106).
4. Replace the shift solenoid valves B and C (see page

14-107).

valves A and B (see page 14-109).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM

m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle at a speed over 12 m p h (20 km/h)

in 1st, 2nd, 3 r d , 4th gear in H position f o r more
than 30 seconds.
YES Replace the transmission.
NO - The system is OK at this t i m e .
14-90
D T C P0780: M e c h a n i c a l Problem in Hydraulic
Control S y s t e m for Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A
a n d A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e Control S o l e n o i d
V a l v e s A a n d B, or Problem in Hydraulic
Control S y s t e m

another code.
YES Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

troubleshooting.
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/

shift solenoid valve A assembly (see page 14-106),
and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A and B assembly (see page 14-109).
4. Reset the PCM m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP

fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box
for more than 10 seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd,

3rd, and 4th gears in H position.
YES Replace the transmission.
NOThe problem has been corrected.

D T C P1750: M e c h a n i c a l P r o b l e m In H y d r a u l i c DTC P1751: M e c h a n i c a l P r o b l e m in Hydraulic

Control S y s t e m for A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e Control S y s t e m for Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e B
Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e s A and B, or P r o b l e m a n d A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e Control S o l e n o i d
in Hydraulic Control S y s t e m V a l v e s A a n d B, or P r o b l e m in Hydraulic
Control S y s t e m
another code. 1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates
another code.
the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P1750 after Y E S - Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for
troubleshooting.H the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P1751 after
troubleshooting H
NO G o t o step 2.
N O - Go to step 2.
valves A and B (see page 14-109). 3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-
107), and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. Reset the PCM m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP valves A and B (see page 14-109).
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box
for more than 10 seconds. 4. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd,
3rd, and 4th gears in E position.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2 n d ,
3rd, and 4th gears in E] position. 5. Recheck for code P1751.
6. Recheck for code P1750. Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code P1751?
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code P1750? Y E S - Replace the transmission. H
Y E S - R e p l a c e the transmission. NO The problem has been corrected.
NO The problem has been c o r r e c t e d . *
14-92
D4 Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the H 10. Measure the voltage between the D9 terminal and
indicator light. body g r o u n d .
Does the E indicator light come on and stay on?
Y E S - G o t o step 2. 1 2 3
/ 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NO If the light comes on for about t w o seconds
and then goes off, it's OK. If it doesn't come on at 13 14 15 16
all, go t o step 11. A T P D4 (YEL)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). W i r e side of female terminals
5. Measure the voltage between the A14 terminal and Is there approx. 5 V?
body ground.
YES Faulty PCM or the gauge assembly.
NO Check for short to g r o u n d in the w i r e between
/
the D9 terminal and the transmission range switch.
/ 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 10
If wire is OK, check the transmission range
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/ 23 24
switch.
2 5 26 27 28 29 30
D4 IND (GRN/BLK)
/ 32
11. Make sure the Honda PGM Tester is not connected

to the DLC.
12. Shift t o S position.
Does the B indicator light come on?

Is there voltage? connectors and recheck the B indicator light
several times. If the problem is intermittent,
YES Repair short to power in the w i r e between substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. If the
the A14 terminal and the gauge a s s e m b l y . light then works OK every t i m e , replace the original
PCM.B
7. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).
9. Shift t o any position other than &
(cont'd)
14-93
U S Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and B20 19. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P).
and B22 terminals.
20. Connect the digital multimeter between the A14
and B20 or B22 terminals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 17 18 PCM CONNECTORS
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
A (32P) B (25P)
LG1 (BRN/BLK) L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 1415
/ 17 18
26 27 28 29 30 (311 32
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
D4 IND LG1
(GRN/BLK) (BRN/BLK)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
Is there continuity between ground and each ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
terminal?
Is there voltage for at least 2 seconds?
NO Repair open in the wire(s) between the B20 or
B22 terminal and ground (G101) B YES Check for open in the wire between the A14
terminal and the gauge assembly. If wire is OK,
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). check for a faulty B indicator light bulb or a faulty
printed circuit board in the gauge assembly.B
17. Measure the voltage between terminals B1 and B22,
and between terminals B9 and B20. NO G o t o step 22.
IGP1 ( Y E L / B L K )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IGP2 (YEL/BLK)
/
y 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/ 17 18
23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BLK:'98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
NO Repair open or short in the w i r e between the

B1 or B9 terminal and the PGM-FI main relay and
f r o m fuse No. 46 in the under-hood fuse/relay box
to the PGM-FI main relay. B
14-94
24. Check for continuity between the A14 terminal and

No. 12 terminal of the gauge assembly C (16P)
connector.
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 (313 32
(GRN/BLK)
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C (16P)
CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
X 12
/ 14 15 16
D4 IND ( G R N / B L K )

connectors. Check the transmission range switch. If
recheck H
NORepair open in the wire between the A14

terminal and the gauge assembly.
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Press the brake pedal. 5. Measure the voltage between the B12 terminal of
the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P)
Are the brake lights ON? connector and body ground w i t h the throttle
released and the brake pedal pressed.
MULTIPLEX C O N T R O L UNIT, DRIVER'S
NO Repair faulty brake light circuit, refer to B (22P) C O N N E C T O R
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 19-8).B
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 22
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to IB
position. ILU (WHT/RED)
X XXX
3. Press the brake pedal, and release the accelerator
pedal.
4. Measure the voltage between the A28 terminal and Wire side of female terminals
body g r o u n d .

(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 NO Repair open in the wire between the A28

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31] 32 terminal of the PCM and B12 terminal of the driver's
ILU ( W H T / R E D ) multiplex control unit. H
6. Measure the voltage between the B22, terminal of

the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P)
connector and body ground.
MULTIPLEX C O N T R O L UNIT, DRIVER'S

B (22P) C O N N E C T O R
1/ 3 4 5
11 12 13 14 15 1 6 X 17
6 7 8 9
22
X
XXXX
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
(GRN)
NO Repair open in the wire between the B22

terminal of the driver's multiplex control unit and
the driver's under-dash fuse No. 9 (via the shift lock
solenoid).
14-96
Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the shift 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
lever to E position.
9. Disconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P).
Dose the OB indicator in the gauge assembly
illuminate? 10. Measure the voltage between the A32 and B20 or
B22 terminals while pressing the brake pedal.
YESCheck for loose terminal fit to the driver's
PCM CONNECTORS
multiplex control unit B12 and B22 terminal wires.
If necessary, substitute a known-good driver's A (32P) B (25P)
multiplex control unit.B
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Repair open in the IB position switch circuit

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 18
from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box K10 25 26 27 28 29 30 (31 32
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
(BLK/BLU) wire to ground ( G 1 0 D . B BK S W LG1

(WHT/BLK) (BRN/
BLK)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
NO Repair open in the wire between the A32

terminal and the brake pedal position switch (brake
switch).
(cont'd)
14-97
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P). 16. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of
the throttle position sensor and the B20 or B22
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal of the PCM.
13. Measure the voltage between the C27 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) C (31P)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 LG1 (BRN/BLK) L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
/ / 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 21 22
/
23 24 25
17 18
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR CONNECTOR
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) TPS
( B R N / B L K ; '00-01) (RED/BLK) 1
SG1 (GRN/BLK)
LG1 Wire side of female terminals
(BRN/BLK)
Y E S - Replace the throttle body.

Is there approx. 0.5 V (throttle fully closed)?
NO Go to step 17.
Y E S - C h e c k f o r loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good 17. Check for continuity between the C18 and B20 or
PCM and recheck. B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) C(31P)
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

//
1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10
15. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.

/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18
/ // 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
20 21 22 23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
/ 25 26 27 21
SG2
29 30
V
( B R N / B L K : '00-01) (GRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Y E S Repair open in the wire between the C18

terminal and the throttle position sensor.
NO Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
14-98
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the A/T shift cable adjustment (see page 14- 6. Measure the voltage between the No. 7 terminal
136). and body ground.
K E Y S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R (7P)
2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector f r o m the
steering lock assembly.
3. Connect the No. 7 terminal of the key switch

connector to the battery positive terminal, and
WHT/YEL
connect the No. 5 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
1 / 3 / 5 6 7 W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
e e
N O - C h e c k f o r blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the unde

r-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open
Terminal side of male terminals or short in the wire between the No. 7 terminal of
the key switch connector and under-hood fuse/
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the relay b o x . H
ignition key.
7. Disconnect the park pin switch 4P connector on the
5. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A front side of the shift lever.
clicking sound should be heard while pushing the
ignition key, and no sound should be heard w h e n 8. With the shift lever in Park, check for continuity
releasing the key. between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the park
pin switch 4P connector.
Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly?
P A R K PIN S W I T C H
NO -Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace 1 2 3 4

the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly.H
BLK WHT/RED
NOTE: Do not re-key the new ignition switch.

Re-key the other lock cylinder to match the new
switch.
NO Repair open in the wires between the park pin

switch and the 4P connector. If wires are OK,
replace the park pin switch.
(cont'd)
14-99
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
the park pin switch 4P connector and the No. 5
terminal of the key switch connector.
1 / 3 / 5 6 7
WHT/RED
WHT/RED
1 2 3 4
NO Repair open in the w i r e between No. 4

terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and
the No. 5 terminal of the key switch connector

the 4P connector and body g r o u n d .
1 2 3 4
BLK
i J)
YES Check for loose key switch connector and

park pin switch connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good steering lock a s s e m b l y .
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 3

terminal of the 4P connector and ground ( G 1 0 D . B
14-100
<3&
Road Test
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to B position while pressing the brake
pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in B position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and g o t o the PGM-FI Data List; then g o t o step 1. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Pull back the carpet f r o m the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM (A).
6. Connect the digital multimeter (B) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 ( + ) terminal and B20
( - ) or B22 ( - ) terminal of the PCM.
(cont'd)
14-101
Road Test (cont'd)

7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the E position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by m o n i t o r i n g the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
Upshift-El position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd 4th Lock-up ON
Throttle position mph 9-10 21-23 30-34 45 48
sensor voltage: 0.7 V km/h 14-16 33-37 48-54 73 - 7 7
Throttle position mph 24-27 45-48 65-68 77-81
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 39-43 72-78 104-110 124-130
Fully-opened throttle. mph 35-39 65-68 98-101 99-103
Throttle position km/h 57-63 104-110 157-163 160-166
sensor voltage: 4.5 V
Downshift-IB position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up O F F 4th 3rd 3rd 2nd 2nd 1st
Throttle position mph 44-47 17-19 6 - 8 (3rd 1st)
sensor voltage: 0.8 V km/h 71-75 27-31 9 - 1 3 (3rd 1st)
Throttle position mph 68-71
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 109-115
Fully-opened throttle. mph 90-94 89-92 54-58 27-31
Throttle position km/h 145-151 142-148 87-93 44-50
sensor voltage: 4.5 V
8. Accelerate to about 35 m p h (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift f r o m B position to [2] position.
The vehicle should immediately begin s l o w i n g d o w n f r o m engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the f o l l o w i n g positions.
0D (1st Gear) Position

Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur w i t h the shift lever in this position.
SO (2nd Gear) Position

Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur w i t h the shift lever in this position.
I B (Reverse) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle, and check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
10. Test in E (Park) Position.

Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16), apply the parking brake, and shift into B position. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
14-102
Stall Speed Test
1. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.
3. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
4. After the engine has w a r m e d up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to \2\ position.
5. Fully press the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
6. Allow t w o minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in H, CU, and SB positions.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
Stall speed should be the same in H, [2], H , and BE positions.
Do not test stall speed w i t h the A/T pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification: 2,400 rpm
Service Limit: 2,250 2,550 rpm
TROUBLE PROBABLE C A U S E
Stall rpm high in H, CU, [J, and IE positions Low fluid level or ATF pump output
Clogged ATF strainer
Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
Slipping clutch
Stall rpm high in CD position Slippage of 1st clutch
Stall rpm high in [JD position Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall rpm high in OH position Slippage of 4th clutch
Stall rpm low in H, [2], IS, and IE positions Engine output low
Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
14-103
Pressure Tests
A/T oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400
A/T pressure hose, 2210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled t o the proper level.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. A l l o w the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. W a r m up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect the tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the holes.
TORQUE: 18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
A / T OIL PRESSURE G A U G E A / T PRESSURE HOSE, 2 2 1 0 m m A / T PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER

SET W / P A N E L 07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY40120
07406-0020400 (4 Required) (4 Required)
INSPECTION HOLE INSPECTION HOLE INSPECTION HOLE
14-104
0
7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm.
8. Shift to H or E position, and measure line pressure at line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE; Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than H or [ 0 .
9. Shift to QQ position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B).
10. Shift to [2] position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to [B position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to H position, and release the brake pedal (the transmission is in 1st gear).
13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission will be shifted to 2nd gear).
14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission is shifted to 2nd gear, the engine speed
will decrease to about 1,000 r p m .
15. Press the accelerator very slowly (so it takes at least 5 seconds to raise the engine speed to 2,000rpm), then hold
the engine speed at 2,000 r p m .
16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), as the transmission will shifted 2nd gear to 3rd gear, then to 4th gear.
PRESSURE SHIFT SYMPTOM PROBABLE C A U S E FLUID P R E S S U R E

LEVER
POSITION Standard Service Limit
Line 05] or E No (or low) Torque converter, 800 860 kPa 760 kPa
2
(A) line pressure ATF pump, pressure 2
( 8 . 2 - 8 . 8 kgf/cm , (7.7 kgf/cm , 110
regulator valve, 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) psi)
torque converter
check valve
1st clutch m No or low 1st 1st clutch 790 870 kPa 750 kPa
2
(B) pressure 2
( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 kgf/cm , (7.6 kgf/cm , 110
120 130 psi) psi)
2nd clutch m No or low 2nd 2nd clutch
(C) pressure
3rd clutch S3 No or low 3rd 3rd clutch

(D) pressure
4th clutch No or low 4th 4th clutch

(E) pressure
m Servo valve or 4th
clutch
17. Install the inspection hole bolts w i t h new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 18 N m (1.8 kgf.m,13 Ibfft)
NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.
14-105
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A
Replacement
1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve 3P connector/shift solenoid valve A. NOTE: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A assembly must be removed/replaced
as an assembly.
1. Remove the bolts securing the ignition coil bracket

('98-99 models), then remove the harness cover
f r o m the transmission hanger.
2. Remove the mounting bolts and torque converter

clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A.
2. Measure the resistance of the torque converter

clutch solenoid valve between the No. 3 terminal of
the 3P connector and body ground.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
3. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve A

between the No. 1 terminal of the 3P connector and
body ground.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
4. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/ 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
shift solenoid valve A if either resistance is out of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
specification. solenoid valve A, and install a new torque
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
5. If the resistance is w i t h i n the standard, connect the A w i t h a new filter/gasket (B).
No. 1 terminal of the 3P connector to the battery
positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 4. Install the harness cover on the transmission
Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive hanger, and install the ignition coil bracket bolts
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. ('98-99 models).
Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A if no sound is heard w h e n 5. Install the male terminal connector (C) of the
connecting either terminal to the battery positive solenoid connector on the harness cover.
terminal.
6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
reconnect the connector securely.
14-106
Shift Solenoid Valves B and C Test Shift Solenoid Valves B and C
Replacement
1. Remove the starter.
2. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B or C NOTE: If the shift solenoid valve B and C are replaced or
connector. removed at the same time, be sure to reinstall t h e m
correctly. The connector color of shift solenoid valve B
is black, and the connector color of shift solenoid valve
C is brown.
1. Remove the starter.
NOTE: If you are only replacing shift solenoid valve

C, starter removal is not needed.
2. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid

valve B.
3. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and

No. 2 terminals of the shift solenoid valve B or C.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
4. Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if the

resistance is out of standard.
5. If the resistance is w i t h i n the standard, connect the

No. 2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve B or C 6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 3. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid
Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if no sound valve C.
is heard.
4. Install a new shift control solenoid valve B or C w i t h
new O-rings (A). While installing the valves, do not
allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then

reconnect the connector securely.
6. Install the starter.
14-107
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch
valves A and B 2P connectors. pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the
A battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2
terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make
sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A and B move.
2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1
and No. 2 terminals of each connector.
STANDARD: Approx. 5.0 Q 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check
valve movement.
3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch body (C).
pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the
battery positive t e r m i n a l , and connect the No. 2 9. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the
terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not
sound should be heard. operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.
5. If not, remove the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.
6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valve for dust and dirt.
14-108
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement
1. Remove the ATF cooler hose (outlet line) at the ATF 4. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
cooler line. Turn the end of the cooler hose up to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
prevent ATF f r o m f l o w i n g o u t then plug the line and B and the transmission housing.
and hose.
5. Place the new gasket (B) on the transmission
2. Remove the ATF cooler line (outlet line) f r o m the housing, then install the 8 x 1 8 m m ATF feed pipe
transmission housing. (C), 8 x 2 6 m m pipe (D) and 8 x 36 m m pipe (E) w i t h
their filter side into the transmission housing.
3. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B (A). 6. Install the new O-rings (F) over the feed pipes, and
install the 8 x 40 m m ATF feed pipe (G).
6x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
7. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B and harness clamp bracket (H).
8. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
t h e m securely.
9. Install the ATF cooler line (outlet line), and connect

the ATF cooler hose to the cooler line.
14-109
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and

countershaft speed sensors.
2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed

sensor/then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
from the end cover.
3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed

sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor
from the transmission housing.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones before installing

the sensors.
5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed

sensors, then connect the connectors.
14-110
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch 3rd Clutch Pressure Switch
Replacement Replacement
1. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch 1. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector. connector.
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 I b f f t )
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f m , 1 4 I b f f t )
2. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install

2. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch, then install a new one w i t h a new sealing washer. Tighten the
a new one w i t h a new sealing washer. Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no
3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
14-111
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the
recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to bring it
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on the level g r o u n d . Turn off the B
2 4 x 1.5 m m
engine. 4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) f r o m the

transmission, and wipe it w i t h a clean cloth.
A
A
7. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) w i t h a new sealing
washer (C).
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It
should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
14-112
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 5. Refill the transmission w i t h the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the
engine off. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.9 fl (3.1 U S qt, 2.6 Imp qt) at changing
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and 7.2 fl (7.6 U S qt, 6.3 Imp qt) at overhaul
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
B
2 4 x 1.5 m m
NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF 4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
Cooler Flushing (see page 14-127).
18 x 1.5 m m
4 9 N m (5.0 k g f m , 3 6 I b f f t ) A
6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) w i t h a new sealing
washer (C).
4. Reinstall the drain plug w i t h a new sealing washer.
14-113
Transmission Removal
1. Before disconnecting power, make sure you have 8. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) f r o m the clamp (B)
the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n on the starter.
the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
2. Disconnect the battery negative t e r m i n a l , then

remove the positive terminal.
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then

remove the battery and battery tray.
4. Remove the battery cable clamps f r o m the battery

base.
5. Loosen the m o u n t i n g bolts securing the battery

base bracket, then remove the battery base bracket
and battery base. B A
6. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing 9. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) f r o m the ATF
assembly. cooler lines (C). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler
hoses up to prevent ATF f r o m f l o w i n g out, then
7. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
supported. Remove the drain plug, and drain the
automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall the NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose
drain plug w i t h a new sealing washer. joints.
10. Remove the starter cables (A) f r o m the starter (B)

and clamp bracket (C), then remove the starter.
11. Remove the transmission ground terminal (D).
12. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B connector (E),

and C connector (F), then remove the harness
clamp f r o m the clamp bracket.
14-114
<3
13. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch 17. Disconnect the connectors from the countershaft
pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), speed sensor (A), and 2nd clutch pressure switch
and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A (B).
and B (C), then remove the harness clamps from
the clamp brackets.
18. Remove the transmission range switch connector

(C) from the connector bracket (D), then disconnect
it.
14. Disconnect the connector from the torque 19. Remove the nut from the front mount.
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
A assembly (A), then remove the connector from
harness cover (B).
B
15. Remove the two bolts securing the harness cover

and the ignition coil bracket, and remove the
ignition coil (C). ('98-99 models)
16. Push the harness cover rearward to remove from

the transmission hanger (D).
(cont'd)
14-115
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
20. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly 22. Remove the cotter pins <A) and castle nuts (hex
w i t h an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-1256, available nuts) (B), and remove the damper forks (C), then
through the American Honda Tool and Equipment separate the ball joints f r o m the lower arms (D),
p r o g r a m , or equivalent). refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page
18-17).
C
2 1 . Remove the splash shield.
23. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods f r o m the lower arms (D).
24. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the

intermediate shaft, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see step 10 on page 16-4).
14-116
25. Make reference marks (A) across both the front 28. Remove the transmission lower rear mount (A)
beam (B) and the rear beam (C). from the transmission.
26. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam A

(B), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipe (C) 29. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left
from the clamps on the front beam. driveshaft from the differential and to remove the
right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.
30. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,
then tie the plastic bags (B) over the driveshaft
ends.
31. Remove the intermediate shaft.
27. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower

mounts, then remove the front beam (B).
32. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean

engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the both
ends of intermediate shaft.
(cont'd)
14-117
33. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A), 36. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then
then remove shift cable cover (B). remove the eight drive plate bolts (B) one at a time
while rotating the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint,
remove the bolts securing the holder before
removing the bolts securing the cover.
37. Remove the engine stiffener bolts (C).
38. Remove the front mount bracket.
34. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) w i t h the control
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
35. Install a 6 x 1.0 x 14 m m bolt (A) and nut (B) on the

shift cable cover (C), then reinstall the shift cable
cover to the torque converter housing.
(The torque converter may stay on the engine, and
the bolt head will support the torque converter,
w h e n the transmission is removed.)
B
14-118
39. Place a transmission jack under the transmission. 42. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it
clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the
40. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts. transmission jack.
NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive

plate, reach through the starter opening, and pull it
toward the transmission housing.
43. Remove the shift cable cover, then remove the

torque converter assembly from the torque
converter housing.
41. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts

(A) and connector bracket bolt (B).
B A
44. Remove the transmission lower front mount.
(cont'd)
14-119
45. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's
damaged.
46. Remove the 6 x 1.0 x 14 m m bolt (A) and nut (B)

f r o m the shift cable cover (C).
B
14-120
Transmission Installation
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-127). 6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install
the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) and
2. Install the transmission lower front m o u n t connector bracket bolt (B).
B
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f m , 4 7 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N - m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
3. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the A

mainshaft (B) with a new O-ring (C). 1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
D
7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
E
4. Install the 14 m m dowel pin (D) and 10 m m dowel
pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F).
5. Place the transmission on a transmission jack, and

12 x 1.25 m m
raise it to engine level. 6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
14-121
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
8. Install the front mount bracket. 13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
excessively.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
9. Install the engine stiffener mounting bolts (A).

C
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
B 14 N m (1.4 k g f m , 10 I b f f t )
14. Install the lock bolt (D) w i t h a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.

be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
16. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft

A contacts the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent
10 x 1.25 m m or carburetor cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air.
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
Then install the intermediate shaft in the
10. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (B) differential. While installing the intermediate shaft,
w i t h eight bolts (C). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified to enter the transmission.
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
10 x 1.25 m m
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
3 9 N m (4.0 k g f m , 3 0 I b f f t )
crankshaft rotates freely.
11. Install the torque converter cover (D).
12. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see

page 6-17).
14-122
17. Install new set rings on the right and left 20. Install the front beam (A) by aligning both reference
driveshafts. marks (B) on both rear beam (C), and tighten the
bolts.
18. Install the right and left driveshaft, refer to
A
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 16-20).
While installing the left driveshaft in the differential,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
NOTE:
Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air.
Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully
outward, and slide the left driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its spring clip engage
the side gear. Slide the right driveshaft into the
intermediate shaft until you feel its spring clip
engage the intermediate shaft.
19. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the

transmission.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N-m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
21. Install the transmission lower mount nuts (D).
22. Connect the vacuum tube (E), and install the power
steering fluid pipe (F) on its clamps.
(cont'd)
14-123
2 3 . Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball 2 7 . Install and tighten the nut on the front mount.
joints on each lower arms (B) with the castle nuts
1 2 x 1.25 m m
(hex nuts) (C) and new cotter pins (D). 5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
43 N m (4.4 k g f - m , 3 2 I b f f t )
28. Remove the hoist, then remove the hoist bracket

from the engine.
29. Connect the transmission range switch connector

(A), then install it on its connector bracket (B).
12 x 1.25 m m
49~59 N m (5.0-6.0 kgfm,
3 6 - 4 3 Ibfft)
24. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.
25. Remove the jack from the transmission.
26. Install the splash shield.
30. Connect the connectors to the countershaft speed

sensor (C) and 2nd clutch pressure switch (D). Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
14-124
0
31. Install the harness cover (A) on the transmission 34. Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve
hanger (B), then install the ignition coil (C). ('98-99 B (A) and shift solenoid valve C (B), then install the
models) clamp on the clamp bracket.
10 x 1.25 mm
32. Install the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/

shift solenoid valve A assembly connector (D) on
the harness cover, then connect the connector.
33. Connect the connectors to the 3rd clutch pressure

switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), and A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (C),
then install the clamps on the clamp brackets. Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign 35. Install the transmission ground terminal (C).
particles to enter the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector. 36. Install the starter (D) on the torque converter
housing. Connect the starter cables (E) to the
starter, and install the harness clamp on the clamp
bracket. Make sure the crimped side of the starter
cable ring terminal is facing out.
37. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B) (see page 14-128). Clamp the ATF cooler
hose w i t h the clamp (C) on the starter.
I!
(cont'd)
14-125
38. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
39. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
40. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
41. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
42. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-113).
43. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect

the negative terminal.
44. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
45. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position

indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
46. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment, refer

to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-
5).
47. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating

temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the
transmission in OS or OB position, then turn it off
and check the ATF level (see page 14-112).
48. Perform a road test (see page 14-101).
50. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then
retighten the nut to the specified torque.
12x1.25 mm
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f m , 4 0 I b f f t )
14-126
ATF Cooler Flushing
Special Tools Required 7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
Commercially available transmission cooler flusher water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent available.)
This procedure should be performed before reinstalling

the transmission.
1. Check the equipment for wear and cracks before

using it. Replace any w o r n or cracked components.
2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21

ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable
flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with
any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on
the fluid container.
8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water

does not f l o w through the cooler, it is completely
plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced.
9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the

water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger
down.
10. While flushing w i t h the water and flushing fluid for

t w o minutes, turn the air valve on for five seconds
every 15 20 seconds to create a surging action.
2
AIR PRESSURE: M A X 845 kPa (8.45 k g f / c m ,
120 psi)
11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then
reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in
the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the 12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler w i t h water
flusher w i t h compressed air to 5 5 0 - 829 kpa (5.6 - for one minute.
2
8.45 kgf/cm , 8 0 - 1 2 0 psi). The air line should be
equipped w i t h a water trap to ensure a dry air 13. Turn the water valve and the water supply off.
system.
14. Turn the air valve on for t w o minutes, or until no
4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle. moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (B) to the return transmission.
line of the ATF cooler using a clamp.
15. Remove the flusher f r o m the cooler line. Attach the
6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the drain hose to an ATF container.
ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the
opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or 16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose
floor drain. attached to the cooler line.
(cont'd)
14-127
ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd) ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement
17. Make sure the transmission is in OS position. 1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the
Fill the transmission w i t h ATF, and run the engine ATF cooler, and secure them w i t h the clips (C).
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 fi
A E D
(1.0 US qt., 0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged.
18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler

return hose to the transmission.
19. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF to the proper level

(see page 14-113).
2. Clamp the ATF cooler hose w i t h the yellow mark

(D) on the clamp (E).
14-128
Shift Lever Removal
1. Shift the transmission into SB position. 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)
and park pin switch 4P connector (B).
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A),

then separate the shift cable end f r o m the shift
lever assembly.
\ ;
6. Remove the four bolts (C) securing the shift lever

bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)

counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder to remove the shift cable f r o m the shift lever
bracket base (C).
NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting

the shift cable guide pipe (D).
14-129
Shift Lever Installation

1. Install the shift lever assembly. 5. Insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the
positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the through the positioning hole on the shift lever
El position indicator light comes on. assembly.
3. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then

release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one
step so that the shift position is in E . Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C).
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) w i t h the
square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the
shift cable.
+ +++ NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the

shift cable guide (H).
14-130
7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly 10. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
installed on the mounting stud (B). to hold the shift lever.
Properly Installed:
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and park
pin switch 4P connector.
A B 13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
Not Properly Installed:
lever releases.
Cable e n d rides o n t h e b o t t o m
of the m o u n t i n g stud.
8. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable

f r o m the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.
9. Install and tighten the nut.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
14-131
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS c o m p o n e n t locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
A p p l y silicone grease to these parts:
Movable parts of the shift lever.

Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism.
Sliding surfaces on the detent spring.
PUSH BUTTON
SPRING
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

PLUNGER
SCREW
3 N m (0.3 k g f - m , 2 I b f f t )
Apply non-hardening thread
lock sealant.
PLUNGER SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CLAMP
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
SHIFT LOCK LIGHT HOUSING
SOLENOID
LEVER COVER
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR LIGHT
8 x 1.25mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
DETENT SPRING
SHIFT CABLE
SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
8 x 1.25mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
14-132
Shift Cable Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Remove the floor heat shield.
securely supported, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 1-15). 8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and
g r o m m e t (B).
2. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels
securely.
3. Shift the transmission into El position.
4. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-01


lever assembly.
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A),

then remove the shift cable cover (B).

remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
cover.
6. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)

bracket base (C).

the shift cable guide pipe (D).
10. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) w i t h the control
lever.
(cont'd)
14-133
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
11. Insert the new shift cable through the g r o m m e t 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket. E position indicator light comes on.
12. Verify that the transmission is in E position on the 18. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then
control shaft. release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one
step so that the shift position is in E.
13. Install the control lever (A) w i t h the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
20. Insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the

through the positioning hole on the shift lever
assembly.
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m ,
10 I b f f t )
14. Install the lock bolt (D) w i t h a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the cover.

be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
14-134
21. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 23. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable
counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the from the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C). shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the cable bracket base.
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the 24. Install and tighten the nut.
shift cable.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the

8x1.25 mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
25. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
22. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
Cable end rides on the bottom

of the mounting stud.
14-135
Shift Cable Adjustment

1. Shift the transmission into E position. 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release your
hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord shift position is in EL

lever assembly.
+ ++++
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the

E position indicator light comes on.
8. Insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the

through the positioning hole on the shift lever
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) assembly.
bracket base (C).

the shift cable guide (D).
14-136
<2
9. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 11. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable
counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the f r o m the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C). shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting m o u n t i n g stud w h i l e the shift cable is on the shift
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) w i t h the cable bracket base.
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the 12. Install and tighten the nut.
shift cable.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the

8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
13. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
10. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly lever releases.
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
A B
Not Properly Installed:
Cable end rides o n the b o t t o m

of the m o u n t i n g stud.
14-137
A/T Gear Position Indicator
Component Location index
A / T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Indicator Input T e s t , p a g e 14-143
I n d i c a t o r B u l b R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-144

T e s t , p a g e 14-140
14-138
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No 41 (100A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (15A)

CTNjO CTNJD
y
YEL
POWEPTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
1
[7
VSP D4 ATP
OUT IND R
D 1 5 | D13 ('96-99 models)

B14 ('00-01 models)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
MULTIPLEX
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
<3 CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
STARTER
r BLK/BLU i CUT RELAY
CRUISE
- RED/BLK | RED/BLK
DIMMING
CIRCUIT LT BLU P> CONTROL
UNIT
Wr-
- PNK - - PNK -
- BLU - - BLU - - BLU
-- -BRN- -BRN- - BRN
14-139
A/T Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) f r o m the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the
transmission range switch connector.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below.
NOTE: Terminal N o . 1 : Neutral position switch
Transmission Range Switch Continuity Check
\ Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Position \
c%
E KJ u
CS. /~\
m w ~ - KJ
m KJ KJ - KJ
B
r\ rs
KJ KJ KJ
B KJ KJ KJ
a s~\ r>
KJ
/-\
KJ
m o O
14-140
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Set the transmission range switch to [ED position.
securely supported, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 1-15). NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in OS
position.
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels
securely.
3. Shift to ED position.
4. Remove the transmission range switch connector

(A) f r o m the connector bracket (B), then disconnect
the transmission range switch connector.
8. Set the control shaft to HI position.
5. Remove the clamp f r o m the harness clamp bracket

on the transmission housing, and remove the
harness clamp (A) f r o m the end cover (B).
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (C),

then remove the transmission range switch (D)
f r o m the end cover.
(cont'd)
14-141
A/T Gear Position indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the transmission range switch (A) on the 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
control shaft (B), then secure it w i t h the bolts. through all gears, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization w i t h the A/T gear
NOTE: Do not move the transmission range switch position indicator (A).
w h e n tightening the bolts.
6 x 1.0 m m
12N-m(1.2 kgfm,
8.7 I b f f t )
13. Move the shift lever through all gears, and verify
the f o l l o w i n g :
The engine will not start in any position other

6 x 1.0 m m than M or B .
12 N m {1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in ID position.
10. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and
the harness clamp (D) on the end cover (E).
11. Connect the transmission range switch connector

(A), then install it on the connector bracket (B).
14-142
0
Indicator Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).
2. Remove the gauge assembly f r o m the dashboard, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68),
then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
- If a test indicates a problem, find a correct the cause, then recheck the system.
- If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y CONNECTORS
B(22P) C(16P)
1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11 12 /// 16|XI/ / 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11|X112 /14 15 16
Cavity Wire Color Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause
(If result is not obtained)
B11 YEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
An open in the wire
B16 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground(G501)
conditions There should be continuity. An open in the wire
C4 WHT Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range
ON (II) and shift There should be 1 V or less. switch
lever in E There should be battery voltage in An open in the wire
C5 BRN Ignition switch any other shift lever position.
ON (II) and shift
lever in [ J
C6 PNK Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in B
C7 BLU Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [2]
C12 GRN/BLK Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range
ON (II) and shift There should be battery voltage. switch
lever in S3 Faulty PCM
An open in the wire
C15 BLK/BLU Shift lever in LB Check for continuity to ground: Faulty transmission range
There should be no continuity in any switch
other shift lever position. An open in the wire
C16 RED/BLK Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground:
ON (II) and shift There should be 1 V or less.
lever in \M There should be battery voltage in
any other shift lever position.
14-143
A/T Gear Position indicator
Indicator Bulb Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-
28).
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01

2. Remove the gauge assembly, refer to the '98-01

3. Disassemble the gauge assembly, refer to

NOTE: Disassembly is not required on all models.
4. Replace the bulbs (A) at the reverse side of the

gauge assembly (B).
14-144
A/T Interlock System 0 0
14-145
A/T Interlock System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
BATTERY
No.47 (20A)
WHT/YEL
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A) No.42(50A) BAT No.9 (7.5A) WHT/YEL

O CH
IG1
STEERING LOCK
YEL ASSEMBLY
GRN WHT/RED
IG1 SHIFT LOCK

SOLENOID
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S
"o^|\ PARK /IJJK PEDAL

PG LG ATP P ILU ii/ SWITCH W POSITION
SWITCH
A15 B12
BLK BLK BLK/BLU WHT/RED BLK WHT/BLK
A
G501
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
G401
14-146
Control Unit Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Disconnect the 22P connector f r o m the multiplex control unit (driver's), then remove the multiplex control unit
(driver's) f r o m the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 3.
NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) while depressing the brake pedal
w i t h the shift lever in B position, the shift lock system is OK. If the shift lever cannot be shifted f r o m E position,
test the transmission range switch.
3. With the driver's unit still disconnected f r o m its connector and the fuse/relay box, make these input tests at its
connector or its fuse/relay box socket.
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
14-147
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTORS
24P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 / 3 4 5
16
6 7 8 9 /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 11 12 13 14 15
N" / / / / 22
Terminal side o f male terminals Wire side of female terminals
M u l t i p l e x Control Unit (Driver's) 24P Connector

A3 Shift lever in B Check for continuity to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
There should be continuity. Poor ground (G101)
An open in the wire
A12 Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
A14 Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
conditions There should be continuity. An open in the wire
A24 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
turned ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Multiplex Control Unit (Driver's) 2 2 P Connector

B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G503)
conditions There should be continuity. A n open in the wire
B22 GRN Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Faulty shift lock solenoid
A n open in the wire
4. Reconnect the connectors to the multiplex control unit (driver's), and make this input test.
B12 WHT/RED Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty brake pedal position
ON (II) and brake There should be battery switch
pedal pushed voltage. Faulty PCM
Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty multiplex control unit
ON (II), brake pedal There should be 1 V or less. (driver's)
and accelerator An open in the wire
pedal pressed at
the same time
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
|f all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit (driver's), and recheck the system.
If the system is OK, the multiplex control unit (driver's) must be faulty; replace it.
14-148
<5
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test
S R S components are located in this area. Review the 1. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-01
S R S component locations, precautions, and procedures Accord Service Manual (see page 20-83).
in the S R S section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23- 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.
28).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, refer

to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-
84).
2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector from the

steering lock assembly.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7

terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no
continuity when the key is released.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid

1 / 3/5 5 6 7 connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
5>. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the E
position. Release the battery terminals from the
shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
back to the B position, and make sure it locks.
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal
(reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power inside the solenoid.
connected to the No. 7 terminal and ground
connected to the No. 3 terminals. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release
lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the
If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock release lever is released.
solenoid is OK.
If the key can be removed, replace the steering 6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.
lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not
available separately).
14-149
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement Park Pin Switch Test
1. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-01 1. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 20-83). Accord Service Manual (see page 20-83).
2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 2. Disconnect the park pin 4P connector.
3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a

screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (B).
E
3. Shift the shift lever into the \E position, then check

for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4
A terminals. There should be no continuity.
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (C) and 4. Shift the shift lever out of the OB position, and check
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid. for continuity between the terminals in step 3.
There should be continuity.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of
the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace the shift
stop (E). lever bracket base.
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then NOTE: The park pin switch is not available
connect the shift lock solenoid connector. separately from the shift lever bracket base.
14-150
Transmission End Cower
End Cover Removal
Exploded View
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET END COVER

END COVER GASKET
Replace. SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSMISSION RANGE
LOCKNUT
SWITCH COVER
Replace.
MAINSHAFT LOCKNUT
TRANSMISSION
Replace.
RANGE SWITCH
P I T O T PIPE
'00-01 models)
LUBRICATION
P I T O T PIPE
00-01 m o d e l s )
BEARING H U B /
BALL BEARING
ASSEMBLY
CONICAL SPRING WASHER
Replace.
PITOT FLANGE
('00-01 m o d e l s )
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING M A I N S H A F T IDLER G E A R

COUNTERSHAFT Replace.
IDLER G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
BREATHER TUBE
A T F C O O L E R LINE
PARK P A W L SHAFT
LINE BOLT
A T F C O O L E R LINE
SEALING WASHERS
LINE BOLT
Replace.
(cont'd)
14-151
Transmission End Cower
End Cover Removal (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.
Mainshaft holder
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

f o l l o w i n g procedure.
1. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
2. Remove the bolts securing the harness clamp (one

bolt) and transmission range switch (two bolts),
then remove the transmission range switch.
3. Remove the bolts securing the end cover (sixteen

0 7 G A B - P F 5 0 1 0 1 or
bolts), then remove the end cover. 07GAB-PF50100
4. For '00-01 models: Remove the pitot pipe (A) and

the lubrication pitot pipe ( B ) f r o m the transmission 6. Engage the park pawl w i t h the park gear.
housing (C), then remove the pitot flange (D) f r o m
the mainshaft idler gear (E). 7. Cut the lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (B) using
a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical
spring washers f r o m each shaft.
NOTE:
Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the
press fit idler gears on the mainshaft and
secondary shaft, and the park gear and bearing
hub on the countershaft.
Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
8. Remove the special tool (mainshaft holder) f r o m

the mainshaft.
14-152
Park Lever Stop Inspection and
Adjustment
Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the
secondary shaft idler gear (B) with a puller (C). 1. Set the park lever (A) in the B position.
C
6x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
2. Measure the distance (B) between the park pawl

10. Remove the bearing hub ( D ) with the puller from shaft (C) and the park lever roller pin (D).
the countershaft then remove the countershaft
idler gear (E) and bearings. STANDARD: 84.6 85.6 m m ( 3 . 3 3 3 . 3 7 in.)
11. Remove the park gear (F) with the puller. 3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and
install the appropriate park lever stop (E) from the
12. Remove the park pawl, spring, shaft, and shaft stop. table below.
13. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
14. Remove the line bolts, then remove the ATF cooler
lines. L2
PARK LEVER STOP
Mark Part Number L1 L2

1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
(0.433 in.) (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65'mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the

distance is within tolerance.
14-153
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
SHAFT HOLDER TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLTS
R E V E R S E IDLER
GEAR SHAFT a ^ HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
4
TT /
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
TRANSMISSION HANGER/
COUNTERSHAFT HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
REVERSE GEAR
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
TRANSMISSION HANGER
SHIFT FORK
TRANSMISSION HOUSING GASKET

Replace.
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
14-154
Special Tools Required 4. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) w i t h
Housing puller 07HAC-PK40102 the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the A C 07HAC-PK40102
following procedure.
1. Remove the t w o bolts securing the reverse idler

gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler
gear shaft holder (A), shaft (B), and washer (C).
5. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then

remove the transmission housing (D).
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too

short, replace it with Housing Puller A r m , 205 m m ,
2. Remove the transmission housing m o u n t i n g bolts, 07SAC-P0Z0101.
transmission hangers, and harness clamp bracket.
6. Remove the reverse idler gear, needle bearings,
3. Move the reverse idler gear (A) to disengage it f r o m and thrust washer f r o m the transmission housing.
the mainshaft and countershaft reverse gears.
7. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then remove
NOTE: The transmission housing will not separate the countershaft reverse gear and the needle
f r o m the torque converter housing if the reverse bearing.
idler gear is not moved.
8. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then
remove the shift fork w i t h the reverse selector,
reverse selector hub, and countershaft 4th gear.
If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, leave it
and 4th gear on the countershaft.
9. Remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly. If the

reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove the
secondary shaft sub-assembly, countershaft
sub-assembly and mainshaft sub-assembly
together.
10. Remove the countershaft sub-assembly.
11. Remove the mainshaft sub-assembly.
12. Remove the differential assembly.
14-155
Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing d o w n into
Driver 07749-0010000 the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 around it.
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600
NOTE: Coat all parts w i t h ATF before assembly.
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft

bearing (B) and secondary shaft bearing (C) f r o m
the transmission housing, expand each snap ring
w i t h the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's

necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
5. After installing the bearings verify the following:
The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and

housing grooves.
The ring end gaps (B) are correct.
B: 0 7 mm
( 0 - 0 . 2 8 in.)
2. Install the bearings in the direction s h o w n .
3. Expand each snap ring w i t h the snap ring pliers,

and insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
14-156
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Exploded V i e w
A T F FEED PIPE,
8 x 198 m m
A T F FEED PIPES,
8 x 85 m m
SERVO DETENT 3 Pipes
BASE
ATF STRAINER
SJATOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP
DOWEL PINS, 2
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
6x 1.0 m m , 1 Bolt
M A I N VALVE BODY
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
SPRING
SERVO BODY
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
D O W E L PINS, 2 ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR

SHAFT
SERVO SEPARATOR
ATF P U M P DRIVE GEAR
PLATE
ATF P U M P DRIVEN GEAR
M A I N SEPARATOR PLATE
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
DOWEL PINS, 3
TORQUE CONVERTER
HOUSING TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
(cont'd)
14-157
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B).
f o l l o w i n g procedure. thoroughly w i t h compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes f r o m the regulator clogged.
valve body, servo body, and accumulator body.
2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).
3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).
4. Remove the accumulator cover (two bolts).
NOTE: The accumulator cover is spring loaded. To

prevent stripping the threads in the servo body,
press d o w n on the accumulator cover w h i l e
unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern.
5. Remove the bolts securing the servo body (nine A

bolts), then remove the servo body, servo
separator plate and dowel pins (two). 17. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
6. Remove the accumulator body (six bolts). damaged.
7. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
8. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
9. Remove the regulator separator plate and dowel

pins (two).
10. Unhook the detent spring f r o m the detent a r m , then

remove the detent arm shaft, detent a r m , and
control shaft.
11. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler

check valve (steel ball).
12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).
13. Remove the torque converter check valve and

spring.
14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then

remove the ATF p u m p gears.
15. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins

(three).
14-158
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it w i t h
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves. compressed air.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for 6. Coat the valve w i t h ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
about 30 minutes. should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
o w n weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore w i t h the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it w i t h compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is a l u m i n u m and doesn't

require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the

valve body with solvent. Dry all parts w i t h
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-159
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Reassembly
1. Coat all parts w i t h ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-161),
regulator valve body (see page 14-164), and servo
body (see page 14-165). Refer to the f o l l o w i n g
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up w i l l be facing the outside
of the valve body.
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(B). Push the spring in w i t h a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
C
14-160
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry t h e m w i t h compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
4. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts w o r n or damaged.
5. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during assembly.
6. Install the filter in the direction shown.
(cont'd)
14-161
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Sectional V i e w
MANUAL VALVE
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

Wire Dia. O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
CD Modulator valve spring 1.6(0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
Shift valve D spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 32.2 (1.268) 13.4
Relief valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 30.1 (1.185) 10.7
Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4
Cooler check valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 5.8(0.228) 14.5(0.571) 6.8
Torque converter check valve 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 35.1 (1.382) 14.3
Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
@ Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
14-162
ATF Pomp inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B) 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance;
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083 0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.035-0.063 mm (0.0014-0.0025 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure

the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
D gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
14-163
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry t h e m with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement, If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are w o r n or damaged.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
6. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap w i t h the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
VALVE SLEEVE LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE

Stator reaction spring 5.5(0.217) 37.4(1.472) 30.3 (1.193) 2.12
Regulator valve spring A 1.8 (0.071) 14.7 (0.579) 87.5 (3.445) 16.5
Regulator valve spring B 1.7 (0.067) 9.4 (0.370) 44.0(1.732) 13.4
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2
Lock-up t i m i n g valve spring 0.65 (0.026) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370) 15.6
14-164
<2
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.
4. Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
Replace.

Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4(1.591) 16.9
Shift valve A spring 0 8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4(1.591) 16.9
CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
CPC valve B spring 0 7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
4th accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6(0.772) 66.4(2.614) 9.7
4th accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8 (0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5
3rd accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6(0.772) 66.4(2.614) 9.7
3rd accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8(0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5
14-165
Valve Body
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls: it m a y magnetize the balls.
2. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them w i t h compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
3. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
SNAP RINGS
No. Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

1st accumulator spring B 2.7 (0.106) 15.0 (0.591) 52.5 (2.067) 10.3
1st accumulator spring A 2.5 (0.098) 21.6 (0.850) 87.5(3.445) 11.8
2nd accumulator spring B 2.4(0.094) 12.6 (0.496) 53.5(2.106) 12.9
2nd accumulator spring A 2.7 (0.106) 19.6 (0.772) 66.3 (2.610) 9.9
14-166
Torque Converter Housing <3
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with
Adjustable bearing puller, 2540 mm the special tools.
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A 07749-0010000
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the

special tool and a commercially available 3/8"-16
slide hammer (A).
07746-0010600
07736-A01000Bor
07736-A01000A
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
14-167
Torque Converter Housing
Countershaft Bearing Replacement Secondary Shaft Bearing

Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25 40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Special Tools Required
Driver 07749-0010000 Adjustable bearing puller, 2 5 - 4 0 m m
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500 07736-A01000B or07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) w i t h the Driver attachment 07947-6340500
slide h a m m e r (B). 1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) w i t h the
slide h a m m e r (B).
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).
2. Install the ATF guide plate <A).

_ 07749-0010000
17-6340500
00.03 m m / | ^ tA\
(0-0.001 in.) I .hQ^f)
3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) w i t h
C A
the special tools.
3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) w i t h
the special tools.
14-168
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

Replace.
2 2 6 Nm (23.0 k g f - m , 1 6 6 I b f f t ) 0 -
167 N - m (17.0 k g f - m , 1 2 3 I b f f t )
THRUST WASHER,
27 x 47 x 5 m m
T H R U S T NEEDLE B E A R I N G CONICAL SPRING WASHER

Replace.
4TH GEAR 6 x 1.0 m m

9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
('00-01 m o d e l s )
PITOT F L A N G E
00-01 m o d e l s )
IDLER G E A R
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
3RD/4TH CLUTCH A S S E M B L Y
O-RINGS
Replace.
T H R U S T S H I M , 41 x 7 3 m m
S e l e c t i v e part
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
SEALING RINGS, 3RD G E A R

32 m m
NEEDLE BEARING
SEALING RINGS
2 9 mm
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING
S E T RING
2. Check the clearance of the 3rd/4th clutch assembly (see page 14-170).
3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
6. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
7. Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 73 m m thrust shim in the direction s h o w n .
8. Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are w o r n , distorted, or damaged, replace them (see page
14-171).
14-169
Shafts and Clutches
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings f r o m the mainshaft. 3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch
assembly (B), then measure the clearance between
2. Assemble the 41 x 73 m m thrust shim (A), 3rd/4th the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar w i t h a
clutch assembly (B), and 4th gear collar (C) on the feeler gauge (F) in at least three places. Use the
mainshaft (D). average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0 . 0 3 0 . 1 1 m m (0.001 0.004 in.)
4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.
THRUST SHIM, 41 x 73 m m
No. Part Number Thickness

1 90414-P7X-000 7.85 m m (0.309 in.)
2 90415-P7X-000 7.90 m m (0.311 in.)
3 90416-P7X-000 7.95 m m (0.313 in.)
4 90417-P7X-000 8.00 m m (0.315 in.)
90418-P7X-000 8.05 m m (0.317 in.)
6 90419-P7X-000 8.10 m m (0.319 in.)
6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the

clearance is w i t h i n standard.
14-170
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement
The sealing rings are synthetic resin w i t h chamfered
ends. Check condition of the sealing rings, and replace
them only if they are w o r n , distorted, or damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze the sealing rings (A)

together slightly before installing t h e m .
2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install

t h e m on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the

following:
The rings are fully seated in the groove.

The rings are not twisted.
The chamfered ends of the rings are properly
joined.
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and take off components d o w n to the reverse selector hub.
L O C K N U T (FLANGE NUT)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
2 2 6 N - m (23.0 k g f - m , 1 6 6 l b f f t ) - 0
167 N m (17.0 k g f - m , 1 2 3 I b f f t )
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-173).
3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-175).
5. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
7. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
8. Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and distance collar in the direction shown.
14-172
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance
Driver 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100 collar, and 31 m m cotters f r o m the countershaft.
Removal 3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) together
f r o m the countershaft (C) w i t h a puller (D). Place a
1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th shaft protector (E) between the puller and
gear (B) w i t h a universal two-jaw (or three-jaw) countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.
puller (C). Place a shaft protector (D) between the
puller and countershaft (E) to prevent damaging the
countershaft.
NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not

press-fitted, and can be removed w i t h o u t using a
puller.
(cont'd)
14-173
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement
(cont'd)
4. Install the 31 m m cotters, distance collar, snap ring,
Installation needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the
countershaft.
1. A p p l y ATF to the parts.
5. Slide the reverse selector hub (B) over the
2. Install the 1st gear on the countershaft by hand. countershaft (C), and then press it into place w i t h
the special tool and a press.
3. Align the shaft splines w i t h those on 3rd gear, then
press the countershaft (A) into the 3rd gear w i t h NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not
press. press-fitted and can be installed without using the
special tool and a press.
Place an attachment (B) between the press and
countershaft to prevent d a m a g i n g the
07746-0030100
countershaft.
Stop pressing the countershaft w h e n the 3rd gear
contacts the 1st gear (C).
14-174
Countershaft Bearing Huh/Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough

movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged,
replace it.
2. Remove the bearing (A) from the bearing hub with

the special tools, a bearing separator (B), and a
press.
3. Install the new bearing on the bearing hub with the

special tools and a press.
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

Replace.
Left-hand threads
2 2 6 N m (23.0 k g f - m , 1 6 6 I b f f t ) 0 -
167 N m (17.0 k g f - m , 1 2 3 I b f f t )

Replace.
BALL BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
IDLER G E A R
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE ^ (Hj

v 1 1
BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
T H R U S T S H I M , 37 x 55 m m
Selective part
NEEDLE BEARING
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING 1ST G E A R O-RINGS
Replace.
C O T T E R S , 32 m m
SPLINED WASHER,
3 8 x 5 6 . 5 mm COTTER RETAINER
Selective part
SNAP RING
S E A L I N G R I N G S , 25 m m
3. Check clearance of the secondary shaft assembly (see page 14-177).
4. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
6. Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-179).
7. Before installing the O-rings, w r a p the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
9. Install the conical spring washer and 38 x 56.5 m m splined washer in the direction shown.
14-176
<S0
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings f r o m the shaft. 3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 m m
splined washer (E) and cotters (F) w i t h a feeler
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average
bearing (B), 1st gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D), as the actual clearance.
38 x 56.5 m m splined washer (E), 32 m m cotters (F),
cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the STANDARD: 0.07 0.15 m m (0.003-0.006 in.)
secondary shaft (I).
4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

splined washer, and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new splined washer, then

recheck.
SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 m m
No. | Part Number Thickness

1 j 90502-P0Z-000 6.85 m m (0.270 in.)
2 ; 90503-P0Z-000 6.90 m m (0.272 in.)
3 j 90504-P0Z-000 6.95 m m (0.274 in.)
4 I 90505-P0Z-000 7.00 m m (0.276 in.)
5 ! 90506-P0Z-000 7.05 m m (0.278 in.)
6 i 90507-P0Z-000 7.10 m m (0.280 in.)
(cont'd)
14-177
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer f r o m the 9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer (G) against
mainshaft. the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear
axial clearance in at least three places while
7. Assemble the 1st/2nd clutch assembly (A), 37 x 55 m o v i n g the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the
m m thrust s h i m (B), thrust needle bearing (C), actual clearance.
needle bearing (D), 2nd gear (E), thrust needle
bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer STANDARD: 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m (0.002 0.005 in.)
(removed f r o m m a i n s h a f t ) (G) on the secondary
shaft (H).
10. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 37 x

55 m m thrust shim and measure its thickness.
11. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck.
THRUST SHIM, 37 x 55 m m
Set the dial indicator (I) on 2nd gear (E).
E No. Part Number Thickness
1 90406-P0Z-000 4.90 m m (0.193 in.)
2 90407-P0Z-000 4.95 m m (0.195 in.)
3 90408-P0Z-000 5.00 m m (0.197 in.)
4 90409-P0Z-000 5.05 m m (0.199 in.)
5 90410-P0Z-000 5.10 m m (0.201 in.)
6 90411-P0Z-000 5.15 m m (0.203 in.)
7 90412-P0Z-000 5.20 m m (0.205 in.)
12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer on the

mainshaft.
14-178
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear
Driver 07749-0010000 with the special tool and a press.
A t t a c h m e n t 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough

movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, go
to step 2.
2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with

soft jaws.
3. Remove the bearing (A) f r o m the secondary shaft

idler gear (B) w i t h a commercially available 3-jaw
slide hammer (C).
14-179
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch
Clutch spring compressor attachment assembly.
07LAE-PX40100 07LAE-PX40100
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch

end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates w i t h a
screwdriver (B).
2. Remove the disc spring (A) f r o m the 1st, 3rd and 4. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full
4th clutches. contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
14-180
5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of 7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be
the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the removed.
special tool works on the clutch return spring (C).
(cont'd)
14-181
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
9. For 3rd and 4th clutch: W r a p a shop rag around the
clutch d r u m (A), and apply air pressure to the fluid
passage to remove the piston (B). Place a finger tip
on the other end w h i l e applying air pressure.
14-182
Clutch Inspection
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
NOTE: There are t w o types of spring retainer, you may find either type in the clutch assembly. Some spring retainers
have seal lips, and do not have O-rings. The seal lip is undetachable f r o m the spring retainer.
- SNAP RING
O-RINGS
Replace.
- CLUTCH END
PLATE
CLUTCH PISTON
-CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . )
DISC SPRING CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
RETURN SPRING
O-RING
Replace,
SPRING RETAINER
S N A P RING
- SNAP RING
-SPRING RETAINER
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . ) - O-RING
CLUTCH PLATES Replace.
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . - R E T U R N SPRING
CLUTCH PISTON
'O-RINGS
Replace.
2ND C L U T C H
DRUM
1ST CLUTCH
CLUTCH END DRUM
- S N A P RING
PLATE
(cont'd)
14-183
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch inspection (cont'd)
3RD/4TH CLUTCH
SNAP RING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
CLUTCH END PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . )
O-RINGS
Replace.
CHECK VALVE
CLUTCH PISTON
DISC SPRING SNAP RING
RETURN SPRING SPRING RETAINER
SPRING RETAINER
RETURN SPRING
SNAP RING
DISC SPRING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . CLUTCH PISTON
O-RINGS
Replace.
4TH CLUTCH DRUM
CLUTCH END PLATE 3RD CLUTCH DRUM
SNAP RING
14-184
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B) and the
Clutch spring compressor attachment spring retainer (1st and 2nd clutches).
07LAE-PX40100
Clutch spring compressor attachment NOTE: Some spring retainers of the 1st and 2nd
07HAE-PL50101 clutch have seal lips and do not have O-rings.
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
Note these items during reassembly:
Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor

cleaner, and dry t h e m w i t h compressed air.
Blow out all passages.
Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
1. Inspect the check valve (A) on the 3rd and 4th

clutch pistons (B); if it's loose, replace the piston.
A
3. Install the piston (A) in the clutch d r u m (B). Apply

pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring w i t h ATF before
installing.
NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the

piston with too much force.
A
(cont'd)
14-185
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 6. Be sure the special too (A) is adjusted to have full
and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer. contact w i t h the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
C 4th clutches.
7. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of

the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the
5. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch special tool w o r k on the clutch return spring (C).
assembly.
07LAE-PX4010Q
0 7 L A E - P X 4 0 1 0 0 or
07HAE-PL50101
0 7 G A E - P G 4 0 2 0 0 or
07GAE-PG4020A
14-186
8. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of 10. Install the snap ring (A).
the spring retainer which is unsupported by the
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
11. Remove the special tools.
9. Compress the return spring. 12. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches in the direction shown.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
(cont'd)
14-187
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
13. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a 16. Measure the clearance between the clutch end
m i n i m u m of 30 minutes. Before installing the plate (A) and top disc (B) w i t h a dial indicator (C).
plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch Zero the dial indicator w i t h the clutch end plate
d r u m is free of dirt and other foreign matter. lowered, and lift it up to the snap ring (D). The
distance that the clutch end plate moves is the
14. Starting w i t h a clutch plate, alternately install the clearance between the clutch end plate and top disc.
clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) w i t h the flat side t o w a r d the disc (B). NOTE: Take measurement in at least 3 places, and
use the average as the actual clearance.
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:
Clutch Service Limit

1st 1 . 2 - 1 . 4 m m (0.047- 0.055 in.)
2nd 0.85 -1.05 m m (0.033-0.041 in.)
3rd 0.55 0.75 m m (0.022 0.030 in.)
4th 0.55 0.75 m m (0.022-0.030 in.)
15. Install the snap ring (A) w i t h a screwdriver (B).
14-188
17. If the clearance is not within the service limit, select 1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
a new clutch end plate from the following table.
Mark Part Number Thickness
NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed, 6 22551-P7Z-003 2.6mm (0.102 in.)
but the clearance is still over the standard, replace 7 22552-P7Z-003 2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
the clutch discs and clutch plates as a set. 8 22553-P7Z-003 2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
9 22554-P7Z-003 2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
0 22555-P7Z-003 3.0 m m (0.118 in.)
1 22556-P7Z-003 3.1 m m (0.122 in.)
2 22557-P7Z-003 3.2 m m (0.126 in.)
3 22558-P7Z-003 3.3 m m (0.130 in.)
4 22559-P7Z-003 3.4 m m (0.134 in.)
3RD and 4TH CLUTCH END PLATES
Mark Part Number Thickness

1 22551-PX4-003 2.1 m m (0.083 in.)
2 22552-PX4-003 2.2 m m (0.087 in.)
3 22553-PX4-003 2.3 m m (0.091 in.)
4 22554-PX4-003 2.4 m m (0.094 in.)
5 22555-PX4-003 2.5 m m (0.098 in.)
6 22556-PX4-003 2.6 m m (0.102 in.)
7 22557-PX4-003 2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
8 22558-PX4-003 2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
9 22559-PX4-003 2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
14-189
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation
Exploded View
Torque:
6 x 1.0 m m : 1 2 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
8 x 1.25 m m : 1 8 N - m ( 1 . 8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m ,
8 Bolts - A T F F E E D PIPE,
8 x 198 m m
SERVO DETENT
BASE ATF FEED PIPES,
8 x 8 5 mm
3 Pipes
ATF STRAINER
STAJOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP
D O W E L PINS, 2
O-RING REGULATOR
Replace SEPARATOR PLATE
6 x 1.0 m m 6 x 1.0 m m , 1 B o l t
2 Bolts
MAIN V A L V E BODY
6 x 1.0 m m
9 Bolts
COOLER CHECK VALVE
SERVO BODY SPRING
COOLER CHECK VALVE

DOWELPINS, 2
ATF PUMP DRIVEN G E A R
SHAFT
SERVO SEPARATOR
PLATE ATF PUMP DRIVE G E A R
ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
MAIN S E P A R A T O R PLATE
D O W E L PINS, 3
ACCUMULATOR BODY

TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
14-190
NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during the 4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the
following procedure. main valve body, then install the t w o dowel pins
and the regulator separator plate.
1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install 5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and
ATF p u m p driven gear shaft (D). Install the ATF 6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
p u m p driven gear w i t h its grooved and chamfered
side facing d o w n . 7. Install the t w o dowel pins and the servo separator
plate on the main valve body.
8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter

housing along w i t h the manual valve (B).
2. Install the torque converter check valve and spring,

then install the main valve body (one 6 m m bolt
and three 8 m m bolts). Make sure the ATF pump
drive gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal
operating direction, and the ATF pump driven gear
shaft (D) moves smoothly in the axial and normal
operating direction.
B E
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (D) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).
11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).
12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).

3. If the ATF p u m p drive gear and ATF pump driven
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main 15. Install the t w o ATF feed pipes in the servo body,
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven four pipes in the regulator valve body, and one pipe
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified in the accumulator body.
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF p u m p
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized
ATF pump drive gear or ATF p u m p driven gear
shaft.
14-191
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
Exploded V i e w
8 x 1.25 m m
2 6 N - m (2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 I b f f t ) TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET

R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R S H A F T
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
TRANSMISSION HANGER/
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
6 x 1.0 m m TRANSMISSION HOUSING

14 N - m (1.4 k g f - m
10 I b f f t )
TRANSMISSION HANGER
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
LOCK WASHER GASKET
Replace. Replace.
SHIFT FORK
R E V E R S E IDLER
REVERSE SELECTOR GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH G E A R ' / ' -
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
14-192
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 5. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission
following procedure. housing.
1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft sub-

assembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary
shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse

selector hub on the countershaft. If the reverse
selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the
installation procedure (see page 14-173).
3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered

hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (B) and reverse selector (C) together on
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (D). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E)
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock Place the reverse idler gear (A) in the transmission
washer against the bolt head. housing as shown, then slide it in the direction
E shown.
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse

gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the
countershaft.
(cont'd)
14-193
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
7. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) w i t h 10. Engage the reverse idler gear with the countershaft
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then
control shaft. install the needle bearings (A), reverse idler gear
A shaft (B) and thrust washer (C) in the reverse idler
gear, and install the reverse idler gear shaft holder
(D) on the transmission housing.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 6 N m (2.7 k g f m , 2 0 I b f f t )
8. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the

torque converter housing.
9. Place the transmission housing on the torque

converter housing, then install the transmission
housing m o u n t i n g bolts along w i t h the harness
clamp bracket (A), transmission hanger (B) and
transmission hanger/harness clamp bracket (C).
Tighten the bolts in t w o or more steps in the
sequence s h o w n .
TORQUE: 4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 I b f f t )
C B
14-194
Transmission End Cover 3
End Cower and Idler Gears Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
Mainshaft holder and a collar (C). Hold the park pawl (D) to engage
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 w i t h the park gear, then tighten the old locknut until
the shaft splines come out slightly over the park
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on gear splines.
the control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt (D)
w i t h a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock NOTE:
tab of the lock washer in this step; bend it after Do not use an impact wrench.
checking park pawl engagement. Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
2. Lubricate the following parts w i t h ATF:

4. Remove the locknut and the collar, then install only
Splines of the countershaft, the park gear, and the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) and old
the old locknut. conical spring washer (B). Tighten the old locknut
Threads of the countershaft and the old locknut. (C) to seat the park gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166
Old conical spring washer. Ibf ft), then remove the locknut and conical spring
washer.
(cont/d)
14-195
Transmission End Cover
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) with 7. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler
a puller (B). gear (B) as shown.
8. Measure the countershaft idler gear axial clearance

6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing in at least three places, while moving the
(B), countershaft idler gear (C), thrust needle countershaft idler gear (A).
bearing (D), bearing hub/bearing assembly (E), and Use the average as the actual clearance.
the old conical spring washer (F). Then tighten the
old locknut (G) to seat the bearing hub/bearing STANDARD: 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)
assembly to 164 N-m (17.0 kgfm, 123 Ibfft).
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench, always use a

torque wrench to tighten the locknut.
14-196
9. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 14. Lubricate the following parts w i t h ATF:
bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as Splines of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
described on the previous page. idler gears.
Threads of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing new locknuts.
assembly, then recheck. Old conical spring washers.
15. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the old
conical spring washer (B) on the mainshaft (C).
Tighten the old locknut (D) to seat the mainshaft
idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166 Ibf-ft).
NOTE: Do not use an impact w r e n c h , always use a

BEARING HUB
Mark Part Number Difference

A 90520-P6H-000 3.503 m m (0.1379 in.)
B 90521-P6H-000 3.490 m m (0.1374 in.)
C 90522-P6H-000 3.477 m m (0.1369 in.)
D 90523-P6H-000 3.464 m m (0.1364 in.)
11. After replacing the bearing hub/bearing assembly

make sure the clearance is within standard.
12. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring

washer f r o m the countershaft.
13. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft. 16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
secondary shaft idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m,
166 I bf-ft)
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench, always use a
Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.
17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring

washer f r o m the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
14-197

18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft and new 22. For '00-01 models: Install the pitot flange (A) on the
locknuts, and new conical spring washers w i t h ATF. mainshaft idler gear (B), then install the lubrication
pitot pipe (C) and the pitot pipe (D) on the
19. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the transmission housing.
direction s h o w n , and install the new locknuts (B).
20. Tighten the locknuts to 167 N-m (17.0 kgf-m, 123

ibfft). 23. Set the park lever in the E position, then verify that
the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
NOTE: B
Do not use an impact w r e n c h , always use a
Coutershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
2 1 . Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 m m

punch.
24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the pawl shaft (C) and the park
lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-153).
25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
14-198
0
26. Install the end cover (A) along w i t h t w o dowel pins, 28. Set the control shaft (A) to the H position by
new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp turning it.
bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 N-m, (1.2
kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft). NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the
B
control shaft tips together w h e n turning into
position. If the tips are squeezed together it will
cause a faulty shift signal or position due to the
play between the control shaft and the switch.
27. Set the transmission range switch to \S\ position.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in M

position.
(cont'd)
14-199
29. Install the transmission range switch (A) loosely on
the control shaft (B), then secure it w i t h the bolts.
Do not move the transmission range switch w h e n
tightening the bolts.
30. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and

install the harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket
(E) on the transmission housing, then install the
harness clamp (F) on the end cover (G).
31. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing

washers. Tighten the line fittings to 28 N-m
(2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
32. Install the breather tube.
33. Install the ATF dipstick.
14-200
A/T Differential 0
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection
1. Install both axles, and place the differential

assembly on V-blocks (A).
T H R U S T S H I M , 76 m m
THRUST WASHER
BEARING OUTER RACE

CARRIER BEARING
2. Check the backlash of both pinion gears (B) w i t h a

dial indicator (C).
STANDARD: 0.05 0.15 m m (0.002 0.006 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
B a c k l a s h I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 14-201
CARRIER BEARING
BEARING OUTER RACE

^ T H R U S T WASHER
14-201
A/T Differential
Final Driven Gear/Carrier Carrier Bearing Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the final driven gear f r o m the differential Attachment, 40 x 50 m m 07LAD-PW50601
carrier.
NOTE:
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
threads. set.
Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
bearing is replaced.
Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) w i t h a commercially

available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepped adapter (D).
2. Install the final driven gear w i t h the chamfered side

on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a

crisscross pattern.
2. Install the new carrier bearings with the special tool
TORQUE: 101 N-m (10.3 k g f m , 74.5 I b f f t ) and a press.
NOTE:
Press the bearings on until they bottom.
Use the small end of the special tool to install the
bearing.
Press the bearings on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearings and the
differential carrier.
14-202
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
Driver 07749-0010000 w i t h the special tools.
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or
07GAD-PG40100
Pilot 28 x 30 m m 07JAD-PH80400
Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the differential assembly.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the transmission

housing (B).
A B
3. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the torque converter
housing (B).
07JAD-PH80400
14-203
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (B) in
Driver 07749-0010000 the torque converter housing (C), and be sure to
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NA1D-PX40100 install the outer race until it bottoms in the housing
with the special tools.
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the B
outer race is to be replaced.
Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race from the

transmission housing by heating the housing to
about 212F (100C) with a heat gun. Do not heat
the housing more than 212F (100C).
2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque

converter housing.
3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B) and

outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D) with
the special tools.
07NAD-PX40100
14-204
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Special Tools Required 4. Select the 2.60 m m (0.102 in.) thrust shim f r o m the
D r i v e r 07749-0010000 middle of the table below.
A t t a c h m e n t 78 x 80 m m 07NAD-PX40100
Preload inspection tool 07HAJ-PK40201 THRUST SHIM, 7 6 m m
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter No. Part Number Thickness
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 m m (0.081 in.)
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing T 41439-PX4-700 2.01 m m (0.083 in.)
preload must be adjusted. U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 m m (0.085 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 m m (0.087 in.)
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer B 41442-PK4-000 2.25 m m (0.089 in.)
(B) and thrust shim (C) f r o m the transmission C 41443-PK4-000 2.30 m m (0.091 in.)
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212F D 41444-PK4-000 2.35 m m (0.093 in.)
(100C) w i t h a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 m m (0.094 in.)
more than 212F (100C). F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 m m (0.096 in.)
G 41447-PK4-000 2.50 m m (0.098 in.)
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 m m (0.100 in.)
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload. I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 m m (0.102 in.)
E J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 m m (0.104 in.)
K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 m m (0.106 in.)
L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 m m (0.108 in.)
M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 m m (0.110 in.)
N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 m m (0.112 in.)
O 41455-PK4-000 2.90 m m (0.114 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 m m (0.116 in.)
Q 41457-PK4-000 3.00 m m (0.118 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 m m (0.120 in.)
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing w h e n the outer

race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing

side.
(cont'd)
14-205
A/T Differentia!
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection :'d)
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and 8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (B), and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D).
(D). Align the spring pin on the control shaft <E) w i t h the
transmission housing groove.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N - m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6. Drive the outer race w i t h the special tools, and

install it securely in the transmission housing.
7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust

washer, outer race, s h i m , and transmission
housing.
A C D
9. Install the transmission housing (F) w i t h the

transmission hangers (G) and harness clamp
bracket (H), and tighten the bolts.
14-206
10. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
to seat the bearings.
11. Measure the starting torque of the differential

assembly w i t h the special tool and a torque wrench
(A). Measure the starting torque at normal room
temperature in both directions.
STANDARD:
New bearing: 2.7-3.9 N m
( 2 8 - 4 0 kgf-cm, 2 4 - 3 5 Ibf-in.)
Reused bearings: 2.5 3.6 N-m
( 2 5 - 3 7 kgf-cm, 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)
07HAJ-PK40201
12. To increase the starting torque, increase the

thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting
torque, decrease the thickness of the s h i m .
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease starting torque about
0 . 3 - 0 . 4 N-m (3 4 kgf-cm, 3 - 3 Ibf-in.).
14-207
Transaxle
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts R e a s s e m b l y 16-3
Intermediate Shaft R e m o v a l 16-14
Intermediate Shaft D i s a s s e m b l y 16-14
Intermediate Shaft R e s a s s e m b l y 16-16
Intermediate Shaft Installation 16-18
NOTE: Refer to the '98 01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown
in this section.
Outline of Model Changes
'98 model:
The installation length of the driveshafts is different; installation instructions and specifications are
included.
The installation position of the intermediate shaft is different; related service information is included.
'99 model:
The Thermoplastic Polyester Elastomer (TPE) outboard boot has been added.
The replacement procedure for ear clamp type boot bands has been added.
The outboard joint disassembly/reassembly procedure has been added.
'01 model:
The replacement procedure for low profile type boot bands has been added.
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools

07LAF-SM40300 Support Base Attachment 1
07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07947-SD90101 Oil Seal Driver, Attachment 1
07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2x49.5x15 mm 1
07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
16-2
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
'98-00 model
INBOARD JOINT
ROLLER
CIRCLIP
DOUBLE LOOP BAND

Replace.
S E T RING
Replace.
Pack cavity w i t h grease
SPIDER
INBOARD BOOT
cShMmm
Pack cavity with grease.
DRIVESHAFT
STOP RING
Replace.
DOUBLE LOOP BAND

Replace.
(Rubber type)
OUTBOARD BOOT
(Rubber)
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
Pack cavity with grease.

EAR CLAMP BAND
Replace.
EAR CLAMP BAND
O U T B O A R D B O O T (TPE) Replace.
(cont'd)
16-3
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)

' 0 1 model
Pack c a v i t y w i t h g r e a s e .
16-4
Special Tools Required 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent commercially the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the
available driveshaft.
Boot band pincers, KENT-MOORE J-35910 or
equivalent commercially available
Boot band pincers, commercially available
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side
1. Wrap the splines w i t h vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damage to the inboard boot.
4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always

rotate the circlip in its groove to be sure it is fully
seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A or B) onto the spider (C) w i t h their

high shoulders facing outward, and note these
items:
Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (D).
2. Install the inboard boot to the driveshaft, then Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
remove the vinyl tape.Take care not to damage the rollers f r o m falling off.
inboard boot. Roller (A) is used on '98-00 A/T models and all '01
models.
Roller (B) is used on '98-00 M/T models.
(cont'd)
16-5
Driveline/Axle
6. Pack the inboard joint w i t h the joint grease Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure
included in the new driveshaft set. below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
Grease quantity ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the
Inboard joint; 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 g ( 4 . 2 - 4 . 6 oz) driveshaft and joint.
('98-00 models)
1 5 0 - 1 6 0 g (5.3 5.6 oz) Left driveshaft: 554 559 mm (21.8 22.0 in.)
('01 model) Right driveshaft: 544 549 mm (21.4 21.6 in.)
9. Install the boot bands.

7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note
these items: For the double loop type, go to step 13.
For the low profile type, go to step 11.
Reinstall the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft
by aligning the marks (B) on the inboard joint and
the rollers.
Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up
to prevent it f r o m falling off.
For M/T models, align the roller holders (C) w i t h
the grooves in the inboard joint ('98-00 models).
16-6
10. I n s t a l l t h e n e w l o w p r o f i l e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t 12. Fit t h e b o o t e n d s o n t o t h e d r i v e s h a f t a n d t h e
(B) a n d d y n a m i c d a m p e r , t h e n h o o k t h e t a b (C) o f i n b o a r d j o i n t , t h e n i n s t a l l t h e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t
the band. (B).
(cont'd)
16-7
Driveline/Axfe
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose 18. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
section of the commercially available boot band free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m ( 0 . 2 - 0 . 4
tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
the w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n w i t h a

hammer.
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere w i t h
anything and the band does not move.
Remove any grease remaining on the
16. Place a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot surrounding surfaces
band t o o l , and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-8
20. Install the new set ring. Outboard Joint Side:
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damage to the outboard boot.
Rubber type
2. Install the new boot band (B) (TPE type).
3. Install the outboard boot. Take care not to damage

the outboard boot.
4 . Remove the vinyl tape.
(cont'd)
Driveline/Axle
5. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft 7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
groove (B). driveshaft and joint, and drop t h e m f r o m about
10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
hammer as excessive force may damage the
driveshaft.
6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)

until the stop ring (C) is close on the joint.
10 cm
(4 In.)
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the

outboard joint end (B).
Push.
16-10
9. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease 12. Set the new double loop band (A) onto the boot.
included in the new joint boot set.
I T A
Grease quantity
Outboard joint (Rubber): 1 3 0 - 1 4 0 g ( 4 . 6 - 4 . 9 oz)
Outboard joint (TPE): 1 4 0 - 1 5 0 g ( 4 . 9 - 5 . 3 oz)
13. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
14. Mark a position (A) on the band 1 0 - 1 4 mm (0.4

0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
10. Install the outboard boot and boot bands.
8
For TPE type boot, go to step 20.
For rubber type boot, go to step 11.
11. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
(cont'd)
16-11
Driveline/Axle
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose 18. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
section of a commercially available boot band tool free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m ( 0 . 2 - 0 . 4
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n w i t h a

hammer.
NOTE:
16. Place a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
band tool, and tighten the band until the marked anything, and the band does not move.
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip. Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces.
17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
A
the band 90 to the clip. Center punch the clip, then
fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-12
20. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and 2 1 . Close the ear portion (A) of the band w i t h a
outboard joint (C). commercially available boot band pincers (B).
2 2 . Check the clearance between the closed ear portion

of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band further.
16-13
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Removal Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
1. Drain the ATF, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Special Tools Required
Manual (see page 14-113). Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07947-6340500
2. Remove the left driveshaft; refer to the '98-01 Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Accord Service Manual (see page 16-3). Support base 07965-SD90100
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).
1. Remove the heat shield (A) and intermediate shaft
outer seal (B) from the bearing support (C).
C
4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal 2. Remove the external snap ring (D).
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage
to the differential oil seal (B). 3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
A intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the special
tools and a press. Be careful not to damage the
metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during
disassembly.
Press
16-14
4. Remove the internal snap ring.
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
6 x 1.0
mm
10 N m(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 ibfft)
RING
P a c k t h e i n t e r i o r of t h e o u t e r s e a l .
3 . 0 - 4 . 0 g ( 0 . 1 1 - 0 . 1 4 oz)
16-16
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
Driver 07749-0010000 bearing using the special tool and a press.
Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Support base 07965-SD90100
Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101
Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x15 mm 07947-4630100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the

bearing support (B) using the special tools and a
press.
07749-0010000
07947-4630100
5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of

the intermediate shaft (B).
3. Seat the internal snap ring in the groove of the

bearing support.
(cont'd)
16-17
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly Intermediate Shaft Installation
(cont'd)
1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A)
contacts the transmission (differential) thoroughly
6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the with solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with
outer seal into the bearing support (B) using the compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
special tools and a press. assembly into the differential. Hold the
intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to
the differential oil seal (B).
B A
2. Install the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).

A
10 x 1.25 m m
3 9 N - m (4.0 k g f - m , 2 9 I b f f t )
7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.
3. Refill the transmisson with recommended ATF,

14-113).
16-18
Steering
Power Steering
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index 17-4
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting 17-6
Pump P r e s s u r e Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 ..... 17-7
Pump P r e s s u r e Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A .... 17-8
Fluid Leakage Inspection 17-9
Pump Belt Inspection and A d j u s t m e n t 17-10
Hoses and Lines Replacement 17-12
Pump R e p l a c e m e n t 17-13
Pump Overhaul 17-14
Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t 17-19
Steering G e a r b o x Overhaul 17-20
NOTE; Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for items not shown
in this section.
Outline of V6 Model Changes
The Steering System has been changed to suit the V6 engine.

Power Steering
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool N u m b e r Description Qty
07LAG-SM40100 or 07LAG-SM401 OA Piston Seal Ring Guide
07LAG-SM40200 or 07LAG-SM4020A Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1
07TAF-SZ50100 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
07RAK-S040122 P/S Joint Adaptor (Hose) 1
07VAK-P8A011A P/S Joint Adaptor (Pump) 1
07VAK-P8A012B P/S Joint Adaptor Plate (Pump) 1
07406-0010001 or 07406-001000A P/S Pressure Gauge 1
07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 m m 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
i n c l u d e d in the Belt Tension Gauge Set, 07TGG 001000A.
17-2
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 17-19
S t e e r i n g G e a r b o x O v e r h a u l , p a g e 17-20
17-3
Power Steering
F i n d t h e s y m p t o m in t h e c h a r t b e l o w , a n d d o t h e r e l a t e d p r o c e d u r e s in t h e o r d e r l i s t e d u n t i l y o u f i n d t h e cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) A l s o c h e c k for:

Hard Steering T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e s y s t e m {see p a g e 17-6). Modified suspension
T i r e sizes, t i r e
v a r i e t i e s , a n d air
pressure
Power steering p u m p
belt a d j u s t m e n t
Assist (excessively light Check t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19). Front w h e e l alignment;
s t e e r i n g at h i g h s p e e d ) refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 18-5).
Shock or vibration w h e n the 1. C h e c k t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).
w h e e l is t u r n e d t o f u l l lock 2. C h e c k t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p b e l t f o r s l i p p a g e a n d a d j u s t as n e c e s s a r y (see
p a g e 17-10).
3. R e p l a c e t h e s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x ; r e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 17-30).
Steering wheel will not 1. C h e c k c y l i n d e r lines A a n d B f o r d e f o r m a t i o n .
return smoothly 2. C h e c k w h e e l a l i g n m e n t ; r e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 0 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e
18-5).
p a g e 17-30).
U n e v e n or r o u g h steering 1. C h e c k t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).
2. C h e c k p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p b e l t a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-10).
3. C h e c k f o r l o w o r e r r a t i c e n g i n e idle s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).
4. C h e c k f o r air in t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g s y s t e m d u e t o l o w f l u i d l e v e l .
5. C h e c k f o r l o w f l u i d level in t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g r e s e r v o i r d u e t o p o s s i b l e leaks
in s y s t e m .
p a g e 17-30).
S t e e r i n g w h e e l kicks b a c k 1. C h e c k p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p b e l t a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-10).
during wide turns 2. C h e c k t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p f l u i d p r e s s u r e w i t h T / N 07406-0010001 (see
p a g e 17-7), w i t h T / N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A (see p a g e 17-8).
Humming 1. Check w h e n the noise occurs
If t h e n o i s e h a p p e n s 2 3 m i n u t e s after s t a r t i n g t h e e n g i n e in c o l d w e a t h e r ,
t h i s is n o r m a l .
If t h e n o i s e h a p p e n s w h e n t h e w h e e l is t u r n w i t h t h e v e h i c l e s t o p p e d , t h i s is
normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check f o r the high-pressure hose t o u c h i n g t h e s u b - f r a m e or body.
3. Check for automatic t r a n s m i s s i o n convertor noise. Remove the p o w e r
s t e e r i n g belt, a n d r e c h e c k .
17-4
Rattle o r c h a t t e r i n g 1. Check f o r loose s t e e r i n g c o m p o n e n t s ( t i e - r o d a n d ball j o i n t s ) . T i g h t e n o r
r e p l a c e as n e c e s s a r y .
2. Check t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n s h a f t f o r w o b b l i n g . If t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n s
w o b b l e s , replace t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n a s s e m b l y , refer t o t h e '98-'01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 17-25).
3. Check t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).
4. Check t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p p u l l e y .
If t h e p u l l e y is l o o s e , t i g h t e n it (see p a g e 17-14).
If t h e p u m p s h a f t is l o o s e , r e p l a c e t h e p u m p (see p a g e 17-13).
Hissing Check t h e f l u i d l e v e l . If l o w , f i l l t h e r e s e r v o i r t o t h e p r o p e r level a n d c h e c k f o r
leaks.
Check t h e r e s e r v o i r f o r leaks.
Check f o r c r u s h e d i n l e t h o s e o r l o o s e h o s e c l a m p a l l o w i n g air i n t o t h e s u c t i o n
side of t h e s y s t e m .
Check t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p s h a f t oil seal f o r leaks.
P u m p noise C o m p a r e t h e p u m p n o i s e at n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g t e m p e r a t u r e t o a n o t h e r v e h i c l e ,
( p u m p n o i s e u p t o 2 - 3 m i n u t e s a f t e r s t a r t i n g t h e e n g i n e in c o l d w e a t h e r is
normal).
R e m o v e a n d i n s p e c t t h e p u m p f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e (see s t e p 1 o n p a g e 17-15).
Squeaking Check t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g belt t e n s i o n a n d a d j u s t as n e c e s s a r y (see p a g e 1 7 - 1 0 ) .
F l u i d Leaks f r o m t h e F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e t o p of t h e v a l v e b o d y u n i t :
steering gearbox Replace t h e v a l v e b o d y u n i t .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e left t i e - r o d b o o t :
Replace t h e v a l v e oil seal o n t h e p i n i o n s h a f t .
Replace t h e c y l i n d e r e n d seal o n t h e g e a r b o x s i d e .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e r i g h t t i e - r o d b o o t : Replace t h e c y l i n d e r e n d s e a l .
F l u i d leaks f r o m p i n i o n s h a f t near t h e l o w e r s t e e r i n g j o i n t b o l t : Replace t h e v a l v e
b o d y unit.
Fluid leaks f r o m line F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e c y l i n d e r l i n e A or B c o n n e c t i o n s (flare n u t s ) :
T i g h t e n t h e c o n n e c t i o n a n d retest. If it still leaks, r e p l a c e t h e f i t t i n g O - r i n g s .
F l u i d leaks f r o m a d a m a g e d c y l i n d e r line A o r B:
Replace t h e c y l i n d e r l i n e .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e p u m p o u t l e t h o s e o r r e t u r n line f i t t i n g o n t h e v a l v e b o d y
u n i t (flair n u t s ) : T i g h t e n t h e f i t t i n g a n d retest. If it still leaks, replace t h e h o s e , t h e
line, o r v a l v e b o d y u n i t as n e c e s s a r y .
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e f r o n t o i l s e a l : Replace t h e f r o n t oil seal.
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p h o u s i n g :
Replace t h e l e a k i n g O - r i n g s o r seals (see p a g e 17-14), a n d if n e c e s s a r y r e p l a c e
(see page 1 7 - 1 3 )
Fluid leaks f r o m r e s e r v o i r Fluid leaks f r o m a r o u n d t h e r e s e r v o i r c a p : F l u i d level is t o o h i g h : d r a i n t h e
r e s e r v o i r t o t h e p r o p e r l e v e l . A e r a t e d f l u i d : c h e c k f o r an air leak o n t h e i n l e t s i d e
of p u m p .
F l u i d leaks f r o m r e s e r v o i r : Check f o r t h e r e s e r v o i r f o r cracks a n d r e p l a c e as
necessary.
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p Check t h e f i t t i n g f o r l o o s e b o l t s . If t h e b o l t s are t i g h t , replace t h e f i t t i n g O - r i n g .
outlet hose (high-pressure) F l u i d leaks at t h e s w a g g e d j o i n t : Replace t h e o u t l e t h o s e .
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p i n l e t Check t h e h o s e f o r d a m a g e , d e t e r i o r a t i o n , o r i m p r o p e r a s s e m b l y . Replace o r
hose (low-pressure) r e p a i r as n e c e s s a r y .
17-5
Power Steering
Symptom Troubleshooting
Hard Steering 6. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-19), and retest.
1. Check the power assist refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Is the steering OK?
Y E S Repair is completed.
Is the power assist more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)?
NO Faulty gearbox.
7. Check for feed and return lines between the p u m p
N O - Power assist is O K . B and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure f r o m the p u m p Are the lines clogged or deformed?
at idle w i t h T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or
w i t h T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8). Y E S Repair or replace the lines.
2
Is the pressure 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm ,213 psi) or less? NO Faulty valve body u n i t . B
Y E S - G o to step 3. 8. Check the f l o w control valve, refer to the '98-01

Accord Service Manual (see page 17-17) for
NO Go to step 7. s m o o t h m o v e m e n t and leaks.
3. Measure the p u m p relief pressure at idle w i t h T/N Is the flow control valve OK?
07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or w i t h T/N 07406-
001000A (see page 17-8). Y E S Faulty p u m p a s s e m b l y .
Is the pressure 7,600- 8,300 kPa (78- 85 kgf/cm N O - F a u l t y f l o w control valve.

2, 1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?
9. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation
Y E S - G o to step 4. (see page 17-12).
NO Go to step 8. Are the Aor B lines deformed?
4. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in Y E S Replace the l i n e s .

both directions, to the left and to the right.
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
1.12 Ibf) of each other? 10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (to tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted
NO Go to step 9. too tight?
5. Measure the fluid pressure w i t h T/N 07406-0010001 Y E S - R e p l a c e the rack shaft or readjust the rack
(see page 17-7) or w i t h T/N 07406-001000A (see guide.
page 17-8) w i t h both pressure gauge valves open
(if so equipped), wheel t u r n i n g the steering wheel NO Faulty valve body u n i t . B
fully to the left and fully to the right.
Is the pressure 7,600- 8,300 kPa (78-85 kgf/crrf,

1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?
NO Faulty g e a r b o x .
17-6
Pump Pressure Test w i t h T/N 07406-0010001
Special Tools Required 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).

P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A
P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122
P/S pressure gauge, 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the p u m p or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level; refer to

the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14)
and p u m p belt tension (see page 17-10).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) f r o m the

p u m p outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) w i t h the P/S joint outlet plate.
07RAK-S040122
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).
8. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several

times to w a r m the fluid to operating temperature.
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the p u m p is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15
07406-0010001 2
kgf/cm , 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet
hose or valve body unit (see Steering System
07VAK-P8A011A Troubleshooting).
10. Close the pressure control valve, then close the

shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
6 x 1.0 m m
[NOTICE]
11 N m Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
(1.1 k g f m , 8 Ibfft) than 5 seconds or the p u m p could be damaged by
over-heating.
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose 11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). If the p u m p is in good condition, the gauge should
2
read at least 7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kPa ( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm ,
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint 1,1101,210 psi). A low reading means pump
adapter (pump). output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the p u m p .
17-7
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A
Special Tools Required 5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.
P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A A
P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122
P/S pressure gauge, 07406-001000A
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the p u m p or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level; refer to

the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14)
and p u m p belt tension (see page 17-10).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) f r o m the

p u m p outlet w i t h care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the p u m p
outlet (B) w i t h the P/S joint outlet plate.
7. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several

times to w a r m the fluid to operating temperature.
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the p u m p is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15
2
kgf/cm , 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet
hose or valve body unit (see Steering System
Troubleshooting).
9. Close the pressure control valve gradually and read

the pressure.
I NOTICE I
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
over-heating.
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S 10. Immediatery open the pressure control valve fully.
pressure gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose If the p u m p is in good condition, the gauge should
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). read at least 7,600 -8,300 kPa (78- 85 kgf/cm , 2
1,110 1,210 psi). A low reading means p u m p

4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
adapter (pump). the pump.
17-8
Fluid Leakage Inspection
PUMP A S S E M B L Y
C h e c k f o r l e a k s at t h e p u m p
s e a l , inlet a n d outlet fittings. G E A R B O X and V A L V E BODY UNIT
' C h e c k f o r leaks at t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e
and flare nut connections.
H O S E S and LINES
Inspect hoses for d a m a g e , leaks, interference a n d t w i s t i n g
Inspect fluid lines for d a m a g e , rusting and leakage.
C h e c k f o r leaks at h o s e a n d line j o i n t s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Special Tools Required Adjustment
Belt tension gauge set, 07JGG-001000A or
Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-001010A 3. Loosen the power steering p u m p mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
Belt Tension Gauge Method
Inspection
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt w i t h the

gauge face t o w a r d the engine, and measure the
tension of the belt. Follow the manufacture's
instructions. If the belt is w o r n or damaged, replace
it.
NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to

avoid hitting the gauge reset lever.
Tension:
Used Belt: 3 9 0 - 5 4 0 N ( 4 0 - 5 5 kgf, 8 8 - 1 2 1 Ibf)
N e w Belt: 740 880 N (75 90 kgf, 1 6 5 1 9 8 Ibf) 2 4 N m (2.4 k g f m , 17 I b f f t )
0 7 J G G - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A or
07JGG-001010A 4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt
tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel f r o m

lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5

minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specifications.
17-10
Deflection Method Adjustment
Inspection 3. Loosen the power steering p u m p mounting nut (A)

and bolt (B).
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf) and measure
the deflection between the power steering pump
pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B).
Deflection:
Used Belt: 13.0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in.)
New Belt: 8.5 11.0 mm (0.33 0.45 in.)
2 4 N m (2.4 k g f - m , 17 I b f f t )
4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt

tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel f r o m

lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5

minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specifications.
17-11
Power Steering
Hoses and Lines Replacement
Note these items during installation:
Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance f r o m the hose end as s h o w n .
Check all clamps for deterioration or d e f o r m a t i o n ; replace w i t h the clamps new ones if necessary.
A d d the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
A D J U S T A B L E HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)
2 . 5 5 . 5 mm
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 in.)
2 . 5 5 . 5 mm 2.04.0 mm
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 In.) ( 0 . 0 8 - 0 . 1 6 in.)
6 x 1.0 mm
17-12
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 7. Loosely install the p u m p in the p u m p bracket w i t h
the mounting bolts and nut.
2. Drain the power steering fluid f r o m the reservoir.
8. Install the p u m p belt (A) on the pulley (B).
3. Remove the intake manifold cover.
Note these items during belt installation:
4. Cover the crankshaft pulley with several shop Make sure that the power steering belt is
towels to protect if f r o m spilled power steering properly positioned on the pulleys.
fluid. Disconnect the p u m p inlet hose (A) and pump Do not get the power steering fluid or grease on
outlet hose (B) f r o m the p u m p (C), and plug them. the belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. grease before installation.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. A
6 x 1.0 m m B O L T
11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8 Ibfft)
9. Adjust the p u m p belt adjustment (see page 17-10).
10. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line; refer to

5. Remove the belt (D) by loosening the pump

adjusting nut (E), then remove pump mounting
bolts (F), nut (G) and pump. Do not turn the steering
wheel w i t h p u m p removed.
6. Connect the p u m p outlet hose and inlet hose.

Tighten the p u m p fittings securely.
17-13
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
R e p l a c e t h e p u m p a s a n a s s e m b l y If t h e p a r t s "indicated w i t h a s t e r i s k (*) a r e w o r n o r d a m a g e d .
4 . 5 mm ROLLER
FLANGE BOLTS
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f - m , 1 4 I b f f t )
*PUMP COVER
5 mm ROLLER
*SIDE PLATE
PUMP COVER SEAL

Replace.
* P U M P C A M RING
15.2x2.4 m m O-RING
Replace.
51 x 2 . 4 m m O - R I N G
Replace.
13 x 1.9 m m O - R I N G
Replace.
INLET JOINT
FLANGE BOLTS
11 N - m (1.1 k g f - m ,
8 Ibfft)
*FLOW CONTROL VALVE
SPRING
15.2x2.4 m m O-RING
Replace.
PULLEY NUT *FLOW CONTROLVALVE CAP

6 4 N - m (6.5 k g f - m , 47 I b f f t ) 4 9 N - m (5.0 k g f - m , 3 6 I b f f t )
17-14

Special Tools Required Inspection
Universal holder, 07725-0030000
10. Check the f l o w control valve for wear, burrs, and
Disassembly other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
1. Remove the power steering p u m p (see page 17-13).
2. Drain the fluid f r o m the pump.
3. Hold the steering p u m p (A) in a vise w i t h soft jaws,

hold the pulley (B) w i t h the special tool, and
remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing w i t h the jaws of the
vise.
07725-0030000
11. Inspect the bore of the f l o w control valve on the

A pump housing for scratches and wear.
B
12. Slip the f l o w control valve back in the p u m p
housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 13; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not
available separately.
4. Loosen the f l o w control valve cap w i t h a hex

wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, f l o w control
valve, and spring.
5. Remove the p u m p cover and p u m p cover seal.
6. Remove the outer side plate, p u m p cam ring, pump

rotor, pump vanes, side plate, and O-rings.
7. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve

f r o m the pump housing.
8. Remove the circlip, then remove the p u m p drive

shaft by tapping the shaft end w i t h the plastic
hammer.
9. Remove the p u m p seal spacer and p u m p seal.
(cont'd)
17-15
Power Steering
Pomp Overhaul (cont'd)

13. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the f l o w control Reassembly
valve (B) as s h o w n . Then submerge the f l o w
control valve (B) in a container of power steering 16. Clean the disassembled parts w i t h solvent, and dry
fluid or solvent (C), and b l o w in the hose. them w i t h compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than in solvent.
2
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm , 14.2 psi), replace the p u m p
as an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not 17. Align the pin (A) of the sub-valve (B) w i t h the oil
available separately. passage (C) in the p u m p housing, and push the
If the f l o w control valve tests OK, set it aside for sub-valve into place, then install the snap ring (D).
reassembly later.
18. Install the new p u m p seal (A)(with its grooved side

facing in) into the p u m p housing by hand, then
14. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race install the p u m p seal spacer (B).
slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (B).
WE
iulJJji
19. Position the pump drive shaft (C) in the p u m p

housing (D), then drive it in using a 29 m m socket
(E).
15. Inspect each part s h o w n w i t h an asterisk in the
Exploded View; if any of t h e m are w o r n or 20. Install the 40 m m snap ring (F) w i t h its radiused
damaged, replace the p u m p as an assembly. side facing out.
17-16
21. Coat the new p u m p cover seal (A) with power 24. Assemble p u m p rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
pump cover (B).
25. Set the 10 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.

Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are
in contact w i t h the sliding surface of the cam ring.
22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the 2 rollers (D).
26. Coat the new O-ring (A) w i t h power steering fluid,
23. Set the p u m p cam ring (A) over the 2 rollers with its and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).
" " mark (B) facing up. .A
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
ID
the roller set holes (D) in the side plate w i t h the
rollers (E).
(cont'd)
17-17
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
28. Coat the new O-ring (A) w i t h power steering f l u i d , 32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
and position it in the bottom of the p u m p housing nut (B). Hold the steering p u m p in a vise w i t h soft
(B). jaws. Be careful not to damage the p u m p housing
w i t h the jaws of the vise.
8 x 1.25 m m
20 N m
07725-0030000
(2.0 k g f - m , 1 4 I b f f t )
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m ,
47 Ibfft)
29. Install the p u m p cover assembly (C) in the p u m p

housing. 33. Hold the pulley (A) w i t h the special tool, and tighten
the pulley nut (B).
30. Coat the f l o w control valve (A) w i t h power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the p u m p 34. Check that the p u m p turns smoothly by turning the
housing. pulley by hand.
A
4 9 N - m (5.0 k g f - m ,
36 Ibfft)
3 1 . Coat the new O-ring (D) w i t h power steering f l u i d ,

and install it on the f l o w control valve cap (E).
Install the cap on the p u m p housing, and tighten it.
17-18
Rack Guide Adjustment
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 7. Check for tight or loose steering through the
complete turning travel.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) w i t h a
commercially available 1 3/4 inch crowfoot wrench 8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the
(B), then remove the rack guide screw (C). power assist; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
6 9 N - m (7.0 k g f - m ,
3. Remove the old sealant f r o m rack guide screw

threaded section, and apply new sealant all the w a y
around the first three threads (A). Loosely install
the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m,

18 I b f f t ) , then loosen it.
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m

(0.4 kgf-m, 2.9 Ibfft), then back it off to specified
angle.
Specified Return Angle: 60 + 5
6. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide

screw.
17-19
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
F L A R E NUTS FLANGE BOLTS

13 N-m (1-3 k g f m , 9.4 Ibfft) 1 9 N-m (1.9 k g f m , 1.4 I b f f t )
CYLINDER END SEAL

Replace.
17-20
Special Tools Required 3. Unbend the lock washer (A).
8
Cylinder end seal remover attachment, A
07TAF-SZ50100
Driver, 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 X 47 m m , 07746-0010300
Piston seal ring guide,
07LAG-SM4010A or 07LAG-SM40100
Piston seal ring sizing t o o l ,
07LAG-SM4020A or 07LAG-SM40200
Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially
available
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

Removal
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side
1. Remove the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01 steering rack (B) w i t h a w r e n c h , and unscrew both
Accord Service Manual (see page 17-30). rack ends (C) w i t h a wrench. Be careful not to
damage the rack surface w i t h the wrench. Remove
Note these items during removal: the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
Disconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
B
Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 5-2) to allow
clearance for the steering gearbox.
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot band (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull
the boots away f r o m the ends of the gearbox.
(cont'd)
17-21
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide 9. Remove the end plug (A) f r o m the gearbox housing,
screw (B). then remove the nut (B) f r o m the pinion shaft end.
C
6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) f r o m

the gearbox.
7. Remove the cylinder lines f r o m the gearbox. 10. Remove the t w o flange bolts, the valve body unit
(C), and gasket (D) f r o m the gearbox. Check that the
valve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. If
any play or roughness is felt, replace the valve
body unit w i t h a new part if necessary. Do not try to
disassemble the valve body unit.
11. Slide the steering rack all the w a y to the left.
12. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the

end of the circlip (B) sticks out f r o m the hole (C) in
the rack stop. Then turn it clockwise to remove the
circlip (D).
8. Drain the fluid f r o m the cylinder fittings by slowly

m o v i n g the steering rack back and f o r t h .
17-22
13. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (B), and 16. Install a washer (O.D. 27.5 m m , P/N 94103-10400)
steering rack (C) f r o m the steering gearbox. (A) so it will fit through the rack guide hole of the
gearbox housing, then position the washer on the
cylinder end seal (B). Make sure that the washer is
securely positioned on the cylinder end seal edges,
14. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B)
f r o m the rack bushing (C).
17. Install a socket w i t h a 27.5 m m O.D. (A) onto a 24 in.

long, 3/8 in. drive extension (B), and carefully place
it on the washer (C).
15. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of seal ring groove and piston edges w h e n
removing the seal ring.
18. Install a bearing separator (D) on the gearbox

housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the
gearbox housing points upward, then push out the
cylinder end seal (E) 5 - 6 m m ( 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 in.) by
pressing on the end of the extension.
19. Remove the steering gearbox f r o m the press, and

remove the washer f r o m the gearbox inside.
(cont'd)
17-23
Power Steering
20. Turn the special tool so it will fit through the rack Reassembly
guide hole of the steering gearbox, then position
the special tool on the cylinder end seal (A). Make 22. Coat the special tool w i t h power steering fluid, then
sure that the special tool is securely positioned on slide it onto the rack, big end first.
the seal edges.
23. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them d o w n
t o w a r d the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:

Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings w i t h care so as not to damage
t h e m . After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool).
Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
21. Insert a 24 in. long, 3/8 in. drive extension (A), on

the special t o o l . Place the steering gearbox in a
press, then remove the cylinder end seal (B) f r o m
of the gearbox by pressing on the end of the
extension.
Note these items w h e n pressing the cylinder end

seal: 24. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
cylinder w a l l . Check the tool angle, and correct it top of the O-ring.
if necessary, w h e n removing the cylinder end
seal. 25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do special tool w i t h power steering fluid, then
not try to remove the seal by striking the t o o l ; carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
striking the tool w o u l d break the cylinder end piston seal ring.
seal, and the seal w o u l d remain in the gearbox.
07TAF-SZ50100
0 7 L A G - S M 4 0 1 0 A or
07LAG-SM40100
26. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
17-24
27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end 30. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be careful
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped w i t h the rack edges.
portion.
28. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal 3 1 . Insert a deep socket (A) onto the steering rack as
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the shown.
steering rack w i t h its grooved side toward the Press
piston. W h e n installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not damage the lip of the seal w i t h the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
A
I
32. Install the cylinder and seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool w i t h a press.
Do not push on the tool w i t h excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
29. Remove the vinyl tape f r o m the steering rack, thei

remove any adhesive residue.
(cont'd)
17-25
Power Steering
34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and 37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with
coat the surface of the tape with power steering the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger.
carefully so there is no stepped portion.
38. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
35. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal remove any adhesive residue.
(A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
rack bushing (B) using the special tools. 39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the
SS 07749-0010000 hole (B) is aligned with the slot (C) on the steering
A rack.
07746-0010300
36. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,
and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
17-26
40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of 45. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new O-
the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop rings with power steering fluid, then install the
counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in lines.
the rack stop.
A Note these items during reassembly:
Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
13 N m (1.3 k g f m , 9 . 4 I b f f t )
41. Apply grease to the needle bearing (A) in the

gearbox housing, and install the valve body unit (B)
and gasket (C) by engaging the gears. Note the
valve body unit installation position (direction of
line connections). Then loosely install the 2 flange
bolts. 46. Apply multipurpose Grease to the sliding surface of
the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
housing.
42. Install the nut (D) onto the pinion shaft end, and
tighten to specified torque. After tightening, use a
drift to stake the nut shoulder (E) against the pinion 47. Apply new sealant all the way around the first 3
shaft. threads of the rack guide screw (B), then install the
spring (C) rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
f
43. Apply sealant all the way around the threads on the
end plug (F), install the end plug onto the gearbox 48. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-19). After
housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
44. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
17-27
Power Steering
49. Install the stop washer (A) w i t h the chamfered side 52. Apply multipurpose grease (A) to the
facing out, and screw each rack end (B) into the circumference of the rack end joint housing.
rack while holding the lock washer (C) so its tabs A
(D) are in the slots (E) in the end of the rack.
53. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (B) to the boot

grooves (B) on the rack ends.
50. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side
steering rack w i t h a w r e n c h , and tighten both rack 54. Center the steering rack w i t h i n its stroke. Install the
ends. Be careful not to damage the rack surface boots on the rack ends w i t h the tie-rod clips. After
w i t h the w r e n c h . installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
5 1 . Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
the rack end joint housing.
17-28
55. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (B) of the band.
56. Close the ear portion (A) of the band w i t h a

commercially available Oetiker 1098 pincer or
equivalent (B).
57. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
Installation
58. Install the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01

Note these items during installation:

Reinstall exhaust pipe A w i t h new gasket (see
page 5-11).
Reconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Front Brake P a d s Inspection
and R e p l a c e m e n t 19-2
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul 19-4
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) Components 19-7
NOTE; Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for the items not
s h o w n in this section.
The front brake caliper is different; the brake pad replacement and the brake caliper overhaul procedures
are included.
Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement
3. Remove the pads (A), pad shims (B), and pad

ACAUTION retainers (C).
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust,regardless of
material composition,could be hazardous to your
health.
Avoid breathing dust particles.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies.Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. Raise the front

of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the front wheels. Remove the
brake hose mounting bolts (A) from the knuckle.
A
9.8 N m
(1.0 kL
7.2 Ibfft) 4. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of

each brake pad lining. The measurement does not
include the pad backing plate (A) thickness.
Brake Pad Thickness:

Standard: 10.5 - 1 1 . 5 mm (0.41 - 0.45 in)
Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
Remove the caliper bolt (B), and pivot the caliper
(C) up out of the way. If the caliper pin head is the
hex. type, the caliper bolt should be removed using
a wrench while holding the caliper pin with another
wrench. Check the hoses and pin boots for damage
and deterioration.
i
5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the front pads and shims together as
a set.
6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and

check for grooves and cracks.
7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
19-2

8. Install the pad retainers (A). 11. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
9. Apply Molykote M77 grease to both sides of the

pad shims (A) and the back of the pads (B). Wipe
excess grease off the shim.
A C
12. Pivot the caliper down into position, being careful

not to damage the pin boot Install the caliper bolt
(B), and torque it to proper specification. If the
caliper pin head (C) is the hex. type, the caliper bolt
should be installed by using a wrench while
holding the caliper pin with another wrench. Install
the brake hose onto the knuckle.
13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work, then road-test.
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a

greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. pads have been replaced as a set. Several
Install the pad with the wear indicator (C) on the applications of the brake pedal will restore the
inside.If you are reusing the pads,always reinstall normal pedal stroke.
the brake pads in their original positions to prevent
loss of braking efficiency. 14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
19-3
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Avoid breathing dust particles
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages w i t h compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake f l u i d .
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
W h e n reusing pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake flued.
Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore w i t h clean brake fluid.
Replace all rubber parts w i t h new ones.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
19-4
Sedan:
^3Mm:S\\ licone grease
{GREASEM : Rubber grease
BANJO BOLT
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f m , 2 5 Ibfft)
/SEALING WASHERS
BRAKE HOSE Replace.
10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S BLEED SCREW
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f m , 2 5 I b f f t ) 9 N m (0.9 k g f m , 6.5 I b f f t )
CALIPER BODY
CAM BOOT S L E E V E PISTON BEARING A

Replace.
ADJUSTING SPRING B
SPRING COVER
CIRCLIP
PISTON A S S E M B L Y
BRAKE PADS
OUTER PAD SHIM
CALIPER BRACKET
10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
PIN B O O T
(cont'd)
19-5
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (cont'd)
Coupe:
: Silicone grease
GREASE! : Rubber grease
BANJO BOLT
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f - m , 2 5 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 mm
43 N m , SEALING WASHERS
(4.4 k g f - m , 3 2 Ibfft) Replace.
BLEED SCREW
9 N m (0.9 k g f - m , 6.5 I b f f t )
PISTON SEAL
Replace.
CAM BOOT
Replace.
PISTON BOOT
Replace.
PARKING L E V E R /
CAM ASSEMBLY
RETURN
SPRING
PAD SPRING
% GREASES!
CALIPER BOLTS
8 x 1.0 m m
2 5 N m (2.5 k g f - m , 19 I b f f t ) BOOT CLIP
Replace.
PIN A
PIN B O O T S
Replace.
BRAKE PADS
RETAINER
PIN B O O T S
SILICONE
GREASE
CALIPER
FLANGE BOLTS BRACKET
10 x 1.25 m m
5 5 N - m (5.6 k g f - m , 41 I b f f t )
PIN
19-6
Brakes
ABS Components ('98-00 Models)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index 19-9
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index 19-10
Circuit D i a g r a m 19-12
A B S Indicator Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ................... 19-18
Modulator Unit R e m o v a l a n d Installation .............. 19-21
ABS Control Unit R e p l a c e m e n t 19-22
NOTE: Refer to the 1998 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for the items not
s h o w n in this section.
* The locations of the modulator unit and ABS control unit were changed;
- Component location index w a s added.
- Modulator unit removal and installation was added.
- ABS control unit replacement was added.
Ground numbers of pump motor ground and ABS control unit ground were changed;
- DTC troubleshooting index w a s added.
- S y m p t o m troubleshooting index w a s added.
- Circuit diagram was added.
- DTC troubleshooting was added.
- ABS indicator circuit troubleshooting was added.
ABS Components
/UNDER-HOOD ARSRELAY BOX

(PUMP MOTOR RELAY)
Inspection, page 22-52
/UNDER-HOOD ABS RELAY BOX

(FAIL-SAFE RELAY)
Inspection, page 22-52
/UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
/PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

MODULATOR UNIT
R e m o v a l a n d Installation,/ RIGHT-REAR W H E E L S E N S O R
p a g e 19-21 I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-70
A B S C O N T R O L UNIT R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-71
DATA LINK in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
C O N N E C T O R (16P)
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL S E N S O R
Inspection, p a g e 19-70 DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l FUSE/RELAY BOX
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
19-8
DTC Detection item Note
DTC: 11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body g r o u n d / s h o r t to power) Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-52)
DTC: 12 R i g h t - f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n ) Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
(see p a g e 19-53)
DTC: 13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-52)
DTC: 14 L e f t - f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n ) Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-53)
DTC: 15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body g r o u n d / s h o r t to p o w e r ) Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-52)
DTC: 16 R i g h t - r e a r w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n ) Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
(see p a g e 19-53)
DTC: 17 Left-rear w h e e l s e n s o r ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t t o p o w e r ) Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-52)
DTC: 18 Left-rear w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n ) Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-53)
DTC: 21 Right-front pulser Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-54)
DTC: 22 Left-front pulser Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-54)
DTC: 23 Right-rear pulser Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-54)
DTC: 24 Left-rear p u l s e r Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-54)
DTC: 31 R i g h t - f r o n t inlet s o l e n o i d Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 32 Right-front outlet solenoid Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 33 L e f t - f r o n t inlet s o l e n o i d Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 34 Left-front outlet solenoid Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 35 R i g h t - r e a r inlet s o l e n o i d Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 36 Right-rear outlet solenoid Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 37 L e f t - r e a r inlet s o l e n o i d Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 38 Left-rear o u t l e t s o l e n o i d Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-55)
DTC: 41 Right-front w h e e l lock Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-58)
DTC: 42 L e f t - f r o n t w h e e l lock Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-58)
DTC: 43 R i g h t - r e a r w h e e l lock Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-58)
DTC: 44 L e f t - r e a r w h e e l lock Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-58)
DTC: 51 M o t o r lock Refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-59)
DTC: 52 M o t o r s t u c k OFF (see p a g e 19-14)
DTC: 53 M o t o r stuck O N (see p a g e 19-16)
DTC: 54 Fail-safe relay Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-63)
DTC: 61 L o w ignition voltage Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-65)
DTC: 62 High ignition voltage Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-65)
DTC: 71 Different diameter tire Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-66)
DTC: 81 C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) d i a g n o s i s , a n d R O M / R A M d i a g n o s i s Refer t o t h e '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 19-66)
19-9
ABS Components
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
A B S indicator does not come on A B S Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)
A B S indicator does not go off A B S Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)
and no DTC is stored
19-10
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
MODULATOR UNIT
CONNECTOR
7P CONNECTOR ( number) 18P CONNECTOR ( O number) 16P CONNECTOR ( number) ( O number)
18P CONNECTOR CO number)
4 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 3 J s 6 7
1
4
3 1
S ; 6 .,11,
ir
7 8 9
A" a^\a/
7 8 | 9 i o [ / 12J13 14| / l l 7 18 8 3 10
11112 A" 15
BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR

PUMP MOTOR
20P CONNECTOR ( O number) CONNECTOR
18P CONNECTOR ( number) ( number)
1 ;
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8
r-i | I E=L.
i o ' n :12 13 i 4 , i 5 i i e ; i 7 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13114 15 16 17 18
GAUGE A S S E M B L R Y CONNECTORS Terminal side of female terminals

22P CONNECTOR ( O number) 16P CONNECTOR ( number)
o 6 7(8 9 11C 1 I 2 4 5 6 7
.i'i2y/;/i6!>oy / 19! 20 21122 8 j 9 10Jll|XJl2

/ 14 15 16
19-12
TVBSl
ABS C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S
CONNECTOR a (22P)
FRONT/REAR
Terminal side o f
CONNECTOR B (12P) male t e r m i n a l s
JU. p 5 3 , , n,
Wire side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-13
ABS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C 52: Motor Stuck O F F 4. Connect the p u m p motor relay connector terminal

No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire for a moment,
1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the under- and check the fuse.
hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK,
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR

Is the fuse OK ?
4 3
NO - Replace the fuse, and g o t o step 2. ' II
+B I I MOTOR
2. Connect the p u m p motor relay connector t e r m i n a l (WHT) I J (WHT/BLU)
No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a m o m e n t ,
and check the fuse. J U M P E R WIRE
T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the fuse blown?
4 [| 3 Y E S - C h e c k for a short to body ground in the MCK

+B I | MOTOR circuit.
(WHT) [ ) (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
5. Check the p u m p motor relay in the under-hood
ABS relay box, refer to the ' 9 8 - 0 1 Accord Service
Is the fuse blown? Is the relay OK?
Y E S Check for a short to body g r o u n d in the Y E S - G o t o step 6.

motor power source circuit.
NO Replace the p u m p motor relay.
6. Connect the p u m p motor relay connector terminal
3. Check the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a moment.
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK. Does the pump motor operate?
Is the fuse OK ? Y E S - G o t o step 11.
Y E S - G o t o step 5. NO Go to step 7.
N O - R e p l a c e the fuse, and go to step 4. 7. Disconnect the p u m p motor connector.

No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
19-14
9. Measure the voltage between the pump motor 11. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B (12P).
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
PUMP MOTOR CONNECTOR
No. 1 to No. 4 with a jumper wire.
I MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER PMR (YEL/RED)
(V) WIRE
2lxTi
+B (WHT)
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Y E S - G o to step 10. 13. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit
connector terminal B12 and body ground.
NO Repair open in the wire between the under-
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P)
hood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
10. Measure the voltage between the pump motor

connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6
PUMP MOTOR CONNECTOR 7 8 9 10 11 12
,
I 1 . _r-j
PMR (YEL/RED)
M O T O R G N D (BLK) MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals Y E S - G o to step 14.

Is there battery voltage? hood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit.
Y E S Replace the modulator unit.
NO - R e p a i r open in the wire between the p u m p

motor and body ground (G203).B
(cont'd)
19-15
ABS Components
14. Remove the j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the p u m p m o t o r DTC 53: Motor Stuck O N
relay connector.
1. Check that the p u m p motor operates w i t h the
15. Start the engine. ignition switch OFF.
16. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit Does the pump motor operate?
connector terminal B12 and body g r o u n d .
Y E S Replace the p u m p motor relay. (Pump motor
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P) relay stuck O N . ) B
IMO-Go to step 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 2. Remove the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the

7 8 9 10 11 12 passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
1 I I T "
y ,
L
1
PMR (YEL/RED)
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO -Replacethe fuse, and recheck.B


4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's
YES Repair a short to power in the w i r e between under-dash fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal
the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS control No. 5 and body ground.
unit.B
P A S S E N G E R S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y B O X 16P C O N N E C T O R
NO If the p r o b l e m recurs, replace the ABS control
unit.B
MCK (GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 1 2 / 14 15 / (YJ
NO Repair open in the wire between the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ABS control u n i t . B
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
19-16
6. Disconnect the p u m p motor connector. 9. Remove the p u m p motor relay.
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and 10. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B (12P).
body ground.
11. Check for continuity between terminal B12 and
body ground.
A B S CONTROL UNIT C O N N E C T O R B (12P)
u r n
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
L1 t J
u " PMR (YEL/RED)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx. 10 V? Wire side of female terminals
Y E S - G o t o step 8. Is there continuity?
NO Repair open in the wire between the under- Y E S Repair short to body ground in the wire
hood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor. between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
ABS control u n i t . H
8. Measure the voltage between the p u m p motor
connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2. NO If the problem recurs, replace the ABS control
unit.H
M O T O R G N D (BLK) MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
NO Repair open in the wire between the p u m p

motor and body ground (G203).B
19-17
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and watch the ABS 9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly
indicator. 16P connector terminal No.10 and body ground.
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y 16P C O N N E C T O R
Does the ABS indicator come on?
Y E S If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 / 14 15 16
it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, go to step 13.
X
WALP (BLU/WHT)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?
YES Go to step 3.
NO Repair open in the brake system indicator
circuit.* Is there continuity?
Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse. Y E S Repair short to body ground in the wire
Open in the w i r e between the BACK-UP LIGHT between the gauge assembly and the ABS control
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly. unit. B
Open circuit inside the fuse box.
NO Go to step 10.
10. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector.
4. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B (12P).
11. Connect the gauge assembly 22P connector
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal No. 16 to body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
Does the ABS indicator come on? 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S Check for loose ABS control unit connectors.
If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control
unit and recheck.
NO G o t o step 6. 1 2
11 12
X/4 /5 16 6 7 8 9 10
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge X

JUMPER
XXX19 20 21 22
G N D (BLK)
assembly.
WIRE
Is the bulb OK?
NO Replace the ABS indicator bulb B

Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the gauge
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 16P connector. assembly and body ground (G50D.B
N O - R e p l a c e the printed circuit board in the gauge

assembly. B
19-18
13. Check the POWER MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the 16. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit
under-dash driver's fuse/relay box, and reinstall the connector terminal A11 and body ground.
fuse if it is OK.
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
Is the fuse OK ?
IG2 (YEL/BLK)
__n n n t1 _
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck B 1
12 / 14
4 6 7 8 9 10 11
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 d
14. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal l i h
A1 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
G N D 3 (BLK)
X n -TL- Is there battery voltage?

JUMPER 17 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
WIRE
I L
N O - Repair open in the wire between the POWER

MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS control unit, fl
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s 17. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal B1
to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P)
Does the ABS indicator go off?
Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the ABS JUMPER

WALP (BLU/WHT)
control unit and body ground (G204). B WIRE
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO - Go to step 16. 7 8 9 10 11 12
Y E S - Check for loose ABS control unit connectors.

If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control
unit, and recheck.
NO- Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
19-19
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector

terminal No. 10 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
2.
1 2 3 "'>-<.' 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 14 15 16
12
X X
JUMPER WALP (BLU/WHT)
WIRE
YES Repair open in the w i r e between the gauge

assembly and the ABS control u n i t . H
NO Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge

assembly.
19-20
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
8
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
8
To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel.
Removal
1. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B) and the pump motor connector (A).
2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (C).
Installation
3. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. Tighten the flare nuts to 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 lbf-ft).
4. Connect the modulator unit connector and the pump motor connector.
5. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
6. Start the engine, and check that the A B S indicator goes off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the A B S indicator does not come on.
19-21
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.
2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors.
3. Remove the ABS control unit.
4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
19-22
Brakes
#
ABS/TCS Components ( 1 Model)
General Troubleshooting Information 19-25
DTC Troubleshooting Index 19-30
System Description 19-32
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting 19-76
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting 19-78
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation 19-80
TCS Switch test - 19-81
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement 19-82
Wheel Sensor Inspection 19-82
Wheel Sensor Replacement 19-83
The A B S has been changed to ABS/TCS; troubleshooting was added.

ABS/TCS Components
Component Location index
/UNDER-HOOD A B S RELAY BOX

'PUMP MOTOR RELAY
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 22-52 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
T e s t , p a g e 22-52 i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
TCS RELAY
T e s t , p a g e 22-31
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L S E N S O R
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

I
TCS SWITCH
T e s t , p a g e 19-81
M O D U L A T O R UNIT
Removal and Installation, D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (16P)
p a g e 19-80 A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-82 LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
19-24
A B S / T C S Indicators The ABS is not operational w h e n the ABS indicator is

O N ; the TCS is not operational w h e n the TCS
If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off once indicator is ON.
after turning the ignition switch ON(II) w i t h o u t When the ABS and TCS indicators are both O N ,
starting the engine, and then comes on again and troubleshoot the ABS first.
goes off several seconds later after starting the When the TCS indicator and MIL are both ON,
engine. This occurs because the ABS/TCS control unit troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.
is turned on by the IG2 power source.
The TCS or ABS indicator comes on w h e n the ABS/ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
TCS control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating The m e m o r y can hold any number of DTCs. However,
properly, the TCS or ABS indicator will come o n , w h e n the same DTC is detected more than once, the
under the following conditions: more recent DTC is written over the earlier one .
For ABS or TCS Indicator: Therefore, w h e n the same problem is detected
- Only drive wheels rotate repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
- One drive wheel is stuck The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
- The vehicle goes into a spin. not in the order they occur.
- The ABS continues to operate for a long time. The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
disturbance. cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery.
For TCS Indicator: Perform the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
- The TCS operated w h e n the front brake pad
temperature rises excessively. Self-diagnosis
- The TCS switch is OFF.
- One or more of these components are faulty: Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
Heated oxygen sensor, Manifold absolute pressure - Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine
sensor, Crankshaft position sensor, Engine coolant starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
temperature sensor, Throttle position sensor, Top - Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial
dead center sensor, Top dead center sensor 2, diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Intake air temperature sensor, Exhaust gas When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis/the
recirculation, Barometric pressure sensor, Idle air ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
control valve, VTEC pressure switch, Knock sensor,
Fuel supply system, Automatic transaxle, Misfire Kickback
detection system of the PGM-FI system.
The pump motor operates w h e n the ABS is functioning,
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
the customer about the problem, taking these cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
conditions into consideration:
Pump Motor
When a problem is detected and the ABS or TCS
indicator comes on, there are cases w h e n the The pump motor operates w h e n the ABS is
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned functioning.
OFF, and cases w h e n the indicator goes off The ABS/TCS control unit checks the p u m p motor
automatically w h e n the system returns to normal. For operation during initial diagnosis w h e n the vehicle is
ABS DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off started. You may hear the motor operate at this time,
automatically when the system returns to normal. For but it is normal.
all other codes, the indicator stays on until the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
For ABS DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18, 2 1 , 22, 23, 24, 5 1 , 52 and
53, the ABS indicator goes off w h e n the vehicle is Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
driven again and the system is OK after the ignition are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not
switch is turned f r o m OFF to ON (II). However, if the equipped with ABS/TCS. To ease bleeding, start w i t h
DTC is cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes the front wheels.
off right after the engine is started if the system is OK.
(cont'd)
19-25
ABS/TCS Components
How to Troubleshoot A B S and T C S DTCs 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and f o l l o w the
prompts on the Honda PGM Tester to display the
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
and/or TCS indicator is still on. Following the f l o w c h a r t
w h e n the ABS and/or TCS indicator does not come on NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
can result in incorrect diagnosis. for specific instructions.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors w i t h a single outline and the male terminal Shorting the Service Check Signal Circuit with the
connectors w i t h a double outline. Honda PGM Tester:
1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
the problem occured, and try to reproduce the PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out (DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.
w h e n the ABS and/or TCS indicator came on, such
as during ABS control, after ABS control, w h e n
vehicle speed was at a certain speed, etc.
2. W h e n the ABS or TCS indicator does not come on

during the test drive, but troubleshooting is
performed based on the DTC, check for loose
connectors, poor contact of the terminals, etc.
before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-

drive the vehicle. Make sure the ABS and TCS
indicators do not come on.
How to Retrieve A B S or T C S DTCs

2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the
Using the Honda PGM Tester: Honda PGM Tester.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda 3. Turn the ignition switch ON i ' without pressing the
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector brake pedal.
(DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning
the ignition switch ON (II), the system shifts to the
DTC clearing mode.
19-26
4. The blinking frequency indicates the DTC. How to Clear ABS DTCs
NOTE: If the DTC is not memorized, the ABS or TCS Honda PGM Tester Method:
indicator will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come
back on. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
The system w i l l not indicate the DTC unless these (DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.
conditions are met:
The TCS switch is not pushed.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
The ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The engine is stopped.
The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
E x a m p l e of D T C 1 5
Short blinks
L o n g blink (five t i m e s )
ON | 1 n n n n r
OFF ' U U U U U
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC
E x a m p l e of D T C 2 2 (s) by following the screen prompts on the Honda
Short blinks
L o n g blinks (two times) (two t i m e s )
PGM Tester.
NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual

for specific instructions.
J
OFF *' Service Check Signal Circuit Method:
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester f r o m the DLC. (DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the

Honda PGM Tester.
(cont'd)
19-27
ABS/TCS Components
General Troubleshooting information (cont'd)
3. Press the brake pedal. 8. After a few seconds, the ABS indicator blinks twice
and the DTC is cleared. If the indicator does not
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. If the indicator
brake pedal pressed. stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the
DTC because a problem was detected during initial
5. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake diagnosis before shifting to DTC clearing mode.
pedal.
6. After the ABS indicator comes on, press the brake
pedal again. 10. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester f r o m the DLC.
7. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake

pedal again.
You cannot clear the DTC unless these conditions

are met:
The vehicle speed is 6 m p h (10 km/h) or less.
The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition
switch is turned ON (II).
ON
ABS
indicator
OFF
d | d
Depressed- I
Brake
pedal
R e l e a s e d --
I g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II)
a: 2 sec. c : 0.3 s e c .
b: 4 s e c . d: within 3 s e c .
19-28
I
r
ABS
H o w to Clear T C S DTCs Service Check Signal Circuit M e t h o d :
Honda PGM Tester M e t h o d : 1. Press the parking brake pedal w i t h the SCS circuit
opened. Keep the pedal pressed during the entire
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda DTC clearing procedure.
(DLC) (B) behind the driver's kick panel. 2. Press and hold the TCS switch, then turn the
ignition switch ON (II) w i t h o u t starting the engine.
3. Continue to hold the TCS switch for four seconds,

then turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Within six seconds, turn the ignition switch back

ON (II) for at least 4 seconds, then release the TCS
switch, and watch the TCS indicator.
5. After a f e w seconds, the TCS indicator will come on

after blinking to indicate that the DTC is cleared. If
the indicator blinks repeatedly, repeat steps 1
through 4.

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC
S t a n d a r d Indication Pattern
(s) by f o l l o w i n g the screen prompts on the PGM Continues O N
Tester. ON r-
T C S Indicator
NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual OFF
for specific instructions.
I
a a
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h O N (II)
A b n o r m a l Indication Pattern
blinks repeatedly
ON
T C S Indicator
OFF 4
a : 0.3 s e c .
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h O N (II)
19-29
ABS/TCS Components
ABS DTCs
DTC Detection I t e m aMote
11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short t o body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
21 Right-front pulser (see page 19-50)
22 Left-front pulser (see page 19-50)
23 Right-rear pulser (see page 19-50)
24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-50)
31 Right-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
32 Right-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
33 Left-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
34 Left-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
35 Right-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
36 Right-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
37 Left-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
38 Left-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
41 Right-front wheel lock (see page 19-54)
42 Left-front wheel lock (see page 19-54)
43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-54)
44 Left-rear wheel lock (see page 19-54)
51 Motor lock (see page 19-55)
52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-55)
53 Motor stuck ON (see page 19-57)
54 ABS Fail-safe relay (see page 19-59)
61 Low ignition voltage (see page 19-61)
62 High ignition voltage (see page 19-61)
71 Different diameter tire (see page 19-62)
81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis (see page 19-62)
T C S DTCs
DTC Detection Item Note
24 RF TCS NO solenoid (see page 19-63)
25 RF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-63)
26 LF TCS NO solenoid (see page 19-63)
27 LF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-63)
28 TCS relay (see page 19-66)
31 Engine retard c o m m a n d (PFINH) signal (see page 19-69)
32 Engine speed (NEP) signal (see page 19-71)
34 Reference voltage (VREF) signal (see page 19-72)
36 Throttle position sensor output (THLOUT) signal (see page 19-73)
61 A/T shift position (ATSFTP) signal (see page 19-74)
81 Continuous TCS operation (see page 19-75)
19-30
ABS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-76)
ABS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
DTC is stored 19-76)
ABS indicator came on once, but it is The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
OK n o w
TCS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-78)
TCS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
DTC is stored 19-78)
TCS indicator came on once, but it is The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
OK n o w
19-31
ABS/TCS Components
System Description
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (26P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
n n X n n
1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
FLW FRW FRW
GND1 N C L NOL ABS SCS (-) (-) {+) STOP IG2
15 16 18 20 21 22 24 25 26
RLW RRW RRW
NCR NOR TCS1 MCK (+) (+) (-) FSR DLC
Terminal W i r e color Terminal sign Description Measurement

number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II))
1 BLK GND1 Ground 1-GND B e l o w 0.3 V
( G r o u n d 1)
2 YEL/GRN NCL D r i v e s left T C S n o r m a l l y 2-GND TCS OFF Battery
( N o r m a l l y c l o s e d left) closed solenoid valve Indicator Voltage
3 GRY NOL D r i v e s left T C S n o r m a l l y 3-GND ON B e l o w 0. 3 V
( N o r m a l l y o p e n left) open solenoid valve (Disconnect
16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
4 BLU/WHT ABS Drives A B S indicator 4-GND ABS ON 4 - 6 V
(Turns the indicator drive indicator OFF B e l o w 1.0 V
transistor to O N , then
t u r n s off the indicator)
6 BRN SCS (Service check Detects service check 6-GND SCS C i r c u i t Shorted B e l o w 0.3 V
signal) c o n n e c t o r signal (Use f o r Opened Approx. 5 V
DTC i n d i c a t i o n )
8 BRN FLW(-) Detects left-front w h e e l 8-9 Wheel T u r n w h e e l at AC:
(Front-left w h e e l sensor signal 1 turn/second 0. 053 V o r
neqative) above
9 GRN/BLU FLW( + ) (Reference)
(Front-left w h e e l Oscilloscope:
positive) 0.15 V p - p o r
10 GRN FRW( ) Detects right-front w h e e l 10-11 above
(Front-right wheel sensor signal
neqative)
11 GRN/BLK FRWH-) Stopped 0.25 V -
(Front-right wheel 1.15V
positive)
12 WHT/BLK STOP Detects brake switch 12-GND Brake p e d a l Pressed Battery
signal Voltage
Released B e l o w 0.3 V
13 YEL/BLK IG2 Power source for 13-GND Ignition switch O N (II) Battery
( I g n i t i o n 2) activating the system Voltaqe
S t a r t (III) B e l o w 0.3 V
19-32
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Measurement
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II)}
15 RED/GRN NCR Drives right TCS n o r m a l l y 15-GND TCS indicator OFF Battery
(Normally closed riqht) closed solenoid valve Voltaqe
16 LT B L U NOR Drives right TCS n o r m a l l y 16-GND ON B e l o w 0.3 V
(Normally opened open solenoid valve (Disconnect
right) 16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
18 RED/WHT TCS1 Drives TCS indicator 18-GND TCS indicator With engine Battery
(Turns the indicator drive running, and Voltage
transistor to O N , then i n d i c a t o r OFF
turns off the indicator) ON Approx. 2 V
20 GRN MCK Detects p u m p m o t o r 20-GND Pump motor ON Battery
( M o t o r check) drive signal Voltaqe
OFF B e l o w 0.3 V
Remove MCK fuse A p p r o x . 10 V
21 LT B L U R L W (+) Detects left-rear w h e e l 21-22 Wheel T u r n w h e e l at AC:
(Rear-left w h e e l sensor signal 1 turn/second 0. 053V o r
positive) above
22 GRY RLW(-) (Reference)
(Rear-left w h e e l Oscilloscope:
positive) 0.15 V p - p o r
23 GRN/YEL RRW( + ) Detects r i g h t - r e a r w h e e l 23-24 above
(Rear-right w h e e l sensor signal
positive)
24 BLU/YEL RRW(-) Stopped 0.25 V -
(Rear-right w h e e l 1.15 V
neqative)
25 YEL/GRN FSR D r i v e s A B S fail-safe relay 25-GND ABS Warning B e l o w 0.3 V
(Fail-safe relay) ( A B S f a i l - s a f e relay is (SCS c i r c u i t Normal A p p r o x . 11V
t u r n e d OFF t o s h u t off t h e m u s t be open)
power source to the
solenoid and p u m p
m o t o r relay w h e n a
p r o b l e m occurs.)
26 LT B L U DLC Communicates with the
(Data link c o n n e c t o r ) Honda P G M Tester
(cont'd)
19-33
ABS/TCS Components
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
1
FP
TDR
2
VREF
10
/ 11
SW
4
TCS
13 14
AT
7
SFTP
15 16
/
PF
OUT INH NEP T C S R P A R K PMR T C S 2
Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Measurement

1 PNK FPTDR Outputs e n g i n e retard 1-GND TCS Not operating A p p r o x . 2.5 V
( F r a m e to p o w e r t r a i n request signal (5V, d u t y 50)
torque d o w n request) Operating A p p r o x . 5V
2 ORN/GRN VREF Reference voltage f o r the 2-GND A p p r o x . 5V
(Voltage reference) sensors of the PGM-FI
system
4 ORN/WHT TCS S W Detects T C S s w i t c h s i g n a l 4-GND TCS TCS switch Battery
(TCS s w i t c h ) switch pressed Voltaqe
OFF (TCS i n d i c a t o r 0 V
is O N )
7 LTGRN ATSFTP Detects A / T s h i f t p o s i t i o n 7-GND Shift the transmission to E , Approx. 4 V
(AT shift position) signal t h e n start t h e e n g i n e .
9 YEL/GRN THLOUT Detects t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n 9-GND Throttle Fully closed A p p r o x . 0.5V
(Throttle out) sensor signal valve Fully o p e n e d A p p r o x . 4.8V
10 BLU PFINH Detects T C S o p e r a t i o n 10-GND Permission (normal) A p p l o x . 2.5V
(Powertrain to frame permission signal (5V, d u t y 50)
inhibition) I n h i b i t i o n (the c o o l a n t Approx. 5 V
t e m p e r a t u r e is 0C or b e l o w )
Failure (TCS a n d / o r P C M has Applox. 0 V
failed)
11 BLU NEP Detects e n g i n e s p e e d 11-GND Engine idling Approx. 6 V
(Enqine speed pulse) signal
13 GRN/YEL TCSR D r i v e s T C S r e l a y (TCS 13-GND TCS (SCS Warning B e l o w 0.3 V
(TCS relay) relay is t u r n e d OFF t o circuit Normal A p p r o x . 11 V
shut off the p o w e r source m u s t be
to the TCS solenoid and opened)
p u m p m o t o r relay w h e n a
problem occurs)
14 GRN/RED PARK Detects p a r k i n g b r a k e 14-GND With Pulled B e l o w 0.3 V
(Parking) switch signal engine Released Battery
running, Voltage
parking
brake
15 YEL/RED PMR Drives p u m p m o t o r relay 15-GND ABS OFF] Pump ON B e l o w 1.0 V
( P u m p m o t o r relay) indicator motor OFF Battery
Voltage
ON B e l o w 0.3 V
1
16 RED/WHT TCS2 Drives TCS indicator 16-GND Tcs OFF Battery
(Turns the indicator drive indicator Voltaqe
transistor to O N , then ON Approx. 2 V
t u r n s off the indicator)
19-34
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (12P)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
2 3 4 5 6
RR- FL- RL~ FR-
LG OUT OUT OUT OUT
7 8 9 10 11 12
RR- FL- RL- FR-
GND3 IN IN IN IN GND2
Terminal W i r e color Terminal sign Description Measurement

2 BRN/BLK LG G r o u n d for logic circuit 2-GND B e l o w 0.3 V
(Loqic q r o u n d )
3 YEL/WHT RR-OUT Drives right-rear outlet 3-GND ABS indicator OFF Battery
(Rear-riqht outlet) solenoid valve Voltage
4 YEL/BLU FL-OUT Drives left-front outlet 4-GND
(Front-left outlet) solenoid valve
5 YEL/GRN RL-OUT D r i v e s left-rear o u t l e t 5-GND ON B e l o w 0.3 V
(Rear-left o u t l e t ) solenoid valve (Disconnect
6 YEL/BLK FR-OUT Drives right-front outlet 6-GND 16P c o n n e c t o r
(Front-right outlet) solenoid valve to turn
indicator on)
( G r o u n d 3)
8 RED/WHT RR-IN D r i v e s r i g h t - r e a r inlet 8-GND ABS indicator OFF Battery
( R e a r - r i g h t inlet) solenoid valve Voltage
9 RED/BLU FL-IN Drives left-front inlet 9-GND
( F r o n t - l e f t inlet) solenoid valve
10 RED/GRN RL-IN D r i v e s left-rear inlet 10-GND ON B e l o w 0.3 V
(Rear-left inlet) solenoid valve (Disconnect
11 RED/BLK FR-IN Drives right-front inlet 11-GND 16P c o n n e c t o r
( F r o n t - r i g h t inlet) solenoid valve to turn
indicator on)
( G r o u n d 2)
(cont'd)
19-35
ABS/TCS Components
Outline
This system consists of the ABS/TCS control unit, the m o d u l a t o r unit, f o u r w h e e l sensors, and the PCM. The system integrates the A B S (Anti-
l o c k Brake S y s t e m ) a n d t h e T C S ( T r a c t i o n C o n t r o l S y s t e m ) a n d c o n t r o l s b o t h s y s t e m s u s i n g t h e b r a k e s .
A B S control Improves maneuverability a n d stability w h e n braking.
ABS/TCS
I m p r o v e s a c c e l e r a t i n g ability f r o m a standstill on slipperly road surfaces.
T C S control
I m p r o v e s t r a c t i o n w h e n o n e drive w h e e l is o n a slippery road surface.
NO: Normally Open

NC: Normally Closed
19-36
ABS Features
W h e n t h e b r a k e p e d a l is p r e s s e d w h i l e d r i v i n g , t h e w h e e l s can lock b e f o r e t h e v e h i c l e c o m e s t o a s t o p . In s u c h an e v e n t , t h e m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y o f
t h e v e h i c l e is r e d u c e d if t h e f r o n t w h e e l s are l o c k e d , a n d t h e s t a b i l i t y o f t h e v e h i c l e is r e d u c e d if t h e rear w h e e l s a r e l o c k e d , c r e a t i n g a n
e x t r e m e l y u n s t a b l e c o n d i t i o n . T h e A B S p r e c i s e l y c o n t r o l s t h e s l i p rate o f t h e w h e e l s t o e n s u r e m a x i m u m g r i p f o r c e f r o m t h e t i r e s , a n d it t h e r e b y
e n s u r e s m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y a n d s t a b i l i t y of t h e v e h i c l e .
T h e A B S c a l c u l a t e s t h e slip rate o f t h e w h e e l s b a s e d o n t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d a n d t h e w h e e l s p e e d , t h e n it c o n t r o l s t h e b r a k e f l u i d p r e s s u r e t o a t t a i n
t h e t a r g e t s l i p rate.
Grip F o r c e of Tire a n d R o a d S u r f a c e
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
TARGET SLIP RATE
SLIP RATE
TCS Features
T h e T C S p r o v i d e s l o w s p e e d t r a c t i o n . W h e n a d r i v e w h e e l loses t r a c t i o n o n a s l i p p e r l y r o a d s u r f a c e a n d s t a r t s t o s p i n , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
s e n d s a b r a k e s i g n a l t o t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t , w h i c h a p p l i e s brake p r e s s u r e t o s l o w t h e s p i n n i n g w h e e l . A t t h a t t i m e , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
s e n d s an e n g i n e r e t a r d s i g n a l t o t h e P C M t o p r e v e n t d a m a g e t o t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n .
(cont'd)
19-37
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Main Control
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s t h e w h e e l s p e e d b a s e d o n t h e w h e e l s e n s o r s i g n a l it r e c e i v e d , t h e n it c a l c u l a t e s t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d b a s e d o n
t h e d e t e c t e d w h e e l s p e e d . T h e c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d d u r i n g d e c e l e r a t i o n b a s e d o n t h e rate o f d e c e l e r a t i o n .
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t c a l c u l a t e s t h e s l i p r a t e o f e a c h w h e e l , a n d it t r a n s m i t s t h e c o n t r o l s i g n a l t o t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t s o l e n o i d v a l v e w h e n
t h e s l i p r a t e is h i g h .
T h e pressure r e d u c t i o n c o n t r o l has 3 m o d e s : p r e s s u r e i n t e n s i f y i n g , p r e s s u r e r e t a i n i n g , a n d pressure r e d u c i n g .
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT
Detect Reference
Vehicle S p e e d Slip Rate
RIGHT-REAR Detect | 1
\ \ \ Detect ABS Drive . ^ RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR Wheel Speed | J J J Slip Rate
3> Control Solenoid [ | SOLENOID
LEFT-REAR Detect Select L o w Drive LEFT-REAR

WHEEL SENSOR Wheel Speed Speed Wheel Solenoid SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT 1 Detect Detect ABS Drive RIGHT-FRONT
W H E E L S E N S O R f ~ f ^ Wheel Speed Slip Rate Control Solenoid SOLENOID
LEFT-FRONT Detect Detect ABS Drive 1 L I LEFT-FRONT

WHEEL SENSOR Wheel Speed Slip Rate Control Solenoid : SOLENOID
T C S Main Control
The ABS/TCS control unit controls t h e TCS based o n signal inputs f r o m the throttle position sensor, engine speed sensor, shift position sensor,
a n d t h e w h e e l s e n s o r s . In a d d i t i o n , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t s e n d s a n e n g i n e r e t a r d r e q u e s t s i g n a l t o t h e P C M if n e c e s s a r y . T h e A B S / T C S
c o n t r o l u n i t uses t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t t o c o n t r o l t h e T C S . T h e pressure i n t e n s i f y i n g control has three m o d e s : pressure i n t e n s i f y i n g , pressure
retaining, and pressure reducing.
THROTTLE
ANGLE SENSOR Calucufate
traction torque
Calculate control
condition signal
Engine speed signal -
Shift position signal -

->* slip rate Calculate amount Drive RIGHT-FRONT
of right-front
solenoid SOLENOID
wheel control
Calculate control
target value
Calculate amount
RIGHT-REAR Detect Drive LEFT-FRONT
Calculate of left-front
WHEEL SENSOR wheel speed solenoid SOLENOID
vehicle speed wheel control
LEFT-REAR Detect
WHEEL S E N S O R ~ ~ | wheel speed Calculate drive Calculate
wheel speed deviation
avarage
RIGHT-FRONT Detect
WHEEL S E N S O R wheel speed
Calculate drive Calculate

wheel speed deviation
LEFT-FRONT Detect difference
WHEEL SENSOR wheel speed
19-38
ABS Self-Diagnosis
The A B S / T C S control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
9
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories;
- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the A B S or T C S indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the A B S / T C S control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
ABS Self-diagnosis Table

Diagnostic Trouble Detection Item Detection Timing Fail-safe Mode
Code (DTC) Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
11, 13, 15, 17 Wheel sensor (open/short t o body g r o u n d / s h o r t t o power) AO
12, 14, 16, 18 Wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) O AO, LO
21-24 Pulser AO, LO
31-38 Solenoid (short t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t to wire) o o S1
41-44 Wheel lock o AO, LO
51 M o t o r lock AO, LO
52 M o t o r stuck OFF o AO, LO
53 M o t o r stuck ON o AO, LO
54 Fail-safe relay S1
61 L o w ignition voltage o BO
62 High ignition voltage r BO
71 Different diameter tire S1
81 Central Processing Unit (CPU), R O M / R A M o O S1
ABS Operation Mode Table

Operation Mode Description A B S Indicator T C S Indicator
Regular operation Operation in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode-S1 The ABS/TCS control unit t u r n s the system off (ABS fail-safe relay off) w h e n the ON ON
control unit detects a p r o b l e m .
Fail-safe mode-AO If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a m a l f u n c t i o n w h i l e the ABS or TCS is ON ON
operating, it w i l l t u r n off the m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c o m p o n e n t , and continue t o
m o d u l a t e the rest of t h e ABS system until c o m p l e t i n g the ABS or TCS operation.
At that t i m e , t h e entire system w i l l be t u r n e d off until the p r o b l e m goes away.
Fail-safe mode-LO The ABS/TCS control unit stores a DTC in back-up m e m o r y w h e n it detects a ON ON
p r o b l e m . If a p r o b l e m is detected w h e n t h e ignition switch is t u r n e d ON (II), the
ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the system off. If the p r o b l e m goes away, the
ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the system o n again.
Fail-safe mode-BO The ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the s y s t e m off if ignition voltage drops, and ON ON
w i l l t u r n it on again w h e n ignition voltage returns t o n o r m a l .
On-board Diagnosis Function

The A B S can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
(cont'd)
19-39
ABS/TCS Components
T C S Self-diagnosis
The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped w i t h a m a i n CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:

- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Diagnostic Trouble Detection Item Detection Timing Fail-safe Mode
Code(DTC) Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
24-27 TCS solonoid (short t o body ground/short t o wire) (J) O S1
28 TCS relay r> S1
31 E n g i n e r e t a r d c o m m a n d (PFINH) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y o A2
ground)
32 Engine speed(NEP)signal (open/short t o b o d y ground) o A2

^%
34 Reference voltage(VREF) signal(open/short t o b o d y g r o u n d ) A2
36 Throttle position sensor output(THLOUT)signal(open/short to o A2

body ground)
61 A/T s h i f t p o s i t i o n ( A T S F T P ) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d ) o A2
81 Continuous TCS operation A2
TCS Operation Mode Table

Operation Mode Description A B S Indicator T C S Indicator
Regular operation Operation in normal condition OFF OFF
Fail-safe m o d e - S 1 T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t t u r n s t h e s y s t e m o f f (fail-safe r e l a y o f f ) w h e n t h e ON ON
control unit detects a problem.
Fail-safe m o d e - A 2 If t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a m a l f u c t i o n w h i l e t h e T C S i s o p e r a t i n g , i t OFF ON
w i l l t u r n o f f t h e m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c o m p o n e n t , a n d c o n t i n u e t o m o d u l a t e t h e rest o f
t h e T C S s y s t e m u n t i l c o m p l e t i n g t h e T C S o p e r a t i o n . A t that t i m e , t h e T C S
system will beturned off.
TCS deactivate If t h e f r o n t b r a k e p a d t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e e x c e s s i v e l y , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t OFF Comes ON when
mode s t o p s t h e T C S s y s t e m a n d it t u r n s t h e T C S i n d i c a t o r o n . W h e n t h e b r a k e p a d the f r o n t b r a k e p a d
temperature lowers, t h eABS/TCS control unit turns offthe T C S indicator a n d t e m p e r a t u r e rises
restarts t h eT C S system. excessively.
TCS OFF m o d e The ABS/TCS control unit cancels t h e T C S system under these conditions: O N o r OFF ON
If t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a p r o b l e m w i t h t h e P G M - F I (ON: W h e n t h e
c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit. A B S s y s t e m is
T h e A B S s y s t e m is faulty. faulty)
T h e T C S s y s t e m is OFF.
If t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s r e t u r n t o n o r m a l , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t r e s t a r t s t h e T C S
system.
On-board Diagnosis Function

The TCS can be diagnosed w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used w i t h this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
19-40
ÂBSl
M o d u l a t o r Unit
T h e m o d u l a t o r unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS n o r m a l l y o p e n (NO) solenoid valve, TCS n o r m a l l y closed
(NC) s o l e n o i d v a l v e , r e s e r v o i r , p u m p , p u m p m o t o r , a n d t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r .
T h e m o d u l a t o r c o n t r o l s t h e c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e d i r e c t l y . It is a c i r c u l a t i n g - t y p e m o d u l a t o r b e c a u s e t h e brake f l u i d c i r c u l a t e s t h r o u g h t h e
caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
T h e h y d r a u l i c c o n t r o l has t h r e e m o d e s : p r e s s u r e i n t e n s i f y i n g , p r e s s u r e r e t a i n i n g , a n d p r e s s u r e r e d u c i n g .
T h e h y d r a u l i c c i r c u i t is an i n d e p e n d e n t f o u r c h a n n e l t y p e , o n e c h a n n e l f o r e a c h w h e e l .
ABS Control
Pressure intensifying mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e c l o s e d , i n l e t v a l v e o p e n , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d .
M a s t e r c y l i n d e r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t t o t h e c a l i p e r .
Pump Motor
W h e n s t a r t i n g t h e p r e s s u r e r e d u c i n g m o d e , t h e p u m p m o t o r is O N . W h e n s t o p p i n g A B S o p e r a t i o n , t h e p u m p m o t o r is OFF.
T h e r e s e r v o i r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t b y t h e p u m p , t h o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
\N W[ j 3 V\{ 3
I"""" IN i m
DAMP 1PING
33 s v \
33'
CHAM MBER
St
IPCV]
Pressure retaining mode

TCS N O valve o p e n , TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed.
C a l i p e r f l u i d is r e t a i n e d b y t h e i n l e t v a l v e a n d o u t l e t v a l v e .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
~|~ I TCS NO a g M 1
^ ^Tc's'N'c' *'''*""*""*' TCSNC^^T^"^^
_ [jgA/-|EZCI>
DAMPING
w| 111' [a Y vfflTta *
, J B DAMPING | J 1 I
1 CHAMBER WBB
1
m CHAMBER r * H u T ^ ^ I O U T
PUMP
gj 11 1 ' IvV (~>
1 II ( ^ p u M P ^ y y j " 1 [I [X] wj' 111 Ixi
(03
(cont'd)
19-41
ABS/TCS Components
Pressure reducing mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e c l o s e d , i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , o u t l e t v a l v e o p e n .
Caliper fluid f l o w s t h r o u g h the outlet valve t o the reservoir.
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
1 1
NO I """""I " "
}w wC
IN Tj
[T]/v <y a TTTW
E C WHT j 3 V
OUT J ! UU I
DAMPING 9 H L
CHAMBER WUK MOTOR
M DAMPING
CHAMBER
UU I
'^PUMpWJ n 1
CO)
T C S Control
Pressure intensifying mode
T C S N O v a l v e c l o s e d , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , i n l e t v a l v e o p e n , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , p u m p m o t o r O N .
T h e r e s e r v o i r a n d m a s t e r c y l i n d e r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t b y t h e p u m p , t h r o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o t h e f r o n t c a l i p e r .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
J 3
I IN
1 M
flich
3a
LZ UMP IMBM^M^H Ill I BB^ ^PUWIP
RESERVOIRL
CcO
19-42
Pressure retaining mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , p u m p m o t o r O N .
F r o n t c a l i p e r f l u i d is r e t a i n e d b y t h e i n l e t v a l v e a n d o u t l e t v a l v e .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
3 WTTHi] x^wQ
I IN
m ^ J |HU
DAMPINGpump
I
M n T n R
I i
lAfM|DAMPII' G EC.,--*. ^ w r -
<
EZ] II |
U
M
(
0 T * * T | CHAMBER H T l IVIUKJK HMcHAMBER
)pUMP
ft" '
" 1 [I
O Ur
|X1
=4= P U M P ^ ^ I ^ ^ ^
izj 111 JTIM 1
^^)^^ v\^TF!^
J RESERVOIR
Pressure reducing mode

T C S N O v a l v e c l o s e d , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , f r o n t i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , f r o n t o u t l e t v a l v e o p e n , p u m p m o t o r O N .
Caliper f l u i d f l o w s t h r o u g h t h e o u t l e t valve t o the reservoir.
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
}N
Ik /vc 3 v\<| 111" in
MOTOR
EO -QJ^PUMP^^
J*
(cont'd)
19-43
ABS/TCS Components
Wheel Sensor
T h e w h e e l s e n s o r s are the m a g n e t i c contactless type. A s the g e a r p u l s e r teeth rotate past the w h e e l s e n s o r ' s magnetic coil, A C current is
g e n e r a t e d . T h e A C f r e q u e n c y c h a n g e s in a c c o r d a n c e with the w h e e l s p e e d . T h e A B S / T C S control unit detects the w h e e l s e n s o r signal
f r e q u e n c y a n d thereby detects the w h e e l s p e e d .
GEAR PULSER
WHEEL SENSOR at HIGH SPEED
| at LOW SPEED
Wheel S p e e d and Modulator Control (ABS)
SPEED VEHICLE SPEED
REFERENCE VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE ON
OFF
INLET
VALVE ON
OFF
MOTOR
ON
OFF
W h e n the w h e e l speed d r o p s sharply b e l o w the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens m o m e n t a r i l y to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. T h e
p u m p m o t o r s t a r t s at t h i s t i m e . A s t h e w h e e l s p e e d is r e s t o r e d , t h e i n l e t v a l v e o p e n s m o m e n t a r i l y t o i n c r e a s e t h e c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e .
19-44
W h e e l S p e e d a n d M o d u l a t o r control ( T C S )
DRIVE W H E E L S P E E D
SPEED
BRAKE
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE
INLET
VALVE
TCS NC VALVE
TCS NO VALVE
MOTOR
W h e n t h e f r o n t w h e e l s p e e d rises s h a r p l y a b o v e t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d , t h e T C S NC v a l v e o p e n s , t h e TCS N O v a l v e c l o s e s , a n d t h e p u m p m o t o r
starts t o i n t e n s i f y t h e f r o n t c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e . W h e n t h e w h e e l s p e e d d r o p s , t h e f r o n t inlet v a l v e c l o s e s m o m e n t a r i t y t o r a t a i n t h e f r o n t
caliper fluid pressure. W h e n the w h e e l speed drops further, the f r o n t outlet valve opens m o m e n t a r i t y t o reduce the f r o n t caliper fluid pressure.
19-45
ABS/TCS Components
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S D E I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S

C O N N E C T O R A (18P) C O N N E C T O R B (7P) C O N N E C T O R M (20P) C O N N E C T O R J (18P)
3 iI 4 5 6 1 I2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 F=l 5 6 7 8
7 8| 9 /113 A/ /|17
4 4|5|6|7 10 11 12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S BRAKE SWITCH CRUISE CONTROL/ A B S P U M P MOTOR

C O N N E C T O R B (18P) C O N N E C T O R I (16P) CONNECTOR T C S SWITCH 8P C O N N E C T O R S R|_AY 5P C O N N E C T O R
T
1 2 3 I1 4 5 6 1 2 3 t=! 4 5 6 7 T F=1._ 2 7 .rnzfai,
4
i II 1 5
7 8| 9 10 11 / | 1 3 1 4 | / 16|17 18
1 L
8 9 10 11(12 / 14 15 / 4
j 1
5(6 7
4
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS FAIL S A F E R E L A Y /
T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R MODULATOR UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
C O N N E C T O R B (22P) C O N N E C T O R C (16P)
1 ? |/1/I5|6|7l
,.,171
>^
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 5 6 7
11 12 /// 18 19 20 21 2 2 8 9 10 111X112 / 14 15 16
m 16 1/ M11|12|13|14|/|
/1l9l20|2ll22|/l/
19 -46
Y +B
-GRN/RED
-o
8
04-WHT/GRN
13
O - BBRN/BLK
12
J
R N / B L K - i
(DAYTIME RUNNING 0--BLK |
'
J
GRN/WHT
[ Canadi.
J
I /
[LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT| Q R N R E D
I
| USAj
!
AC\ PARKING
l l
Uh J BRAKE SWITCH
^ j K Closed: Brake lever
pulled
~ BLU/WHT
WHEEL SENSOR
-GRN/BLU
BRN
- L T BLU -
GRY
-BLK
-BLK
1
-BLK'
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTOR

C O N N E C T O R A (26P) C O N N E C T O R B (16P) C O N N E C T O R C(12P) FRONT/REAR
0
n JlF=tfL
1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 / 2 3 4 5 6
/ 15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 10 11 L / | 1 3 14 16 7 8 9 10 11 12
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (32P) DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R (16P)

J S L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 23 24 13
25 26 2 7 28 29 30 31 32
19-47
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
A B S D T C 11,13,15.17: Wheel Sensor (Open/ 4. Check for continuity between the appropriate
S h o r t to Body G r o u n d / S h o r t to Power) wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminal and body ground
(see table).
1. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A
(26P). DTC Appropriate Terminal
11 (Right-front) A 1 1 : FRW (+)
2. Start the engine. 13 (Left-front) A9: FLW (+)
15 (Right-rear) A23: RRW (+)
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate 17 (Left-rear) A 2 1 : RLW (+)
wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminal and body g r o u n d
(see table).
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
DTC Appropriate Terminal FLW (+) FRW (+)

11 (Right-front) A11 : FRW (+) (GRN/BLU) (GRN/BLK)
13
15
(Left-front)
(Right-rear)
A9 : FLW (+)
A23 : RRW (+)
n n
I i
17 (Left-rear) A 2 1 : RLW (+)
/
1 2 3 4
15 16 18
u
6
/20 /
8 9 10 11 12 13
2 2 23 24 25 26
-
RLW (+) RRW (+)

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P) (LT BLU) (GRN/YEL)
FLW (+) FRW (+) <g) (g> (g

(GRN/BLU) (GRN/BLK)
it n L _
1 2 3 4 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13 W i r e side of female terminals
/ 15 16 18 / 20 22 23 24 25 26 Is there continuity?
RLW (+) RRW (+)
(LT BLU) (GRN/YEL)
5. Disconnect the harness 2P connector f r o m the

Is there 2 V or more? appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
between the ( + ) and ( - ) terminals of the harness
Y E S - R e p a i r short to power in the ( + ) circuit w i r e and body ground.
between the ABS/TCS control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor. Is there continuity?
N O - G o to step 4. Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the ( + ) or ( - )

circuit w i r e between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the wheel sensor.
NO Replace the wheel sensor. I
19-48
6. Check the resistance between the appropriate A B S DTC 12,14,16,18: Wheel Sensor
wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuit terminals (see (Electrical Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
table).
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
DTC Appropriate Terminal described below,the indicator goes off when you test-
( + )Side (-)Side drive the vehicle at 19 m p h (30 km/h).
11 (Right-front) A11 :FRW( + ) A10:FRW(~)
13 (Left-front) A9:FLW( + ) A8:FLW( - ) Only the drive wheel rotated
15 (Right-rear) A23: RRW A24; RRW The vehicle spun
(+ ) <-) Electrical noise
17 (Left-rear) A21 :RLW( + ) A22:RLW(~)
1. Visually check f o r appropriate wheel sensor and
pulser installation (see table).
GRN/BLU GRN DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor

BRN \ / GRN/BLK 12 Right-front
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear
720 218 229 23

-XL- -XL- _JT_
1 2 3 4 6 10 11 12 13 18 Left-rear
/ 15 16 18 / 24 25 26
-~ir- Are they installed correctly?
LT B L U / \ BLU/YEL
GRY GRN/YEL
NO Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
Wire side of female terminals sensor or pulser
Is the resistance between 450-2,000 Q ? 2. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A
(26P).
Y E S - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
connectors.If necessary, substitute a known-good 3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. B wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuit terminals (see
table).
NO Go to step 7.
DTC Appropriate Terminal
7. Disconnect the harness 2P connector f r o m the ( + )Side ( ) Side
appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance 12 (Right-front) A11 : FRW A10:FRW
between the ( + ) and ( ) terminals of the wheel ( + ) (-)
sensor. 14 (Left-front) A9 : FLW A 8 : FLW
(+ ) (-)
Is the resistance between 450-2,000 Q ? 16 (Right-rear) A23 : RRW A 2 4 : RRW
(+ ) (-)
Y E S Repair open in the ( + ) or ( ) circuit w i r e , or 18 (Left-rear) A21 : RLW A22 : RLW
short beween the ( + ) circuit wire and the ( ) ( + > (-)
circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the wheel sensor Is there less than 450 Q ?
NO - Replace the wheel sensor. Y E S - Repair short to wire between the appropriate
wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuits.
(cont'd)
19-49
ABS/TCS Components
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S D T C 21,22,23,24: Pulser

wheel sensor < + ) circuit terminal and other w h e e l
sensor ( + ) circuit terminals (see table). 1. Clear the DTC.
DTC Appropriate Other Terminal 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Terminal
12 A11 : A9: A23: A21 : Does the ABS indicator come on and are DTCs
FRW FLW( + ) RRW RLW 21-24 indicated?
(+ ) (+ ) ( :)
14 A9 : A11 : A23: A21 : Y E S - G o to step 3.
FLW( + ) FRW RRW RLW
(+ ) (+ ) ( ;) N O - T h e system is OK at this t i m e . B
16 A23: A11 : A9 : A21 ;
RRW FRW FLW( + ) RLW 3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
(+) (+ ) (+ ) tooth (see table).
18 A21 : A11 : A9: FLW A23:
RLW( + ) FRW( + ) (+ ) RRW( + ) DTC Appropriate Pulser
21 Right-front
Is there continuity? 22 Left-front
23 Right-rear
Y E S - Repair short to w i r e between the appropriate 24 Left-rear
wheel sensor and the other wheel sensor.
Is the pulser OK ?
N O - C l e a r the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If
the ABS indicator comes on and the same DTC is Y E S - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
indicated, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. B
NOReplace the driveshaft or the hub unit.

(Chipped pulser gear)B
19-50
ABS DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38: 5. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
Solenoid
6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
1. Verify the DTC. TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table).
Is DTC 54 indicated?
YES Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for 31: FR-IN C11
DTC 54. 32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
N O - G o to step 2. 34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 36: RR-OUT C3
1
^: RUN C10
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and 38: RL-OUT C5
the ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P).
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C(12P)
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit YEL/BLU
terminal and body ground (see table). /YEL/GRN

YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
31:
32:
FR-IN
FR-OUT
C11
C6
/ 2 3 4 5 6
1
7 8 9 10 11 12
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8 REED
D // W
WHHT
T
R // m
'
B / G m
RED/BLK
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10 RED/BLU
38: RL-OUT C5 W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
YEL/BLU YES -Replace the modulator u n i t . H

/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
\ N O - G o to step 7.
/YEL/BLK
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.

7 8 9 10 11 12
RE
R ED
D // W
WHHT
T // * RED/BLK
R E D / Q R N
RED/BLU
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the

appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the
ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit I
(cont'd)
19-51
ABS/TCS Components
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P 9. Check for continuity between the appropriate
connector solenoid circuit terminal to body g r o u n d ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid
w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table). circuit terminal and body ground (see table).
DTC A p p r o p r i a t e Terminal DTC Appropriate Terminal

31: FR-IN No. 11 31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT No. 19 32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN No. 14 33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT No. 22 34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN No. 13 35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT No. 21 36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN No. 12 37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT No. 20 38: RL-OUT C5
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
RED/GRN RED/WHT YEL/BLU

RED/BLK \ /RED/BLU /YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
?
1
7 2 3 4 5 6
16
IXlii|i2li3|uX7l 7 8i 9 10 11 12
1 / i t
ir-j j 1
19120|21|22|/1/
/ f \
Y E L / BB LL K
K J/ \ YEL/BLU
RED/WHT
RED/GRN
RED/BLK
YEL/GRN YEL/WHT RED/BLU

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
IMO Repair open in the appropriate solenoid

circuit w i r e between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator unit.
10. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the modulator unit

24P connector.
11. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
19-52
12. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector 15. Check for continuity between the appropriate
terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire. ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit
NOTE: Wire colors of ABS fail-safe relay connector; terminals (see table).
WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, YEL/GRN.
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR 31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
SOLENOID 34: FL-OUT
(BRN/BLK)
C4
35: RR-IN C8
JUMPER
WIRE 36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
W i r e side of female terminals T C S Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit

Connector A (26P) Terminal
NOR A16
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS/ NCR A15
TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and NOL A3
body ground (see table). NCL A2
IN: 8 - 1 0 Q (at20C, 68F)
OUT: 3 - 5 Q (at20C, 68F)
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)
YEL/BLU
DTC Appropriate Terminal /YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
31: FR-IN C11 / /YEL/BLK
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
71 2
8
3
9
4 5
10 I 11 1 2 ]
i . n
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3 RED/BLK
RED/WHT
37: RL-IN C10 RED/GRN
38: RL-OUT C5 RED/BLU
YEL/BLU
y YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
YEL/GRN GRY
/1 2
8
3
9
4
10 11
5
-fl n
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
RED/WHT
RED/WHT // R E D
*
/ G R N
RED/BLK / 15 16 18 / 20121
22 23 _24
_j
25 26
RED/BLU
W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s RED/GRN LT BLU
Is the resistance OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 14. Is there continuity?
NO - Replace the modulator u n i t . H Y E S - R e p a i r short in the appropriate wires

14. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector, and modulator u n i t . H
remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the ABS fail-safe
relay 4P connector. N O - G o to step 16.
(cont'd)
19-53
ABS/TCS Components
16. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector. A B S DTC 41, 4 2 , 4 3 , 4 4 : Wheel Lock
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate 1. Check for brake drag.
ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) t e r m i n a l
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit Do the brakes drag?
terminals (see table).
Y E S - Repair the brake d r a g . B
31: FR-IN C11 N O - G o to step 2.
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9 2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
34: FL-OUT C4 sensor (see table).
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3 DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
37: RL-IN C10 41 Right-front
38: RL-OUT C5 42 Left-front
43 Right-rear
T C S Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit 44 Left-rear
Connector A (26P) Terminal
NOR A16 Is it correct?
NCR A15
NOL A3 Y E S T h e probable cause was the vehicle spun
NCL A2 during cornering. If the problem recurs, check the
modulator using the Honda PGM T e s t e r .
YEL/BLU NO Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly.
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
\ ,7 J jS.ll,,,J J
77
LR-
2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
RED/WHT
RED/GRN
W. RED/BLK
RED/BLU
YEL/GRN GRY
J -
1 2 3 4 / 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16 / 18 / 20 21J22 23 24 25 26
-tr\
L
ir J
RED/GRN
/ \ LT BLU
Is there less than 3 Q?
Y E S Replace the modulator u n i t . H
N O - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit

connectors. If necessary, substitute a k n o w n - g o o d
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck.
19-54
ABS DTC 51: Motor Lock ABS DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
1. Clear the DTC. 1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or more. it is OK.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 51 Is the fuse OK?
indicated?
YES Replace the modulator u n i t . B
NO Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
NOThe system is OK at this t i m e . B
2. Remove the p u m p motor relay, and connect the
pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 4 to
No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a m o m e n t , and check
the fuse.
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR +B (WHT)
(WHT/BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
Y E S Check for a short to body ground in the

motor power source circuit.B
3. Check the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK ?
NO Replace the fuse, and go to step 4.
(cont'd)
19-55
ABS/TCS Components
4. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector 9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a 24P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
m o m e n t , and check the fuse.
M O D U L A T O R U N I T 24P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P CONNECTOR ?
1
111121131141/1
16 117 (
L/|19|20| 21 \22\/\/
IMA
MOTOR + B (WHT)
(WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
W i r e side of female terminals Y E S - G o t o step 10.

Is the fuse blown?
10. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
Y E S -Check f o r a short t o body ground in the GRN 24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16.
w i r e between the passenger's under-dash fuse/
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit.
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
Vlllll2J13lUl/r
5. Check the p u m p motor relay in the under-hood 7113120[21122|/1/
ABS relay box. Refter to the '98 01 Accord Service
MOTOR GND (BLK)
Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52).
Is the relay OK ?
Y E S - Replace the modulator unit.H
N O - R e p l a c e the p u m p motor relay. NO Repair open in the wire between the pump
motor and body ground (G203).
6. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r wire for a 11. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
moment. B (16P).
Does the pump motor operate? 12. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector
terminal No. 1 to No. 5 with a j u m p e r wire.
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R
7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.

JUMPER WIRE
8. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector

+ B (WHT)
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals
19-56
^BS
13. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control A B S D T C 53: Motor Stuck O N
unit connector B (16P) terminal B15 and body
ground. 1. Check that the p u m p motor operates w i t h the
ignition switch OFF.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) Does the pump motor operate?
7
_Jfl_ -J-2;"S4_,
1 2 /
4 Y E S Replace the p u m p motor relay. (Pump motor
9 10 11 13 14 15 16
relay stuck O N . ) B
PMR (YEL/RED)
2. Remove the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the

Wire side of f e m a l e terminals passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S Leave the fuse removed, and go to step 3.
YES Go to step 14.
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck. B
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the under-
hood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's

14. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the pump motor under-dash fuse/relay box connector I (16P)
relay 5P connector, and reinstall the p u m p motor terminal 15 and body g r o u n d .
relay.
15. Start the engine. PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR f (16P)
MCK (GRN)
16. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control
1 1
unit connector B (16P) terminal B15 and body 1 2 3 F=J 4 5 6 7
ground. 8 9 10 11|12
i. i
14 15 /
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
it*. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1 2 /4 /
9 10 11 13 14 15|16
PMR (YEL/RED) Is there approx. 10 V?
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s NO Repair open in the wire between the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the
Y E S Repair short to power in the wire between passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS
control u n i t . B
NO If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS

control u n i t . B
(cont'd)
19-57
ABS/TCS Components
6. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector. 9. Remove the p u m p motor relay, then connect relay
terminals No. 4 and No. 5 together w i t h a jumper
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and wire.
body g r o u n d .
Does the pump motor run?
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR (WHT/BLU) NO Replace the p u m p motor.
1 2 /
5 |6 7 10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
|/|11|12|13|14|/| B (16P).
16 1 /
/
19 20 21 22 / /
11. Check for continuity between terminal B15 and
body ground.
Wire side of female terminals A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
__n_
Is there approx. 10 V? 1 2 / 4 / / 7
9 j 10
i
i
L
/ 13 14 15 16i
I
Y E S - G o t o step 8. PMR (YEL/RED)
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the under-

8. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit

24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16. W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire

MOTOR (WHT/BLU) between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
ABS/TCS control unit.
1 ? /|5|6 7 8 /
|/|11|12|13|14L/|
N O - I f the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS
16 1 /
/ 19 20 21 22 // control u n i t . H
M O T O R G N D (BLK)
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the p u m p

motor and body g r o u n d (G203).
19-58
A B S D T C S4; A B S Fail-safe Relay 5. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector
terminal No. 1 to No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
1. Check the ABS F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK. A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 2. +B (WHT/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
Does the fuse blow?

between the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the
p u m p motor relay, and modulator u n i t . H 6. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
NO G o t o step 3. 7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.2 and

body g r o u n d .
3. Check the ABS fail-safe relay in the under-hood
ABS relay box. Refer to the ' 9 8 - 0 1 Accord Service
Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52). The wire M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
colors of the ABS fail-safe relay connector are
WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, and YEL/GRN. SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
Is the relay OK ? 1 2 /VI 51 6 7 | 8 /

|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 / / 1 9 20 21 2 2 / /
Y E S Leave the ABS fail-safe relay removed, and
go to step 4.
NO Replace the ABS fail-safe relay
4. Measure the voltage between the ABS fail-safe W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
+ B (WHT/GRN)
NO Repair open in the wire between the ABS
fail-safe relay and the modulator unit.H
8. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the ABS fail-safe

relay connector.
NO -Repair open in the wire between the under-

hood fuse/relay box and the ABS fail-safe relay. I (cont'd)
19-59
ABS/TCS Components
9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit N O - G o to step 13.

24P connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d . 13. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control
unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body
ground.
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK) A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
1 ? /|5|6 7|8|/
n n n n
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
16 1 /
/
19 20 21 2 2 / /
/ 15 16 / 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
YESRepair short to power in the w i r e between Is there continuity?

the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the
modulator unit, and the under-hood ABS relay box. Y E S Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS
fail-safe r e l a y .
10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
A (26P). 14. Check for continuity between the ABS fail-safe
relay 4 P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
12. Measure the voltage between terminal A25 and A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R

body ground.
GND (BLK)
n n n n
1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Is there battery voltage? NO Repair open in the w i r e between the ABS

fail-safe relay and body ground, or a loose or poor
Y E S Repair short to power in the w i r e between connection at body ground (G202).H
the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-safe
relay.
19-60
15. Connect the A B S fail-safe relay 4P connector A B S D T C 61, 62: Ignition Voltage
terminals No. 3 and No. 4 with a jumper wire.
1. Clearthe DTC.
A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or more.
G N D (BLK)
mi FSR (YEL/GRN)
NO The system is OK at this time. H
JUMPER WIRE 3. Verify the DTC.
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
Y E S Check the charging system. H

16. Check for continuity between the A B S / T C S control
unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body NO Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for
ground. the c o d e . H
n n X n n
1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Y E S If the problem recurs, replace the A B S / T C S

control unit.H
NORepair open in the wire between the A B S / T C S

control unit and the A B S fail-safe relay.
19-61
ABS/TCS Components
A B S DTC 71: Different D i a m e t e r Tire A B S D T C 81: Central P r o c e s s i n g Unit ( C P U )

Diagnosis, and R O M / R A M Diagnosis
1. Clear the DTC.
1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle.
2. Test-drive the vehicle.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 71
indicated? Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 81
indicated?
YES Make sure all f o u r tires are the specified size
and are inflated t o proper specification. Y E S - R e p l a c e the ABS/TCS control unit.
NO Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this NO Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this
time.B time.H
19-62
7VBS
T C S DTC 24,25,26,27: T C S Solenoid 6. Check for continuity between the appropriate

ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid
1. Verify the TCS DTC. circuit terminal and body g r o u n d (see table).
Is TCS DTC 28 indicated? T C S DTC Appropriate Terminal

24: NOR A16
Y E S Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for 25: NCR A15
26: NOL A3
DTC 28. 27: NCL A2
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
NOL (GRY)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and
n
the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P). 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate

/ 15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
NCR
NOR (LT BLU)
ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) TCS (RED/
GRN)
solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see
table). ID (H;
T C S DTC Appropriate Terminal
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15 Is there continuity?
26; NOL A3
27: NCL A2 Y E S Replace the modulator unit. B
N O L (GRY) 7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.

NCL (YEL/GRN)
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P
connector TCS solenoid circuit terminals to body
10 11 12 13
ground w i t h j u m p e r wires (see table).
16 21 22 23 24 25 26
NCR
N O R (LT BLU) T C S DTC Appropriate Terminal
(RED/
GRN) 24: NOR No 5
25: NCR No. 6
X X f l 26: NOL No. 8
27: NCL No. 7
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR

Is there continuity? NCR (RED/GRN) NCL (YEL/GRN)
Y E S Repair short to body ground in the NOR (LT BLU) NOL (GRY)
appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the 1
? 1 / 1 / 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 /
ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit. I 1
M11|12|13114|7T
16 1 /
/1191201211221/17
N O - G o to step 5. JUMPER
WIRE
(cont'd)
19-63
ABS/TCS Components
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S / 12. Remove the TCS relay, and connect the TCS relay
TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
terminal and body ground (see table). jumper wire.
TCS DTC A p p r o p r i a t e Terminal NOTE: Wire colors of TCS relay 4P connector; BLU,
24: NOR A16 RED/BLU, BRN/BLK, GRN/YEL.
25: NCR A15
26: NOL A3
T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
27: NCL A2
TCS
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P) SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
NOL (GRY)
JUMPER
NCL (YEL/GRN)
WIRE
10 11 12 13
16 20 21 22 23 2 4 25 26
NCR
N O R (LT B L U ) Wire side of female terminals
(RED/
GRN)
(a) (p) (oxo)

NO Repair open in the appropriate TCS solenoid

circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator u n i t . H
10. Remove the j u m p e r wires f r o m the modulator unit

24P connector.
19-64
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate 15. Check for continuity between the appropriate
ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal
and body ground (see table). and each of the other terminals listed (see table).
NOR, NOL, NCR, NCL: 8 - 1 0 0 (at 20C, 68F)
T C S DTC Appropriate Terminal
T C S DTC Appropriate Terminal 24: NOR A16
24: NOR A16 25: NCR A15
25: NCR A15 26: NOL A3
26: NOL A3 27: NCL A2
27: NCL A2
A B S Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit
Connector C (12P) Terminal
NOL (GRY) FR-IN C11
NCL (YEL/GRN) FR-OUT C6
FL-IN C9
FL-OUT C4
10 11 12 13
RR-IN C8
15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
RR-OUT C3
NCR
N O R (LT B L U ) RL-IN C10
(RED/
GRN) RL-OUT C5
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
YEL/GRN GRY
_n_ _n_ _n_ _n_

Is there resistance OK? 1 1 3 4 6 / 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16
u
18
-ur
/ /
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
HUT
NO Replace the modulator unit.H RED/GRN LT BLU

14. Disconnect the modulator unit connector, and
remove the jumper w i r e f r o m the TCS relay 4P
connector terminal.
YEL/BLU
YEL/WHT / /YEL/GRN
/YEL/BLK
7 7
2
8
3 4
9 10 11 12
5 6
I
RED/WHT /
7/W \ RED/BLK
RED/BLU RED/GRN
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the appropriate wires

modulator unit.H
(cont'd)
19-65
ABS/TCS Components
16. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector. T C S D T C 28: T C S Relay
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S / 1. Check the BSC F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
T C S control unit connector A (26P) terminal and all fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
other A B S and T C S solenoid circuit terminals (see
table). Is the fuse OK ?
TCS DTC Appropriate Terminal Y E S - G o to step 2.

24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15 NO Replace the fuse, and recheck.
26: NOL A3
27: NCL A2 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
A B S Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit Does the fuse blow?

Connector C (12P) Terminal
FR-IN C11 Y E S Repair short to body ground in the w i r e
FR-OUT C6 between the TCS relay and the modulator u n i t s
FL-IN C9
FL-OUT C4 N O - G o to step 3.
RR-IN C8
RR-OUT C3 3. Check the TCS relay in the under-hood ABS relay
RL-IN C10 box (see page 22-31). The wire colors of the TCS
RL-OUT C5 relay 4P connector are BLU, RED/BLU, BRN/BLK,
and GRN/YEL.
YEL/GRN GRY
Is the relay OK ?
in _n_ Y E S Leave the TCS relay removed, and go to

1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
step 4.
/ 16
15 i j-j
18 / 20 21 2 2 2 3 24 25 26
N O - R e p l a c e the TCS relay

RED/GRN LT B L U
4. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P) T C S R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
YEL/BLU
YEL/WHT / /YEL/GRN
7
UZ/'
7
2
8
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
.._n_i
/YEL/BLK
B (BLU)
RED/WHT / \ RED/BLK
RED/BLU RED/GRN
Wire side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there less than 3Q?
Y E S - Replace the modulator u n i t . B Is there battery voltage?
N O - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit Y E S - G o to step 5.

ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. NO Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood fuse/relay box and the TCS relay.
19-66
5. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
to No. 2 with a jumper wire. 24P connector terminal No. 17 and body ground.
T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R MODULATOR UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
1 ? /|5|6
+ B (BLU) |/111|12|13|14|/1
JUMPER WIRE
16 1 /
/19 20 21 22 //
T C S SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
TCS SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector. Is there battery voltage?
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.17 and Y E S Repair short to power in the w i r e between
body ground. the TCS relay and the modulator u n i t . H
10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector B

MXl5l6l7l8lXl (16P).
M1111211311417T"
19l20i2li22l/l/ 11. Measure the voltage between terminal B13 and
TCS SOLENOID (RED/BLU) body ground.
Wire side of female terminals 1 2 /4 7 / /

9 10 11 13 14 15 16
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
YES G o t o step 8.
NO Repair open in the wire between the TCS

relay and the modulator unit. H Wire side of female terminals
Remove the jumper wire f r o m the TCS relay 4P

connector. Is there battery voltage?
Y E S Repair short to power in the wire between

the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS relay. H
(cont'd)
19-67
ABS/TCS Components
12. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control 16. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P
unit connector B (16P) terminal B13 and body connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
ground.
-JUS
/ /
- T L .
1 2 4 7 7 SOLENOID
9 10 11 13 14 15 16 (BRN/BLK)
1
i I !J 1
TCSR (GRN/YEL)

YES Repair short to body ground in the w i r e
between the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS NO Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe
relay. relay and the TCS relay.
N O - G o to step 13. 17. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector No. 3 and
No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
NOTE: Make sure the ABS/TCS control unit
14. Remove the ABS fail-safe relay. The w i r e colors of connector B (16P) is disconnected.
ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector are WHT/GRN,
BRN/BLK, BLK, YEL/GRN.
15. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector

terminal No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
A B S FAIL-SAFE R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
SOLENOID TCSR
(BRN/BLK) (GRN/YEL)
+B (WHT/GRN) JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
19-68
ABS
18. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control T C S DTC 31: E n g i n e Retard C o m m a n d
unit connector B (16P) terminal B13 and body (PFINH) signal
ground.
NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is O N , troubleshoot
the PGM-FI or ABS first.
1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and the
ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).
1 2 4/ / /
9 10 11 13 14 15 16 2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A13 and body g r o u n d .
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
PFINH (BLU)
Y E S - I f the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS

control u n i t s
NORepair open in the w i r e between the TCS
relay and the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
YES Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
N O G o to step 3.
3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
19-69
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A 6. W i t h an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar
(32P) terminal A13 and body g r o u n d . range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B10 and
NOTE; Use the 10 V range or similar range in an body g r o u n d .
analog tester.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 4/ 7 Y/
24 9 10 11 13 14 15 16
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 i | r-
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 PFINH (BLU)
PFINH (BLU)

5V
5V
Approx. 2.5V-
Approx. 2.5V-
OV
OV '

Y E S - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit
Y E S - G o t o step 6. connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ABS/TCS control unit.H
19-70
T C S D T C 32; E n g i n e s p e e d (NEP) Signal 5. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar
range, measure the voltage between the PCM
NOTE; If the MIL or A B S indicator is ON, troubleshoot connector A (32P) terminal A19 and body ground.
the PGM-FI or A B S first.
1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and A B S / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)

TCS control unit connector B (16P).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(32P) terminal A19 and body ground. 32
25 26 27 28 2 9 30 31
NEP(BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 2 9 30 31 32
NEP(BLU)

12V | j ,
Approx. 6V

between the PCM and the A B S / T C S control unit.
OV J I
NO Go to step 3.
4. Start the engine, warm it up to normal operating Is there approx. 6 V?

temperature, and let it idle.
NO Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

substitute a known-good PCM, and r e c h e c k .
(cont'd)
19-71
ABS/TCS Components
6. With the engine still idling, measure the voltage T C S D T C 34: Reference Voltage (VREF) Signal
between the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P) terminal B11 and body ground w i t h the NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON,
analog voltmeter again. troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS the first.
ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).
1 2 4 / 7 7 / 2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector

9 10 11 13 14 15 16
1
A (32P) terminal A7 and body ground.
i . j
NEP (BLU)
VREF (ORN/GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
W i r e side of female terminals 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
(8)
12V W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Approx. 6V- Is there continuity?

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.H
OV
Is there approx. 6 V? 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES The system is OK at this time. If the problem

recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
N O - Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and

the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
19-72
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector TCS DTC 36: Throttle Position S e n s o r Output
A (32P) terminal A7 and body ground. ( T H L O U T ) Signal
NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is O N ,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS first.
VREF (ORN/GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ABS/TCS control unit connector B(16P).
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A31 and body g o u n d .
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
NOCheck for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
unit connector B(16P) terminal B2 and body ground.
YES Repair short to body ground in the w i r e
VREF (ORN/GRN) between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.
1 2 4/ / / N O - G o to step 3.
9 10 11 13 14 15 16
YES The system is OK at this time. If the problem

recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit.

the ABS/TCS control unit H
(cont'd)
19-73
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A T C S D T C 61: A / T Shift Position ( A T S F T P )
(32P) terminal A31 and body ground w i t h the Signal
throttle fully opened and fully closed. There should
be a s m o o t h transition f r o m approx. 0.5 V and 4.5 V. NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is O N ,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
32 2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
A (32P) terminal A11 and body ground.
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
ATSFTP
(LT G R N )
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Is the voltage as specified?
YES G o t o step 6.
NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
6. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control Is there continuity?

unit connector B (16P) terminal B9 and body
ground w i t h the throttle fully closed. Y E S - Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
NO G o t o step 3.
1 2 /
4 7/ 3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).
9 10 11 13 14 i 15

16 1
j
4. Shift the transmission to SB position.
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
Y E S The system is OK at this time. If the problem

recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
NO - Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
19-74
6. W i t h an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar T C S DTC 81: C o n t i n u o u s T C S Operation
range, measure the voltage between the PCM
connector A (32P) terminal A 1 1 and body ground. NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON,
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1. Clear the DTC.

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 2. Test-drive the vehicle.
ATS FTP (YEL/GRN)
Does the TCS indicator come on, and is DTC 81
indicated?
5V - Y E S - R e p l a c e the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H

Approx. 4V -
NO Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this
time.H
OV
NO Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. H
7. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar

range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B7 and body
ground.
ATSFTP
/ / /
(LT G R N )
1 2 4
9 10 11 13 14 15 16
5V
Approx. 4V -
1
OV
Y E S Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit


the ABS/TCS control unit.H
19-75
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS 9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly
indicator. connector C (16P) terminal C10 and body ground.

GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16P)
YES If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off,

it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays o n , turn the 1 2 3
x 4 5 6 7
ignition switch OFF, and go to step 13. 8 9 10 111X112 /
14 15 16
ABS (BLU/WHT)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?

NO Repair open in the indicator power source Is there continuity?

circuit.
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse. Y E S Repair short to body ground in the wire
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly. control u n i t . B
N O G o to step 10.
10. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).
4 . Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
A (26P). 11. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)
terminal B16 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
Y E S - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit 1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 / / / 16|XI/ 18 19 20 21 22
GND (BLK)
N O G o to step 6. JUMPER WIRE
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge

assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 7. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO Replace the ABS indicator b u l b . B Does the ABS indicator come on?
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Y E S Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and body ground (G501). fl
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).
NO Replace the gauge assembly.
19-76
13. Check the R/C MIRROR (7,5 A) fuse in the driver's 17. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if A (26P) terminal A 4 to body ground with a j u m p e r
it is OK. wire.
Is the fuse OK? A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
J U M P E R WIRE
ABS (BLU/WHT)
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck. n n I _ _ n n
14. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector

1 2 3 4 6
/ 8 9 10 11 12 13
A (26P) terminal A1 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r / 15 16 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
wire.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
JUMPER
WIRE
~] GND1 (BLK)
10 12 13
16 20 22 23 24 25 26

W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck.
NO Go to step 18.
18. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P)
Does the ABS indicator go off? terminal C10 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
Y E S Repair open in the w i r e between the ABS/ G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R C (16P)

TCS control unit and body ground (G403)
N O - G o to step 16. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X 14 15 16
unit connector A (26P) terminal A13 and body
8 9 10 11 12
ABS (BLU/WHT) /
ground. JUMPER WIRE
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
IG2 (YEL/BLK)
n n n rt W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16 18 / 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
~u- L j
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the gauge

W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit.
NO Replace the gauge assembly.

NO Repair open in the wire between the R/C

MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS/TCS control
unit.H
19-77
ABS/TCS Components
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and watch the TCS indicator. 5. Remove the j u m p e r wire at the gauge assembly,
and connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
Does the TCS indicator come on? B (16P) terminal B16 and body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
Y E S - I f the TCS indicator comes on and goes off, It's
OK. If the TCS indicator stays on, go to step 7. A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
1 2 / 4
2. Turn the engine OFF, then restart it again. 9 10 11
X
13 14 15 16
7
j ii
1
i l
TCS2
Does the brake system indicator come on? (RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
N O - R e p a i r open in the indicator power source

circuit. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly. Does the TCS indicator come on?
3. Turn the engine OFF, and check the TCS indicator
bulb in the gauge assembly. N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit.H
Is the bulb OK?
6. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
Y E S - G o t o step 4. C (12P) terminal C2 and body ground w i t h a jumper
wire.
N O - R e p l a c e the TCS indicator bulb.
4. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)
terminal B18 and body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
LG (BRN/BLK)
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R B (22P)
JUMPER / 2 3 4 5 6
WIRE
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 / / / 16 X i X 18 19 20 21 22
T C S (RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Does the TCS indicator come on?
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the ABS/

TCS control unit and body ground (G10D.B
Does the TCS indicator come on? N O - C h e c k f o r loose ABS/TCS control unit
Y E S - G o t o step 5. ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck.
N O - R e p l a c e the gauge assembly.
19-78
7, Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
it is OK. 10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A
(26P) and connector B (16P).
Is the fuse OK ?
11. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
Does the TCS indicator go off?
N O - R e p l a c e the fuse, and recheck.
8. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
unit connector A (26P) terminal A13 and body ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck.
ground.
NO Repair short to body ground in the wire
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P) between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
control u n i t . B
IG2 ( Y E L / B L K )
n n "X 1
1 2 3 4 6
/ 8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16 18 / 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the driver's

under-dash fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS control
unit.B
19-79
ABS/TCS Components
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid f r o m f l o w i n g , plug and cover the hose ends and joints w i t h a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Push the modulator unit connector lock (C), and t u r n the connector lever (D).
2. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B).
3. Disconnect the brake pipes, then remove the m o d u l a t o r unit (A).
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.
2. Bleed the brake system, starting w i t h the front wheels.
3. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator go off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator do not come on.
19-80
A B S
TCS Switch Test
1. Remove the cruise control/TCS switch (A) from the 2. Check for continuity between terminal No. 5 and
switch panel. No. 6. There should be continuity when the T C S
switch is pushed.
CRUISE CONTROL/TCS SWITCHCONNECTOR
1 2
/
IG2
4
u
5 6 7
TCS SW
4
(BLK/YEL)
(ORN/WHT)
19-81
ABS/TCS Components
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement Wheel Sensor Inspection
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel. 1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or
damaged teeth.
2. Remove the ABS/TCS control unit (A).
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and
pulser all the w a y around while rotating the pulser.
Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on
the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 m m
(0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard:
Front: 0 . 4 - 1.05 m m (0.02 - 0.04 in)
Rear: 0.19 1.14 m m (0.01 0.05 in)
Front
3. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connectors <B).
4. install the ABS/TCS control unit in the reverse order

of removal.
Rear
19-82
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting wires.
Front
Rear
19-83
S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If b o d y m a i n t e n a n c e is required)
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs,
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
circuits.
Body
Seats
Front Seat Removal and Installation
-4-way Power-Sedan 20-2
Front S e a t D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation
Bumper
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement 20-6
Hood
Replacement 20-7
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement-Coupe 20-8
Emblem Replacement-Sedan 20-8
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement 20-9
F r a m e Repair Chart 20-12
NOTE: Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual

(P/N 61S8008) for the items not shown in this section.

1998 model:
The Accord sedan and coupe V6 model has been added.
- The V6 emblem has been added.
- The hood replacement procedure is different.
- The sub-frames are different.
- The frame repair chart is different.
2001 model:
The following item has been added on Sedan or Coupe V6 model.
- The passenger's 4 w a y power seat (sedan)
-~ The rear bumper spoiler (coupe)
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation - 4-1 ay Power - Sedan
'01 model; 4. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect and detach
SRS components are located in this area. Review the the seat harness connector (A) and harness clip (B).
SRS component locations and precautions and
A B B
procedures in the SRS section before performing
repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-28).
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery, and

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove

the bolts securing the front seat (B). W h e n prying
w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h protective
tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch
the body or tear the seat covers.
Fastener Locations
To body. To body.
: Bolt, 4 > : Clip, 1
5. W i t h the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
front seat through the front door opening.
6. Install the front seat in the reverse order of removal,

and note these item:
Replace the damaged track and cover clip.

Make sure the seat harness connector is plugged
in properly.
Enter the anti-there code for the radio, then enter
20-2
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'01 model:
SRS components are located in this area. Review the S R S component locations, and precautions and procedures in
the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page
23-28).
Disassembly the front sent as shown.

Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Route the seat wire harness correctly (see page 20-5).

Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
To prevent wrinkles in the seat-back cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
If the seat-back pad or the OPDS unit is replaced, reinitialize the OPDS unit. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual,
P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-322).
HEADREST
BACK PANEL
SEAT-BACK
HOOKS
PIVOT WASHER
PIVOT N U T
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
W I R E TIE
SEAT CUSHION
FRONTCOVER
CENTER COVER
10 x 1.25 m m
RECLINE COVER
47 N m
(4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )
SEAT LINKAGE
10 x 1.25 m m
47 N m (4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )
CAPS SWITCH KNOBS
20-3
Seats
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'01 m o d e l :
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands.
To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the f r o n t seat backward fully.
Disassemble the linkage as s h o w n .
Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Before installing the slide motor and slide gearbox, align portion (A) as s h o w n to align both slide gearbox positions.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions of the linkage.
Check operation of the recline and slide adjusters.
3.7 N - m (0.38 k g f m , 2.7 I b f f t ) LEFT SLIDE GEARBOX
20-4
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'01 model:
When assembling the front seat, make sure the seat

belt switch harness (A), seat harness (B), seat heater
harnesses (C), side airbag harness (D), OPDS unit
harness (E), connectors (F), clips (G) and wire tie (H) are
fastened correctly.
20-5
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement - Coupe
'01 m o d e l :
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.

Remove the rear bumper spoiler as shown.
Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2 [> : Clip, 2
20-6
Hood
Replacement
1. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (A) from 4. Install the hood in the reverse order of removal,
the windshield washer nozzles (B), and release the and note these items:
windshield washer tube f r o m the clips (C).
Before reattaching the support struts, adjust the
C B
hood alignment.
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
Make sure the windshield washer tubes are
connected properly.
W h e n reattaching the support struts, set the clips
(A) t o the original position, then attach the
support struts (B) on the pivot bolts (C) by
pushing the support strut.
2. With a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the clips (A) out of

the support struts (B) on each hood side, then
release both support struts f r o m the pivot bolts (C)
with the help of an assistant. Do not remove the
clips f r o m the support struts. If necessary, release B
the support strut f r o m the pivot bolt on the body,
then remove the support strut.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4
6 x 1.0 m m |
fntaED 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , |
^ 7.2 I b f f t ) I
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
3. With the help of an assistant, remove the bolts,

then remove the hood (D). Take care not to damage
the hood and body.
20-7
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement - Coupe Emblem Replacement - Sedan
Apply the e m b l e m where s h o w n . A p p l y the e m b l e m where s h o w n .
NOTE: NOTE:
Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface w i t h a Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface w i t h a
sponge dampened in alcohol. sponge dampened in alcohol.
After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water f r o m After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water f r o m
getting on the surface. getting on the surface.
Attachment Point (Reference): Attachment Point (Reference):
V6 EMBLEM
ACCORD EMBLEM V6 EMBLEM
T R U N K LID
Edge of the
rear b u m p e r .
U n i t : m m (in.)
Unit: m m (in.!
ACCORD
EMBLEM / 2 0
r V / (
o7
.9
N
t?
10 (0.39)
13(0.51)
V6 EMBLEM
Edge of the
trunk lid. Edge of the
rear b u m p e r .
20-8
Frame
Sob-frame Replacement
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
REAR B E A M
(cont'd)
20-9
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement (cont'd)
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m with new ones.
SUB-FRAME
20-10
20-11
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top V i e w
U n i t ; m m (in.)
0: Inner d i a m e t e r
POINT h
POINT g
POINT e
POINT I
<
UJ Z
>
20-12
POINT rt
POINT w
2145 (84.45)
2236 (88.03)
2365 (93.11)
2750 (108.3)
2899 (114.1)
297TTlT7)
2998 (118.0)
3008 (118.4)
3200 (126.0)
3622 (142.6)
(cont'd)
20-13
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side V i e w
0 1 1 . 5 (0.45)
SECTION B B SECTION A A
20-14
SECTION DD
S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If H V A C m a i n t e n a n c e is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS Includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
circuits.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Air Conditioning Climate Control

Special T o o l s 21-2 Component Location
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 21- 26
Index 21-3 General Troubleshooting
A / C Refrigerant Oil Information 21- 28
Replacement 21-6 DTC Troubleshooting
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index 21- 29
Index 21-7 Symptom Troubleshooting
Circuit Diagram .................... 21-8 Index 21--30
C o n d e n s e r Fan Circuit System Description 21--31
Troubleshooting ............... 21-10 Circuit Diagram 21--32
Radiator and C o n d e n s e r F a n s DTC Troubleshooting 21--34
C o m m o n Circuit ECT Sensor Circuit
Troubleshooting 21-12 Troubleshooting 21--50
Heater Valve Cable Climate Control Power and
Adjustment 21-13 Ground Circuits
Compressor Replacement Troubleshooting 21 -51
('98-00 model) 21-14 Recirculation Control Motor
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check Circuit Troubleshooting ... 21 -52
('98-00 model) 21-16 A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Overhaul Troubleshooting 21 -53
('98-00 model) 21-17 In-car Temperature Sensor
C o m p r e s s o r Relief Valve Replacement and Test 21 -55
Replacement Outside Air Temperature
('98-00 model) 21-18 Sensor Replacement
Compressor Replacement 21 -56
('01 model) 21-19 Sunlight Sensor Replacement
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check and Test 21 -57
('01 model) 21-21 Power Transistor Test 21 -58
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Overhaul Climate Control Unit Remova I
('01 model) 21-22 and Installation 21 -58
C o m p r e s s o r Relief Valve Climate Control Unit
Replacement Disassembly and
('01 model) ........................ 21-23 Reassembly 21 -59
C o n d e n s e r R e p l a c e m e n t ..... 21-24
Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for items not shown in this section.
The air conditioning and climate control has been changed to suit the Accord V6.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool N u m b e r Description Qty

07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
I
21-2
Air Conditioning in
\ CONDENSER
I \ Replacement, page 21-24
/ EVAPORATOR
/ R e m o v a l a n d Installation, page 21-46 I RECEIVER/DRYER
/ in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
COMPRESSOR
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS ('98-00 m o d e l s )
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-47 Replacement, page 21-14
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l Clutch Check, page 21-16
C l u t c h O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-17
Relief Valve R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-18
COMPRESSOR
('01 m o d e l )
Clutch Check, page 21-21
Clutch O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-22
Relief Valve R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-23
(cont'd)
21-3
Air Conditioning
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,

RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY,
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
( L o c a t e d in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
T e s t , page 22-52
21-4
f HEATER VALVE CABLE
Adjustment, page 21-13
HEATER UNIT/CORE
Replacement, page 21-28
EVAPORATOR
moval and Installation, page 21-46
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-22
BLOWER UNIT
R e m o v a l a n d Installation,
page 21-26
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
BLOWER UNIT C O M P O N E N T S
BLOWER RESISTOR
D U S T AND POLLEN FILTER

MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-21 HEATER CONTROL PANEL
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a Removal a n d Installation, page 21-24
Replacement, page 21-21 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-24
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR HEATER FAN SWITCH
Test, page 21-23 Test, page 21-23
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-20
21
Air Conditioning
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
D i s c h a r g e h o s e t o t h e c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9 . 8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )

CO D i s c h a r g e h o s e t o t h e c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
(D C o n d e n s e r l i n e t o t h e c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
C o n d e n s e r l i n e t o t h e r e c e i v e r / d r y e r : 9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
R e c e i v e r l i n e t o t h e r e c e i v e r / d r y e r : 9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
(D R e c e i v e r l i n e t o t h e e v a p o r a t o r : 1 3 N - m (1.3 k g f - m , 9.4 I b f f t )
(7) S u c t i o n h o s e t o t h e e v a p o r a t o r : 31 N - m (3.2 k g f - m , 2 3 I b f f t )
(D S u c t i o n h o s e t o t h e c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
(D C o m p r e s s o r t o c o m p r e s s o r b r a c k e t (8 x 1.25 m m ) : 2 2 N - m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
(3D C o m p r e s s o r b r a c k e t t o e n g i n e b l o c k (10 x 1.25 m m ) : 4 4 N - m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
21-6
Symptom Diagnostic procedure | Also check for
Recirculation control doors do Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's
not change between Fresh and Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate. Accord Service Manual (see page Cleanliness and tightness of all
21-14) connectors
Blower motor runs, but one or Blower Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the under-
more speeds are inoperative. Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
Accord Service Manual (see page in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
21-15) box
Poor ground at G202 and G401
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Blower motor does not run at all. Blower Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the under-
Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
21-15) box
connectors
Condenser fan does not run at Condenser Fan Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
all (but radiator fan runs w i t h Troubleshooting (see page 21-10) hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
the A/C on). in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Both fans do not run w i t h the Radiator and Condenser Fans Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
A/C on. C o m m o n Circuit Troubleshooting (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
(see page 21-12) and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor clutch does not Compressor Clutch Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
engage. Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
21-39) box
connectors
A/C system does not come on A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
(both fans and compressor). Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 connectors
Accord Service Manual (see page
21-41)
Both heater and A/C do not Heater Control Power and Ground Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the under-
work. Circuits Troubleshooting, refer to hood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
(see page 21-19) and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors
21-7
Air Conditioning
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.6 (15A)
No.42 (50A)
No.41 (100A) No.54 (40A) No. 13 (7.5 A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
RADIATOR CONDENSER COMPRESSOR BLOWER

FAN FAN CLUTCH MOTOR
RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY
GRN BLU/YEL RED

BLK YEL/BLK
COMPRESSOR
- GRN - CLUTCH
XL
G202
BLU/BLK GRN
A/C
PRESSURE
RADIATOR XX SWITCH
FAN 2 1
SWITCH A FAN C (_ ^t-Hj27)- BLU/RED
/Closed : Above\
D
\199F(93 C) /
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR A CONDENSER
FAN
MOTOR
BLK WHT/GRN
1
RADIATOR
FAN
r SWITCH B
2
I /Closed: AboveN
l225F (107C)/
-LL 1
G201 G101 G201
21-8
E
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT < | RED
(DRIVER'S)
HEATER CONTROL PANEL

Air Conditioning
Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood 4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the
fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the condenser fan relay 4P socket with a j u m p e r wire.
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK ?

C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.

JUMPER
2. Remove the condenser fan relay f r o m the under- WIRE
hood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01

Accord Service Manual (see page 21-52). BLU/YEL
is the relay OK ?
Does the condenser fan run?
NO - Replace the condenser fan relay.
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d . N O - G o t o step 9.

1
2 7. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
4 3
1
2
4 3
YEL/WHT
NO Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. I
Y E S Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
21-10
8. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of 12. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of
the radiator fan control module 8P connector and the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
body ground with the 8P connector connected.
C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
, I YEL/WHT
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
YES Replace the condenser fan motor.
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the
condenser fan relay and the radiator fan control NO Check for an open in the wire between the
module.H condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201.
NO Perform the radiator fan control module input
tests (see page 10-20).
10. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.

the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2
terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector.
1
BLU/YEL
'BLU/YEL
C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R

condenser fan relay and the condenser fan.B
21-11
Air Conditioning
Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20 A) and No. 58 (20 A) fuses in 9. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage
the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) between the No. 20 terminal of the PCM connector
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. A (32P) and body ground w i t h the PCM connectors
connected.
Are the fuses OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 2. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
NO Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.

GRN
2. Remove the condenser fan relay f r o m the under- / 2 3 4 5 6

/ 8 9 10
hood fuse/relay box. 12 13 14 15
25 26 27
/ 17 18 19 20
28 29 30
21 23
32
24

the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the PCM connector A(32P). If the connections are
g o o d , substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM.B
YEL/WHT
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the radiator

fan relay, the condenser fan relay and PCM.
NO Perform the radiator fan control module input

tests (see page 10-20).
6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
21-12
jam
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
heater valve arm (C). Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve
B arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
B
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
3. Set the temperature control dial on MAX COOL

(60F or 18C) with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix

control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D),
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp (A).
21-13
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('98-00 model)
1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning suction (A) and discharge (B) lines from the
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off. compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, contamination.
preset buttons.
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/

charging station, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from

the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the
6x1.0 mm
condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan
shroud. 8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t ) removing the compressor.
8x1.25 mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
-6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
21-14.
on
9. Remove the bolts, the suction service valve (A) and 11. Install the compressor in the reverse order of
the O-ring (B) from the compressor. removal, and note these items:
2 5 . 5 N - m (2.6 k g f - m , 18.8 I b f f t )
If you're installing a new compressor, you must
calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC-
134a DENSO piston type compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
10. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts and the Service Manual (see page 21-55).
compressor bracket. Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its
performance, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
21-15
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Check ('98-00 model)
1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for 4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is w i t h i n specifications, replace the field coil (see
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-17). page 21-17).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating Field Coil Resistance: 3 . 4 - 3 . 8 ohms at 68F (20C)
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set w i t h a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-17).
3. Measure the clearance betweenn the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (B) w i t h a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the m o v e m e n t of the
pressure plate w h e n the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not w i t h i n the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-17).
Clearance: 0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.020 + 0.006 in)
NOTE: The shims are available in three

thicknesses: 0.1 m m , 0.3 m m and 0.5 m m .
21-16
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 model)
Special Tool Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872, ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and
commercially available compressor.
A
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure
plate with a commercially available A/C clutch
holder.
13.2 N-m (1.35 k g f m , 9.76 Ibfft)
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), 4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) with snap
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). Be careful
number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then not to damage the field coil and compressor.
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-16).
.A
(cont'd)
21-17
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 Compressor Relief Valve
model) (cont'd) Replacement ('98-00 model)
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
disassembly, and note these items: charging station, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Install the field coil with the wire side facing
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the 2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
hole in the compressor. the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces the system and the compressor oil from running
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum out.
solvent. A
Install new snap rings, note the installation 1 3 . 2 N m (1.35 k g f m , 9 . 7 6 Ibf ft)
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in

the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
B
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief

valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief

valve.
6. Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord

7. Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord

21-18
Compressor Replacement ('01 model)
1. If the compressor Is marginally operable, run the 7. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning suction line (A) and discharge line (B) from the
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off. compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, contamination.
preset buttons.
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

charging station, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from

the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the 8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.
condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan removing the compressor.
shroud.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
21-19
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('01 model) (cont'd)
9. If necessary, remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and the 10. Install the compressor in the reverse order of
compressor brecket. removal, and note these items:
If you're installing a new compressor, you must

calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed f r o m it, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Replace the O-rings w i t h new ones at each fitting,
0
installing t h e m . Be sure to use the right O-rings
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC-
134a DENSO piston type compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
w i t h other refrigerant oils.
10 x 1.25 m m absorption.
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 Ibfft) Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins w h e n
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
Evacuate the system, refer to '98-01 Accord
Charge the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 21-56), and test its
performance, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
21-20
Compressor Clutch Check ('01 model)
1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for 4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is w i t h i n specifications, replace the field coll (see
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-22). page 21-22).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating Field Coil Resistance: 3.4~3.8 o h m s at 68F (20C)
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-22).
9 0
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (B) w i t h a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the
pressure plate w h e n the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not within the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-22).
Clearance: 0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.020 + 0.006 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in three

thicknesses: 0.1 m m , 0.3 m m and 0.5 m m .
12V
21-21
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('01 model)
Special Tool Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872, ring (A) w i t h snap ring pliers, then remove the
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and
commercially available compressor.
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the

pressure plate w i t h a commercially available A/C
clutch holder (B).
A
13.2 N-m
(1.35 k g f - m ,
9.76 Ibfft)
4. Remove the screw f r o m the field coil ground

Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) w i t h snap
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). Be careful
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the not to damage the field coil and compressor.
number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-21).
21-22
Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement ('01 model)
5. Reassemble the clutch In the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
Install the field coil with the wire side facing charging station, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the Manual (see page 21-54).
hole in the compressor.
Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces 2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
solvent. the system and the compressor oil from running
install new snap rings, note the installation out.
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
A
1 3 . 2 N m (1.35 k g f - m , 9 . 7 6 I b f f t )
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief

valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief

valve.
6. Evacuate the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service

7. Charge the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service

Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance,
refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-
44).
21-23
Air Conditioning
Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Remove the bolts and the upper mount brackets (A),
charging station, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service then remove the condenser (B) by lifting it up. Be
Manual (see page 21-54). careful not to damage the radiator and condenser
fins when removing the condenser.
2. Remove the coolant reservoir, but do not A
disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant
reservoir and the radiator.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the upper mount

brackets from the radiator.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m {1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
4. Remove each bolt, then disconnect the discharge

line (A) and condenser (B) line from the condenser.
Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust 6. Install the condenser in the reverse order of
contamination. removal, and note these items:
If you're installing a new condenser, add

refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8), refer to the '98-
01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-32).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
Be careful not to damage the radiator and
condenser fins when installing the condenser.
Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
21-24
21-25
Climate Control
A / C PRESSURE SWITCH
RADIATOR FAN
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
T e s t , p a g e 21-56
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY, CONDENSER FAN
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
( L o c a t e d in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
T e s t , p a g e 22-52
21-26
E
HEATER VALVE CABLE
A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 21-13 BLOWER UNIT
SUNLIGHT SENSOR Replacement, page 21-26
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-57 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
Test, p a g e 21-57
BLOWER UNIT C O M P O N E N T S
HEATER UNIT/CORE R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-27
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-28 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
Test, page 21-22
B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y
Test, p a g e 22-52
POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-58
D U S T AND P O L L E N FILTER
n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
EVAPORATOR
R e m o v a l a n d Installation, page 21-46
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-20
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-20 R e m o v a l and Installation, page 21-58
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-59
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-23
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
Test, page 21-55
MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-21
21
Climate Control
How to Retrieve a DTC
The climate control unit has a self-diagnosis function.
Running t h e Self-diagnosis Function

T E M P E R A T U R E C O N T R O L DIAL T E M P E R A T U R E INDICATOR
A / C O N Q H F U L L
A/C OFF U U AUTO MODE
f
r
AUTO OFF qf^l i
V J J \I )) 1
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
2. Set the temperature control dial on M A X COOL, then slowly to M A X HOT.
3. After 1 minute, press the AUTO button and then the OFF button. Continue to hold both buttons d o w n . If there is
any abnormality in the system w h e n both buttons are pressed, the temperature indicator will light up the segment
(A to N) corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator will then alternate every second between
displaying " 8 8 " (all segments lit) and the error segment. If there is no abnormality, the segments will not light up.
Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function

Turning the ignition switch OFF will cancel the self-diagnosis function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnosis function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
21-28
To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnosis function (see page 21-28), In the case of multiple problems, the
respective indicator segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I, and L come on at the same time, there
may be an open in the c o m m o n ground wire of the sensors.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
DTC Detection Item Page

(Temperature
Indicator
segment)
A An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-34)
B A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-35)
C An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-35)
D A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-37)
E An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-37)
F A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-38)
G An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-39)
H A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-40)
I A n open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-41)
J A short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-41)
K A problem in the air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-42)
L An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-43)
M A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-44)
N A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-45)
21-29
Climate Control
Symptom | Diagnostic procedure | Also check for
The blower motor does not run ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting Cleanliness and tightness of all
immediately even through the (see page 21-50) connectors
engine is fully warmed up
NOTE: The temperature control
dial or button must be set
between 64F (18C) and 90F
(32C)
Recirculation control doors do Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's
not change between Fresh and Troubleshooting (see page 21-52) under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate. Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Condenser fan does not run at Condenser Fan Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
all (but radiator fan runs with Troubleshooting (see page 21-10) hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
the A/C on). in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Both fans do not run w i t h the Radiator and Condenser Fans Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
A/C on. C o m m o n Circuit Troubleshooting (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
(see page 21-12) and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor clutch does not Compressor Clutch Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
engage. Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
21-39) box
connectors
A/C system does not come on A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
(both fans and compressor). Troubleshooting (see page 21-53) connectors
Both heater and A/C do not Climate Control Power and Ground Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the under-
work. Circuits Troubleshooting (see page hood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in
21-51) the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors
21-30
System Description
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R S
8P C O N N E C T O R 20P C O N N E C T O R
CXI
B 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
r1 r1
8P CONECTOR ( on Circuit Diagram)
Cavity Wire color Signal

1 BLK/YEL IG2 (Power) INPUT
2 WHT/YEL + B (Power) INPUT
3 RED/WHT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR OUTPUT
4 BLU/ORN BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELAY INPUT
5 ORN/BLK POWER TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
6 BLU/RED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
7 BRN/YEL REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INPUT
8 BLK GROUND OUTPUT
OP CONECTOR ( O on Circuit Diagram)
Cavity Wire color Signal

1 PNK/BLK AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
2 YEL/GRN A/C PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT
3 GRN/RED FRESH ' INPUT
4 GRN/WHT RECIRCULATE INPUT
5 BLU/BLK MODE DEF OUTPUT
6 BLU/WHT MODE VENT OUTPUT
7 RED/YEL AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
8 RED/BLK COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY INPUT
9 RED/WHT AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
10 RED MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S) OUTPUT
11 YEL/GRN SENSOR C O M M O N GROUND INPUT
12 WHT/RED r
SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPUT
13 GRY AIR MIX POTENTIAL + 5 V OUTPUT
14 BRN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
15 BRN/WHT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
16 YEL/RED IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
17 BLU/GRN MODE 4 OUTPUT
18 LT GRN/BLK MODE 3 OUTPUT
19 GRN/YEL MODE 2 OUTPUT
20 GRN/BLK MODE 1 OUTPUT
21-31
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.6(15A)
No.42 (50A) / I G I OX BLK/YEL
- W H T + 0 BAT ) No.3 (7.5A)
\IG2 O y - YEL BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
No.41 (100 A) No.54 (40A)
& No.56 (40A)
No.57 (20A) No.58 (20A)
RADIATOR CONDENSER COMPRESSOR BLOWER

FAN FAN CLUTCH MOTOR
RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY
GRN
GRN BLU/YEL RED
I-
BLK YEL/BLK
-6RN-
COMPRESSOR
BLU/BLK GRN CLUTCH
G202
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH
2 / C \ 1
> ] " @ BLU/RED -L^^L YEL/GRN
RADIATOR / f *
FAN
SWITCH A
/Closed : Above*
S
\199 F(93C) / ECTX
R E D / W H T
S G
VS
RADIATOR CONDENSER
FAN FAN
MOTOR MOTOR
PCM
t \ RADIATOR
i ) FAN
SWITCH B
2
I /Closed: Above\
5
.225F(107 C)/
v
BLK " BLK
1 1
G201 G101 G201 G401
21-32
YEL/BLK
BLU/RED
BLK/YEL -^T}-VW^#4-
L
WHT/YEL --{2}-VW W-
A : IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E
SENSOR
B : O U T S I D E AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C : SUNLIGHT S E N S O R
D:EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YEL/GRN
S5V S-COM
>AMD-P
AIR M X
>M-COOL CONTROL
REAR
21 MOTOR
WINDOW
OM-HOT
DEFOGGER
RELAY
J M-VENT
S-COM Q-
JM-DEF
!>MODE1 MODE
CONTROL
)MODE2
COMBINATION MOTOR
LIGHT SWITCH
>MODE3
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
)MODE4
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S) F R S
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
REC MOTOR |G2' BLK/YEL
: BP C O N N E C T O R
O : 20P C O N N E C T O R
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT G401
2
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC indicator light A: A n open in the in-car Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of
temperature s e n s o r circuit the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
2 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page connector.
21-55). C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No.
2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
*Check for a change in resistance by heating or
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cooling the sensor w i t h a hair drier.
YEL/RED
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
YEL/RED
i
h
1 2
U L IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor B

RESISTANCE the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
1 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
connector.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
50 68 86 104F 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10 20 30 40 C YEL/GRN
TEMPERATURE
*ls the resistance within the specifications shown I YEL/GRN
on the graph?
Y E S - G o t o step 3. IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
N O - Replace the in-car temperature sensor.

3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
Y E S Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the in-
car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control u n i t . B
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.
21-34
D T C indicator light B: A short in the in-car DTC indicator light C: A n open in the outside
temperature s e n s o r circuit air temperature s e n s o r circuit
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see
21-55). page 21-56).
2. Test the in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-55). 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No.
2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor.
Is the resistance within the specifications shown * D i p the sensor in ice water the and measure the
on the graph? resistance. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and
check for a change in resistance.
NO Replace the in-car temperature sensor.

the climate control unit 20P connector and body
ground.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/RED
RESISTANCE
kQ
YES Repair short to body ground in the wire 14 32 50 68 86 104 F

-10 0 10 20 30 40 C
between the climate control unit and the in-car
TEMPERATURE
temperature sensor H
*ls the resistance within the specifications shown
NO Substitute a known-good climate control unit, on the graph?
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit. 11 Y E S - G o t o step 3.
N O - Replace the outside air temperature s e n s o r .
(cont'd)
21-35
Climate Control
4. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of 5. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
1 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P 2 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector. connector.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
BRN/WHT YEL/GRN
BRN/WHT
YEL/GRN
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES Go to step 5. YES Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 20P connector and at the
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the climate outside air temperature sensor 2 P connector. If the
control unit and the outside air temperature connections are good, substitute a known-good
sensor. climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
control u n i t . B
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate

control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.
21-36
D T C indicator light D: A short In the outside DTC indicator light E: An open in the sunlight
air temperature s e n s o r circuit sensor circuit
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see 1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
page 21-56).
2. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-56). 3. Check for continuity between the No. 12 terminal of
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
Is the resistance within the specifications shown 1 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
on the graph? C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
NO Replace the outside air temperature sensor, I I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
WHT/RED
ground. WHT/RED
1
S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Is there continuity?
18 19 20
I BRN/WHT YES - G o t o step 4.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the sunlight sensor.
Y E S R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor. H
NO - Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

replace the original climate control unit.H
(cont'd)
21-37
Climate Control
4. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of D T C indicator light F: A short in the sunlight
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. s e n s o r circuit
2 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s 2. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ground.
i YEL/GRN

YEL/GRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
WHT/RED
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate

control unit and the outside air temperature Is there continuity?
sensor.
Y E S Repair short to body ground in the wire
5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2 P connector. between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor.
6. Reconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
NO - G o t o step 4 .
7. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-57).
4. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
5. Reconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
Y E S - Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the 6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-57).
sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are
g o o d , substitute a known-good climate control unit, Is the sunlight sensor OK?
replace the original climate control u n i t . H Y E S - Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
NO - Replace the sunlight sensor. replace the original climate control unit.H
NO -Replace the sunlight sensor.H
21-38
DTC Indicator light G: A n o p e n in t h e 4 . Check for continuity between the No. 1 4 terminal of
evaporator temperature sensor circuit the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
1 . Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
connector.
2 . Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
2 terminals of the evaporator temperature sensor.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ^0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
BRN
1 2
BRN
u U

40
30
Y E S - Goto step 5.
RESISTANCE NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the evaporator temperature
20
sensor
10
50 68 86 F
1 0 20 30 C
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?
Y E S - G o t o step3.
NO Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor.
(cont'd)
21-39
Climate Control
5, Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of D T C indicator light H: A short in the
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. evaporator temperature s e n s o r circuit
1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector. 1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
2. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see step 2
on page 21-39).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Is the resistance within the specifications shown
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
on the graph?
YEL/GRN
YES G o t o step 3.
YEL/GRN
NO Replace the evaporator temperature
sensor, m
Is there continuity? the climate control unit 20P connector and body
ground.
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good

indication goes away, replace the original climate 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
control u n i t . B
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NO - R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the climate BRN

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor. 11
Y E S -Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor.
NO -Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

replace the original climate control u n i t . B
21-40
DTC Indicator light I: An open in the air mix D T C indicator light J : A short in the air mix
control motor circuit
control motor circuit
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
3. Check for continuity between f o l l o w i n g terminals 3. Check for continuity between body ground and the
of the climate control unit 20P connector and the air climate control unit 20P connector terminals No. 1,
mix control motor 7P connector. 7, 9, 11 and 13 individually.
20P: 7P:
No. 1 No. 3
No. 7 No. 2 C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
No. 9 No. 1
No. 11 No. 5
No.13 No. 7 RED/
YEL
RED/WHT
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R PNK/BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/GRN GRY
RED/YEL
PNK/BLK RED/WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 20
YEL/ GRY
GRN
YES Repair any short to body ground in the

wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air
mix control motor. H
YEL/
PNK/BLK GRN GRY NO G o t o step 4.
/ / 7
LO
1 2 3
RED/WHT RED/YEL
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
YES- Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 20P connector and at the air
mix control motor 7P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit.H
NO Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the air mix control
motor. H
(cont'd)
21-41
Climate Control
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the s a m e DTC indicator light K: A problem In the air
terminals for voltage. mix control linkage, door and motor
1. Test the air mix control motor, refer to the '98-01

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P CONNECTOR
Is the air mix control motor OK ?

RED/YEL
RED/WHT
YES- Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
PNK/BLK and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
replace the original climate control unit.H
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NO Go to step 2.
2. Remove the air mix control motor, refer to

3. Check the air mix control linkage and door for

Is there any voltage? smooth movement.
Y E S Repair any short to power in the wire(s) Do the air mix control linkage and door move
between the climate control unit and the air mix smoothly?
control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before YES- Replace the air mix control motor H
replacing the climate control unit.
NO -Repair the air mix control linkage or door.H
NO Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
replace the original climate control unit.
21-42
D T C indicator light L: An open or short in the 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
mode control motor circuit terminals for voltage.
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
BLU/BLK | ^ | BLU/WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
climate control unit 20P connector terminals No. 5,
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6, 11, 17, 18,19 and 20 individually.
GRN/
BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/ BLU/GRN GRN/ Is there any voltage?

GRN BLK
LT G R N / B L K
GRN/YEL Y E S - Repair any short to power in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the mode
(U) (Q) ;o) (D (h (0) u control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit B
Is there continuity? N O - G o to step 5.
YES Repair any short to body ground in the wire

(s) between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor.
(cont'd)
21-43
Climate Control
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for D T C indicator light M: A problem in the mode
continuity between f o l l o w i n g terminals of the control linkage, doors and motor
climate control unit 20P connector and the m o d e
control motor 7P connector. 1. Test the mode control motor, refer to the '98-01
20P: 7P: Accord Service Manual (see page 21-21).
No. 5 No. 1
No. 6 No. 2 Is the mode control motor OK?
No. 11 No. 7
No. 17 No. 3 Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good climate control unit,
No. 18 No. 4 and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
No. 19 No. 5 replace the original climate control unit.
No. 20 No. 6

2. Remove the mode control motor, refer to the '98-01
BLU/BLK I^BLU/WHT
3. Check the mode control linkage and doors for
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 smooth movement.
YEL/GRN
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Do the mode control linkage and doors move
smoothly?
Y E S -Replace the air mix control m o t o r .
NO - Repair the mode control linkage or d o o r s .
M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R

mode control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit.
NO Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the mode control motor.
21-44
DTC indicator light N: A problem In the 4. Connect the No. 4 and No. 5 terminals of the power
blower motor circuit transistor 5P connector with a jumper wire.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and turn the blower

fan speed knob to HIGH. P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
Does the blower motor run?

_Q_
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the BLU/RED tJ BLK
power transistor 5P connector.
JUMPER WIRE
the power transistor 5P connector and body ground.
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Does the blower motor run at high speed?
3
NO - Repair open in the wire between the power
4 5
transistor and the blower motor.
BLK

NO Check for an open in the wire between the

power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G401.
(cont'd)
21-45
Climate Control
9. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of 11. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal of
the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 3 the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 1
terminal of the power transistor 5P connector. terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 8P C O N N E C T O R C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 8P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
3 \
4
r
5
f^l
6 f
2
7
1
8
1
4
r 1
5 6
r1
2
7
3
8
BLU/RED
ORN/BLK
ORN/BLK
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Y E S G o t o step 12.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the climate
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate control unit and the power transistor.
control unit and the power transistor.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the climate control unit 8P connector and body
the climate control unit 8P connector and body ground.
ground.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 8P C O N N E C T O R Wire side of female terminals
/ - \
1 2 3
\
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 5 6 rJ 7 8 r1 r1
BLU/RED
rl ... l
ORN/BLK
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the power
between the climate control unit and the power transistor.
transistor.
NO G o t o step 13.
21-46
ra
13. Reconnect the climate control unit 8P connector. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Test the power transistor (see page 21-58). 19. Disconnect the jumper wire.
Is the power transistor OK? 20. Remove the blower motor high relay, and test it,
YES Check for loose wires or poor connections at 22-52).
power transistor 5P connector. If the connections Is the relay OK?
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes YES Go to step 2 1 .
away, replace the original climate control unit.
NO Replace the blower motor high relay.
NO Replace the power transistor.
2 1 . Connect the No. 4 terminal of the blower motor
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No. 56 high relay 5P connector to body ground w i t h a
(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and jumper wire.
No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box. 5P C O N N E C T O R
Are the fuses OK ?
X L
YES G o t o step 16. 1

tr
16. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the blower motor 2P BLU/RED

connector to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
JUMPER
WIRE
B L O W E R M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

BLU/RED
JUMPER Y E S - G o t o step 23.
WIRE
NO -Repair open in the wire between the blower

motor high relay and the blower motor.

YES - Go to step 18.
NO Go to step 3 1 .
(cont'd)
21-47
Climate Control
26. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of 29. Disconnect the climate control unit 8P connector.
the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground. 30. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of
the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 3
terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P
connector.
BLK/YEL
1 / 3
4
0 5
1
4 5 6
2
7
3
8
1
r
r
BLU/ORN
Is there battery voltage? BLU/ORN

n
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the blower

motor high relay and the No. 3 fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y


the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground. Y E S Check for loose wires or poor connections at
blower motor high relay 5P connector. If the
1 control unit. M
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the blower motor high relay H
BLK
N O - Check for an open in the wire between the

blower motor high relay and body g r o u n d . If the
w i r e is OK, check for poor g r o u n d at G401
21-48
3 1 . Disconnect the jumper w i r e . 36. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
32. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.
B L O W E R MOTOR 2P C O N N E C T O R
YEL/BLK
YES Go to step 37.
NO Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

YES - Replace the blower motor.
NO G o t o step 34. the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF. B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
35. Remove the blower motor relay f r o m the under-

hood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52). BLK/YEL
Is the relay OK?
NO Replace the blower motor relay.
NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 3

fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the blower motor relay.
(cont'd)
21-49
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting
39. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1. Check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
40. Check for continuity between the No. 2 t e r m i n a l of Does the malfunction indicator lamp come on?
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
Y E S Refer to the fuel and emissions section of
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
(see page 11-3).
NO Go to step 2.
BLK
2 1 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ [] 3 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.

Is there continuity? the climate control unit 8P connector and body
ground.
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the blower
motor relay and the blower motor.
N O - C h e c k for an open in the w i r e between the

blower motor relay and body g r o u n d . If the w i r e is
\ RED/WHT
OK, check for poor g r o u n d at G202. 1 2
4 5 6 7 8
l r1
Is there approximately 5 volts?
Y E S - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 8P connector and at the ECT
sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good climate control unit, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control u n i t . H
NO Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the ECT sensor.
21-50
Climate Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 54 (40A) fuse in the under-hood 6. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of
fuse/relay box, the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's the climate control unit 8P connector and body
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A) ground.
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK ?
Y E S G o t o step 2. WHT/YEL

ground. Is there battery voltage?
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T BP C O N N E C T O R
NO -Repair open in the wire between the No. 13

fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the climate control unit.
BLK/YEL /

ground.
Is there battery voltage? -v

M l IWl 2
3
6 L
Y E S - G o t o step 5. 4^5
J1 7 8
BLK
NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 3
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the climate control u n i t . B

YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 8P connector. If the
connections are good,substitute a known-good
control u n i t . B
N O - Check for an open in the wire between the

blower motor high relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401.
21-51
Climate Control
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under- 8. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4
dash fuse/relay box. terminals of the climate control unit 20P conector
and body ground individually.
Is the fuses OK ?
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck. H

GRN/WHT
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
GRN/RED
connector.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

the recirculation control motor 7P connector and
body ground.

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity?
Y E S R e p a i r any short to body ground in the wire

(s) between the climate control unit and the
1
BLK/YEL
5 / 1
recirculation control motor.
NO Goto step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and check the same

wires for voltage.
GRN/WHT

recirculation control motor and the No. 3 fuse in the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6. Test the recirculation control motor, refer to

Is there any voltage?
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
Y E S - Repair any short to power in the wire(s)
Y E S - G o t o step 7. between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor. This short also
N O - G o t o step 11. damages the climate control unit. Repair the short
to power before replacing the climate control unit.
21-52
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for
continuity between the f o l l o w i n g terminals of the
climate control unit 20P connector and the 1. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
recirculation control motor IP connector.
20P: 7P: 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
No. 3 No. 5
No. 4 No. 7 3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of
the A/C presure switch 2P connector and body
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR ground.
A / C P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
GRN/WHT Wire side of female terminals
GRN/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
BLU/RED
9) U
GRN/RED
GRN/WHT

7P CONNECTOR
W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals
Is there continuity? Y E S - G o t o step 4.
YES -Check for loose wires or poor connections at NO G o t o step 10.

the climate control unit 20P connector and at
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m / 5. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2
indication goes away, replace the original climate terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
control unit.
NO -Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

A / C PRESSURE SWITCH
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor.
11. Remove the recirculation contol motor, refer to

12. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors

for smooth movement.
Do the recirculation control linkage and doors

move smoothly?
YES Replace the recirculation control motor B Is there continuity?
NO - Repair the recirculation control linkage or Y E S - G o t o step 6.

doors.
(cont'd)
21-53
Air Conditioning
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. 10. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage
between the No. 27 terminal of the PCM connector
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector. A (32P) and body ground w i t h the PCM connectors
connected.
9. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

/ /
ground.
2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
12 13 14
25
15
26
/27
17 18
28
19
29
20
30
21 23 24
BLU/RED
YEL/GRN r>^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the PCM

and the A/C pressure switch. H
Is there approximately 5 volts? N O - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are
Y E S - C h e c k for loose wires or poor connections at good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the original PCM.B
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m / 11. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
control u n i t . B Is the pressure within specifications?
N O - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate Y E S -Replace the A/C pressure s w i t c h . B
control unit and the A/C pressure switch fl
N O - Repair the A/C pressure problem. B
21-54
Climate Control
In-car Temperature Sensor In-car Temperature Sensor Test

Replacement
Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling
the sensor with a hair drier.
Remove the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the
dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B) Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and
and the air hose (C). Be careful not to damage the No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with
sensor and the dashboard. the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
1 2
u u
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. RESISTANCE

(kPJ
Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
TEMPERATURE
21-55
Climate Control
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the outside air Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance.
temperature sensor. Release the lock, and remove Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a
the outside air temperature sensor. change in resistance.
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and

No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor
with the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
RESISTANCE
(kPJ
104 F
4 0 C
TEMPERATURE
21-56
Sunlight Sensor Replacement Sunlight Sensor Test
1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard, Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage
then disconnect the 2P connector. Be careful not to between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No. 1
damage the sensor and the dashboard. terminal and the () probe on the No. 2 terminal with
the 2P connector connected. The voltage will not
change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent
lamp. Voltage should be:
3.63.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct

sunlight.
3.33.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.
WHT/RED YEL/GRN
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
21-57
Climate Control
Power Transistor Test Climate Control Unit Removal and
Installation
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the power
transistor.
1. Remove the center panel together with the climate
2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. control unit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
4 terminals of the power transistor. If should be Manual (see page 20-86).
approximately 1.4 1.5 kQ .
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
If the resistance is within the specifications, go to control unit (A) from the center pagnel (B).
step 3.
If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
POWER TRANSISTOR
4
y 3 L
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 3 terminal

(ORN/BLK) (A) in the 5P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
B
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the control unit
B controls to see whether it works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnosis function to comfirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page 2 1 -
28).
4. Connect a 1.2 3.4 W bulb (B) between the No. 3

and the No. 4 cavity on the 5P connector.
5. Reconnect the 5P connector to the power transistor.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

blower motor runs.
If the blower motor does not run, replace the

power transistor.
If the blower motor runs, replace the climate
control unit.
21-58
Climate Control Unit Disassembly and Reassembly
1. Remove the fan switch (A) and temperature control (B) dials, then remove the front (C), temperature control (D)
and fan switch (E) panels. Remove A/C switch (F), MODE control switch (G), AUTO switch (H), OFF switch (I),
recirculation control switch (J), front defroster switch (K) and rear defogger switch (L) buttons.
J A
2. Reassemble the control unit in the reverse order of removal.
21-59
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If Electrical maintenance is required)
collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
circuits.
Body Electrical
Relay and Control Unit Locations 22-2

Connectors and Harnesses 22-4
Fuse/Relay Boxes 22-23
Power Distribution 22-26
Ground Distribution 22-29
Battery 22-30
Relays
Power Relay T e s t 22-31
* Gauges
Gauge Bulb R e p l a c e m e n t . 22-32
Safety Indicator System
* Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit C o n n e c t o r R e p l a c e m e n t 22-42
Radio Remote Switch Test 22-42
Homelink Remote Control System
Test 22-43
Power Seat ('01 Sedan)
Motor T e s t 22-46
Switch Test/Replacement 22-47
Seat Heaters-Canada
NOTE; Refer to the '98 01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8007, for the items not shown in this section.
Outline of V6 Model Chenges

1998 model:
The ABS control unit location has been changed; related component locations are included.
A blower motor high relay and a radiator fan control module have been added; related componet locations
are included.
The wire harness and ground locations have been changed.
The bulb locations in the gauges have been changed.
The stereo sound system has been changed.
Homelink remote control system has been added; related information is included.
Circuit diagrams which differ f r o m those in the '98 Accord Service Manual have been included.
1999 model:
There are no changes to the 1998 model.
2000 model:
There side airbag system has been added; related information is included.
The engine wire harness has been changed.
Circuit diagrams which differ f r o m theose in the '98-99 Accord Service Manual have been included.
2001 model:
The seat heater relay location has been changed
The ABS/TCS control unit, TCS relay, and TCS indicator have been added.
The wire harness and ground locations have been changed.
The passenger's power seat has been added in the sedan.
Circuit diagrams which differ f r o m those in the '98-01 Accord Service Manual have been included.
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Engine Compartment
S E A T H E A T E R R E L A Y (Canada)
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT HARM RFI AV
('98-00 m o d e l s ) RELAY 1 RELAY 2 HORN RELAY
[Wire colors: B L K / Y E L , B L K ,
LWHT/BLK and W H T / G R N
TCS RELAY BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
('01 m o d e l )
[Wire colors; G R N / Y E L ,
i B R N / B L K , R E D / B L U and BLU MULTI-RELAY BOX CONDENSER FAN RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
ELD UNIT
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY

fWire colors: Y E L / G R N , B L K ,
L B R N / B L K and W H T / G R N
INTERMITTENT
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY WIPER RELAY
f Wire colors: Y E L / R E D , Wire colors: G R N / B L K ,
^BRN/BLK, W H T / B L U and WHT WHT, BLK, G R N / R E D ,
and B L U / W H T
I
22-2
Dashboard
BLOWER M O T O R HIGH RELAY
CONTROL MODULE ABS C O N T R O L UNIT

('98-00 m o d e l s )
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
('01 m o d e l )
22-
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r s h a v e b e e n a s s i g n e d t o i n - l i n e c o n n e c t o r s . T h e n u m b e r is p r e c e d e d b y t h e letter "C" f o r c o n n e c t o r s , " G " f o r g r o u n d
t e r m i n a l s or " T " f o r n o n - g r o u n d t e r m i n a l s .
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard O t h e r s (Floor, Door, Notes
T r u n k , a n d Roof)
Starter cable T1,T2and( + ) (see p a g e 22-5)
Battery g r o u n d cable T3 (see p a g e 22-5)
G1and (-)
Engine g r o u n d cable T4 (see p a g e 22-5)
G2
Engine w i r e harness C103 t h r o u g h C108 (see p a g e 22-6)
T101 and T102
G101 a n d G 1 0 2
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t wire G201 t h r o u g h G205 C201 t h r o u g h C204 (see p a g e 22-12)
harness
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e G301 a n d G 3 0 2 C103andC104 (see p a g e 22-14)
harness C301 a n d C302
Dashboard w i r e harness B C 3 0 1 , C 4 0 1 a n d C402 (see p a g e 22-16)
(left b r a n c h ) G401
Dashboard w i r e harness B C201 t h r o u g h C 2 0 3 a n d (see p a g e 22-16)
(right branch) C403
Dashboard w i r e harness A C 2 0 4 , C302 a n d C401 C501 t h r o u g h C505 a n d (see p a g e 22-18)
G501 and G502 C582
G503 and G504
Left s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s C501 a n d Refer t o t h e '98-01
C551 t h r o u g h C557 A c c o r d Service Manual
G551 a n d G 5 5 2 (see p a g e 22-24)
Right side w i r e harness C581 t h r o u g h C586 a n d (see p a g e 22-20)
C851
G581
Rear w i r e h a r n e s s C 5 5 4 a n d C601 Refer t o t h e '98-01
G601 Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-28)
M o o n r o o f wire harness C502 Refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-30)
Roof wire harness Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-30)
D r i v e r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e h a r n e s s C551 Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-31)
P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e C701 (see p a g e 22-22)
h a r n e s s ('01 S e d a n )
Driver's door w i r e harness C631 a n d C632 Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-32)
Passenger's door w i r e harness Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-34)
Left rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s C553 Refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-36)
R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s C581 Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-37)
Ignition switch harness C404 Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-38)
SRS m a i n harness C503 C556, C557, C583 a n d Refer t o t h e '98-01
C584 Accord Service Manual
G801 (see p a g e 22-38)
SRS f l o o r harness (Sedan) C505 a n d C851 Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 22-39)
OPDS wire harness C851 Refer t o t h e '98-01
(with side airbags) Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-42)
Rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r w i r e Refer t o t h e '98-01
harness Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-42)
22-4
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects t o Notes

T1 1 Right s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Under-hood fuse/relay box
T2 2 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Starter m o t o r
Battery Battery positive terminal
( )
Battery Ground Cable
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Notes

T3 6 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Transmission housing
G1 5 Left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d via battery
g r o u n d cables
( ) Battery Battery negative terminal
Engine Ground Cable ('99 model)

T4 8 M i d d l e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Valve cover
G2 7 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d via engine
g r o u n d cable
Engine Ground Cable ('00-01 models)

T4 4 Left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Transmission housing
G2 3 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d via engine
g r o u n d cable
22-5
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness ('98-99 models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

Alternator 42 4 Right side of engine compartment
A/T clutch pressure control valve A 27 2 Right side of engine compartment
A / T clutch p r e s s u r e control v a l v e B 28 2 Right side of engine compartment
T r a n s m i s s i o n range s w i t c h (A/T g e a r 15 10 Right side of engine compartment
position switch)
CKP sensor 4 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Countershaft speed sensor 16 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Coolant temperature gauge sending 41 1 Middle of engine compartment
unit
E n g i n e coolant t e m p e r a t u r e ( E C T ) 39 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
Radiator fan s w i t c h B 45 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
E x h a u s t g a s recircuration ( E G R ) 40 6 Middle of engine compartment
control s o l e n o i d v a l v e
Idle air c o n t r o l (IAC) v a l v e 35 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Ignition coil 18 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Ignition control m o d u l e (ICM) 14 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) s e n s o r 13 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Lock-up control s o l e n o i d v a l v e and 32 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
shift control s o l e n o i d v a l v e A
Mainshaft s p e e d s e n s o r 29 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
M A P sensor 38 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
No. 1 fuel injector 7 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
No. 5 fuel injector 8 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Oil pressure s w i t c h 2 1 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
PCM connector B 19 25 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
PCM connector C 20 31 Under m i d d l e of dash
PCM connector D 21 16 Under m i d d l e of dash
Primary heated o x y g e n sensor 11 4 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
(Primary H02S)
Radiator fan switch A 25 2 Right side of engine compartment
Second clutch pressure switch 33 1 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve B 36 2 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve C 34 2 Right side of engine compartment
Starter solenoid 31 1 Right side of engine compartment
TDC sensor 44 4 Right side of engine compartment
Third clutch pressure switch 30 1 Right side of engine compartment
T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (TP) s e n s o r 37 3 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC pressure switch 1 2 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC s o l e n o i d v a l v e 5 1 Right side of engine compartment
C103 23 14 Right side of engine compartment Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
C104 24 10 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
C105 (Junction connector) 22 20 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
C106 (Junction connector) 17 8 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
T101 3 Under-hood fuse/relay box
T102 43 Alternator
G101 26 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Engine g r o u n d via engine
wire harness
22-6
(cont'd)
22-7
Connector t o Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness ('00-01 models)

Alternator 46 4 Right side of engine compartment
A/T clutch pressure control valve A 28 2 Right side of engine compartment
A/T clutch pressure control valve B 29 2 Right side of engine compartment
T r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e (TR) s w i t c h ( A / T 15 10 Right side of engine compartment
gear position switch)
CKP s e n s o r 4 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Countershaft speed sensor 16 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
E n g i n e c o o l a n t t e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) 41 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
sensor
E x h a u s t g a s r e c i r c u r a t i o n (EGR) 40 6 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
control solenoid valve
Idle air c o n t r o l (IAC) v a l v e 36 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) s e n s o r 14 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Lock-up control solenoid valve and 33 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
shift control solenoid valve A
Mainshaft speed sensor 30 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
M A P sensor 39 3 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
N o . 4 fuel injector 49 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
N o . 1 ignition coil 8 3 M i d d l e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
N o . 2 i g n i t i o n coil 9 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
N o . 3 ignition coil 11 3 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
N o . 4 i g n i t i o n coil 48 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
N o . 5 ignition coil 44 3 Middle of engine compartment
N o . 6 i g n i t i o n coil 42 3 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Oil pressure switch 2 1 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
PCM connector B 19 25 Under middle of dash
PCM connector C 20 31 Under middle of dash
PCM connector D 21 16 Under middle of dash
22-8
(cont'd)
22-9
Engine Wire Harness ('00-01 models) (cont'd)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Notes

Primary H02S 12 4 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Radiator fan switch A 26 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Radiator fan switch B 51 2 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Secondary clutch switch pressure 34 1 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
switch
Shift control solenoid valve B 37 2 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve C 35 2 Right side of engine compartment
Starter solenoid 32 1 Right side of engine compartment
TDC sensor 50 4 Right side of engine compartment
Third clutch pressure switch 31 1 Right side of engine compartment
T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (TP) s e n s o r 38 3 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC p r e s s u r e s w i t c h 1 2 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC solenoid valve 5 1 Right side of engine compartment
C103 24 14 Right side of engine compartment Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
C104 25 10 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
C105 (Junction connector) 22 20 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
T101 3 Under-hood fuse/relay box
T102 47 Alternator
G101 27 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d via e n g i n e w i r e
harness
G102 6 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d via engine wire
harness
22-10
22-11
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
ABS control unit connector A 1 12 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l * 1
ABS control unit connector B 2 22 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l * 1
A B S fail-safe relay 6 4 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t -x- -|
ABS modulator unit 22 10 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t * 1
ABS pump motor 23 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
A B S p u m p m o t o r relay 5 4 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
ABS right front wheel sensor 20 2 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
ABS/TCS control unit connector A 45 26 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l *2
ABS/TCS control unit connector B 1 16 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l *2
ABS/TCS control unit connector C 2 12 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l *2
ABS/TCS modulator unit 22 23 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t *2
A/C compressor clutch 31 1 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
A/C pressure switch 25 2 Behind condenser fan motor
Condenser fan motor 30 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Cruise control actuator 21 4 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Diode (Lighting) 40 2 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Canada
ELD u n i t 12 3 Inside u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay box
H i g h b e a m cut relay 42 4 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Canada
Left h o r n 26 1 Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
O u t s i d e air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r 28 2 B e h i n d m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 4 3 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
c o n n e c t o r D (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r C (see p a g e 22-25)
P o w e r s t e e r i n g p r e s s u r e (PSP) s w i t c h 19 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Radiator fan m o t o r 24 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right front parking light 33 2 Behind right headlight
Right front side marker light 39 3 Behind right of front b u m p e r
Right headlight (High beam) 32 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (Low beam) 34 2 Behind right headlight
Right horn 29 1 Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
Seat heater relay 7 4 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t * 1
Secondary heated oxygen sensor 18 4 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
(Secondary H02S)
Security h o o d switch 27 2 Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
Taillight relay 41 4 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
TCS relay 7 4 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t *2
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 8 16 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
D (see p a g e 22-23)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 9 3 R i g h t s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C (see p a g e 22-23)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 10 7 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
B (see p a g e 22-23)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 11 18 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
A (see p a g e 22-23)
W a s h e r level s w i t c h 38 2 Behind right of front b u m p e r Canada
Windshild washer motor 37 2 Behind right of front b u m p e r
C201 13 16 Under right side of dash Dashboard w i r e harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
C202 14 7 U n d e r right side of dash Dashboard w i r e harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
C203 15 5 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
C204 16 22 U n d e r right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
G201 35 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
G202 17 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
G203 36 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
G204 43 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
G205 44 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
I c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
* 1: '98-00 m o d e l s
* 2; '01 m o d e l
22-12
22-13
Connector to Harness index (cont'd)
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness

A B S left f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r 16 2 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
B r a k e f l u i d level s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r A 6 1 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
B r a k e f l u i d level s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r B 7 1 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
( /
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 12 20 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
c o n n e c t o r E (see p a g e 22-24)
c o n n e c t o r C (see p a g e 22-24)
Engine m o u n t control solenoid valve 4 2 Left s i d e o f engine compartment
EVAP purge control solenoid valve 3 2 Left s i d e o f engine compartment
Intermittent w i p e r relay 13 6 Left s i d e o f engine compartment
Left f r o n t p a r k i n g l i g h t 20 2 B e h i n d left headlight
Left f r o n t s i d e m a r k e r l i g h t 17 3 B e h i n d left of front b u m p e r
Left h e a d l i g h t ( H i g h b e a m ) 21 2 B e h i n d left headlight
Left h e a d l i g h t ( L o w b e a m ) 19 2 B e h i n d left headlight
Seat heater relay 13 4 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l *
Test tachometer connector 1 2 Left s i d e o f engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 8 5 Left r e a r o f engine compartment
C103 2 14 Left s i d e o f engine compartment E n g i n e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-6)
C104 15 10 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t E n g i n e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-6)
C301 9 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard w i r e harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
C302 10 16 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard w i r e harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
G301 18 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d v i a left e n g i n e
G302 5 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d via left e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
'01 m o d e l
22-14
22-15
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left Branch)

Brake s w i t c h 5 4 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C a b l e reel 13 4 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C o m b i n a i o n light switch 12 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Data link c o n n e c t o r (DLC) 16 16 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Daytime r u n n i n g lights control unit 14 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
c o n n e c t o r 0 (see p a g e 22-24)
c o n n e c t o r P (see p a g e 22-24)
c o n n e c t o r Q (see p a g e 22-24)
Ignition switch 11 7 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Immobilizer control unit 10 5 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Intermittent dwell time controller 8 2 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
PGM-FI m a i n relay 7 7 U n d e r left s i d e of d a s h
Windshield wiper/washer switch 9 8 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r s
C301 6 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
C401 15 22 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard wire harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
C402 4 8 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Security system w i r e harness Canada
(Optional)
C402 4 4 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Security system w i r e harness USA
(Optional)
G401 17 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l Body g r o u n d via d a s h b o a r d
w i r e harness B
D A S H B O A R D W I R E H A R N E S S B (left b r a n c h )
22-16
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right Branch)

Air mix control m o t o r 15 7 U n d e r right side of dash
Blower motor 12 2 Under right side of dash
B l o w e r m o t o r h i g h relay 11 4 U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h AUTO A/C
Climate control unit connector A 3 20 U n d e r m i d d l e of d a s h AUTO A/C
Climate control unit connector B 1 8 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash AUTO A/C
Evaporator t e m p e r a t u r e sensor 4 2 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
Heater c o n t r o l p a n e l 3 22 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash MAN. A/C
Heater f a n s w i t c h 1 7 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash MAN. A/C
Mode control motor 2 7 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
c o n n e c t o r J (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r K (see p a g e 22-25)
Power transistor 10 4 Under r i g h t side of dash AUTO A/C
Radiator fan control m o d u l e 16 8 Under m i d d l e of dash
Recirculation control m o t o r 5 7 Under m i d d l e of dash
C201 6 16 Under r i g h t side of dash Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-12)
C202 14 7 U n d e r right side of dash Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
C203 13 5 U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
C403 7 2 U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h Security system w i r e harness
(Optional)
22-17
Dashboard Wire Harness A
Connector or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Notes

Accessory socket 29 2 Behind m i d d l e of dash
A / T gear position console light/parking 32 4 Middle of floor between front
pin switch seats
A u d i o unit 17 20 Behind audio unit
Clock 16 5 Behind middle of dash
C r u i s e c o n t r o l unit 37 14 Behind left s i d e o f d a s h
Cruise main switch 7 5 Behind instrument panel *1
Cruise main / T C S switch 7 8 Behind i n s t r u m e n t panel *2
Driver's seat heater s w i t c h 31 6 Behind m i d d l e of dash
Driver's u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box 2 18 Behind left kick p a n e l
c o n n e c t o r 1 (see page 22-24)
Driver's u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box 3 18 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
c o n n e c t o r K (see page 22-24)
Gauge assembly connector A 11 14 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector B 10 22 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector C 12 16 Behind gauges
G l o v e box light 27 2 Behind glove box
Hazard w a r n i n g switch 14 10 Behind m i d d l e of dash
In-car temperature s e n s o r 38 2 Behind left s i d e o f d a s h
Left tweeter 9 2 Behind i n s t r u m e n t panel
M o o n r o o f switch 8 6 Behind instrument panel
Multiplex control unit (driver's) 5 22 Behind left kick p a n e l
connector B
Multiplex control unit (passenger's) 23 22 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
connector B
Parking brake switch 36 1 M i d d l e of floor between f r o n t
seats
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r s w i t c h 30 6 Behind m i d d l e of dash
c o n n e c t o r H (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r 1 (see p a g e 22-25)
PCM connector A 28 32 Behind middle of dash
Right tweeter 20 2 Behind instrument panel
Shift lock solenoid 34 2 Middle of floor between front
seats
Sunlight sensor 15 2 Behind m i d d l e of dash
SRS m e m o r y erase signal (MES) 4 2 Behind left kick p a n e l *2
SRS unit 33 8 Middle of f l o o r *3
C204 26 22 Behind right side of dash Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
C302 39 16 B e h i n d left s i d e o f d a s h Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
C401 40 22 B e h i n d left s i d e of d a s h D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s B (see
p a g e 22-16)
C501 42 18 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l Left s i d e w i r e h a r e n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 22-24)
C502 6 7 Behind i n s t r u m e n t panel M o o n r o o f w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 22-30)
C503 13 3 Under middle of dash SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e '98- * 1
01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
C503 13 2 Under middle of dash SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - '00 Sedan
p a g e 22-39)
C503 13 8 Under middle of dash SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e '98- '00 C o u p e
p a g e 22-39)
C504 41 2 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l Security system w i r e harness USA
(Optional)
C505 35 6 Middle of floor SRS f l o o r h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - '00 Sedan
01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see with side
p a g e 22-39) airbags
C582 25 16 B e h i n d r i g h t s i d e of d a s h R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e '00 C o u p e
22-21)
22-18
C582 25 6 Behind right side of dash R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see *2
p a g e 22-20)
G501 18 Under middle of dash Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
G502 19 Under middle of dash Body g r o u n d via dashboard
wire harness A
G503 1 B e h i n d left kick p a n e l Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
G504 24 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
*1: '98-00 m o d e l s
* 2: '01 m o d e l
* 3: '00-01 S e d a n , '01 C o u p e
22-19
Right Side Wire Harness (Sedan)

A B S r i g h t rear w h e e l s e n s o r 16 2 U n d e r r i g h t s i d e o f rear seat
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 2 2 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *4
Passenger's door switch 13 1 Right B-pillar
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat b e l t s w i t c h 4 3 U n d e r passenger's seat *1
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r 3 3 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *2
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r 3 4 U n d e r passenger's seat *3
Passenger's side impact sensor 11 2 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *4
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay b o x 7 20 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
c o n n e c t o r A (see p a g e 22-25)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 8 3 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Canada
c o n n e c t o r G (see p a g e 22-25)
Right rear d o o r s w i t c h 15 1 Right quarter panel
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r 17 2 Right quarter panel
R i g h t s i d e seat b e l t t e n s i o n e r 14 2 Right B-pillar #4
W i n d o w antenna coil connector A 18 1 M i d d l e of rear shelf
C581 1 10 Right side of floor R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s ,
refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-
37)
G582 9 6 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Dashboard wire harness A , *4
refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-
lo;
G583 5 4 SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o #4
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e
M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-39)
G584 6 4 S R S m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o * 4
C701 3 10 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat P a s s e n g e r ' s seat w i r e h a r n e s s *2
(see p a g e 22-22).
G851 12 4 O P D S w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o #4
G581 10 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat B o d y g r o u n d v i a r i g h t side
wire harness
* 1: ' 0 0 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
* 2: '98-99 m o d e l
* 3: ' 0 0 m o d e l w i t h seat h e a t e r
* 4: '01 m o d e l
22-20
Right Side Wire Harness (Coupe)
A B S r i g h t rear w h e e l s e n s o r 16 2 U n d e r r i g h t side of rear seat
P a s s e n g e r ' s door s w i t c h 13 1 R i g h t B-pillar
P a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt s w i t c h 12 3 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat * 1
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r 10 3 Under passenger's seat *2
Passenger's s e a t h e a t e r 10 4 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *3
Passenger's s i d e a i r b a g i n f l a t o r 15 2 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *5
Passenger's side i m p a c t sensor 14 2 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
P a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box 5 20 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
c o n n e c t o r A (see page 22-25)
P a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box 6 3 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Canada
c o n n e c t o r G (see page 22-25)
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r 17 2 Right quarter panel
W i n d o w antenna coil connector A 18 1 M i d d l e o f rear s h e l f
C582 7 16 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Dashboard wire harnessA * 4
(see p a g e 22-18)
C582 7 6 B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l Dashboard wire harnessA *5
(see p a g e 22-22)
C583 2 4 S R S m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o *6
C584 3 4 S R S m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o *6
C585 ( C o n n e c t s t o C586) 4 1 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *6
C586 ( C o n n e c t s t o C585) 8 1 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *6
C851 11 4 O P D S w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o *6
G581 1 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat B o d y g r o u n d via r i g h t s i d e
wire harness
* 1: '00-01 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
* 2: '98-99 m o d e l s
* 3: '00-01 m o d e l w i t h seat h e a t e r
* 4: '00 m o d e l
* 5: '01 m o d e l
* 6: '00-01 m o d e l s
22-21
Connector to Harness index (cont'd)
Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (4-way Adjustable) ('01 model)

P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat a d j u s t m e n t 4 6 R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
switch connector A
P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat a d j u s t m e n t 2 6 R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
switch connector B
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat b e l t s w i t c h 7 3 U n d e r passenger's seat
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r 5 4 U n d e r passenger's seat
Recline m o t o r 1 2 U n d e r passenger's seat
Slide m o t o r 6 2 U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
C701 3 10 R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-20)
22-22
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects t o

A 15 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
A/C compressor clutch relay 3 4
B 14 7 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Blower motor relay 11 4
C 13 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Condenser fan relay 1 4
D 12 16 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Diode 9 2 Not used
ELD unit 4 3
Horn relay 10 4
Headlight relay 1 7 4
Headlight relay 2 8 4
Radiator fan relay 2 4
T1 6 Battery positive cable (see page 22-5)
T101 5 Engine wire harness (see page 22-6)
1 2 3
22-23
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector t Fuse/Relay Box index (cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects t o

A 11 10 Left side w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
B 3 14 Left side w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
C 10 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)
D 7 Not used
Diode 1
Diode 2
E 4 20 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)
F 9 6 Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
G 8 18 Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
H 5 6 No used
1 13 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18)
J 12 2 Service check connector
K 14 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18)
L 23 Not used
M 15 6 Ignition switch harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-38)
Multiplex control unit 6 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
connector A
N 22 2 SRS w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 22-39)
0 21 20 Dashboard w i r e harness B (see page 22-16)
P 16 7 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16)
Q 17 22 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16)
R 26 1 Optional connector
Reverse relay 19 4
S 27 1 Optional connector
Starter cut relay 18 4
T 24 1 Optional connector
Turn signal/hazard relay 20 4
U 25 1 Optional connector
22-24
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to

A 10 20 Right side wire harness (see page 22-20)
Accessory relay 15 4
B 4 4 Roof wire harness (see page 22-20)
C 9 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
D 5 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Diode 1 Not used
Diode 2
Diode 3
E 8 2 Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-34)
F 7 20 Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-34)
G 6 3 Right side wire harness (see page 22-20)
H 18 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18)
I 12 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18)
J 17 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16)
K 13 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16)
Multiplex control unit connector 11 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
A
M
Power window relay 14 4

Rear window defogger relay 16 4
16 15 14
22-25
Power Distribution
Fuse t o Components Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Amps Wire color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
41 100A Battery, Power distribution
42 50A WHT Ignition switch (BAT)
43 20A RED/GRN Right headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
44 Not used
45 20A RED/YEL Left headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Hight beam indicator, Hight beam cut relay
46 15A WHT/GRN PGM-FI main relay, Data link connector (DLC)
47 20A WHT/YEL Ignition key light and key interlock solenoid, ABS control unit (BLS)
Cruise control unit, PCM, Horn relay
High m o u n t brake light, Brake failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
Fuse/relay Multiplex control unit (driver's)
box socket
48 20A WHT/GRN ABS front and rear solenoids
49 15A WHT/GRN Turn signal/hazard relay
50 30A WHT ABS p u m p motor
51 40A WHT/BLU No. 1, 7, 8, 15 and 16 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
52 20A BLU TCS relay
53 40A W r f f T G R N " " Rear w i n d o w defogger relay
54 40A YEL No. 9, 10, 1 1 , 12 and 13 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
55 40A YEL/GRN No. 2, 4, 5 and 6 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
56 40A YEL/BLK Blower motor
57 20A BLU/BLK Radiator fan motor
58 20A BLU/YEL Condenser fan motor
WHT Fan control module (Radiator fan control module)
RED A/C compressor clutch
59 20A WHT/GRN Driver's and front passenger's seat heaters (Canada)
22-26
- +
BODY
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Number Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

1 15A RED/WHT PGM-FI main relay
RED/BLU (or GRN) SRS unit (VA)
2 10A BLK/WHT (or GRN) SRS unit (VB)
3 7.5A BLK/YEL Blower motor high relay, Climate control unit, Heater
control panel, Fan control module (Radiator fan control
module), Recirculation control motor, Rear w i n d o w
defogger relay, Seat heater relay
4 7.5A YEL/BLK ABS control unit, Power mirror actuators, Power mirror
defoggers (Canada), ABS/TCS control unit ('01 model)
Fuse/relay box socket Optional connector
5 7.5 A
15A
1 YEL/RED
BLK/YEL
Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Alternator, Cruise control unit, Cruise control main
6
switch indicator, ELD unit, Engine mount control
solenoid valve, Evaporative emission bypass solenoid
valve, Evaporative emission purge control solenoid
valve, Gauge assembly, PCM, Primary and Secondary
heated oxygen sensors, Vent shut solenoid valve, TCS
switch ('01 model)
7 7.5A YEL/GRN Multiplex control unit (driver's) (All '98-99 models
and '00 Sedan), Windshield washer motor (All '98-99
models and '00-01 Sedan), OPDS unit (with side
airbags)
8 7.5A YEL/BLK Accessory socket relay
Fuse/relay box socket Optional connector
9 7.5A YEL Back-up lights, Brake failure sensor, Clock, DRL
indicator light, Gauge assembly, Multiplex control unit
(passenger's), Shift lock solenoid, Trailer lighting
connector
Fuse/relay box socket Multiplex control unit (driver's)
10 7.5A YEL/RED Turn signal/hazard relay
11 15A BLK/YEL Ignition coils
12 30A GRN/BLK Windshield wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper
motor, Windshield washer motor ('00-01 Coupe),
i Multiplex control unit (driver's) ('00-01 Coupe)
13 7.5A BLU/ORN PCM, PGM-FI main relay
(cont'd)
22-27
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Number Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

1 30 A GRN Moonroof motor
2 20 A RED Power seat rear up-down motor, Recline motor
3 20A RED Passenger's power seat, Slide motor ('01 Sedan)
4 20 A BLU Power seat front up-down motor, Slide motor
5 20A WHT/RED Passenger's power seat, Recline motor ('01 Sedan)
6 10 A RED/BLU Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
7 20 A WHT/YEL Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Left rear
power w i n d o w motor (Sedan),
Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
8 20 A BLU/BLK Passenger's power w i n d o w motor
9 20 A WHT/GRN Audio unit
WHT/RED Audio unit, Accessory socket
10 10 A RED/GRN Heater control panel, A/T gear position console light,
(Sedan) Driver's seat heater switch light (Canada), Audio unit,
15 A Gauge lights, Cruise main switch light, Moonroof
(Coupe) switch light, Clock, Hazard warning switch light,
Glove box light, Vanity mirror lights, Front parking
lights, Front side marker lights, Rear side marker
lights, License plate light(s), Taillights, Trailer lighting
connector, Climate control unit
11 7.5 A WHT/BLU Courtesy lights, Trunk light, Ceiling light, Spotlights
12 20 A Fuse/relay box socket Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
13 7.5 A WHT/YEL PCM, Heater control panel, Security indicator,
Multiplex control unit (door), Gauge assembly, Clock,
Climate control unit
Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
14 7.5 A GRN ABS control unit
15 20 A GRN/WHT Multiplex control unit (door)
16 20 A WHT/BLK Right rear power w i n d o w motor (Sedan)
22-28
Ground Distribution
Ground t o Components Index
NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G1 Battery, Transmission housing
G2 Engine block
G101 PCM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), Idle air control solenoid valve, Radiator
and fan switch, PGM-FI main relay, EGR control solenoid valve, Shift control solenoid valve assembly,
G102 A/T gear position switch, Engine coolant temperature switch, Ignition coils ('00 model)
('00-01 Shielding between the PCM and these components (all have BRN/BLK wires); CKP sensor, TDC
models) sensor, Primary and secondary heated oxygen sensors, Mainshaft speed senser, Countershaft
speed sensor, VTEC pressure switch, Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer control unit
G201 Condenser fan motor, Radiator fan motor, Right headlight (low beam), Right front parking light,
Right front side marker light, Right front turn signal light, Hood switch (security), Washer level
switch, Windshield washer motor
G202 Seat heater relay ('98-00 models), Blower motor relay, ELD unit, A B S fail-safe relay, Power steering
pressure switch, Cruise control actuator
G203 A B S pump motor, A B S / T C S modulator unit ('01 model)
G204 ABS control unit (2 wires), A B S / T C S control unit ('01 model)
G205 ABS control unit (2 wires), A B S / T C S control unit (2 wires) ('01 model)
G301 Left headlight (low beam), Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal
light
G302 Brake fluid level switch, Windshield wiper motor, Intermittent wiper relay, Seat heater relay
('01 model)
G401 Multiplex control unit (driver's), Turn signal/hazard relay, Power window master switch, Driver's
door key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Ignition key
switch, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), Data link connector (DLC), Combination
switches (3 wires), Heater control panel (2 wires), Fan control module (Radiator fan control
module), Blower motor high relay, Power transistor, Climate control unit
G501 Moonroof switch, Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Driver's seat heater switch, Front
passenger's seat heater switch, Glove box light, Transmission range switch (A/T gear position
switch), Clock, Audio unit, Accessory socket, Gauge assembly, Cruise control unit, Cruise control
main switch, OPDS unit ('00 Sedan with side airbags), Fuel gauge sending unit ('00 Coupe), Front
passenger's seat belt switch ('00 model), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('01 model), Cruise
control main/TCS switch ('01 model)
G502 Audio unit
G503 Multiplex control unit (driver's)
G504 Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
G551 Power mirror switch, Left power mirror defogger (Canada), Driver's power window motor, Power
window master switch (2 wires), High mount brake light, Driver's seat belt switch, Left rear door
lock knob switch, Driver's power seat switch (2 wires), Driver's seat heater (Canada)
G552 Fuel pump (FP), Fuel gauge sending unit (All '98-99 models, '00 Sedan, and '01 model)
G581 Multiplex control unit (passenger's), Power window relay, Accessory relay, Vanity mirror lights,
Spotlights, Passenger's door key cylinder switch, Passenger's door lock switch, Passenger's door
lock knob switch, Front passenger's seat heater, Right power mirror defogger (Canada), Right rear
door lock knob switch, OPDS unit (Coupe with side airbags, '01 Sedan with side airbags) Front
passenger's seat belt switch ('01 model), Front passenger's power seat switch (2 wires) ('01 model)
G601 Tail lights (right, left), License plate light, Trunk latch switch, Trunk key cylinder switch (security),
Trunk actuator (security), Brake light failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
G801 S R S unit (2 wires), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('00 model)
22-29
Battery
Battery Test
A battery can explode if you do not f o l l o w the

proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away f r o m the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and f o l l o w the

manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized tester, f o l l o w this conventional test
procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is

between 70F (21C) and 100F (38C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
If the case is damaged, replace the battery.

If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to

step 4.
If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the

surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps

for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK.

If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE

shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30
minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be
necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged w i t h i n

3 hours, the battery is O K . B
If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged
w i t h i n 3 hours, replace the battery.
22-30
Relays
Power Relay Test
Identify the relay, then do the test listed for i t Normally-open t y p e A:
NOTE: Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual for Check for continuity between the terminals.
the relay input test except that it is mentioned in this
manual (see page 22-52) There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No.
2 terminals w h e n power and ground are connected to
Relay Test the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals.
TCS relay Normally-open type A There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 2 terminals w h e n power is disconnected.
- TCS relay ('01 model)
2 3
1 4
22-31
Gauges
Gauge Bulb Replacement
Bulb Location
ABS INDICATOR I M M O B I L I Z E R I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )

L I G H T (1.26 W ) HIGH B E A M
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL \ INDICATOR W A S H E R L E V E L INDICATOR
I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W ) \ L I G H T (1.26 W ) L I G H T (1.26 W)
(Canada)
DRL INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
L I G H T (1.26W)
(Canada)
{'00-01 m o d e l s
T C S INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
('01 m o d e l )
A/T GEAR POSITION LEFT TURN SIGNAL
INDICATOR LIGHTS INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.4Wx7) (1.26 W )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHTS
(3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
LOW FUEL INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

L I G H T (3.78 W ) MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR LIGHT
G A U G E LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT (1.26 W )
(3.78 W ) (1.26 W )
22-32
I BODY I
Circuit Diagram

BATTERY
0-BLK
DRIVER'S
J No.6 j No.9
(7-5A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
C (15A) }
( BOX
BLU/RED
G401 G302
(cont'd)
22-33
Gauges
Circuit Diagram {cont'd)
PCM
BLU
/From \
1
previous
\page /
TEST
TACHOMETER
WHT/YEL YEL BLU CONNECTOR
B21 B11 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
/From \
previous
\page /
ENGINE
COOLANT
FUEL SPEEDO- TACHO-
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE METER METER
(ECT)
GAUGE
SPEEDOMETER TACHOMETER
FUEL DRIVE CIRCUIT ECT DRIVE CIRCUIT
DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
MICRO CONTROLLER and SUB S Y S T E M CIRCUIT
C11 C2 B3 B13 B14

(SCS) (RXD) (TXD)
YEL/BLU YEL-GRN BLU/WHT
v
PCM
ENGINE
FUEL FUEL COOLANT
GAUGE GAUGE TEMPERATURE
UNIT SENDING (ECT)
UNIT
SENDING UNIT
PCM
('00-01 models)
BLK
1
G552
('98-99 models)
22-34
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
or TAILLIGHT
RELAY
{Canada;
(cont'd)
22-35
Gauges
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD
RELAY
LEFT RIGHT
GRN/BLU GRN/YEL
GRN/BLU GRN/YEL
I JL
V V
SRS UNIT
V
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
LIGHTS LIGHTS
BLU GRN/BLU
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDING
UNIT
1
G552
22-36
BODY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
v
RED/WHT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
MALFUNCTION
CRUISE SIDE AIRBAG
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR CONTROLLER
LAMP (MIL) LIGHT LIGHT
SEAT BELT LOW
(1.26W) (1.26W) (1.26W)
REMINDER ENGINE OIL
LIGHT PRESSURE
(LED) INDICATOR
LIGHT
(LED)
B6
RED/BLU GRN/ORN BLU/BLK YEL/RED

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
PCM
RED/BLU
('00-01 models)
YEL/RED
DRIVER'S ENGINE OIL

SEAT BELT PRESSURE
SWITCH SWITCH
(OH : Unbuckled ' / O N : Engine stopped '
VOFF: Buckled , \ O F F : Engine running ,
BLK
G551
22-37
Safety Indicator System
Circuit Diagram

BATTERY
No.47 (20A)
( + ) - B L K * - < A J >
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.41 (100A) N o . 4 2 (50A) BAT
I TRUNK
LATCH
J SWITCH
BLK
G601
22-38
I BODY fl
; Coupe
WHT/YEL
WHT'BLK
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
PCM
6[1]
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
0 WHT/BLK ' ABS CONTROL UNIT
TRAILER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
WHT/BLK
d)
HIGH MOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
(21W)
BLK
-5"
G601 G551
22-39
Stereo Sound System
TWEETERS
PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

AUDIO UNIT
R e m o v a l , p a g e 22-124
C o n n e c t o r R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22-38
ANTENNA LEAD
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

RADIO R E M O T E SWITCH
Test, page 22-38
WINDOW ANTENNA
Test, page 22-126
REAR SPEAKERS
Repair, page 22-126
22-40
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A) ' BAT N 0 . 8 (7.5A)
- BLK - W H T O f
ACC>
WHT/BLK
No.54 (40A) YEL/BLK
VOL. H VOL. Q
DOWN [ UP I
() g (A) g
iI I 0501
(With security alarm system)
22
Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit Connector Replacement Radio Remote Switch Test
W h e n replacing an audio unit connector, match the 1. Remove the 2 screws (A) f r o m the radio remote
wires to the cavities listed in the f o l l o w i n g table. switch (B).
Cavities 1, 1 1 , 12, and 13 are not used.
B
Cavity Wire Connect to

2 WHT/RED ACC (Main stereo power
supply)
3 GEN/RED Radio remote switch
4 BLU Security IN
5 RED/YEL Right rear speaker ( )
6 BLU/YEL Left rear speaker ( + )
7 RED/GRN Front passenger's speaker
(+)
Right tweeter ( + )
8 BLU/GRN Driver's door speaker ( + )
Left tweeter ( + )
9 RED/BLK Lights-on signal
10 WHT/GRN Constant power
14* BLK Security OUT
15 BRN/WHT Right rear speaker ( -)
16 GRY/WHT Left rear speaker ( )
17 BRN/BLK Front passenger's door
speaker( - )
Right tweeter ( )
18 GRY/BLK Driver's door speaker ( )
Left tweeter ( - )
19 RED Dash lights brightness
controller 2. Remove the radio remote switch (B) f r o m the
20 BLK Ground (G502) steering wheel by removing the 2 screws, and
'98-00 models disconnect the 2P connector (C).
3. Measure resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2

terminals in each switch position according to the
table.
foj
Qj I I Position Resistance
OFF Approx. 3.6 k Q
(Si
> o o AUDIO/CH Approx. 780 Q
(SEEK)
Approx. 360 Q
(VOL UP)
)
Approx. 100 0
(VOL DOWN)
1 2 3 "4 "5 6 7 8 " 9 10

11 12 13 1415 16 17 18
22-42
Homelink Remote Control System
Circuit Diagram Test
BATTERY Turn on the spotlight.
(+)
If the spotlight comes on, the Homelink's power and
ground circuits are OK. If the Homelink w i l l not open
the customer's garage door, check that the Homelink
is programmed properly (see the owner's manual) or
call Homelink at 800-355-3515. On the Internet, go to
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
www.homelink.jci.com
BOX
If the spotlight does not come on, check for these
problems:
- A blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box.
- An open in the WHT/BLU wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and
PASSENGER'S
spotlight.
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY - A n open in the BLK wire between the spotlight and
BOX
G581.
G581
22-43
Power Seat
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):
N O T E : R e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 6 , f o r t h e d r i v e r ' s p o w e r s e a t .
22-44
Circuit Diagram - 4-way Adjustable

BATTERY
No.41 (100A) No.55 (40A)
(4^* BLK
YEL/GRN
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
No.3 No.5 FUSE/RELAY BOX
(20A) (20A)
WHT/RED
B3 B1 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
O
FOR- BACK- BACK-
a
WARD WARD WARD FOR- '
WARD
B4 A4 A2 B5 B6 B2
BLK BLU BLU/YEL YEL YEL/GRN BLK
SLIDE RECLINE
MOTOR MOTOR
JOL
G581 G581
Power Seat
Motor Test
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjutable): 3. Test the motor. When the motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-2).
Recline m o t o r :
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors f r o m the adjustment
switch. \ Terminal
B5 B6
Position \^
Forward 0 0
Backward 0 0
Slide motor;
\^ Terminal
A2 A4
Position \^
Forward 0
Backward 0
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

check for an open in the power seat wire harness
between the 6P connector and the 2P connectors. If
the harness is OK, replace the motor (see page 20-
2).
22-46
Switch Test/Replacement
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable); 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
1. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the
passenger's seat by removing the 2 screws (B), and Terminal
A2 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C). Position
FOR o -o
WARD
SLIDE
SWITCH
o
BACK
WARD
-o
RECLINE
FOR
WARD o o
SWITCH BACK
WARD o o
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) f r o m the

adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch f r o m
the cover by removing its 2 mounting screws.
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.
22-47
Seat Heaters - Canada
SEAT HEATER RELAY

{'98-00 m o d e l s )
Test, p a g e 22-52
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
i FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT C U S H I O N HEATER
' Test, p a g e 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l ,
.FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT-BACK HEATER
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
DRIVER'S SEAT-BACK HEATER

Test,page 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l .
DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER

Test, page 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
SEAT HEATER RELAY

{'01 m o d e l )
Test, p a g e 22-52
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l . DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 22-199
22-48
Circuit Diagram

IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 41 (100 A) No.42 (50A)
BLK
No.59 (20A)
TH : THERMOSTAT TON ; Below 9 3 F ( 3 4 C ) 1

l O F F : Above 1 0 9 F (43C)J
BR : BREAKER f O N : Below 8 6 F ( 3 0 C ) 1 SEAT HEATER RELAY
[OFF: Above 1 2 2 F (50C)J
HI . High
LO : Low
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(DX, LX) COMBINATION LIGHT
TAILLIGHT SWITCH (DX, LX)
RELAY (EX) TAILLIGHT RELAY (EX)
WHT/BLK
RED/BLK
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
DRIVER'S SEAT
HEATER B K SEAT HEATER B L K (Without side airbag)
I 1 1 1
G202 ("98-00 models)
G302 ('00 model)
22-49
Restraints
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

S R S Unit Identification 23-2
D T C Troubleshooting Index . 23-3
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index .......... 23-4
NOTE: Refer to the '98-01 M Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008,

for the items not shown in this section.
SRS
SRS Unit Identification

'98 Model
MAKER IDENTIFICATION M A R K
KEIHIN M2
SRS UNIT
I
23-2
'98 Model
KE1H1N (M2) SRS unit
DTC Detection Item Notes
1
1-1 Open in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)*
1
1-2 Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)*
1
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's (see page 23-76)*
airbag inflator
1
1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-78)*
1
1-5 Short to ground in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-80)*
1
2-1 Open in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)*
1
2-2 Increased resistance in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)*
1
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in (see page 23-83)*
passenger's airbag inflator
1
2-4 Short to power in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-85)*
1
2-5 Short to ground in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-86)*
1
5-1 Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-88)*
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
1
9-1 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could (see page 23-88)*
mean internal failure of the unit or a faulty indicator
light circuit. Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent
1
Failures (see page 23-45)*
9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could
mean internal failure of the power supply (VB line).
Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
1
page 23-45)*
1
10-1 SRS airbag deployed (SRS unit must be replaced) (see page 23-88)*
* 1: Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.
23-3
SRS
Symptom Troubleshooting index
'98 Model
SRS indicator light doesn't come on. SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-
1
264)* .
The SRS indicator light stays on SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
after the ignition switch is turned on refer to '98-01 Accord Service
(II). Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-
1
264)* .
* T. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.
23-4
Service Manual index
N O T E : Refer t o t h e f o l l o w i n g list t o l o o k u p A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan A s s e m b l y ABS/TCS Components

D T C s , s y m p t o m s , f u s e s , connectors, wire C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 C o m p o n e n t Location Index ............. 19-8, 24
h a r n e s s e s , specifications, m a i n t e n a n c e Test 10-8 Circuit D i a g r a m 19-12,46
s c h e d u l e s , a n d g e n e r a l service Replacement 10-13 Description 19-32
information:
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan C i r c u i t ABS-TCS Control Unit
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Indexes Troubleshooting 21-10 How-to Information 19-25
ABS/TCS Components 19-9 Replacement 19-82
Automatic Climate Control 21-29 A / C Pressure S w i t c h Circuit
Automatic Transaxle 14-7 Troubleshooting 21-53 ABS-TCS Modulator Unit
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s 11-3 Removal/Installation 19-80
SRS 23-3 A/T Assembly
Removal 14-114 Accumulator Body
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Indexes Installation 14-121 D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14-
A/C - 21-7 166
A B S / T C S C o m p o n e n t s .................. 1 9 - 1 0 , 3 1 A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Automatic Climate Control ................. 21-30 Valves Air Cleaner E l e m e n t
Automatic Transaxle 14-8 Test 14-108 Replacement 11-97
Cruise C o n t r o l S y s t e m 4-43 Replacement 14-109
Fan C o n t r o l s 10-15 Alternator
Fuel and E m i s s i o n s 11-6 A / T Countershaft Assembly C o m p o n e n t Location Index ................... 4-25
SRS .....23-4 D i s a s s e m b l y / l n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14- Replacement 4-31
Steering 17-4 172 Overhaul 4-35
Installation 14-192
Fuse/Relay Indexes Alternator-compressor Belt
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Relay ............ 22-23 A / T Countershaft 1st Gear C o m p o n e n t Location Index
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan Relay 22-23 Replacement 14-173 A/C Compressor , 4-25
B l o w e r M o t o r Relay 22-23 Charging System 4-25
ELD (Electrical L o a d D e t e c t o r ) 22-23 A / T Countershaft 3 r d Gear Inspection/Replacement
H e a d l i g h t Relay , 22-23 Replacement 14-173 Charging System 4-31
Horn Relay 22-23
P o w e r Distribution 22-26 A / T Differential Alternator-compressor Belt A u t o -
R a d i a t o r Fan Relay 22-23 C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x .............. 14-201 tensioner
U n d e r - d a s h Fuse/Relay B o x , D r i v e r ' s .... 22- Inspection/Replacement 4-33
24 A / T Gear Position Indicator
U n d e r - d a s h F u s e / R e l a y Box, P a s s e n g e r ' s .. Replacement 14-144 ATF
22-25 Inspection 14-112
U n d e r - h o o d Fuse/Relay B o x 22-23 A / T Gear Position Indicator S y s t e m Replacement 14-113
Connector and W i r e Harness Indexes Circuit Diagram 14-139 ATF Cooler
C o m p o n e n t C o n n e c t o r s (to harness) ... 22-5 Test 14-143 Repair 14-127
G r o u n d s (to c o m p o n e n t s ) 22-29
In-line C o n n e c t o r s (to harness) 22-4 A / T Hydraulic Controls ATF Cooler Lines a n d Hoses
Test 14-104 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2
Specifications section Section 2 Replacement 14-128
A / T Mainshaft Assembly
Maintenance section Section 3 D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14- ATF Pump
169 Inspection 14-163
General Information section Section 1 Installation 14-192
Audio Unit
A / T Secondary Shaft Assembly Replacement 22-42
D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14-
A 176 Audio/Entertainment
Inspection 14-177 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 22-40
Installation 14-192 Circuit D i a g r a m 22-41
A/C
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 21-3 A / T Shift Cable Automatic Climate Control
Circuit Diagram 21-8 Replacement 14-133 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 21-26
Adjustment 14-136 Description 21-31
A/C Compressor Circuit Diagram .21-32
Replacement 21-14,19 A / T Shift Lever
Removal 14-129 A u t o m a t i c Transaxle
A / C Compressor Clutch Installation 14-130 Description 14-18
Inspection .....21-16,21 Disassembly/Reassembly 14-132 Test 14-101
Overhaul 2 1 - 1 7 , 22
ABS Control Unit
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Relief V a l v e Replacement 19-22
Replacement 21-18, 23
ABS Indicator Circuit
A / C Condenser Troubleshooting 19-18, 76
Replacement 21-24
ABS Modulator Unit
Removal/Installation 19-21 (cont'd)
Service IVIanuaB Index
(cont'd)
Connectors Cruise C o n t r o l A c t u a t o r Cable
B (See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x ) Adjustment 4-54
Coolant Cruise Control Actuator Solenoid

Battery Replacement 10-10 Test 4-50
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Charging System 4-25 Coolant Reservoir Cruise C o n t r o l C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Test C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 Troubleshooting 4-45
Wiring System - 22-30
Coolant Temperature Gauge Cruise Control M a i n S w i t c h
Blower Power Transistor Test 10-5 Test/Replacement 4-48
Test ..........21-58 Troubleshooting 10-5
Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel S w i t c h
Brake Calipers Coolant Temperature Gauge Sending Unit T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t .................................. 4-49
Overhaul 19-4 C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Coolant Temperature Gauge Cruise Control S y s t e m
B r a k e Pads Components 10-2 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-41
Inspection/Replacement 19-2 Cooling System 10-2 Circuit D i a g r a m 4-42
Test
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h Coolant Temperature Gauge Cruise Control Unit
Test - .....4-50 Components 10-7 I n p u t Test 4-46
Cooling System 10-7
B u m p e r S p o i l e r , Rear Cylinder Head Assembly
Replacement 20-6 Cooling System C o m p o n e n t Location Index 6-3
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 R e m o v a l .................................................. 6-31
Installation 6-51
Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing
c Replacement 14-175 Cylinder Head, Bare

Inspection 6-36
Countershaft Bearing, A / T Housing
Camshaft Replacement 14-156
Inspection 6-40
Installation 6-50 Countershaft Bearing, Torque Converter D
Housing
Charging System Replacement 14-168
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-25 Differential Carrier Bearing O u t e r Races, A
Circuit Diagram 4-26 C o u n t e r s h a f t Idler Gear IT
Troubleshooting 4-27 installation 14-195 Replacement 14-204
Charging System Indicator Countershaft Reverse Selector H u b Differential Carrier Bearings, A / T

C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ................... 4-25 Replacement 14-173 Replacement 14-202
Inspection 14-205
CKP ( C r a n k s h a f t P o s i t i o n ) S e n s o r Countershaft Speed Sensor
Replacement 6-56 Replacement 14-110 Differential Carrier, A / T
Replacement 14-202
Climate Control Power and Ground Crankshaft
Circuits C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Differential Oil Seals, A / T
Troubleshooting 21-51 Inspection 7-7, 14 Replacement 14-203
Removal 7-12
Climate Control Unit Installation 7-24 Differential Pinion Gears, A / T
How-to Information 21-28 Inspection 14-201
Removal/Installation 21-58 Crankshaft M a i n Bearings
Disassembly/Reassembly 21-59 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Distributor
Replacement 7-8 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-14
Connecting Rod Bearing Caps Replacement 4-19
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Crankshaft Oil Seal, Pulley End Disassembly/Reassembly 4-20
Connecting Rod Bearings Installation 7-29 Drive Plate
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3
Replacement 7-10 Crankshaft Oil Seal, T r a n s m i s s i o n End Removal/Installation 7-6
Connecting Rod Bolts Installation 7-29 DTCs
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ..................... 7-3
Crankshaft Pulley (See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x )
Inspection 7-21
Removal/Installation 6-17
D4 Indicator Circuit
Connecting Rods
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Crankshaft Thrust Washers Troubleshooting 14-93
Inspection 7-7 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3
Cruise Control Actuator

Test 4-51
Replacement 4-52
Front Driveshaft A s s e m b l y
E Resassembly 16-3 i
Front S e a t s
ECT S e n s o r C o m p o n e n t Location Index 22-44 IA (Intake Air) B y p a s s C o n t r o l V a l v e
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 Circuit Diagram 22-45 Test 11-101
ECT S e n s o r C i r c u i t Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s I C M (Ignition C o n t r o l Module)

Troubleshooting 21-50 Description 11-7 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-14
Circuit Diagram 11-30, 39 Input Test 4-21
EGR Valve
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 Fuel G a u g e Idle C o n t r o l S y s t e m
Test 11-94 C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ................. 11-85
Emblems Adjustment 11-86
Replacement 20-8 Fuel Injection S y s t e m (PGM-FI)
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 11-50 Ignition Coil(s)
End Cover, A / T C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-14
Removal 14-151 Fuel Injectors Test 4-22
Replacement 11-80, 82 Troubleshooting 4-23
Engine Assembly
Removal 5-2 Fuel L i n e s a n d H o s e s Ignition S y s t e m
Installation 5-11 Inspection 11-91 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-14, 15
Circuit D i a g r a m 4-16, 17
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y Fuel P r e s s u r e Regulator Inspection 4-18
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Replacement 11-92, 93
Ignition W i r e s
E n g i n e Block E n d C o v e r Fuel S u p p l y S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-14
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 11-87 Test/Inspection 4-22
Adjustment 11-88
E n g i n e Block, B a r e Troubleshooting 11-89 In-car T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Replacement 21-55
Inspection 7-15 Fuses Test 21-55
Repair 7-17 (See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s Index)
Intake Air S y s t e m
E n g i n e M o u n t Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e C o m p o n e n t Location Index 11-95
G Intake Manifold
E n g i n e M o u n t Control S y s t e m Removal/Installation 9-2
Circuit D i a g r a m 4-56 Gauges Interlock S y s t e m
Troubleshooting 4-57 Circuit D i a g r a m .22-33 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 14-145
E V A P Control S y s t e m G e n e r a l Information
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x .............. 11-103 (See s e c t i o n 1) Intermediate Shaft A s s e m b l y
Disassembly 16-14
E x h a u s t Manifold Removal 16-14
Removal/Installation 9-3 Resassembly 16-16
H Installation 16-18
E x h a u s t Manifold G a s k e t
Replacement 9-3
Heater H o s e s a n d Pipes
E x h a u s t Pipe C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 K
Replacement 9-4
Heater V a l v e
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 K e y Interlock S o l e n o i d
Test 14-149
F Heater V a l v e C a b l e
Adjustment 21-13 K e y Interlock S y s t e m Circuit
Fan Control Module Homelink R e m o t e Control S y s t e m
I n p u t Test 10-20 Circuit D i a g r a m 22-43
Test 22-43
Fan Controls L
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-14 Hood
Circuit D i a g r a m 10-16 Replacement 20-7
L o c k - u p Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e
Final Driven G e a r , A / T H 0 2 S , Primary Test 14-103
L o w Fuel Indicator
Frame H 0 2 S , Secondary Replacement 22-32
Repair C h a r t 20-12 Replacement 11-84
(cont'd)
Service Manual Index
(cont'd)
Lubrication S y s t e m Park Pin S w i t c h Radiator F a n Circuit
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 8-3 Test 14-150 Troubleshooting 10-17
Test 8-4
PCM Radiator F a n S w i t c h
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4 55 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2
_ Test 10 21
PCV Valve
Test 11-102 Radiator F a n S w i t c h Circuit
Main Valve Body Piston Pins
Removal 14-157 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Radiator H o s e s a n d Pipes
Repair 14-159 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2
Resassembly 14-160 Piston Rings
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly .... 14- C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Radio R e m o t e S w i t c h
Replacement 7-22 Test 22-42
161
Installation - 14-190
Pistons Recirculation C o n t r o l Motor Circuit
Mainshaft Bearing, Torque Converter C o m p o n e n t Location Index 7-3 Troubleshooting 21 52
Housing Removal 7-12
Replacement 14-167 Replacement 7-18 Refrigerant Oil
Replacement 21-6
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Power S e a t Linkage
Replacement 14-171 Disassembly/Reassembly 20-4 Regulator V a l v e B o d y
D i s a s s e m b l y / l n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14-
Mainshaft S p e e d Sensor Power Seat Motors 164
Rocker Arm A s s e m b l y
Maintenance Power Seat Switch Removal 6-36
(See s e c t i o n 3) Test/Replacement 22-47 Disassembly/Reassembly 6-37
Multiplex C o n t r o l Unit, Driver's P o w e r S t e e r i n g Fluid R e s e r v o i r Rocker A r m s

Input Test 14-147 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 17-3 Test 6-10
Inspection 6-38
Power Steering Lines and Hoses
Replacement 17-12
o Power Steering Pump s
Oil Filter Test 17-7,8
Replacement 8-5 Replacement 17-13 S a f e t y Indicator S y s t e m
Overhaul 17-14 Circuit D i a g r a m 22-38
Oil P a n
C o m p o n e n t Location Index P o w e r S t e e r i n g P u m p Belt Seat Heaters
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y .....7-3 Inspection/Adjustment 17-10 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 22-48
Lubrication System 7-3 C i r c u i t D i a g r a m .................................... 22-49
Oil P r e s s u r e S w i t c h
_ S e a t W i r e H a r n e s s , Driver's ..
Test Installation 20-5
L o w E n g i n e Oil I n d i c a t o r C o m p o n e n t s .
8-4 S e a t , Front
Lubrication System 8-4 Radiator Removal/Installation 20-2
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 Disassembly/Reassembly 20-3
Oil P u m p , E n g i n e Test 10-8
C o m p o n e n t Location Index Replacement 10-13 Secondary Shaft Bearing, Torque
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y ....7-3 Converter Housing
Lubrication System 7-3 Radiator and Condenser Fans C o m m o n Replacement 14-168
Overhaul Circuit
Lubrication System 8-7 Troubleshooting 21-12 S e c o n d a r y S h a f t Idler G e a r B e a r i n g
Replacement....................................... 14-179
Oil, E n g i n e Radiator C a p
Replacement 8-5 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 Servo Body
Test 10-7 D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14-
O u t s i d e Air T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r 165
Replacement 21-56 Radiator Fan Assembly
Test 21-56 C o m p o n e n t Location Index 10-2 Shift C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d V a l v e s
Test 10-8 Replacement 14-107
P Shift Lock S o l e n o i d
Test 14-149
Replacement 14-150
Park L e v e r Position S t o p
Inspection/Adjustment 14-153
Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit Throttle Body Wire Harnesses
Troubleshooting 14-96 Test 11-96 (See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x )
Removal/Installation 11-99
Spark Plugs Disassembly/Reassembly 11-100 Wiring S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-14 Relay a n d C o n t r o l U n i t L o c a t i o n s ..... 22-2, 3
Inspection 4-24 Throttle Cable
Adjustment 11-98
Specifications
(See s e c t i o n 2) T i m i n g Belt 1
Inspection 6-18
Starter Removal 6-19
Test 4-7 Installation 6-22 1st/2nd Clutch Assembly
Replacement 4-8 Disassembly 14-180
O v e r h a u l ................................................... 4-9 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Inspection 14-183
Replacement 14-106 Resassembly 14-185
Starter Solenoid Test 14-106
Test 4-6
Starting System Removal 14-154 2
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 4-3 Installation 14-192
Circuit Diagram ..4-4
Troubleshooting 4-5 Transmission Range S w i t c h 2 n d Clutch Pressure S w i t c h
Test 14-140 Replacement 14-111
Steering Replacement 14-141
Troubleshooting 17-6 Troubleshooting
Inspection 17-9 (See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x ) 3
Steering Column
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 17-3 3rd Clutch Pressure S w i t c h
V Replacement 14-111
Steering Gearbox
C o m p o n e n t Location Index 17-3 3rd/4th Clutch Assembly
Overhaul 17-20 Valve Guides Inspection 14-170, 183
Inspection 6-44
Steering Lock Replacement 6-45
Valve Seals
S t e e r i n g Rack G u i d e Removal 6-43
Adjustment 17-19
Valve Seats
Steering Wheel Repair 6-47
Valve Springs
Sub-frames Removal 6-43
Replacement 20-9
Valves
Sunlight Sensor Adjustment 6-13
Replacement 21-57 Removal 6-43
Test ..21-57 Inspection 6-44
Installation 6-49
VTEC Lost M o t i o n A s s e m b l i e s / S p r i n g s
T Inspection 6-39
VTEC Solenoid Valve

TCS Indicator Circuit Test 6-9
T C S Relay
Test 22-31 w
TCS S w i t c h
Test 19-81 Water Pump
TDC Sensors Inspection 10-9
Thermostat Wheel Speed Sensors

Test 10-9 Inspection 19-82
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
" Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under
license from America Honda Motor Co., Inc. License Agreement AH220 ."

1998-2001 Honda Accord V-6 SM Supp PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1998-2001 Honda Accord V-6 SM Supp PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

instructions h o w t o service this vehicle correctly a n d safely.

m a r k e d sections are n o t included in this m a n u a l .

Chassis and Paint Codes

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number

A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number

NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic

YR-508M Heather Mist Metallic

Vehicle identification Number Engine Number

1HG C G 5 5 4 * Y A 000001 J30A1 - 3000001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic

YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number

1HG C G 5 5 4 * 1 A 000001 J30A1 - 4000001

R-507P Firepepper Pearl

YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

SPARK PLUG GAP a. Model Year

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families

Example: Engine Family:

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

SPARK PLUG GAP a. Model Year

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families

Example: Engine Family:

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families

Example; Engine Family:

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

SPARK PLUG GAP 1.0-1.1mm

1 HNXV03.OM5U TWC/H02S (2) a. Model Year

Standards and Service Limits

Fuel and Emissions

gear area gear shaft ( 0 . 5 5 0 8 - 0 . 5 5 1 2 in.) damaged

Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 100A, 5 0 A , 4 0 A , 3 0 A , 2 0 A , 15A

Lubricants and Fluids 3-2

Maintenance Schedule for Normal

NO. LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT

18 Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: DENSO: ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-

API SERVICE LABEL API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5).

A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s

3,750 m i / 6,000 k m / - Replace oil a n d filter.

A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s

Listed by Maintenance Item

S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r m i l e s x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5

years 1/2 - 1 - 1 1/2 - 2 - 21/2

Inspect valve clearance A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .

Replace spark plugs

Inspect and adjust drive belts

Check parking brake a d j u s t m e n t # #

Check lights and controls o o

_ 3 31/2 4 _ 41/2 5 51/2 6 - 61/2 7 - 71/2 - 8

R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5).

A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s

3,750 m i / 6,000 k m / - Replace oil and filter.

A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s

S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r m i l e s x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5

Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d Normal Condition: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years,

Engine Mount Control System

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty